Technical manual-PC400 [PDF]

Zitiervorschau

Clinical Chemistry Analyzer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Contents Section 1: Introduction .....................................................................1 - 1 1. Document update ......................................................................................... 1 - 2 2. Legal information .......................................................................................... 1 - 4 3. Operational conditions ................................................................................. 1 - 6

Section 2: Specifications ..................................................................2 - 1 1. Technical specifications ............................................................................... 2 - 2 2. Physical specifications ................................................................................. 2 - 6

Section 3: Technology ......................................................................3 - 1 1. Optical principles .......................................................................................... 3 - 2 2. Fluidic principles ........................................................................................... 3 - 8 3. Temperature control ................................................................................... 3 - 12 4. Level detection and shock detection ........................................................ 3 - 22 5. Pressure detection ...................................................................................... 3 - 28

Section 4: Electric and electronic principles ..................................4 - 1 1. Mother board ................................................................................................. 4 - 3 2. Optical acquisition ...................................................................................... 4 - 14 3. Level detection ............................................................................................ 4 - 18 4. Sample relay board XAA491CS (1209109491) .......................................... 4 - 25 5. Pressure board (kit ref. 1300015280) ......................................................... 4 - 27 6. Internal computer 1300013734 .................................................................. 4 - 29 7. Power supply ............................................................................................... 4 - 30 ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

i

8. Connectors .................................................................................................. 4 - 34 9. Instrument synoptic .................................................................................... 4 - 82

Section 5: Software description.......................................................5 - 1 1. Services menu overview ............................................................................... 5 - 2 2. Software architecture ................................................................................... 5 - 3 3. Diagnostics menu description ..................................................................... 5 - 7 4. Initialization phases .................................................................................... 5 - 25

Section 6: Troubleshooting ..............................................................6 - 1 1. Error messages ............................................................................................. 6 - 2 2. Troubleshooting .......................................................................................... 6 - 42

Section 7: ISE module.......................................................................7 - 1 1. ISE module description ................................................................................ 7 - 2 2. Error messages ........................................................................................... 7 - 38 3. Procedures .................................................................................................. 7 - 42

Section 8: Exploded views................................................................8 - 1 1. Reagent tray .................................................................................................. 8 - 3 2. Reagent tray closing assy ............................................................................ 8 - 6 3. Sample tray .................................................................................................... 8 - 7 4. Optical bench ................................................................................................ 8 - 8 5. Reaction tray ................................................................................................. 8 - 9 6. Cuvette changer .......................................................................................... 8 - 11 7. Cuvette changer carriage assembly ......................................................... 8 - 15

ii

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

8. Cuvette changer load rack ......................................................................... 8 - 16 9. Cuvette changer unload rack .................................................................... 8 - 17 10. Ventilation .................................................................................................. 8 - 18 11. Arms assembly .......................................................................................... 8 - 19 12. Sample arm ................................................................................................ 8 - 23 13. Reagent arm .............................................................................................. 8 - 24 14. Arms assembly kits ................................................................................... 8 - 25 15. Mixer assembly ......................................................................................... 8 - 26 16. Syringe assy .............................................................................................. 8 - 28 17. Wash cup assy .......................................................................................... 8 - 29 18. Fluid part .................................................................................................... 8 - 30 19. Covering ..................................................................................................... 8 - 32 20. ISE module ................................................................................................. 8 - 34 21. ISE module electrode holder ................................................................... 8 - 36 22. ISE module syringes ................................................................................. 8 - 37 23. Computer ................................................................................................... 8 - 38 24. Cooling unit ............................................................................................... 8 - 40

Section 9: Additional spare parts ....................................................9 - 1 1. Tools ............................................................................................................... 9 - 2 2. Kits ................................................................................................................. 9 - 3 3. Fuses .............................................................................................................. 9 - 3 4. Stickers .......................................................................................................... 9 - 4 5. Other consumables ....................................................................................... 9 - 5

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

iii

Section 10: Host connection ..........................................................10 - 1 1. Physical connection .................................................................................... 10 - 2 2. Connection configuration on the instrument ........................................... 10 - 3 3. Connection protocol ................................................................................... 10 - 5 4. ASTM format ............................................................................................... 10 - 6 5. Bidirectional connection ............................................................................ 10 - 9 6. Data exchange examples ......................................................................... 10 - 11 7. Connection test ......................................................................................... 10 - 16 8. Troubleshooting ........................................................................................ 10 - 27

Section 11: Maintenance ................................................................11 - 1 1. Preventive maintenance ............................................................................. 11 - 2 2. Prevention against the electrostatic discharges ..................................... 11 - 4 3. Procedures .................................................................................................. 11 - 7

iv

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Section 1: Introduction

1. Document update ......................................................................................... 1 - 2 1.1. Revisions.................................................................................................................................... 1 - 2 1.2. What’s new? .............................................................................................................................. 1 - 2

2. Legal information .......................................................................................... 1 - 3 2.1. Declaration of Conformity.......................................................................................................... 2.2. Notice of liability ........................................................................................................................ 2.3. Trademarks ................................................................................................................................ 2.4. Graphics .................................................................................................................................... 2.5. Document symbols .................................................................................................................... 2.6. Copyright © 2016 by HORIBA ABX SAS ...................................................................................

1-3 1-3 1-3 1-3 1-3 1-4

3. Operational conditions ................................................................................. 1 - 5 3.1. Environment............................................................................................................................... 3.2. Location ..................................................................................................................................... 3.3. Grounding .................................................................................................................................. 3.4. Humidity and temperature conditions ....................................................................................... 3.5. Electromagnetic environment check ......................................................................................... 3.6. Main power supply .................................................................................................................... 3.7. Environmental protection........................................................................................................... 3.8. Storage conditions and transportation ...................................................................................... 3.9. Package .....................................................................................................................................

1-5 1-5 1-6 1-6 1-6 1-7 1-7 1-8 1-8

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

1-1

Introduction Document update

1. Document update 1.1.

Revisions

Reference

Internal reference

RAA023A RAA023B RAA023C RAA023DEN RAA023EEN RAA023FEN RAA023GEN RAA023HEN 1300021859

RAA023A RAA023B RAA023C RAA023DEN RAA023EEN RAA023FEN RAA023GEN RAA023HEN RAA023JEN

Software version ABX Pentra 400 Pentra C400 1.0.0 N/A 2.0.0 N/A 3.0.0 N/A 4.4.0 N/A 5.0.0 N/A 5.0.5 N/A 5.0.7 1.1.X 5.0.8 1.1.X 5.0.9 1.2.X

Document date issued August 2003 January 2004 December 2004 December 2007 June 2008 May 2010 September 2013 February 2014 June 2016

This document applies to the latest software version listed and higher versions. All information included in this document is current as of the date of creation of this version. Changes that may occur will be available on ITS Web site http://its-information.horiba-abx.com/. This manual applies to both ABX Pentra 400 and Pentra C400. For the ABX Pentra 400, this manual is intended for use on instruments with serial numbers above 2999 (V3). In some procedures, specific instructions are given for previous ABX Pentra 400 hardware versions: ■ V1 corresponds to instruments with serial numbers below 2000. ■ V2 corresponds to instruments with serial numbers between 2000 and 2999.

1.2.

What’s new?

Here is the list of major updates in this document release: Item

Chapter Section 2: Specifications Connections and characteristics of the new RAS376: Installation computer. New computer RAS392: Internal computer Spare parts replacement and Windows master RAS533: Windows master installation for the new computer. installation Electrical diagram of the new cooling unit New cooling unit models 115 V / 60 Hz with built-in power cable Section 3: Technology models 115 V / 60 Hz and circuit breakers. New reagent needle Drawing of the new reagent needle. Section 3: Technology

1-2

Description

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Introduction Document update

Item

Description

Spare parts references

Update of the spare parts references.

Modification of the warnings #620, 624, 650, 654 and 655. "Low pressure" Addition of the "low pressure" alarms in the alarms troubleshooting guide. Replacement of the isolator and the ISE waste ISE module tubing every six months. maintenance Replacement of the ISE syringes pistons once a year. New ISE syringe blocks with two covers and New ISE syringe four O-rings. blocks Maintenance and replacement of the new ISE syringe blocks. Addition of one spring on each ISE syringe ISE syringe motors motor. New lamp reference Modification of the lamp reference. Addition of the procedure to clean and C:\ and D:\ drives defragment the C:\ and D:\ drives. New quality control Update of the procedure to check pipetting solution accuracy and precision. New pressure Update of the procedure to replace the sensors and board pressure sensors and board. Windows master CD- Addition of the procedure to prepare the ROM Windows master CD-ROM. Warnings

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Chapter Section 4: Electric and electronic principles Section 8: Exploded views Section 9: Additional spare parts Section 6: Troubleshooting Section 6: Troubleshooting RAS388: ISE module maintenance RAS388: ISE module maintenance RAS538: ISE module spare part replacement RAS538: ISE module spare part replacement RAS376: Installation RAS378: 6 month maintenance RAS393: Check up after intervention RAS442: Pressure sensors RAS533: Windows master installation

1-3

Introduction Legal information

2. Legal information 2.1.

Declaration of Conformity

This product complies with the Standards and Directives named in the Declaration of Conformity. The latest version of the EC Declaration of Conformity for this product is available on www.horibaabx.com/documentation.

2.2.

Notice of liability

The information in this manual is distributed on an "As Is" basis, without warranty. While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual, HORIBA Medical will not assume any liability to any persons or entities with respect to loss or damage, caused or alleged to be caused directly or indirectly by not following the instructions contained in this manual, or by using the computer software and hardware products described herein in a manner inconsistent with our product labelling.

2.3.

Trademarks

Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Other product names mentioned within this publication may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

2.4.

Graphics

All graphics including screens, printouts and photographs are for illustration purposes only and are not contractual.

2.5.

Document symbols

To alert the operator of potentially hazardous conditions, symbols described in this chapter are provided wherever necessary throughout the manual.

Emphasizes information that must be followed to avoid hazard to either the operator or the environment, or both.

1-4

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Introduction Legal information

Emphasizes information that must be followed to avoid possible damage to the instrument or erroneous test results.

Emphasizes information that can be helpful to the operator before, during or after a specific operational function.

Gives a summary of what can be achieved if the task is performed.

2.6.

Copyright © 2016 by HORIBA ABX SAS

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of HORIBA Medical. HORIBA ABX SAS Parc Euromédecine - Rue du Caducée B.P. 7290 34184 MONTPELLIER Cedex 4 - FRANCE Phone: +33 (0)4 67 14 15 16 Fax: +33 (0)4 67 14 15 17

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

1-5

Introduction Operational conditions

3. Operational conditions 3.1.

Environment

The operation of the ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra C400 should be restricted to indoor location use only. The instrument is operational at an altitude of maximum 3000 m (9840 ft). The instrument is designed for safety from voltage surges according to INSTALLATION CATEGORY II and POLLUTION DEGREE 2 (IEC 61010-1).

3.2.

Location

Keep in mind that the instrument weighs approximately 120 kg (265 lb). To move the instrument, four persons are required. The lifting handles provided in the installation kit must be used. ■ Place

your instrument on a clean and leveled table or workbench.

■ Avoid

exposure to sunlight.

■ Place

your instrument where it is not exposed to water or vapor.

■ Place

your instrument where it is not exposed to dust.

■ Avoid

direct exposure to air conditioner.

■ Place

your instrument where it is free from vibration or shock.

■ Place

your instrument where an independent power receptacle can be used.

■

Use a receptacle different from the one used by a device that easily generates noise such as a centrifuge, etc.

■ Provide

1-6

a space of at least 20 cm (7.9 in) at the back of the instrument for a proper ventilation.

■

Make sure to provide enough space to open the main cover easily. The instrument height is approximately 63 cm (24.8 in) closed cover and 105 cm (41.3 in) open cover.

■

Make sure to provide enough space on both sides of the instrument to access the computer connections and power supply connection.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Introduction Operational conditions

The Power switch and Power supply connection should always be accessible. When positioning the system for operational use, leave the required amount of space for easy access to these items.

3.3.

Grounding

Proper grounding is required when installing the system. Check the wall outlet ground (earth) for proper grounding to the facilities electrical ground. If you are unsure of the outlet grounding, contact your facilities engineer to verify the proper outlet ground.

3.4.

Humidity and temperature conditions ■ Instrument

operating temperature: from +15°C (+59°F) to +32°C (+90°F). If the instrument is stored at a temperature lower than 10°C (50°F), it should stand for one hour at normal room temperature before use.

■ Humidity

Conditions: Relative humidity of 20% - 85% maximum, without condensation.

■ Temperature

3.5.

gradient: 2°C (3.6°F) per hour.

Electromagnetic environment check

The instrument has been designed to produce less than the accepted level of electromagnetic interference in order to operate in conformity with its destination, allowing the correct operation of other instruments also in conformity with their destination.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

1-7

Introduction Operational conditions

In case of suspected electromagnetic noise, make sure that the instrument has not been placed in the proximity of electromagnetic fields or short wave emissions, e.g. Radar, X-rays, Scanners, Cell phones, etc.

Do not perform analysis while cover is open or not correctly fixed. Electromagnetic noise can affect the data or disrupt a nearby instrument.

3.6.

Main power supply

It is recommended to install the system on UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply).

Grounding is required. Make sure the earth wall-plug is correctly connected to the laboratory grounding system. If there is no such system, a ground stake should be used. Use only the main supply cable delivered with the instrument. Main power supply voltage fluctuations must not exceed +/- 10% of the nominal voltage.

■ Always ■ To

3.7.

disconnect the system from the supply before servicing. prevent the risk of electrical shock, do not remove the covers or the back panel.

Environmental protection

Used accessories and consumables disposal Disposable used accessories and consumables must be collected by a laboratory specialized in elimination and recycling of this kind of material according to the local legislation.

Instrument disposal

This product should be disposed of and recycled at the end of the useful life in accordance with European Directive 2002/96/EC on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) and/or European Directive 2006/66/EC on batteries and accumulators.

1-8

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Introduction Operational conditions

3.8.

Storage conditions and transportation

Instrument storage and transportation temperatures: from -20°C (-4°F) to +50°C (+122°F). Analyzer exposure to rainfall and extended sunlight must be avoided. The outdoors storage of the analyzer is prohibited.

Before the shipping of an instrument by transporter, whatever the destination, an external decontamination of the instrument must be carried out.

Keep in mind that the instrument weighs approximately 120 kg (265 lb). To move the instrument, four persons are required. The lifting handles provided in the installation kit must be used. Before instrument removal from use, transportation or disposal, perform a general cleaning and a draining of your instrument.

3.9.

Package

Factory package of the analyzer ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra C400 and its implements consists of firm corrugated cardboard, polyethylene foil and inner foam plastic framework. Package protects analyzer and its implements from adverse factors of outside environment. Analyzer must be transported in its original factory package.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

1-9

Introduction Operational conditions

1 - 10

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Section 2: Specifications

1. Technical specifications............................................................................... 2 - 2 1.1. Intended use .............................................................................................................................. 1.2. Analysis methods....................................................................................................................... 1.3. Throughput ................................................................................................................................ 1.4. Reagent...................................................................................................................................... 1.5. Sample....................................................................................................................................... 1.6. Calibrator and control ................................................................................................................ 1.7. Computer characteristics .......................................................................................................... 1.8. Measurement .............................................................................................................................

2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-4 2-4

2. Physical specifications ................................................................................. 2 - 6 2.1. Power requirements................................................................................................................... 2.2. Dimension and weight ............................................................................................................... 2.3. Sound level ................................................................................................................................ 2.4. Water requirement .....................................................................................................................

2-6 2-6 2-7 2-7

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

2-1

Specifications Technical specifications

1. Technical specifications 1.1.

Intended use

The ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra C400 system is a fully automated chemistry analyzer using colorimetry, turbidimetry and potentiometry technologies. It is mostly meant to be used for in vitro diagnostic analyses based on homogeneous samples such as serum, plasma, urine and whole blood.

1.2.

Analysis methods

The ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra C400 system allows analysis by: ■ Colorimetry ■ Turbidimetry ■ Potentiometry:

1.3.

1.4.

direct for serum and plasma, indirect for urine (ISE module option)

Throughput ■ Up

to 300 tests per hour without ISE

■ Up

to 400 tests per hour with ISE

Reagent

Packaging accepted ■ Twin

compartment cassette 30/10 from HORIBA Medical

■ Twin

compartment cassette 50/50 from HORIBA Medical

■ Twin

compartment cassette 70/30 from HORIBA Medical

■ Twin

compartment cassette 80/10 from HORIBA Medical

■ Single

compartment cassette 100 from HORIBA Medical

■ Reagent

rack

On board conditions ■ Capacity: ■

2-2

52 cassettes (39 tests with reagent racks)

Temperature: 44 positions refrigerated at 4°C - 10°C (39°F - 50°F) and eight positions at room temperature

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Specifications Technical specifications

Reagent management ■ Barcode

reagent identification

■ Back-up

for same reagent

■ Remaining

volume calculation

■ Automated

reagent on board stability check

Reagent sampling ■ Volume:

- Minimum: 2 µL with sample needle and 15 µL with reagent needle - Maximum: 600 µL ■ Capacitive

level detection

■ Insufficient

volume detection

■ Reagent

1.5.

preheating at 37°C +/- 0.5°C (98.6°F +/- 0.9°F)

Sample

Sample types ■ Serum ■ Plasma ■ Urine ■ Cerebrospinal ■ Whole

fluid (CSF)

blood

■ Homogeneous

liquid

Sample tube types accepted ■ Primary

and secondary tubes: - 4 and 5 mL (diameter: 13 mm) - 7 and 10 mL (diameter: 16 mm)

■ Sample

cups (700 µL)

On board conditions ■ Capacity:

60 samples

■ Continuous

loading

Sample management ■ Barcode

sample identification: Barcodes from two to 16 digits. Accepted barcode types: - ITF 2/5 (2 of 5 interleaved) with or without check digit - Code 39 with or without check digit - Code 128 - Codabar

■ Tube

presence detector

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

2-3

Specifications Technical specifications

Sampling ■ Volume:

- Minimum: 2 µL - Maximum: 95 µL for one step and 380 µL for four steps ■ Automatic

sample dilution: 1/2 to 1/22500

■ Automatic

post-concentration: x2 to x10

■ Capacitive

level detection

■ Shock ■ Clot

1.6.

detection

detection and insufficient volume detection

Calibrator and control

Calibrator/Control positioning Sample tray and reagent tray

Automatic standard dilution series

1.7.

■ Main

direct dilution ratio: 1/2 - 1/150

■ Main

indirect dilution ratio: 1/2 - 1/1508

Computer characteristics ■ Color

LCD touch screen: 12 in.

■ Operating

System: Windows 7™

■ Processor:

Atom™ 1.46 GHz

■ RAM

(Random Access Memory): 4 GB

■ Hard

drive: 250 GB

■ RS232C,

RJ45* LAN (Local Area Network), USB 2.0 (7 ports), Audio * Not used

1.8.

Measurement

Reaction system ■ Reaction ■ Cuvette

cuvettes: disposable acrylic cuvettes

volume: 150 µL - 600 µL

■ Automatic ■ "New

■ "Used

cuvette" holder capacity: 360 cuvettes

■ Mixing:

2-4

loading and unloading of cuvettes

cuvette" holder capacity: 360 cuvettes stirring paddle

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Specifications Technical specifications

■ Reaction

temperature: 37°C +/- 0.2°C (99°F +/- 0.36°F), air bath controlled

■ Measurement ■ Sampling ■ Reaction

cycle: 12 seconds

cycle: 12 seconds time: 12 seconds - 20 minutes

Optical system ■ Measurement ■ Light

principle: absorbance measurement (Bichromatic or Monochromatic)

source: tungsten-halogen lamp

■ Diffraction: ■ Detector:

concave reflective grating spectrograph

photodiode array

■ Wavelengths: ■ Optical

340, 380, 405, 420, 455, 490, 505, 520, 550, 560, 580, 600, 620, 660, 700 nm

linearity:

Wavelength 340 nm 380 nm 405 nm 420 nm 455 nm

Linearity (Absorbance) 2.95 2 2.5 3.5 2

Wavelength 490 nm 505 nm 520 nm 550 nm 560 nm

Linearity (Absorbance) 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5

Wavelength 580 nm 600 nm 620 nm 660 nm 700 nm

Linearity (Absorbance) 2.5 2.5 2.5 2 2

Algorithms supported ■ Factor ■ Slope

average

■ Linear

regression

■ Linear

interpolation

■ LOGIT/LOG4 ■ LOGIT/LOG5 ■ Exponential

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

2-5

Specifications Physical specifications

2. Physical specifications 2.1.

Power requirements ■ Power

supply: - Instrument: from 100 V to 240 V (+/- 10%), 50 Hz to 60 Hz - Cooling unit CU401 (depends on models): 100 V (+/- 10%), 50 Hz to 60 Hz 115 V (+/- 10%), 60 Hz 230 V (+/- 10%), 50 Hz 230 V (+/- 10%), 60 Hz - Cooling unit CU400 (depends on models): 100 V (+/- 10%), 50 Hz to 60 Hz 115 V (+/- 10%), 60 Hz 230 V (+/- 10%), 50 Hz to 60 Hz 240 V (+/- 10%), 50 Hz

■ Maximum

power consumption: - Instrument: 250 VA - Cooling unit CU401: 700 W - Cooling unit CU400: 450 W

■ Maximum

heat output: - Instrument + cooling unit CU401: 1940 BTU/h (2010 kJ/h) - Instrument + cooling unit CU400: 2080 BTU/h (2160 kJ/h)

■ Printer:

refer to your printer manual.

Fuses characteristics: Slow-blow internal fuses having the following characteristics: 2 x T 6.3 A H 250 V (5x20 mm)

2.2.

Dimension and weight ■ Instrument

dimensions: 101 x 71 x 63 cm (Width x Depth x Height)

■ Instrument

weight: 120 kg (265 lb)

■ Cooling

unit CU401: - Dimensions: 25 x 50 x 60 cm (Width x Depth x Height) - Weight: 39 kg (86 lb)

■ Cooling

unit CU400: - Dimensions: 29 x 42 x 40 cm (Width x Depth x Height) - Weight: 35 kg (77 lb)

2-6

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Specifications Physical specifications

2.3.

Sound level

The maximum sound level is < 60 dB (A).

2.4.

Water requirement ■ De-ionized/distilled

water

■ Water

specifications: - Resistivity > 5 Mohm.cm - Conductivity < 0.2 µS/cm

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

2-7

Specifications Physical specifications

2-8

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Section 3: Technology

1. Optical principles .......................................................................................... 3 - 2 1.1. Beer-Lambert law ...................................................................................................................... 3 - 2 1.2. Optical bench and spectrophotometer description................................................................... 3 - 3 1.3. Spectrophotometer initialization and absorbance measurements ............................................ 3 - 4

2. Fluidic principles ........................................................................................... 3 - 8 2.1. Instrument hydraulic diagram .................................................................................................... 3 - 8 2.2. Valves....................................................................................................................................... 3 - 10 2.3. Cooling system diagram .......................................................................................................... 3 - 11

3. Temperature control................................................................................... 3 - 12 3.1. PID control ............................................................................................................................... 3.2. Reagent tray ............................................................................................................................ 3.3. Reagent needle........................................................................................................................ 3.4. Reaction tray............................................................................................................................

3 - 12 3 - 15 3 - 20 3 - 21

4. Level detection and shock detection ........................................................ 3 - 22 4.1. Reagent level detection ........................................................................................................... 3 - 22 4.2. Sample level and shock detection........................................................................................... 3 - 26

5. Pressure detection...................................................................................... 3 - 28 5.1. General points.......................................................................................................................... 3 - 28 5.2. High pressure, low pressure and bad sampling detection ...................................................... 3 - 29

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

3-1

Technology Optical principles

1. Optical principles 1.1.

Beer-Lambert law

The biochemistry analysis principle is to mix some reagents with a sample to produce a chemical reaction. The reactive solution thus produced presents absorption properties at a specific wavelength. The absorbance measures the reactive solution capacity to absorb the light that travels through it, at a specific wavelength. The absorbance is defined as follows: A = log (I0 / I) A Absorbance I0 Intensity of light before it travels through the reactive solution I Intensity of light that has passed through the reactive solution Absorption of light as it travels through the reactive solution Cuvette with reactive solution

I0, Incident light intensity

I, Transmitted light intensity

Lamp

Detector

l = 0.6 cm

The Beer-Lambert law states that the measured absorbance at a specific wavelength is proportional to the length of solution that the light travels through, and also the concentration of the absorbing substance in the solution. A=ε*l*c A ε l c

Absorbance Absorption coefficient of the absorbing substance at a specific wavelength Length of solution that the light travels through Concentration of the absorbing substance in the solution

In the ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra C400 case, the length of solution that the light travels through is fixed (l = 0.6 cm) as the absorption coefficient of the absorbing substance at a specific wavelength. So, the measured absorbance at a specific wavelength is proportional to the concentration of the absorbing substance in the solution.

3-2

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Technology Optical principles

In conclusion, the concentration of the absorbing substance in the solution is a function of the intensity of light that has passed through the reactive solution, at a specific wavelength. c = [ 1 / (ε * l) ] * log (I0 / I) c ε l I0 I

1.2.

Concentration of the absorbing substance in the solution Absorption coefficient of the measured substance at the specific wavelength used Length of solution that the light travels through Intensity of light before it travels through the reactive solution Intensity of light that has passed through the reactive solution

Optical bench and spectrophotometer description

1.2.1. General principle Optical bench

■ White ■

Spectrophotometer

light from the halogen tungsten lamp is collected by the condensing lens.

Once reflected by the folding mirror and shaped by the second lens, the white light beam passes through the cuvette where it travels through the reactive solution.

■ White

light emerging from the cuvette is then coupled with the spectrograph entrance slit by the third

lens. ■

The concave reflective grating spreads the incoming white light into monochromatic radiations and reflects them onto the photodiode array.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

3-3

Technology Optical principles

1.2.2. Spectrophotometer principle ■ The

spectrograph entrance slit and concave reflective grating allow the spectrophotometer resolution.

■ The

concave reflective grating is an optical element, with equally spaced grooves on material surface, which: - disperses the incident white light into monochromatic radiations - and reflects them in discrete directions called diffraction orders. Lamp order -1 order -2

Photodiode array order 0 order +1 order +2

white light monochromatic radiations

Concave reflective grating

■ For

the ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra C400, the monochromatic radiations of diffraction order +1 are used and reflected onto the photodiode array.

■ The ■

1.3.

concave reflective grating focuses all the wavelengths onto the photodiode array.

For the ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra C400, the photodiode array measures the light intensity for 15 wavelengths: 340, 380, 405, 420, 455, 490, 505, 520, 550, 560, 580, 600, 620, 660, 700 nm.

Spectrophotometer initialization and absorbance measurements

During a complete spectrophotometer initialization, the steps 1 to 6 (described below) are performed. 1. Spectrophotometer gain adjustment and check For each wavelength, the light intensity is measured on air (without cuvette) and amplified by a multiplier coefficient. This multiplier coefficient named gain is adjusted to measure a light intensity on air (without cuvette) included between 57200 and 65535 (~ 61000). The gains, expressed in % in the Spectro menu (Services > Diagnostics > Spectro), correspond to the amplification percentages applied for each wavelength (from 0 to 100%). These amplification percentages are directly proportional to the multiplier coefficients applied for each wavelength. The gains should be included between 1 and 95%. ■ If one of the gains is > 95% and ≤ 98%, the lamp is still operational but dying and a warning is triggered

(#629 "The lamp is dying, it is still operational but you will need to change it soon."). ■ If

one of the gains is < 1% or > 98%, the lamp needs to be replaced at once and an alarm is triggered (#520 "The lamp has failed the gain check. Please change the lamp.").

% 1

3-4

95

98

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Technology Optical principles

2. Light stability check The light intensity is measured on air (without cuvette) for each wavelength to check the lamp stability.

Lamp

Detector IA, Light intensity on air

For each wavelength, the two following checks are performed: ■ The

absorbance is checked every 12 s during 600 s maximum to ensure that the difference between 2 consecutive absorbances is < 0.00022.

■ IA

is checked to ensure that it is included between 57200 and 65535.

3. Black intensity measurement The black intensity is measured in the black (with the inter-sector located between the sectors 1 and 6 of the reaction tray) for each wavelength. It is the residual intensity or electronic noise measured in the black. Inter-sector

Lamp

Detector IB, Black intensity

IB must be included between 1400 and 2000 for all the wavelengths. No warning or alarm is triggered if IB is out of these ranges.

4. Cuvette cleanness check The light intensity is measured through the empty cuvettes at 340 and 700 nm to check the presence and cleanness of one cuvette. Empty cuvette

Lamp

Detector IC, Light intensity on empty cuvette

The absorbance is calculated as follows: A = log [ (IA - IB) / (IC - IB) ] A IA IB IC

Absorbance Light intensity on air Black intensity Light intensity on empty cuvette

The absorbance at 340 and 700 nm is checked to ensure that it is included in the cuvette presence range as in the cuvette cleanness range.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

3-5

Technology Optical principles

Wavelength (nm) 340 700

Cuvette presence range (Absorbance) 0.03 - 10.0 0.03 - 10.0

Cuvette cleanness range (Absorbance) 0.060 - 0.120 0.050 - 0.090

5. Reference light intensity measurement Once the presence and cleanness of one cuvette are checked, the reference light intensity is measured through a water-filled cuvette (150 µL) for each wavelength. Water-filled cuvette

Lamp

Detector IW, Reference light intensity on water-filled cuvette

6. Reaction tray check The cuvette cleanness check is performed for all the cuvettes (see Cuvette cleanness check, page 3-5). One after the other, each reaction tray position is unloaded, then reloaded and the cuvette segment is checked. The cuvette segments with at least 4 clean cuvettes are kept on the reaction tray, the other ones are replaced. The steps 1 to 6 (described above) are automatically performed every time the instrument is: on ■ woken up after a "stand-by" ■ initialized after a lamp replacement from the Customer Services menu (Services > Customer Services > Cycles) or a modification of spectrophotometer gain adjustment from the Spectro menu (Services > Diagnostics > Spectro). ■ turned

Steps Gain adjustment and check Light stability check Light intensity on air (IA) Black intensity (IB) Cuvette cleanness check (IC) Reference light intensity (IW)

3-6

Start up or wake up

Cuvette segment replacement

Lamp replacement

Measure gain

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Routine

X

X

X X X

X

X

Exit "Diagnostics" menu

X

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Technology Optical principles

7. Absorbance measurement (Normal case) The light intensity is measured through the reactive solution at a specific wavelength. Cuvette with reactive solution

Lamp

Detector I, Transmitted light intensity

The absorbance is calculated as follows: A = log [ (IW - IB) / (I - IB) ] A IW IB I

Absorbance Reference light intensity on water-filled cuvette Black intensity Transmitted light intensity

8. Bichromatism principle The ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra C400 measures the absorbance at two different wavelengths to correct the absorbance due to a cuvette defect, some sample interferences, etc. The primary wavelength is used to measure the reactive solution absorbance. The secondary wavelength is used to measure the absorbance due to a cuvette defect, some sample interferences, etc. The absorbance is corrected as follows: A = A1 - A2 A Absorbance A1 Measured absorbance at the primary wavelength A2 Measured absorbance at the secondary wavelength

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

3-7

Technology Fluidic principles

2. Fluidic principles 2.1.

Instrument hydraulic diagram

Refer to the instrument hydraulic diagram on next page. Mark on diagram LV1, LV2, LV3 LV4, LV5 NEEDLE MANIFOLD (LV1-LV2) MANIFOLD (LV3-LV5) FILTER B1 B2 LOW MANIFOLD

E1 E2 0.89-xxx 2.06-xxx 2.29-xxx C4x6-xxx C4x7-xxx C6x9-xxx C7x10-xxx EAJ0003A 6.6-8 3027030 D7 E3

3-8

P/n EBA010A (1202351010) EBA011A (1202351011) 1300015267 XCA194B (1209122194) 9001072 (1229001072) XEC202AS (1209179202) XCA216BS (1209129216) XCA198B (1209122198) XCA197A (1209121197) EAB013A (1202211013) EAB015A (1202211015) EAE004A* EAE008A* EAE009A* EAE028A* EAE043A* A00AM07677* 0779145* EAJ003A (1202261003) 3027030 (1223027030) EAB041A (1202211041) EAB028A (1202211028)

Designation

Sales unit

VALVE, 2 WAYS ELECTROVALVE

1

VALVE, 3 WAYS ELECTROVALVE

1

MANIFOLD, WITH VALVES V1 AND V2

1

VALVE, 3 VALVES ASSY

1

FILTER, FILTER LIQUID COMPLETE

1

PUMP, WATER ASSY + METAL SHEET

1

PUMP, WASTE ASSY + METAL SHEET

1

FLUID, OVERFLOW MANIFOLD

1

FLUID, CONDENSATION MANIFOLD V1

1

FITTING, STRAIGHT 3.1/2.3 CLEAR

1

TUBING, TYGON 0.889 (0.035) TUBING, TYGON 2.06 (0.081) TUBING, TYGON 2.29 (0.090) TUBING, CRYSTAL 4X6 TUBING, CRYSTAL 4X7 TUBING, PVC 6X9 TUBING, PVC 7X9

Pack of 5 * * * * * * *

COLLAR, MEDIUM D=6-8

1

CLAMP, TUBE D7

1

FLUID, Y FITTING DI=6.25

1

FLUID, T FITTING TS7

1

FITTING, STRAIGHT 2.5/1.5

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Technology Fluidic principles

Mark on diagram

WASTE WASTE H2O

Sales unit

P/n

Designation

XCA196AS (1209129196)

FITTING, H2O/WASTE CONNECT.ASSY (Contains: 3 x FITTING, ANTI ROTATION WASHER EAC008A (1202221008), 3 x FITTING, LUER FEMALE 1 I=3MM EAC010A (1202221010), 3 x FITTING, LUER MALE/FEMALE I=2.5 EAC018A (1202221018))

XBA568F (1209114568) XBA574C (1209113574) LBH004A (1207791004)

FLUID, WATER STRAW ASSY

1

FLUID, WASTE STRAW ASSY

1

FLUID, 10 L CONTAINER

1

* Possible to order under the following references: - EAE004AS (1202249004) (2 metres) - EAE008AS (1202249008) (2 metres) - EAE009AS (1202249009) (2 metres) - EAE028AS (1202249028) (2 metres) - EAE043AS (1202249043) (2 metres) - A00AM07677S (1201907677) (2 metres) - 0779145S (1229779145) (2 metres)

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

3-9

Technology Fluidic principles

2.2.

Valves

2.2.1. Valves 3, 4 and 5 The valves 3, 4 and 5 are located on a "manifold" block behind the pumps. This block is visible as shown below. The valves are behind the plate and visible from the rear of the instrument after removing the rear plate (8 CHC screws).

V4 V5

A B E F C D

V3

2.2.2. Valves 1 and 2 The valves 1 and 2 are located right above the syringes and visible from the rear of the instrument after removing the plate.

V1

V2

V2 V1

Sample syringe Reagent syringe

3 - 10

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Technology Fluidic principles

2.3.

Cooling system diagram

Refer to the cooling system diagram on next page.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

3 - 11

Technology Temperature control

3. Temperature control 3.1.

PID control

3.1.1. General points The PIC U44 of the instrument mother board ensures the temperature control of: ■ the

cooled area of the reagent tray

■ the

reagent needle

■ the

reaction tray chamber.

The temperature control system used is a PID controller (Proportional-Integral-Derivative). The following diagram describes the PID controller principle.

TSetpoint

Error

+ -

PID

Order

TMeasured System

TSetpoint

Setpoint temperature

TMeasured

Measured temperature

Error

Error between the setpoint temperature and the measured temperature

PID

PID controller

System

Controlled system (cooling unit, heater of the reagent needle or reaction tray chamber)

Order

Order in % of the system cooling or heating capacity

■A

temperature sensor (NTC) measures the temperature within the cooled area of the reagent tray, the reagent needle or the reaction tray chamber.

■ The ■

3 - 12

error between the setpoint temperature and the measured temperature is calculated.

According to the calculated error, the PID controller sends an order to the system. This order is a percentage of the system cooling or heating capacity.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Technology Temperature control

The following diagram gives an example of response of a PID controlled system. Controlled value 1.4 1.3 1.2 1.1 1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0 0

Zero permanent error Excess + 10% Measured value Setpoint value - 10%

Time of response to reach the setpoint value 5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

Time

Three parameters are used to adjust the PID controller: Gain (Proportional parameter), Ti (Integral parameter) and Td (Derivative parameter). The PID controller is adjusted to reach a compromise between: ■a

short time of response (determined by Ti)

■a

low excess (determined by Td)

■a

zero permanent error (ensured by Ti).

3.1.2. Instrument PID parameters The instrument PID parameters are displayed in the Heating menu (Services > Diagnostics > Heating).

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

3 - 13

Technology Temperature control

For each part (reagent needle, reaction tray chamber and cooled area of the reagent tray), the following temperature control values are given: Heading Gain Te/Ti Td/Te Te (s)

Description Proportional parameter of PID controller. Integral parameter of PID controller. Derivative parameter of PID controller. Frequency of the order sent by the PID controller to the system. For each cycle of a time Te, minimum time on which the signal Minimum T Off (ms) amplitude can be at 0. Assigned Value (°C) Setpoint temperature. Used for the Manual Mode only. Assigned Value (%) Order in % of the cooling or heating capacity. If checked, the temperature control is manually performed by Manual Mode using the Assigned Value in %. NTC Impedance NTC value for the setpoint temperature. Current (°C) Measured temperature. Power (%) Order in % of the cooling or heating capacity.

Do not modify the instrument PID parameters. Only the NTC value for the reaction tray chamber is modifiable by the technician.

The order is sent by the PID controller to the system via a PWM (Pulse-Width Modulation) signal. This PWM signal is proportional to the order in % of cooling or heating system capacity. The following diagram gives examples of PWM signals in relation with orders in % of cooling or heating system capacity. Amplitude

1

0 25%

0% 0

■ The

50%

75% Time

Te

2Te

3Te

4Te

PWM signal is sent in cycles of a time Te.

■ For

each cycle of a time Te, the time on which the signal amplitude is at 1, is proportional to the order in percentage of cooling or heating system capacity. For each cycle of a time Te, the time on which the signal amplitude is at 0 cannot be lower than the Minimum T Off. In this case, the time (on which the signal amplitude is at 0) is equal to 0.

3 - 14

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Technology Temperature control

3.2.

Reagent tray

3.2.1. Principle The reagent tray consists of 52 numbered positions of which 44 are refrigerated and 8 are at room temperature: ■ Cooled

area of the reagent tray, page 3-15

■ Temperate

area of the reagent tray, page 3-15.

Cooled area of the reagent tray ■ This

reagent tray area is refrigerated at 6°C using a cooling unit with a cooling loop inside the reagent tray. 8 fans (5V), located all along the cooling loop, continuously move the cooled air inside the reagent tray.

■A

temperature sensor (NTC) measures the temperature within the cooled area of the reagent tray. According to the measured temperature, the PIC U44 of the instrument mother board controls the cooling unit via a PWM signal (Te = 20 s).

■

The PWM signal is sent through the cooling unit control cable that connects the cooling unit to the instrument.

Round DIN connector (Cooling unit) Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 Housing

Direction

Sub-D female connector Signal (Instrument) Management of cooling unit ON/OFF (via the relay) Pin 9 +5V Pin 5 Ground 0 V Low liquid level alarm Pin 4 0 V = OK; + 5 V = low level Compressor overload alarm Pin 6 0 V = OK; + 5 V = compressor OFF Pin 3 Solenoid valve control via the PWM signal + 5 V Pin 1 Shield Pin 2, 7, 8 Not connected

Temperate area of the reagent tray ■ This

reagent tray area is kept at room temperature using a fan. The fan (5 V) periodically moves hot-air (from the instrument inner area) into the temperate area of the reagent tray to warm it.

■A

temperature sensor (NTC) measures the temperature within the instrument. According to the measured temperature, the instrument mother board directly controls the fan via a PWM signal (Te = 10 s). For each cycle of a time Te, the time on which the fan is activated is inversely proportional to the temperature measured within the instrument. This is illustrated by the following diagram.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

3 - 15

Technology Temperature control

% of time on which the fan is activated

100%

Temperature

10% 14°C

35°C

The fan is activated only if the reagent tray is in its home position (to warm only the temperate reagent tray area).

2

1

Fan Reagent tray home position: 1- Position 36 in front of the yellow arrow 2- Temperate area in front of the fan

3 - 16

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Technology Temperature control

3.2.2. Cooling unit description The cooling unit consists of: ■

a glycol bath (glycol + distilled water) with an integrated recirculation pump that ensures constant conditions for the reagent tray cooling loop

■a

cooling circuit that cools the glycol bath.

The following diagram describes the cooling circuit principle. Glycol bath

4

3

Evaporator Solenoid valve

Capillary tube

Condenser

Dessicator

Compressor 1

■ The

2

Fan

refrigerant fluid used in the cooling circuit is a refrigerant gas of R-134 type (Freon).

■ The

1.

2.

3. 4.

refrigerant fluid circulating in the cooling circuit undergoes a transformation cycle of four steps. The fluid is in a gaseous state. It passes through the compressor where it is compressed and its temperature and pressure is raised. Its pressure is then controlled by a pressure sensor (only for cooling unit CU401). The fluid is in a gaseous state, in high pressure. It circulates through the condenser by a fan where it passes from a gaseous state into a liquid state and its temperature is slightly reduced. Then, the fluid circulates through the dessicator (where its impurities are eliminated) before passing through the capillary tube. The fluid is in a liquid state, in high pressure. It passes through the capillary tube where its temperature and pressure are reduced. This step is called the gas expansion. The fluid is in the beginning state of a liquid/gaseous transformation, in low pressure. It cools the glycol bath circulating through the evaporator, where it passes into a gaseous state and its temperature is slightly raised.

■ The

temperature control is performed by the solenoid valve that opens a bypass to inject the hot fluid into the evaporator. - If the solenoid valve is opened, the cooling capacity is reduced to zero. - If the solenoid valve is closed, the cooling capacity rises to its maximum.

■ According

to the temperature measured within the cooled area of the reagent tray, the PIC U44 of the instrument mother board controls the solenoid valve via a PWM signal (Te = 20 s).

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

3 - 17

3 - 18

(Top cover for CU400)

Voltage on connectors SK1, SK2, SK3 and SK4: main power supply

Cooling unit models with fuses

Only for CU401

Voltage on connector SK5: 5V / >100V depending on the valve state

Technology Temperature control

3.2.3. Cooling unit electric diagram

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Voltage on connectors SK1, SK2, SK3 and SK4: main power supply

Cooling unit models with circuit breakers

Voltage on connector SK5: 5V / >115V depending on the valve state

Technology Temperature control

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

3 - 19

Technology Temperature control

3.3.

Reagent needle ■ The reagent needle is a stainless steel needle with an external graphitized teflon coating and an internal

sheathing made up of a teflon capillary tube from one end to the other. ■ The

reagent needle preheats the reagents at 37°C (± 0.5°C) during the sampling thanks to a resistive coil wire located along the reagent needle. The resistive coil wire is powered by 24 V, its resistance is 36 Ω and its electric power is 16 W.

■A

temperature sensor (NTC) measures the temperature within the reagent needle. According to the measured temperature, the PIC U44 of the instrument mother board controls the heater via a PWM signal (Te = 0.5 s).

The NTC resistance is 6.02 kΩ at 37°C and 10 kΩ at 25°C.

■

The PWM signal (5V) is sent from the PIC U44 to the transistor Q3 of the instrument mother board. Then, the transistor Q3 converts and sends the PWM signal (24V) to power the heater.

■

During the reagent level detection, the reagent needle heater and NTC are respectively switched off by the relays K1 and K2 of the reagent level detection board in order not to disturb the reagent level detection.

Heater + NTC connector To J5 on reagent level detection board Level detection connector To J1 on reagent level detection board

3 - 20

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Technology Temperature control

3.4.

Reaction tray ■ The

reaction tray is located in a chamber heated at 37°C (± 0.2°C) thanks to a heater and a fan. The heater, located at the bottom of the chamber, is powered by 24 V, its resistance is 4.3 Ω and its electric power is 140 W. The fan (24 V), located right above the heater, continuously moves hot-air inside the reaction tray chamber.

■A

temperature sensor (NTC) measures the temperature within the reaction tray chamber. According to the measured temperature, the PIC U44 of the instrument mother board controls the heater via a PWM signal (Te = 2 s).

The NTC resistance is 6.08 kΩ at 37°C and 10 kΩ at 25°C.

■

The PIC U44 of the instrument mother board sends a control signal to the power supply. Then, the power supply converts the control signal and sends the PWM signal (24V) to power the heater.

Cooled air Reaction tray

NTC

Fan Heater

Hot air

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

3 - 21

Technology Level detection and shock detection

4. Level detection and shock detection 4.1.

Reagent level detection

The reagent level detection is a capacitive level detection and is ensured by the reagent level detection board. See Section 4: Electric and electronic principles, 3.3. Reagent level detection board, page 4-20. Depending on the model of the reagent level detection board you have on your instrument, the reagent level detection principle slightly differs.

4.1.1. Reagent level detection board XAA500FS (1209109500) The following diagram describes the reagent level detection principle.

Oscillator U1

Needle Detector

NTC

Relay K2

Heater

Relay K1

Data treatment

Instrument mother board

Reagent level detection board

1. The oscillator, built in the microcontroller U1, sends continuously a frequency of 12 MHz to the reagent needle. 2. When the reagent arm moves down, the instrument mother board sends the following to the microcontroller U1 of the reagent level detection board: - the sensitivity level (see Sensitivity level, page 3-23) set according to the liquid to be detected. - a start signal to start the capacitive level detection. 3. The microcontroller U1 sends a control signal to the relays K1 and K2 which respectively switch off the reagent needle heater and NTC in order not to disturb the capacitive level detection. 4. The microcontroller U1 sends a shield signal to the heating cable to override the cable noise and the capacitive effect of the heating cable. 5. The microcontroller U1 measures the voltage variation of the oscillator that directly depends on the capacitance measured between the reagent needle and the ground. First, a capacitive measurement is done on air. This measurement gives the reference value. 6. When the reagent needle reaches the liquid, the capacitance as well as the voltage variation change. 7. The microcontroller U1 compares the voltage variation measured with a threshold value. This threshold value is calculated from the calibration measurement (see Calibration, page 3-23) and the reference value.

3 - 22

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Technology Level detection and shock detection

8. A counter counts the number of times the threshold value is overrun. When the counter reaches a value determined by the sensitivity level (impulsion number), the reagent level detection is effective (the liquid has been detected). 9. The microcontroller U1 sends a level detection signal to the instrument mother board to stop the reagent arm movement. 10. The microcontroller U1 sends a control signal to the relays K1 and K2 that switch the reagent needle heater and NTC on. 11. The microcontroller U1 stops the shield signal.

Sensitivity level On certain liquids, foam could be created. The sensitivity level avoids the mix up, during the reagent level detection, between bubbles and liquid. It is determined according to the liquid type and the sampling location (cassette, rack, etc). Each sensitivity level corresponds to the number of times the threshold value is overrun before the reagent level detection is effective. The instrument mother board sends the sensitivity level in the form of an impulsion number, to the reagent level detection board. Sensitivity level

Impulsion number

Default 1 2 3 4 Calibration

0 1 2 3 4 7

Number of threshold overrun 4 8 12 14 20 N/A

Calibration The calibration determines the reagent needle sensitivity which could vary according to the needle. It is performed after each reagent needle replacement. The calibration cycle consists in performing, in the wash tower, a capacitive measurement on air then on water. The calibration result gives a reference threshold. This threshold will be compared to the measured voltage variation during the reagent level detection.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

3 - 23

Technology Level detection and shock detection

4.1.2. Reagent level detection board XAA500DS (1209108500) The following diagram describes the reagent level detection principle.

Oscillator

U2

Needle Detector

NTC

Relay K2

Heater

Relay K1

U3 Microcontroller Data treatment

Instrument mother board

Reagent level detection board

1. The oscillator, built in U2, sends continuously a frequency of 240 kHz to the reagent needle. 2. When the reagent arm moves down, the instrument mother board sends the following to the microcontroller U3 of the reagent level detection board: - the sensitivity level (see Sensitivity level, page 3-25) set according to the liquid to be detected. - a start signal to start the capacitive level detection. 3. The microcontroller U3 sends a control signal to the relays K1 and K2 which respectively switch off the reagent needle heater and NTC in order not to disturb the capacitive level detection. 4. U2 sends a shield signal to the heating cable to override the cable noise and the capacitive effect of the heating cable. 5. U2 measures the voltage variation of the oscillator that directly depends on the capacitance measured between the reagent needle and the ground. First, a capacitive measurement is done on air. This measurement gives the reference value. 6. When the reagent needle reaches the liquid, the capacitance as well as the voltage variation change. 7. The microcontroller U3 compares the voltage variation measured with a threshold value. This threshold value is calculated from the calibration measurement (see Calibration, page 3-25) and the reference value. 8. A counter counts the number of times the threshold value is overrun. When the counter reaches a value determined by the sensitivity level (impulsion number), the reagent level detection is effective (the liquid has been detected). 9. The microcontroller U3 sends a level detection signal to the instrument mother board to stop the reagent arm movement. 10. The microcontroller U3 sends a control signal to the relays K1 and K2 that switch the reagent needle heater and NTC on. 11. U2 stops the shield signal.

3 - 24

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Technology Level detection and shock detection

Sensitivity level On certain liquids, foam could be created. The sensitivity level avoids the mix up, during the reagent level detection, between bubbles and liquid. It is determined according to the liquid type and the sampling location (cassette, rack, etc). Each sensitivity level corresponds to the number of times the threshold value is overrun before the reagent level detection is effective. The instrument mother board sends the sensitivity level in the form of an impulsion number, to the reagent level detection board. Sensitivity level

Impulsion number

Default 1 2 3 4 Calibration

0 1 2 3 4 7

Number of threshold overrun 25 50 100 200 400 N/A

Calibration The calibration determines the reagent needle sensitivity which could vary according to the needle. It is performed after each reagent needle replacement. The calibration cycle consists in performing, in the wash tower, a capacitive measurement on air then on water. The calibration result gives a reference threshold. This threshold will be compared to the measured voltage variation during the reagent level detection. The calibration result is saved on a flash memory (built in U3) on the reagent level detection board. A reagent level detection could not be performed if a calibration has not been done.

Voltage measurements on the reagent level detection board See Section 4: Electric and electronic principles, 3.3.2. Reagent level detection board XAA500DS (1209108500), page 4-22. Configuration On air On distilled water (2 mL) Disconnect the level detection connector (J1)

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Voltage (V) 1.9 1.7 2.8

3 - 25

Technology Level detection and shock detection

4.2.

Sample level and shock detection

The sample level detection is a capacitive level detection and is ensured by the sample level detection board. See Section 4: Electric and electronic principles, 3.2. Sample level detection board XAA486AS (1209108486), page 4-18. The sample level detection board ensures also the sample shock detection. The following diagram describes the sample level detection principle.

Oscillator

PIC U2

Needle

Data treatment

Instrument mother board

Shock detection switch Sample level detection board

1. When the sample arm moves down, the instrument mother board sends a start signal to the PIC U2 of the sample level detection board to start the capacitive level detection. 2. The PIC U2 measures the frequency variation of the oscillator that directly depends on the capacitance measured between the sample needle and the ground. 3. When the sample needle reaches the liquid, the capacitance as well as the frequency variation change. The PIC U2 sends a level detection signal to the instrument mother board to stop the sample arm movement.

Frequency measurements on the sample level detection board ■ Plug a multimeter (frequency measurement function) into the PIC U2 between pin 1 (ground) and pin 5. See Section 4: Electric and electronic principles, 3.2. Sample level detection board XAA486AS (1209108486), page 4-18.

Configuration On air On distilled water (2 mL) Disconnect the level detection connector (J1) Ground

3 - 26

Frequency (kHz) about 47 about 35 > 100 < 10

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Technology Level detection and shock detection

The sample shock detection is enabled by the shock detection switch located on the sample arm.

Shock detection switch

In normal cases, the shock detection switch is in low position: the metal plate keeps the switch in low position. In case of shock, the shock detection switch is in high position: the metal plate raises and releases the switch. The shock detection switch sends a shock detection signal to the instrument mother board to stop the sample arm movement.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

3 - 27

Technology Pressure detection

5. Pressure detection 5.1.

General points

The pressure detection is ensured by two pressure sensors (reagent and sample) located in the syringe block support and the pressure board located behind the syringe block. See Section 4: Electric and electronic principles, 5. Pressure board (kit ref. 1300015280), page 4-27.

The following diagram describes the pressure detection principle.

Reagent pressure sensor

Sample pressure sensor

Pressure board

Signal measurement, amplification and digitisation

Mother board

Result check

1. When the syringes start, the instrument mother board sends a start signal to the pressure board to start the pressure detection. 2. The pressure board measures the signals (voltages) sent by the pressure sensors (reagent and sample). These signals directly depend on the pressures measured by the pressure sensors. 3. The pressure board amplifies and digitizes the signals, then sends the results to the instrument mother board. Two types of results are sent to the instrument mother board: - results before amplification - results after amplification. 4. The instrument mother board checks the results to ensure that they are not out of range.

3 - 28

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Technology Pressure detection

5.2.

High pressure, low pressure and bad sampling detection

The pressure sensors ensure the detection of the three following troubles: - High pressure on the sample or reagent hydraulic system (blockage) - Low pressure on the sample or reagent hydraulic system (water supply failure) - Bad sampling (fibrin, air bubbles).

High pressure on the sample or reagent hydraulic system (blockage) The results before amplification are checked to ensure that the pressure is lower than 2500 mbar. If the pressure is higher than 2500 mbar, there is a high pressure on the sample or reagent hydraulic system (blockage).

Low pressure on the sample or reagent hydraulic system (water supply failure) During rinsing cycles, the results before amplification are checked to ensure that the pressure is higher than 300 mbar. If the pressure is lower than 300 mbar during rinsing cycles, there is a low pressure on the sample or reagent hydraulic system (water supply failure).

Bad sampling (fibrin, air bubbles) To correctly detect a bad sampling (fibrin, air bubbles), the pressure sensors are calibrated as follows. ■

For each pressure sensor (reagent and sample), the system primes the fluids, then runs a 10 aspirations repetition with the syringe, alternating between low and high volumes.

■ At the end of the cycle, the factors A and B of the calibration curve on water (y = Ax + B) are calculated. ■

Then, the factors KA and KB are applied on the calibration curve on water to determine the low and high limits of the acceptable range. y(KA) = KA * (Ax + B) y(KB) = KB * (Ax + B) The factors KA and KB are fixed and must not be changed. KA: factor of air detection during aspiration KB: factor of blockage (fibrin, clamped tubing, ...)

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

3 - 29

Technology Pressure detection

result after amplification

water

KA

KB

Fibrin

Acceptable range

Air bubbles

volume During aspirations, the results after amplification are checked to ensure that they are within the acceptable range. If they are out of the acceptable range during aspirations, there is a bad sampling (fibrin, air bubbles). The pressure detection parameters are displayed in the Pressure menu (Services > Diagnostics > Pressure).

B A C D

For each pressure sensor (reagent and sample), the following parameters are displayed: - the high pressure threshold in mbar (A) - the low pressure threshold in mbar (B) - the factors A and B of the calibration curve on water as well as the factors KA and KB (C).

3 - 30

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Technology Pressure detection

Press Set Pressure to calibrate each pressure sensor. At the end of the cycle, the factors A and B of the calibration curve on water are displayed in the left window. If the results are correct, press OK to validate the calibration. The new factors are then displayed in the right window. If not, press CANCEL to cancel the calibration.

Please refer to the pressure sensors calibration procedure as described in the procedure RAS442: Pressure sensors, page 1 to calibrate the pressure sensors and make sure that the results are correct.

Press Read Pressure to display the pressure measured by each pressure sensor at any time. The results before and after amplification are displayed in the window (D). If the reading is done when the syringe is not working, the result before amplification should be near 0 and the result after amplification should range between 2000 and 5000. This reading allows you to check the pressure sensor functioning and the result amplification.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

3 - 31

Technology Pressure detection

3 - 32

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Section 4: Electric and electronic principles

1. Mother board................................................................................................. 4 - 3 1.1. Mother board synoptic .............................................................................................................. 4 - 4 1.2. Mother board configuration ....................................................................................................... 4 - 6 1.3. Mother board adjustments ........................................................................................................ 4 - 7 1.4. Mother board connections ........................................................................................................ 4 - 9 1.5. LEDs on mother board............................................................................................................. 4 - 11 1.6. Mother board Inputs & Outputs ............................................................................................... 4 - 12

2. Optical acquisition ...................................................................................... 4 - 14 2.1. Optical acquisition synoptic .................................................................................................... 4 - 14 2.2. Optical amplifier board XAA457BS (1209109457)................................................................... 4 - 16 2.3. Optical processing board XAA483CS (1209109483)............................................................... 4 - 16

3. Level detection ............................................................................................ 4 - 18 3.1. Level detection synoptic.......................................................................................................... 4 - 18 3.2. Sample level detection board XAA486AS (1209108486)......................................................... 4 - 18 3.3. Reagent level detection board................................................................................................. 4 - 20

4. Sample relay board XAA491CS (1209109491) .......................................... 4 - 25 5. Pressure board (kit ref. 1300015280)......................................................... 4 - 27 6. Internal computer 1300013734 .................................................................. 4 - 29 7. Power supply ............................................................................................... 4 - 30 7.1. Protection ................................................................................................................................ 4 - 30 7.2. Inputs/Outputs connectors...................................................................................................... 4 - 31 7.3. Power supply cables................................................................................................................ 4 - 33

8. Connectors .................................................................................................. 4 - 34 8.1. DAC024A (1201891024): CABLE, PRINTER IEEE1284 SHIELD.............................................. 8.2. DAC034A (1201891034): CABLE, CHILLER CABLE ............................................................... 8.3. DAC044A (1201891044): CABLE, USB EXT. CORD L=0.3 M ................................................. 8.4. DAD123A (1201921123): CABLE, PC/PRINT L=1000 5-25 P80 ............................................. 8.5. DAD124A (1201921124): CABLE, PC/RS L=1000 5-09 P80 ................................................... 8.6. DAD134B (1201922134): CABLE, ACQUISIT. BOARD CABLE V1 .......................................... 8.7. DAD134C (1201923134): CABLE, ACQUISIT. BOARD CABLE ............................................... 8.8. DAD135A (1201921135): CABLE, SAMP.RELAY PCB CABLE V1 .......................................... 8.9. DAD135B (1201922135): CABLE, SAMP.RELAY PCB CABLE ............................................... 8.10. DAL029A (1201961029): MOTOR, MIXER ASSY MOTOR .................................................... 8.11. XBA512B (1209112512): CABLE, MOTHER BOARD LEFT CABLE ...................................... 8.12. XBA513C (1209113513): CABLE, RIGHT CABLE ASSY P400 V1......................................... 8.13. XBA513E (1209115513): CABLE, RIGHT CABLE ASSY........................................................ 8.14. XBA514B (1209112514): CABLE, ELECTRO-VALVES .......................................................... 8.15. XBA517D (1209114517): CABLE, DET. BOARD CABLE P400.............................................. 8.16. XBA518A (1209111518): SENSOR, LB TRAY/ARM/MIX/HANDLER ..................................... 8.17. XBA519A (1209111519): SENSOR, LB+MOT.CABLE ARM/HANDL..................................... ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

4 - 36 4 - 37 4 - 38 4 - 38 4 - 39 4 - 40 4 - 41 4 - 42 4 - 43 4 - 44 4 - 45 4 - 47 4 - 48 4 - 49 4 - 50 4 - 51 4 - 52 4-1

Electric and electronic principles

8.18. XBA520A (1209111520): CABLE, ARMS/HANDLER CABLE ................................................ 8.19. XBA531B (1209112531): PCB, SAMPLE TRAY TUBE DETECTOR....................................... 8.20. XBA532DS (1209119532): SENSOR, RACK LOAD/UNLOAD ............................................... 8.21. XBA533B (1209112533): FAN, REACTION TRAY FAN.......................................................... 8.22. XBA534C (1209113534): HEATER, REACTION TRAY........................................................... 8.23. XBA535BS (1209119535): SENSOR, REAGENT & REACTION TEMP. ................................. 8.24. XBA536A (1209111536): SENSOR, REACT.TRAY HOME SENSOR ..................................... 8.25. XBA543A (3012277056): CABLE, PREAMP.TO MAIN BOARD ISE....................................... 8.26. XBA544C (1209113544): VALVE, ISE VALVE ASSY .............................................................. 8.27. XBA545B (1209112545): CABLE, ISE SYR. LB CABLE ........................................................ 8.28. XBA551A (1209111551): PCB, SAMPLE TRAY LED ............................................................. 8.29. XBA561D (1209114561): MIXER, MIXING PADDLE MOTOR ASSY...................................... 8.30. XBA563ET (1209119563): NEEDLE, SAMPLE P400 W FERRITE.......................................... 8.31. XBA564DT (1209119564): NEEDLE, REAGENT NEEDLE...................................................... 8.32. XBA571A (1209111571): CABLE, LEVEL DETECT TANKS ................................................... 8.33. XBA572A (1209111572): SENSOR, ROOM TEMP.SENSOR................................................. 8.34. XBA573A (1209111573): SENSOR, REAG.TRAY DOOR SENSOR ....................................... 8.35. XBA587B (1209111587): FAN, REAGENT TRAY FAN L=400................................................ 8.36. XBA588A (1209111588): CABLE, NEEDLE PRESS.CABLE .................................................. 8.37. XBA601BS (1209119601): PCB, PC WAKE UP BUTTON ..................................................... 8.38. XBA732AS (1209119732): CABLE, WASTE PUMP ADAPTOR/V1 ........................................ 8.39. XBA734AS (1209119734): CABLE, ADAP NEW RACK SENSOR/V1 .................................... 8.40. XBA756AS (1209119756): CABLE, ADAP OLD RACK SENSOR........................................... 8.41. XBA814A (1209111814): CABLE, INNER ARM CABLE ......................................................... 8.42. XBA815A (1209111815): CABLE, REAG MOTOR ADAPTOR CABLE ................................... 8.43. XBA847AT (1209119847): NEEDLE, SAMPLE PC400........................................................... 8.44. XDA820D (1209134820): MOTOR, REAGENT TRAY MOTOR............................................... 8.45. XDA871B (1209132871): MOTOR, SAMPLE TRAY MOTOR ASSY....................................... 8.46. XEC186AS (1209179186): SENSOR, REAG. TRAY HOME SENSOR.................................... 8.47. XEC202AS (1209179202): PUMP, WATER ASSY + METAL SHEET .....................................

4 - 53 4 - 54 4 - 55 4 - 56 4 - 57 4 - 58 4 - 59 4 - 60 4 - 61 4 - 62 4 - 63 4 - 64 4 - 65 4 - 66 4 - 67 4 - 68 4 - 69 4 - 70 4 - 71 4 - 72 4 - 73 4 - 74 4 - 74 4 - 75 4 - 76 4 - 77 4 - 78 4 - 79 4 - 80 4 - 81

9. Instrument synoptic .................................................................................... 4 - 82

4-2

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Electric and electronic principles Mother board

1. Mother board

Two mother board references are available depending on the instrument you have: ■ 1300013696 for ABX Pentra 400 ■ 1300013697 for Pentra C400

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

4-3

4-4

Screen

Printer

2 sensors tank full, tank empty for water and waste

Power supply voltages control

Lamp voltage control

IDEE reader Sample

IDEE reader Reagent

RS232

RS232

RS232

RS232

SPI bus

Mouse

Computer RS232

RS232

Mother board

Touch screen

Keyboard

Host

Reagent tray

Sample tray

Reaction tray

Sample arm

Reagent arm

Cuvette changer

Mixer 1 step by step motor 1 continuous motor 1 Home sensor

2 draining/rinsing pumps 2 tank empty/full sensors

6 electrovalves

Reagent syringe 1 step by step motor 1 Home switch

Sample syringe 1 step by step motor 1 Home switch

1 step by step motor 1 Hall effect Home sensor 1 Hall effect sensor for tray door with solenoid bolt

1 step by step motor + encoder 1 Home sensor 2 optical sensors tube/cup

1 step by step motor 1 Home sensor

2 step by step motors (µ step) 2 Home sensors V/H 1 level detection 1 fibrin detection 1 shock detection

2 step by step motors (µ step) 2 Home sensors V/H 1 level detection 1 fibrin detection

3 step by step motors 3 Home sensors

Temperature arm control 1 probe

Temperature reaction tray control 1 probe

1.1.

ISE module amplifier 6 inputs/outputs convertor 16 bits, 1 peristatic pump, step by step motor, 1 Home sensor, 1 optical sensor for air/liquid detection

Photometer amplifier 15 inputs/outputs convertor 20 bits

Temperature control

1 probe Reagent tray

Electric and electronic principles Mother board

Mother board synoptic

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Electric and electronic principles Mother board

Mother board synoptic

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

4-5

Electric and electronic principles Mother board

1.2.

Mother board configuration

E1 E3

E8

E2

E4

E5 E7 E6

Jumpers:

4-6

E1 =

1

2

E3 =

1 2

E2 =

2 1

4 3

E4 =

1 3

2 4

E5 =

2 1

4 3

E7 =

3 4

1 2

E8 =

3 4

1 2

E6 = 1 2

Jumper E3

RTS UART = CTS UART

Jumper Setting Short 1 - 2

Xon / Xoff Handshake (Default)

Jumper E5 E5 E5 (Default) E5 (Default)

RTS UART = RTS COM3 CTS UART = CTS COM3 RTS UART = CTS UART RTS COM3 = CTS COM3

Jumper Setting Short 1 - 2 Short 3 - 4 Short 1 - 3 Short 2 - 4

Hardware Handshake Hardware Handshake Xon / Xoff Handshake Xon / Xoff Handshake

Jumper E2 E2 E2 (Default) E2 (Default)

RTS UART = RTS COM4 CTS UART = CTS COM4 RTS UART = CTS UART RTS COM4 = CTS COM4

Jumper Setting Short 1 - 2 Short 3 - 4 Short 1 - 3 Short 2 - 4

Hardware Handshake Hardware Handshake Xon / Xoff Handshake Xon / Xoff Handshake

Jumper E1 (Default) E4 E4 E4 (Default) E4 (Default)

Pin 9 (Ri) = VCC RTS UART = RTS COM5 CTS UART = CTS COM5 RTS UART = CTS UART Pin 7 & 8 COM5 = NC

Jumper Setting Short 1 - 2 Short 1 - 2 Short 3 - 4 Short 1 - 3

Hardware Handshake Hardware Handshake Xon / Xoff Handshake Xon / Xoff Handshake

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Electric and electronic principles Mother board

1.3.

Jumper E8 E8 E8 (Default) E8 (Default) E7 E7 E7 (Default) E7 (Default) Jumper E6

Pressure Rge = RA0 PH2 = RA3 Pressure Rge = RA3 PH2 = RA0 Pressure Spl = RA0 PH2 = RA3 Pressure Spl = RA3 PH2 = RA0

Jumper Setting Short 1 - 2 Short 3 - 4 Short 1 - 3 Short 2 - 4 Short 1 - 2 Short 3 - 4 Short 1 - 3 Short 2 - 4

Measure by Slave #12 Measure by Slave #12 Trig by Slave #12 Trig by Slave #12 Measure by Slave #13 Measure by Slave #13 Trig by Slave #13 Trig by Slave #13

Main Reset (reserved)

Jumper Setting Open

Default

Mother board adjustments

Motor Reagent Syringe Sample Syringe Reagent Tray Sample Tray X/Y Mixer Mixer Rot. Reagent Arm Up/Down Sample Arm Up/Down Reagent Arm Rot. Sample Arm Cuvette motion Horizontal motion Vertical motion Reaction Tray

Test Point TP2 TP7 TP11 TP14 TP16 TP19 TP27 TP28 TP29 TP30 TP13 TP9 TP6 TP1

Potentiometer R6 R38 R70 R100 R128 R146 R222 R224 R225 R227 R115 R87 R56 R25

Target 1.2 V 1V 1V 1V 0.8 V 9V 0.6 V 1V 1V 0.6 V 0.6 V 0.8 V 1.2 V 2V

Range ±50 mV ±50 mV ±50 mV ±50 mV ±50 mV ±100 mV ±50 mV ±50 mV ±50 mV ±50 mV ±50 mV ±50 mV ±50 mV ±50 mV

Test points and potentiometers are located as shown on the following diagram.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

4-7

Electric and electronic principles Mother board

Reaction tray motor (R25 - TP1)

Horizontal motions motor (R87 - TP9)

Vertical motions motor (R56 - TP6)

Up\Down sample arm motor (R224 - TP28)

Rotation reagent arm motor (R222 - TP27)

Rotation sample arm motor (R227 - TP30) Up\Down reagent arm motor (R225 - TP29)

Cuvette motions motor (R115 - TP13)

Mixing motor (R146 - TP19) Reagent Syringe motor (R6 - TP2) Sample Syringe motor (R38 - TP7)

4-8

Reagent Tray motor (R70 - TP11)

Sample Tray motor (R100 - TP14)

XY Mixing motor (R128 - TP16)

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Electric and electronic principles Mother board

1.4.

Mother board connections

Refer to the following diagram.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

4-9

4 - 10

Permanent Fan (+24V)

Cover Solenoid

Needle Board

J4 on Heating

Cooling Unit

Mixing motor

Reaction Heating sensor

Inner Temperature sensor

Controled Fan (+5V)

XY Mixing motor

Reagent Refrigerated sensor

Sample Tray motor

XY Mixing motor home

Sample Tray home

Reagent Tray motor

Reagent Tray home

Sample Syringe motor

Sample Syringe home

Reagent Syringe motor

Reagent Syringe home

J3 on Pressure board

J48

J66

J35

J25

J16

J11

J6

Power Supply

J53

J46

J42

J67

J2

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN Fans

+24V

J54

J43 J44

J33

J51

J65

J49

J47

Pump

Water

Waste Pump

J56

J31 J28

J55

J52

Valves

J34

J62

Tank sensors J29

Motor

J57

J39

Home

J58

J1 on Sample Relay board

J12

J10

J59

J40

Reagent Arm Vertical

J50

J38

J1

J60

J41

Computer (RS232 # 4)

Motor + Home

J45

J37

J22

J19

J17

J61

J5

J26

Arm Cover Switch

J27

Reagent Arm Rotation

J63

J36

J30

Free

Optical Encoder

J4

ISE (RS232 #5)

Reagent Barcode

Reagent Cover Switch Mixer present switch

PC Wake up

J21

J14

J9

J3

ISE (RS232 #3)

J32

Rotation Motor

Sample Arm

Reagent Room Fan (+5v)

J2 on Reagent Arm board

J2 on Sample Arm board

Rotation Home

Sample Arm

New Segment available

Cuvette Motion home

Cuvette Motion motor

Not in position

Rack Used Segment

Translation Cuvette Loader

Motor + Home

Rack Used Segment full

Vertical Motion home

Vertical Motion motor

Low position

Vertical Motion motor

Reaction Tray home

Sample Arm Vertical

Motor + Home

J20

J15

J8

Reaction Tray motor

Cover sensor

Handling Cuvette

Processing board

J2 on Optical

Electric and electronic principles Mother board

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

-5V DS13

Reaction Room Heating DS10

Compressor Electrovalve DS11

Compressor Overload DS9

+5V DS14

VCC (+5V) DS15 +24V DS16

Cover solenoid DS12

Waste pump DS17

Water pump DS18

Tube / Cup DS7

DUART 1 DS3 DS2

Tube height DS6

1.5.

Needle Heating DS8

Reagent Tray Home DS5

DUART 2 DS4 DS1

Electric and electronic principles Mother board

LEDs on mother board

4 - 11

Electric and electronic principles Mother board

The following table describes the LEDs states. LED designation DS2 DUART 1

DS1

Green

DS4

Red

Reagent Tray Home Needle Heating

DS5 DS8

Red Green

Compressor Overload

DS9

Red

Compressor Electrovalve

DS11

Green

DS10

Red

Lit during reaction room heating

DS13 DS14

Red Red

Lit if power supply is present Lit if power supply is present

DS15

Red

Lit if power supply is present

DS16 DS12 DS17 DS18 DS7 DS6

Red Green Green Green Red Red

DUART 2

Reaction Room Heating Power supply -5V Power supply +5V Power supply VCC (+5V) Power supply +24V Cover solenoid Waste pump Water pump Tube/Cup Tube height

1.6.

DS1

LED color LED state Green Fixed lighting = normal state Blinking = RS232 dialog (emission or reception) Fixed lighting = normal state Red Blinking = RS232 dialog (reception or emission) Fixed lighting = normal state Blinking = RS232 dialog (emission or reception) Fixed lighting = normal state Blinking = RS232 dialog (reception or emission) Lit if reagent tray is in home position Lit during needle heating Lit = compressor OK Switch off = compressor overload Signal lit by intermittence: Lit = not cooling Switch off = cooling

Lit if power supply is present Lit if reagent tray cover is locked Lit if waste pump is running Lit if water pump is running Lit if tube is present Lit if sample cup is present1

Mother board Inputs & Outputs

Refer to the following diagram.

4 - 12

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

PHD14

Optical Encoder

Power Supply

Chiller On/Off

PH4

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7

U37 HC574

Lamp_ON/OFF PC_ON/OFF Pwr_Sup_Status

GND

4 - 13

GND

GND

C455 100p

Lamp_Stand_By

Lamp_ON/OFF PC_ON/OFF Pwr_Sup_Status

CHA CHB

Chiller_Level

PHA PHB

1k

Lamp_Stand_By

VCC

19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12

R202

Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7

Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7

19 18 17 16 15 13 12 14

Chiller_Watchdog

DS12 Green

R183 4k7

U43 HC574

ENEV 1 OE CSR5 11 CLK

D(8) D(9) D(10) D(11) D(12) D(13) D(14) D(15)

GND

Q8 BC817

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7

Chiller_Level

C456 100p

CR2 MURS120

2 3 4 5 6 8 9 7

ENEV 1 OE CSR5 11 CLK

D(0) D(1) D(2) D(3) D(4) D(5) D(6) D(7)

+24V

CR3 MURS120 R185 4k7

CSR5

C290 VCC 470u

Chiller_Watchdog

4VCC 3 J27 2 1

PH2

1 J49 2

R213 4k7

+24V

EV(6)

EV(5)

EV(4)

EV(3)

EV(2)

EV(1)

EV(0)

+24V

D(015)

Arm_switch

CS_REG_OUT

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J34 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

R220 4k7

Cover Solenoid

EV Board

CPU&GLU

ENEV

1 2 3 4 1 3 4 2

EV(0.6)

D(015)

D(0) D(1) D(2) D(3) D(4) D(5) D(6) D(7)

19 18 12 13 14 15 16 17 HC573

Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7

U33 LE D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 OE

Tube_Heigh

Tube_Cup

R147 10k

11 2 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 Chiller_Level 1

DS6 Red

R151 470R

VCC TxD

RxD

COM

16 COM 15 COM 14 COM 13 COM 12 COM 11 COM 10

VCC 10k 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1

CAB_spl_Sensor

U36

U36 U36

U36

U36

U36

U36

VCC

8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 10k

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

ULNZ003

GND

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

8 7 6 5 8 6 5 7 10k GND

UR27 UR27 UR27 UR27 UR26 UR26 UR26 UR26 UR29 UR29 UR29 UR29 UR28 UR28 UR28 UR28

CS_REG_IN

UR22 UR22 UR22 UR20 UR20 UR20 UR20 UR22 +24V

+24V

R186 4k7

Q9 IRLL3303 G

Green

DS17

R187 4k7

NI

R241 1R R237

GND

330R R155 330R

R130

GND

S

D

C292 C300

GND

GND

GND

HE2

1 2 J56

HE2

1 2 J55

100p 100n 100u

C251

To Relay board

Hard PC Wake up

Arm Cover Switch

Reagent Cover Switch

Mixer Position

Fill Tank Switch (NU)

Water Low Level Switch

Waste Full Switch

Water Pump

Waste Pump

HE10MD16

PH4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 J36 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

PH4 1 2 3 J62 4

PH4 1 2 3 J30 4

PH4 1 2 3 J29 4

C293 C301

GND GND

PH4 1 2 3 J28 4

100p 100n 100u

C250

GND

CR4 MURS120

GND

S

D

CR5 MURS120

GND

Tube_Heigh

C213 100n C210 100n Tube_Cup

VCC +24V

C182 47p

Arms_Cover_SW

VCC

+24V

Barcode CAB_spl_Sensor Barcode

Green LED

Red LED

R123 10k

DS18 R215 4k7 R208 Green Q10 4k7 IRLL3303 G

R207 4k7

DS7 Red

R161 470R

R214 4k7

VCC

Fill_Tank_SW Reagent_Cover_SW Arms_Cover_SW PC_Wake_up

Water_Low_SW

Waste_Full_SW

GND GND

GND GND GND GND GND

1 2 3 J31 4

Electric and electronic principles Mother board

Electric and electronic principles Optical acquisition

2. Optical acquisition The optical acquisition consists in the treatment of the optical signal from the spectrophotometer. This signal is digitized and sent to the mother board operating system. This electronic functionality is run by two boards:

2.1.

■

the optical amplifier board XAA457BS (1209109457) (on which photodiode array is fixed) makes the current-power conversion of each wavelength. See 2.2. Optical amplifier board XAA457BS (1209109457), page 4-16.

■

the optical processing board XAA483CS (1209109483) makes the analogic-numeric conversion, the RAM storage and the data transmission to the mother board operating system. See 2.3. Optical processing board XAA483CS (1209109483), page 4-16.

Optical acquisition synoptic

OPTICAL PROCESSING BOARD A1_A18

BD32

SRAM SPI

MICROPROCESSOR

D0_D15 256 Ko x 16 bits

E P O T E N T I M E T E R S

OPTICAL AMPLIFIER BOARD D E T E C T O R

4 - 14

PRE AMPLI

AMPLI

CS2 CS7

ADC BUSY ADC RD ADC CONVST CDE MUX M U L T I P L E X E R

C O N V E R T O R

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Electric and electronic principles Optical acquisition

2.1.1. Analogical acquisition part ■ Detector:

photodiode system in a range of wavelength from 340 nm to 700 nm.

■ Pre

ampli: operational transimpedance amplificator used to perform the current-power conversion for each wavelength (15). According to the gain in the amplificator (68 millions on 340 nm wavelength) and the expected precision, only one resistance is placed in the anti-reaction loop. For each wavelength, the signal is filtered with a "low pass" at approximately 300 Hz.

■

Ampli: the gain is adjusted with a non-inverter assembly. An operational amplificator low noise, low drift (according to the temperature) and low offset power is used. This adjustment with potentiometers (E2pot) corrects doubt on luminosity and lamp ageing and doubt on photodiodes and passive components. It is performed for each wavelength and it is not modified during the measurement. The E2pot (50 kΩ) allows a gain between 1 and 6 with an adjustment of 0.2%. The signal is filtered with a "low pass" at approximately 1 KHz.

■ Multiplexer:

it combines the 15 wavelengths in one signal.

■ Subtractor

assembly: to use the full scale of the analogic/numeric convertor (- 2.5 V > + 2.5 V), 2.5 V are subtracted to the digitized signal. An ampli-op is assemblied in subtractor.

■ Convertor:

performs the analogic-numeric conversion.

2.1.2. Numerical acquisition part The intelligent part of this numerical acquisition is composed with a microprocessor and a SRAM. Application: ■A

"TOP_MEASURE" signal is generated at each beginning of a cuvette motion in front of the analysis window. It is provided by the microprocessor managing the reaction tray. This signal is wired on the microprocessor level 3 IT.

■

The microprocessor orders, by its I/O ports, the multiplexer to direct the signal of wavelength to measure to an analogic/numeric convertor.

■ The

microprocessor runs a conversion by the activation of the convertor "ADC_CONVST" pin wired in CS2.

■

When the conversion ends, the convertor picks up the "ADC_BUSY" signal and informs the microprocessor.

■ The

microprocessor receives data (16 bits) by activating the convertor "ADC_RD" pin wired in CS7.

■ At

the end of a 100 measurements batch on 2 different wavelengths, the microprocessor generates an "IT_SPI" signal for the master in order to receive measurement information via the SPI link between the mother board master microprocessor and the slave microprocessor of the optical processing board.

■

The amplification gain of each wavelength is adjusted by an E2POT. These E2POTs are commanded by the microprocessor via an internal SPI bus of the optical processing board.

Microprocessor: ■ Functioning

frequency = 25 MHz.

SRAM memory: ■ The

SRAM memory is constituted by a housing of 256 Ko x 16 bits. Its selection is performed by the "CSBOOT" signals of the microprocessor.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

4 - 15

Electric and electronic principles Optical acquisition

2.2.

Optical amplifier board XAA457BS (1209109457)

To J1 on Optical Processing Board

2.3.

Optical processing board XAA483CS (1209109483)

The optical processing board XAA483CS (1209109483) is meant to be used on both ABX Pentra 400 and Pentra C400. For the ABX Pentra 400, instruments must be equipped with the V5.0.6 software version or higher.

4 - 16

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Electric and electronic principles Optical acquisition

To J1 on Optical Amplifier board

To J1 on Mother board

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

4 - 17

Electric and electronic principles Level detection

3. Level detection 3.1.

Level detection synoptic

Mother board SAMPLE LEVEL DETECTION BOARD Shock detection switch µCTRL

SAMPLE ARM NEEDLE

CAPACITIVE DETECTION

36 Ω/16 W

HEATER SENSOR

3.2.

J40 5

PIC12C672 Start Scan 10 MHz VCC

REAGENT LEVEL DETECTION BOARD J5 24 V, VCC J4 Relay

J47 4

Heat Cmd Temp Sig

J1 VREF

REAGENT ARM NEEDLE

CAPACITIVE DETECTION

J1 VREF

J2

LVL Detect

J2 µCTRL

5

LVL Detect

J45

PIC12C672 Start Scan 10 MHz VCC

Sample level detection board XAA486AS (1209108486)

The sample level detection board, located on the sample arm, has two functions: ■ level ■

detection: detects the liquid level in different containers (sample tube, sample cup)

shock detection: detects possible collision between the sample arm and sample cup bottom or any other obstacle. To J40 on Mother Board

To Sample Needle

1

5

4 - 18

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Electric and electronic principles Level detection

Sample level detection functioning: The sample needle is connected in J1. It performs a capacitive link between ground and the J1 connection. The component U1 transforms the oscillation in a frequency around 47 kHz (pin 5 of U2). This frequency and its variation around the central frequency is analyzed by a microprocessor PIC U2. If a variance of frequency is detected (during level detection), the "LEVEL_DETECT" signal pin 6 is put to "1" and sent to the instrument mother board. If the detection is not performed and if the needle touches the sample cup bottom, the "shock detection" pin 2 of J2 sends a signal "1" to the instrument mother board.

R3 100k

R4 820k

VCC

VCC

VCC R1

C1

100k

100n

J1

8 2

v+

R2

GND

-

3+ 4 v-

R5 4k7

10MHz

GND

1 Level_detect Start_scan

U1 LM393

100k

GND

Y1 2 GP5/OSC1/CLKIN 3 GP4/OSC2/AN3/CLKOUT 4 GP3/MCLR/Vpp 5 GP2/TOCKI/AN2/INT 6 GP1/AN1/VREF 7 GP0/AN0 U2 PIC12C672

GND

Choc detect switch NO NC

SW1 VCC

GND

GND

1 2 3 J2 4 5 PH5

D 3.2mm FX2

FX3

FX1

GND

To check the detection functioning: ■ Use

a multimeter (Frequency measurement function) and plug it into U2 between chassis (ground) and pin 5: - The frequency must be about 47 KHz.

■ Disconnect

the sample needle (J1) and check the frequency again: - The frequency must be >100 KHz.

■ Reconnect

the sample needle.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

4 - 19

Electric and electronic principles Level detection

3.3.

Reagent level detection board

3.3.1. Reagent level detection board XAA500FS (1209109500) The reagent level detection board, located on the reagent arm, detects the liquid level in different reagent containers (cassette, reagent vial). It also switches off/on the reagent needle heater and the NTC. To Heating Needle

DS2

To J45 on Mother Board

TP1 (START_SCAN) TP2 (LEVEL_DETECT)

DS3

DS1

To J47 on Mother Board

Reagent level detection functioning: The reagent needle is connected in J1. It performs a capacitive link between ground and the connection J1. ■ The

instrument mother board sends the "START_SCAN" signal (5 V pulse, TP1) to the component U1. - The K1 and K2 relays cut the needle heating circuit (heater + NTC). - The component U1 sends a shield signal to the heating cable to override the cable noise and the capacitive effect of the heating cable.

■ The

component U1 sends a frequency of 12 MHz continuously to the needle.

■ The

needle sends a capacitive value to the component U1.

■ The component U1 transforms the capacitive value into a voltage. This voltage and its variation around

the threshold voltage are analyzed by the component U1. If a variance of voltage is detected, the component U1 sends the "LEVEL_DETECT" signal (5 V pulse, TP2) to the instrument mother board.

LEDs function: ■ The

LED DS1 is located between the relays K1 and K2. It gives the state of the relays K1 and K2: the LED is lit when the reagent needle heater and NTC are switched off.

■ The LED DS2 is located close to

the microcontroller U1. It gives the state of the reagent level detection board: the LED is lit permanently when the reagent level detection board detects a default.

■ The

LED DS3 is located under J6. It gives the following information: - the LED is lit when the reference value on air is acceptable, - the LED is unlit when the liquid is detected.

4 - 20

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

DS1

K1

K2

DS2

U1

TP1

TP2

DS3

Electric and electronic principles Level detection

4 - 21

Electric and electronic principles Level detection

3.3.2. Reagent level detection board XAA500DS (1209108500) The reagent level detection board, located on the reagent arm, detects the liquid level in different reagent containers (cassette, reagent vial). It also switches off/on the reagent needle heater and the NTC. Components side To Heating Needle

To J45 on Mother Board

R25 Q1

+C18 U1

D2 R20

K2

K1

J5

J4

J2

K

TP2

A LD2

C12

C14

D1

U2

J1 +C17 +C16

TP1

TP2 TP1

LD2 To J47 on Mother Board

Q4 R26 Q3

C28

R18 R19 R31

TP6 R22 C24 C20

R32

R21

C26

R28 R29

K

R17 LD1

R24 R23 R33 C21 R30

U3 C25

TP3

R27

TP5 TP4 U4

C22

D3 X1

Q2

Welding side

C19

LD1

Reagent level detection functioning: The reagent needle is connected in J1. It performs a capacitive link between ground and J1 connection. The component U2 (pin 17) sends a frequency of 240 kHz continuously to the needle. The component U3 (pin 9) receives the "START_SCAN" signal from the instrument mother board. During the level detection: - the K1 and K2 relays cut the needle heating circuit (heater + NTC). - the shield signal (VSSA), sent by the component U2, reaches the heating cable and thus the cable noise and the capacitive effect of the heating cable are overridden. The component U2 transforms the capacitive value into a voltage. This voltage and its variation around the threshold voltage are analyzed by the microcontroller U3. If a variance of voltage is detected (during level detection), the signal "LEVEL_DETECT" pin 5 is put to "1" and sent to the instrument mother board.

LEDs function:

4 - 22

■

The LED LD1 is located on the welding side close to the microcontroller U3. It gives the following information: - the reagent level detection state: it lits during 0.3 seconds when the liquid is detected. - the reagent level detection board state: if the reagent level detection board detects a default, the LED is lit permanently.

■

The LED LD2 is located on the components side between the relays K1 and K2. It gives the state of the relays K1 and K2: the LED is lit when the reagent needle heater and NTC are switched off.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

R17

2.2kohm

2

2K2-1%-0603

D 3.2mm

1

4 - 23

GND

FX2 FX3 FX1

2

1uF-16v-0603

1

HSMG-C670

C25 2 1

LD1

1

D3

1uF-16v-0603

C22 2 1

+3.3V

GND

C26 2 1

1uF-16v-0603

GND

1

1 2

2

U3

10K-1%-0603

10 kohm

R24

10 kohm

10K-1%-0603

R23

MC3494EG/R2 MC3494EG/R2 MC3494EG/R2

C17 + C16 +

2

BAS516

10 kohm

D2

R26

Q1 BC817

GND

2

1

GND

+5V

2

2 3 4

7 6 5

1 R20

8

HSMG-C670

LD2

100nF-16V-0603

2 1

10 kohm

10K-1%-0603

C19

1

K2

VSSA

VCC VSS P1.0/TACLK/ACLK/A0 XIN/P2.6/TA1 P1.1/TA0/A0/A1 XOUT/P2.7 TEST/SBWTCK P1.2/TA1/A2 P1.3/ADC10CLK/A3/VREF-/VEREFNMI/RST/SBWTDIO P1.4/SMCLK/A4/VREF+/VEREF+/TCK P1.7/A7/SDI/SDA/TDO/TDI P1.5/TA0/A5/SCLK/TMS P1.6/TA/A6/SDD/SCL/TDI/TCLK MSP430F2012IPW MSP430F2012IPW

R25

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

VSSA

22pF

47uF 6V3

GND

10K-1%-0603

2

J1

BAS516

+3.3V

NEEDLE

47uF 6V3

2 3 4

7 6 5

8

GND

R33

TP1

K1

2

1 X1

1

1

1

C12

1 2 HEATER 3 J5 4 NTC

EH4

100nF-50V-0603

GND

2

R22

GND

U4

TP3 TP5 TP4 TP6 TEST TP_SMD

TEST TP_SMD

TEST TP_SMD

TEST TP_SMD

EN

GND 3

4

IN2 6

IN1 5

10uF

TPS77301DGK TPS77301DGK

FB

RES

OUT2

OUT1

C14

10K-1%-0603

+3.3V

1

2

8

7

V+ 4

LM2767M5 LM2767M5

GND

3 CAP-

2

1 VOUT CAP+ 5

D1 2 U1

EH4 TO MAIN BOARD 1 +5V 2 3 J4 TEMP_FIG +24V 4 HEAT_CDE

2

+3.3V

1 C28

+5V

47 kohm

47K-1%-0603

R27

3.3 kohm

R28

2

2

3K3-1%-0603

6.8kohm

+3.3V

GND

6K8-1%-0603

R29

1uF-16V-0603

C24 2 1

10uF

GND

GND

TESTPOINT S1751-46

CM415-32.768KHz

TESTPOINT S1751-46

1

GND

14 13 12 11 10 9 8

2

1 C21

TP2

R30

GND

1 20 kohm

2 1

1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 20K-1%-0603

2

22pF-50V-0603

DGND SHIELDEN C B A LEVEL LPCAP ROSC VDDCAP VPWR VCCCAP 100R-1%-0603

U2

1nF-16V-0603

2 100 ohm

1

22pF 50V

2

1 10 kohm

2

E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1 TEST GND SHIELD AGND

2K2-1%-0603

C18

2

GND

Q4 BC817

R18

100nF-16V-0603

1 C20

47uF 6V3

GND

GND

Q2 BC817

GND

+

1 2.2kohm

22pF-50V-0603 C29

23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13

1

2.2kohm

2

2

R21

GND

R19

R32 GND 4K7-1%-0603 1 4.7kohm 2

GND

4.7kohm

4K7-1%-0603

R31

Q3 BC817

1 2K2-1%-0603 2K2-1%-0603

2 1

2.2kohm

2

1 2.2kohm

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN 2

BAS516

GND

+5V

PH5 TO MAIN BOARD 1 +5V 2 NC 3 J2 START SCAN 4 LEVEL DETECT 5 GND

Electric and electronic principles Level detection

2K2-1%-0603

Electric and electronic principles Level detection

Voltage measurements on the reagent level detection board To check the needle excitation frequency: ■ Disconnect

the reagent needle (J1). [The position of the reagent arm and needle is unimportant.]

■ Use

a multimeter (frequency measurement function) and plug it in between J1 and ground (TP2): - put the multimeter in frequency position and check the frequency: it must be about 240 KHz (±10%). - put the multimeter in alternating voltage position and check the voltage: it must be about 100 mV (±10%).

To check the detection functioning (voltage at U2 output and U3 input): ■ Disconnect

the reagent needle (J1). [The position of the reagent arm and needle is unimportant.]

■ Use

a multimeter (direct voltage position) and plug it in between TP1 and TP2. - The voltage must be about 2.8 V (±10%).

■ Reconnect

the reagent needle (J1) and check the voltage again [The position of the reagent arm and needle is unimportant.]: - The voltage must be about 0 V (< 0.5 V).

■ Disconnect

the heating needle connector (J5).

On air: ■ Place

the reagent arm in "Wash tower position" (above the wash tower).

■ Plug

a multimeter in between TP1 and TP2 then check the voltage: - The voltage must be about 1.9 V (±10%).

On water: ■ Place

the reagent arm in "Low Position in Wash" (in the reagent wash tower).

■ Plug

a multimeter in between TP1 and TP2 then check the voltage: - The voltage must be about 1.7 V (±10%).

■

4 - 24

Make sure that the difference between the measurement on air and the measurement on water is higher than 0.1 V.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Electric and electronic principles Sample relay board XAA491CS (1209109491)

4. Sample relay board XAA491CS (1209109491) The sample relay board is located on the sample tray.

To Tube Detector

To Sample Barcode

To J36 on Mother Board

The sample relay board supplies and transmits information from tube detector (J3), barcode reader (J5), tube height (not connected J4) and cover LED supply (J2) sensors. Reflexion sensor Supply and

J3 info transmission Tube presence

J4 Supply and

info transmission Tube height detection Supply and info transmission

J1 sensors to instrument mother board

LED J2

Supply Cover LED

Supply and

J5 info transmission Barcode reader 51123

Barcode reader SAMPLE RELAY BOARD

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

4 - 25

Electric and electronic principles Sample relay board XAA491CS (1209109491)

FACTORY CONFIGURATION:

4 - 26

Jumper E1 E1 (Default)

Pin 2 J3 = 0 Pin 2 J3 = 1

Jumper setting Short 1 - 2 Open

Jumper E2 (Default) E2

Pin 2 J4 = 0 Pin 2 J4 = 1

Jumper setting Short 1 - 2 Open

WL 160

WL 150

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Electric and electronic principles Pressure board (kit ref. 1300015280)

5. Pressure board (kit ref. 1300015280) The pressure board is located behind the syringe block. To Sample pressure sensor

TP6 (ground)

To Reagent pressure sensor

To J67 on Mother Board

TP3

R16 3.8 V

The pressure board detects fibrin presence or blockage on the sample needle and blockage on the reagent needle. After a gain and an offset calibration, the board, according to the pressure on the sensor, digitizes the analogic signal and sends the digitized information to the instrument mother board.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

4 - 27

Electric and electronic principles Pressure board (kit ref. 1300015280)

Amplification and gain adjustment Pressure sensor Sample needle To ADC µP AN1

P

J1

Offset adjustment with EEPOT Microprocessor 16F873

Amplification and gain adjustment

SPI link to mother board

J3

Pressure sensor Reagent needle To ADC µP AN0

P

J2

Offset adjustment with EEPOT

Pressure board

4 - 28

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Electric and electronic principles Internal computer 1300013734

6. Internal computer 1300013734

MOTHER BOARD

To servo-controls

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

4 - 29

Electric and electronic principles Power supply

7. Power supply

Two power supply references are available depending on the instrument you have: ■ DBN007E (1202165007) for ABX Pentra 400 with an instrument serial number below 4000 and Pentra C400 with an instrument serial number below 112 ■ DBN007F (1202166007) for ABX Pentra 400 since instrument serial number 4000 and Pentra C400 since instrument serial number 112 The instrument power supply is an AC/DC converter, extensive range input, 8 outputs with power of 450 W maximum. It provides electrical requirements to the entire instrument except for the cooling unit (independently connected to the receptacle). All cables are provided with power supply except the TTL flat cable. MOTHER BOARD J53 + 24 V

POWER SUPPLY FAN

VCC +5V

10

-5V

J1

2

TB1

+ 5 V, + 12 V, GND

GND

+ 24 V

V2

DAC011A (OR DAC012A)

V5-V6: 5/- 5 V 0.5 A V7: 0/5.1/5.6 V 6.6 A V8: 12 V 1.5 A

N=2

DZZ039A

Heat Room_Cde

FUSES

V4: 0/5 V 7.2 A

J54

PC_On/Off

FILTER

ON/OFF

V3: 5 V 2 A 24

MAIN SUPPLY 50-60 Hz 100-240 Vac 450 VA

TB4

V1

J2 CONTROLE

10 DAD091B

Lamp_On/Off Lamp_Stand by Power Sup_Status

To servo-controls

This table lists the differences between both power supply references. Mark on diagram V1 V2 FUSES

7.1.

DBN007F 24 V 6.25 A 0/24 V 6.25 A T 6.3 A H 250 V

Protection ■ Input: ■ Input

inrush current limitation (≤ 30 A)

fuses: T 6.3 A H 250 V

■ Outputs:

4 - 30

DBN007E 24 V 7 A 0/24 V 6.3 A F 6.3 A 250 V

electronic protection against short circuits

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Electric and electronic principles Power supply

7.2.

Inputs/Outputs connectors

7.2.1. Power outputs Outputs are done via two connectors embedded on the power supply board: ■a

connector with 2 points for the ISE module (CN2)

■a

connector with 24 points for other resources (CN3)

24-point connector (CN3) Output Pin out Function V11 V2

7 and 19 Analyzer 6 and 18 Reaction tray heater Numerical: 3 - analyzer 1 and 13 Computer Analogical: - optical acquisition module 16 - level detection - fibrin detection Analogical: - optical acquisition module 15 - level detection - fibrin detection

V3 V4 V5

V6

V72

2 and 14 Optical bench lamp

V8

4 Backlight LCD 5 - Sense V7 17 + Sense V7 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 20, 21, 22, 23 and 24

Vnominal

Tolerance Imini Inom

+ 24 V

± 6%

M35 P33 - - - -> C33 P44 - - - -> M44 P52 - - - -> V52

J46

P46 - - - -> B46

J50

P50 - - - -> V50 a...h

J43

P43 - - - -> CTN

J66 J16 J14 J57

P66 - - - -> V66 P16 - - - -> M16 P14 - - - -> CH14 P57 - - - -> M57

J39

P39 - - - -> C39

J27 J25 J21 J60

P27 - - - -> E27 P25 - - - -> M25 P21 - - - -> C21 P60 - - - -> M60

J41

P41 - - - -> C41

J51 J29 J49

P51 - - - -> V51 P29 - - - -> C29 P49 - - - -> SW1

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Mixer assy motor DAL029A (1201961029) XY mixer motor home sensor XBA518A (1209111518) Mixing paddle motor assy XBA561D (1209114561) Reaction tray fan XBA533B (1209112533) Reaction tray temperature sensor XBA535BS (1209119535) Reagent tray fans XBA587B (1209111587) Reagent tray temperature sensor XBA535BS (1209119535) Reagent tray fan XBA587B (1209111587) Reagent tray motor XDA820D (1209134820) Reagent tray home sensor XEC186AS (1209179186) Reagent arm rotation motor Reagent arm rotation home sensor XBA518A (1209111518) Optical encoder Sample tray motor XDA871B (1209132871) Sample tray home sensor XBA518A (1209111518) Sample arm rotation motor Sample arm rotation home sensor XBA518A (1209111518) Not used Reagent tray door sensor XBA573A (1209111573) Cover solenoid

4 - 45

4 - 46

CCA071A HRP-4 (JST) Terminals SHR-001T-P0.6 CCA073A

CCA070A HRP-2 (JST) Terminals SHR-001T-P0.6 CCA073A

CCA018A PHR-4 (JST) Terminals AWG 30-24 SPH-002T-P0.5s CCA020A

CCA017A PHR-3 (JST) Terminals AWG 30-24 SPH-002T-P0.5s CCA020A

CCA046A PHR-2 (JST) Terminals AWG 30-24 SPH-002T-P0.5s CCA020A

C21-C29-C33-M35 P35-C39-C41-P57 P60-CH14

M44-B46-V50a-V50b-V50c V50d-V50e-V50f-V50g-V50h V51-V64-V66-V66

P14-P21-P27-P29 P33-P39-P41

P50-P51-P52-P66

P43-P44-P46-P49

CAK029A 5102-8 terminals 5103 CAK008A

CCA060A 6471-5 terminals 4161 CAK061A

CCA072A HRP-8 (JST) terminals SHR-001T-P0.6 CCA073A

CCA044A EHR-6 (JST) Terminals SEH-001T-P0.6 CCA045A

P16-P25

E27

M16-M25

M57-M60

Electric and electronic principles Connectors

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

8.12. XBA513C (1209113513): CABLE, RIGHT CABLE ASSY P400 V1

4-47

8.13. XBA513E (1209115513): CABLE, RIGHT CABLE ASSY

4-48

Electric and electronic principles Connectors

8.14.

XBA514B (1209112514): CABLE, ELECTRO-VALVES

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

4 - 49

Electric and electronic principles Connectors

8.15.

XBA517D (1209114517): CABLE, DET. BOARD CABLE P400

If the arm cable needs to be replaced on an ABX Pentra 400 V1, please order the KIT, STRAND TRANSF.ARM & GUIDES XEC166AS (1209179166). Once you have installed the kit ref. XEC166AS (1209179166) on your instrument, it is not necessary anymore to order the whole kit to replace the arm cable. Please directly order the arm cable ref. XBA517D (1209114517).

4 - 50

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Electric and electronic principles Connectors

8.16.

XBA518A (1209111518): SENSOR, LB TRAY/ARM/MIX/ HANDLER

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

4 - 51

Electric and electronic principles Connectors

8.17.

4 - 52

XBA519A (1209111519): SENSOR, LB+MOT.CABLE ARM/ HANDL.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Electric and electronic principles Connectors

8.18.

XBA520A (1209111520): CABLE, ARMS/HANDLER CABLE

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

4 - 53

Electric and electronic principles Connectors

8.19.

4 - 54

XBA531B (1209112531): PCB, SAMPLE TRAY TUBE DETECTOR

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Electric and electronic principles Connectors

8.20.

XBA532DS (1209119532): SENSOR, RACK LOAD/UNLOAD

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

4 - 55

Electric and electronic principles Connectors

8.21.

4 - 56

XBA533B (1209112533): FAN, REACTION TRAY FAN

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Electric and electronic principles Connectors

8.22.

XBA534C (1209113534): HEATER, REACTION TRAY

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

4 - 57

Electric and electronic principles Connectors

8.23.

4 - 58

XBA535BS (1209119535): SENSOR, REAGENT & REACTION TEMP.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Electric and electronic principles Connectors

8.24.

XBA536A (1209111536): SENSOR, REACT.TRAY HOME SENSOR

When the reaction tray is in home position: ■ the voltage between Pin 1 and 3 should be 5 V ■ the voltage between Pin 2 and 4 should be 1.27 V

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

4 - 59

Electric and electronic principles Connectors

8.25.

4 - 60

XBA543A (3012277056): CABLE, PREAMP.TO MAIN BOARD ISE

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Electric and electronic principles Connectors

8.26.

XBA544C (1209113544): VALVE, ISE VALVE ASSY

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

4 - 61

Electric and electronic principles Connectors

8.27.

4 - 62

XBA545B (1209112545): CABLE, ISE SYR. LB CABLE

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Electric and electronic principles Connectors

8.28.

XBA551A (1209111551): PCB, SAMPLE TRAY LED

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

4 - 63

Electric and electronic principles Connectors

8.29.

4 - 64

XBA561D (1209114561): MIXER, MIXING PADDLE MOTOR ASSY

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Electric and electronic principles Connectors

8.30.

XBA563ET (1209119563): NEEDLE, SAMPLE P400 W FERRITE

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

4 - 65

Electric and electronic principles Connectors

8.31.

4 - 66

XBA564DT (1209119564): NEEDLE, REAGENT NEEDLE

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Electric and electronic principles Connectors

8.32.

XBA571A (1209111571): CABLE, LEVEL DETECT TANKS

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

4 - 67

Electric and electronic principles Connectors

8.33.

4 - 68

XBA572A (1209111572): SENSOR, ROOM TEMP.SENSOR

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Electric and electronic principles Connectors

8.34.

XBA573A (1209111573): SENSOR, REAG.TRAY DOOR SENSOR

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

4 - 69

Electric and electronic principles Connectors

8.35.

4 - 70

XBA587B (1209111587): FAN, REAGENT TRAY FAN L=400

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Electric and electronic principles Connectors

8.36.

XBA588A (1209111588): CABLE, NEEDLE PRESS.CABLE

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

4 - 71

Electric and electronic principles Connectors

8.37.

4 - 72

XBA601BS (1209119601): PCB, PC WAKE UP BUTTON

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Electric and electronic principles Connectors

8.38.

XBA732AS (1209119732): CABLE, WASTE PUMP ADAPTOR/V1

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

4 - 73

Electric and electronic principles Connectors

8.39.

XBA734AS (1209119734): CABLE, ADAP NEW RACK SENSOR /V1

8.40.

XBA756AS (1209119756): CABLE, ADAP OLD RACK SENSOR

4 - 74

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Electric and electronic principles Connectors

8.41.

XBA814A (1209111814): CABLE, INNER ARM CABLE

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

4 - 75

Electric and electronic principles Connectors

8.42.

4 - 76

XBA815A (1209111815): CABLE, REAG MOTOR ADAPTOR CABLE

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Electric and electronic principles Connectors

8.43.

XBA847AT (1209119847): NEEDLE, SAMPLE PC400

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

4 - 77

Electric and electronic principles Connectors

8.44.

4 - 78

XDA820D (1209134820): MOTOR, REAGENT TRAY MOTOR

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Electric and electronic principles Connectors

8.45.

XDA871B (1209132871): MOTOR, SAMPLE TRAY MOTOR ASSY

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

4 - 79

Electric and electronic principles Connectors

8.46.

4 - 80

XEC186AS (1209179186): SENSOR, REAG. TRAY HOME SENSOR

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Electric and electronic principles Connectors

8.47.

XEC202AS (1209179202): PUMP, WATER ASSY + METAL SHEET

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

4 - 81

Electric and electronic principles Instrument synoptic

9. Instrument synoptic See synoptic diagrams at the end of this section.

4 - 82

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Section 5: Software description

1. Services menu overview............................................................................... 5 - 2 2. Software architecture................................................................................... 5 - 3 2.1. C:\ drive ..................................................................................................................................... 5 - 3 2.2. D:\ drive ..................................................................................................................................... 5 - 5

3. Diagnostics menu description ..................................................................... 5 - 7 3.1. System Parameters ................................................................................................................... 5 - 8 3.2. Tray .......................................................................................................................................... 5 - 10 3.3. Arms......................................................................................................................................... 5 - 12 3.4. Syringe ..................................................................................................................................... 5 - 16 3.5. Cuvette Changer...................................................................................................................... 5 - 17 3.6. Barcode Test ........................................................................................................................... 5 - 19 3.7. Spectro .................................................................................................................................... 5 - 19 3.8. Heating..................................................................................................................................... 5 - 20 3.9. Sensors .................................................................................................................................... 5 - 20 3.10. Pressure................................................................................................................................. 5 - 21 3.11. ISE.......................................................................................................................................... 5 - 21 3.12. Repeatability .......................................................................................................................... 5 - 22

4. Initialization phases .................................................................................... 5 - 25

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

5-1

Software description Services menu overview

1. Services menu overview Main menu

Worklist menu*

Calibration/Control menu*

Result Validation menu*

Services menu*

Archives menu*

Quality control menu*

Services menu Logs menu*  Calibration  Applications  Reagent  Sequencing  Error  Maintenance  System configuration

Application Configuration menu*  Applications  Ratio  Profiles  Incompatibility  Reagents (only for Sales and Manufacturer)

Customer Services menu*  Cycles  ISE  Analyser  Barcode  Test Counter (available on request)

System Configuration menu*  Analyser  Audible alarm  Local Settings  Maintenance  Host Connection  Users  Printer  Channel configuration (only for Sales)  Results validation

Diagnostics menu**  System Parameters  Spectro  Tray  Heating  Arms  Sensors  Syringe  Pressure  Cuvette Changer  ISE  Repeatability  Barcode Test

* Please refer to your user manual for more detailed information. ** See 3. Diagnostics menu description, page 5-7 for more detailed information.

5-2

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Software description Software architecture

2. Software architecture The instrument hard drive contains two partitions: the C:\ drive and the D:\ drive.

2.1.

C:\ drive

Windows and the instrument software are installed on the C:\ drive. During the software version installation, the instrument software is installed on C:\Program Files\P400 Software.

The following table describes the most important files of the P400 Software folder. Folder

File

Exe

ComProcess.exe

Exe

ComSil.exe

Exe

Manitou.exe

Exe

Asp400.ini

Exe

Ihm.exe

Purpose Management of communication between the computer software and the embedded software. Launched during instrument start up. Management of communication with the Host. Launched during instrument start up. Main process. Launched during instrument start up. Main parameters. Launched during instrument start up. Management of user interface. Launched during instrument start up.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

5-3

Software description Software architecture

Folder Exe Exe Exe Exe Exe Exe Exe Exe Exe Exe Exe Exe Exe Exe data data

File

Purpose Available language dictionary. Pentra400.mld Launched during instrument start up. Management of printout. Printer.exe Launched during instrument start up. Sil.ini Configuration of communication with the Host (speed, parity, ...). GridParams.ini Column configuration (column order and size). Embedded software update. BinLoader.exe Only used during the software version update. Database update. MajP400.exe Only used during the software version update. traceCom.log Host communication log file. Error.log Process log file. Spectrophotometer initialization log file (light stability check, black Spectro.log intensity measurement, ...). Log file of cuvette absorbance measurements, cuvette cleanness ReacTray.log check, loading/unloading of cuvette segments. Barcode readings log file (racks and tubes). Barcod.log Only for the sample tray. ISEState.log ISE module status log file (not initialized, sleeping, ...). ActionUtilisateur.log User action log file. Patient data pass through this folder during the communication with Rs_Data the Host. Asp400bd.mdb Database. HORIBA Medical applications database. methodes.mdb User channels are saved in the database. Updated during the Reagent applications installation.

The following folders are also present in the P400 Software folder.

5-4

- Help

Help files (user manual and reagent notices/MSDS).

- Images

Software pictures.

- Son

Sound files of the sound alarms.

- Tasks

Empty folder.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Software description Software architecture

2.2.

D:\ drive

During the software version installation, the Backup folder is created on the D:\ drive.

The following table describes the files of the Backup folder. Folder -

-

-

-

User

File

Purpose Results archive file. Archive_N°.mdb Created at the instrument start up every six months or when at least 100000 results are saved in the database. Database backup copy. Backup_N°_Version_ Saved at each creation of a new worklist. Asp400bd.mdb Up to eight databases are saved and numbered from the most recent to the oldest. Beyond this number, the oldest is suppressed. Backup copy of the instrument parameters (motor adjustments, ...). When you close the Diagnostics menu, the instrument will ask you: Backup_Date_Time_ "Do you want to save parameters?" If you press OK, the backup copy ParamOS9_Version.bin is created (not necessary if you did not modify the instrument parameters). Last backup copy of the instrument parameters (motor adjustments, ParamOS9.bin ...). Backup_Date_Time_ Database backup copy. Asp400bd.mdb Saved at each software version update. Backup copy of the client parameters (database, system configuration, column configuration, ...). Created using the Save client parameters function from the System Date_Time_Serial # Configuration menu (Services > System Configuration > Local Settings).

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

5-5

Software description Software architecture

Folder Restore

File

Purpose Empty folder. Temporary folder necessary for using the Restore database and Restore client parameters functions from the System Configuration menu (Services > System Configuration > Local Settings).

You can also find a Bugs folder on the D:\ drive. This folder contains backup copies of the database and the Error.log file, created when a "GeneralException" error appears. When the Bugs folder contains a lot of files, software slowness can appear. It is therefore advisable to suppress these files.

5-6

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Software description Diagnostics menu description

3. Diagnostics menu description Go to Services > Diagnostics.

The Diagnostics menu is divided into 12 tabs: ■ 3.1.

System Parameters, page 5-8

■ 3.2.

Tray, page 5-10

■ 3.3.

Arms, page 5-12

■ 3.4.

Syringe, page 5-16

■ 3.5.

Cuvette Changer, page 5-17

■ 3.6.

Barcode Test, page 5-19

■ 3.7.

Spectro, page 5-19

■ 3.8.

Heating, page 5-20

■ 3.9.

Sensors, page 5-20

■ 3.10.

Pressure, page 5-21

■ 3.11.

ISE, page 5-21

■ 3.12.

Repeatability, page 5-22.

Press one of the tabs to access the various functions.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

5-7

Software description Diagnostics menu description

■ Closing

the Diagnostics menu, the instrument turns to "Emergency Stop" status. Then, you have to press Startup to reinitialize the instrument. ■ When you run a cycle from the Diagnostics menu, you must always wait for the end of the cycle before running another cycle or pressing a new tab. Recommendations for use: adjust a position by changing the number of steps for this position: - enter the number of steps in the Target field and press Check Position OR - use the + and - buttons. ■ To validate and save the new adjustment value for this position, press Check Home then check the position again (press Check Position). ■ To

3.1.

System Parameters

The System Parameters tab summarizes the instrument parameters (motor adjustments, ...) modifiable by the technician. This tab allows you to print, modify, save and restore these instrument parameters. Moreover, this first tab gives access to the Windows Explorer.

3.1.1. Instrument parameters The following instrument parameters are displayed: ■ Motor

adjustments modifiable by the technician

■ Calibration ■ NTC

factors A and B of the sample and reagent pressure sensors

value for the reaction tray chamber.

Use the slider to display all data.

Print the instrument parameters

Press Data Print/Send to Host from the generic toolbar to print the list of instrument parameters displayed in the System Parameters tab.

Modify the instrument parameters The System Parameters tab opens in Display mode. In this mode, the instrument parameters are not modifiable. Press Edit to access modification function. After modification of one or several parameters, press OK to validate. ■ Only

the motor adjustments are modifiable from the System Parameters tab. calibration factors A and B of the sample and reagent pressure sensors and the NTC value for the reaction tray chamber are not modifiable from this tab; they are respectively modifiable from the Pressure and Heating tabs.

■ The

5-8

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Software description Diagnostics menu description

Save the instrument parameters

Press Export to save the instrument parameters.

■ The

following window is displayed:

The instrument parameters are saved: - on hard disk, by default - on USB flash drive, if selected. Press OK. ■ When

the message "Export successfully completed" is displayed, press OK.

Restore the instrument parameters

Press Import to restore a backup copy of the instrument parameters.

The backup copies of the instrument parameters are created when you close the Diagnostics menu and answer OK at the question: "Do you want to save parameters?" (not necessary if you did not modify the instrument parameters).

■ The

following window is displayed:

The last backup copy of the instrument parameters (D:\Backup\ParamOS9.bin) is submitted by default. If necessary, press Restore File to choose another backup copy of the instrument parameters. Then, press OK. ■ When

the message "Restore successful" is displayed, press OK.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

5-9

Software description Diagnostics menu description

3.1.2. Windows Explorer

■ Press

the Windows Explorer button to open the Windows Explorer. Diagnostics menu.

■ The Windows Explorer is automatically closed when you close the

3.2.

Tray

The Tray tab groups the functions concerning the three trays of the instrument: - Reagent tray - Sample tray - Reaction tray.

For each tray (reagent, sample and reaction), the following functions are available: Heading

Home

Offset

Sector/Position

5 - 10

Format

Description If the tray is at its home position, the light is green. - Reagent tray: sector 36 in front of the yellow arrow. Colored - Reaction tray: sector 1, cuvette segment position 1 in front of the square light beam. If not, the light is red. The light is gray when the tray position is unknown. Offset value (in number of steps). Field See Ranges of adjustment values for the tray positions, page 5-11. - Reagent tray: Tray sector (1 to 52) + Rack type. - Sample tray: Tray sector (1 to 6) / Rack position (1 to 10). Scrolling lists - Reaction tray: Tray sector (1 to 6) / Cuvette segment position (1 to 12).

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Software description Diagnostics menu description

Heading Reagent Position Target Target Check Home Check Position

+/Motor Off

Format

Description Only for the reagent tray. Scrolling lists Reagent rack or calibrator/control reagent rack position. Scrolling list List of the tray positions. Adjustment value (in number of steps) for the selected position. Field See Ranges of adjustment values for the tray positions, page 5-11. Button Moves the selected tray to its home position. Moves the selected tray to the position chosen in the Target Button scrolling list. Increase/Decrease the adjustment value for the position chosen in the Target scrolling list. Buttons - If you click once, the selected tray moves 1/4 of a step. - If you hold the button down, the selected tray moves step by step. Button The selected tray motor is turned off.

Other functionalities: ■

The CAB auto reader adjustment function is used to automatically adjust the reagent tray for the Reagent Bar Code Reader Position position. To use this function, please refer to the Reagent tray procedure. See RAS380: Reagent tray, page 1.

■ The

Segment function is used to load/unload cuvette segments into the reaction tray: - automatically using the Load and Unload buttons - manually using the Forward button.

Ranges of adjustment values for the tray positions Reagent tray Position Offset (not modifiable) Reagent Bar Code Reader Position Central Loading Reagent Position R1 Pos.- Reagent Rack for Sample Arm R2 Pos.- Reagent Rack for Sample Arm R3 Pos.- Reagent Rack for Sample Arm R1 Pos.- Cal/Ctrl Rack for Sample Arm R2 Pos.- Cal/Ctrl Rack for Sample Arm R3 Pos.- Cal/Ctrl Rack for Sample Arm R1 Pos.- Cassette for Sample Arm R2 Pos.- Cassette for Sample Arm R1 Pos.- Reagent Rack for Reagent Arm R2 Pos.- Reagent Rack for Reagent Arm R3 Pos.- Reagent Rack for Reagent Arm R1 Pos.- Cassette for Reagent Arm R2 Pos.- Cassette for Reagent Arm

Default value 160 11711 25870 35360 35358 35436 35492 35469 35520 35496 35576 36336 36778 37479 36361 37824

Min. value 160 10000 23200 33000 33000 33000 33000 33000 33000 33000 33000 34000 34000 35000 34000 35000

Max. value 160 14000 26500 38000 38000 38000 38000 38000 38000 38000 38000 39000 39000 40000 39000 41000

Default value 80 316 3859 18568 40

Min. value 80 0 3400 18100 0

Max. value 80 5000 4400 19000 19200

Sample tray Position Offset (not modifiable) Sample Bar code reader Position Sample Tube Detector Position External Sampling Pos. Internal Sampling Pos.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

5 - 11

Software description Diagnostics menu description

Reaction tray Position Offset Mixing Position Reagent Arm Position Sample Arm Position (not modifiable) Automatic Loading Handling Position

3.3.

Default value 150 4755 948 0 8900 19002

Min. value 50 4000 500 0 8500 18500

Max. value 200 5000 1300 0 9300 19900

Arms

The Arms tab groups the functions concerning the reagent and sample arms as the mixer.

5 - 12

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Software description Diagnostics menu description

3.3.1. Reagent and sample arms functions For the reagent and sample arms, the following functions are available: Heading

VERTICAL

Home

Offset Position Position Automatic adjustment

ROTATION

Home

Offset Position Position Level detection

Shock Detection Check Home Check Position

+/Motor Off

Format

Description If the arm is at its vertical home position (upper position), the light is Colored green. square If not, the light is red. The light is gray when the arm vertical position is unknown. Offset value (in number of steps). Field See Range of adjustment values for the arm positions, page 5-13. Scrolling list List of the arm vertical positions. Adjustment value (in number of steps) for the selected position. Field See Range of adjustment values for the arm positions, page 5-13. This function is used to automatically adjust the arm vertical Function positions. To use this function, please refer to the Arms procedure. See RAS385: Arms, page 1. If the arm is at its rotation home position (cuvette position), the light Colored is green. square If not, the light is red. The light is gray when the arm rotation position is unknown. Offset value (in number of steps). Field See Range of adjustment values for the arm positions, page 5-13. Scrolling list List of the arm rotation positions. Adjustment value (in number of steps) for the selected position. Field See Range of adjustment values for the arm positions, page 5-13. This function is used to check the level detection. To use this Colored function, please refer to the Arms procedure. See RAS385: Arms, square page 1. Only for the sample arm. Colored This function is used to check the shock detection. To use this square function, please refer to the Arms procedure. See RAS385: Arms, page 1. Button Moves the selected arm to its vertical/rotation home position. Moves the selected arm to the position chosen in the Position Button scrolling list. Increase/Decrease the adjustment value for the position chosen in the Position scrolling list. Buttons - If you click once, the selected arm moves 1/4 of a step. - If you hold the button down, the selected arm moves step by step. Button The selected arm motor is turned off.

Range of adjustment values for the arm positions Reagent arm - Vertical Position Offset (not modifiable) Low Position in Reaction Tray Low Position in Wash Tower Low Position in Reagent/Cal/Ctrl Rack Low Position in Cassette

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Default value 128 12070 12600 13383 14399

Min. value 128 11300 12000 11000 13500

Max. value 128 12700 12800 14800 14800

5 - 13

Software description Diagnostics menu description

Reagent arm - Rotation Position Offset (not modifiable) Cuvette Position (not modifiable) Wash Tower Position R1 Pos. - Reagent Rack R2 Pos. - Reagent Rack R3 Pos. - Reagent Rack R1 on Cassette R2 on Cassette

Default value 165 0 1270 2211 2600 2982 2068 3084

Min. value 165 0 500 1500 2000 2400 1500 2500

Max. value 165 0 2000 2700 3100 3500 2600 3600

Default value 128 15386 8300 6936 13912 16642 17608 4000 15010

Min. value 128 14500 8000 5500 13000 14700 16500 3000 14500

Max. value 128 15800 8700 7700 15000 17400 18000 6000 16000

Default value 150 0 521 1487 1711 1888 1425 1612 1825 1397 1927 2450 2708 4383

Min. value 150 0 200 1200 1500 1700 1200 1400 1600 1200 1700 2200 2500 4000

Max. value 150 0 800 1700 1900 2100 1600 1800 2000 1600 2100 2600 2900 4500

Sample arm - Vertical Position Offset (not modifiable) Low Position in Cuvette Low Position in Wash Tower Low Position in Sample Cup Low Position in Sample Tube Low Position in Reagent rack Low Position in Cassette Low Position in ISE Tower Low position CalCs on reagent tray Sample arm - Rotation Position Offset (not modifiable) Cuvette Position (not modifiable) Wash Tower Position R1 Pos. - Reagent Rack R2 Pos. - Reagent Rack R3 Pos. - Reagent Rack R1 Pos.- Cal/Ctrl Rack R2 Pos.- Cal/Ctrl Rack R3 Pos.- Cal/Ctrl Rack R1 on Cassette R2 on Cassette External Sample Internal Sample ISE Sample

5 - 14

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Software description Diagnostics menu description

3.3.2. Mixer functions For the mixer, the following functions are available: Heading Home

Offset Position Position Automatic adjustment Check Home Check Position +/Motor Off

Format

Description If the mixer is at its home position (wash tower position), the light is Colored green. square If not, the light is red. The light is gray when the mixer position is unknown. Offset value (in number of steps). Field See Range of adjustment values for the mixer positions, page 5-15. Scrolling list List of the mixer positions. Adjustment value (in number of steps) for the selected position. Field See Range of adjustment values for the mixer positions, page 5-15. This function is used to automatically adjust the mixer vertical Function positions. To use this function, please refer to the Mixer procedure. See RAS386: Mixer, page 1. Button Moves the mixer to its home position. Button Moves the mixer to the position chosen in the Position scrolling list. Increase/Decrease the adjustment value for the position chosen in the Position scrolling list. Buttons - If you click once, the selected arm moves 1/4 of a step. - If you hold the button down, the selected arm moves step by step. Button The mixer motor is turned off.

Range of adjustment values for the mixer positions Position Offset Above Reaction Tray Cuvette

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Default value 400 9656 13728

Min. value 400 8900 13200

Max. value 500 10200 14300

5 - 15

Software description Diagnostics menu description

3.4.

Syringe

The Syringe tab groups the functions concerning the instrument hydraulic circuit: reagent and sample syringes, waste and water pumps, valves.

For each syringe (reagent and sample), the following functions are available: Heading

Format

Home

Colored square

Offset

Field

Check Home

Button

Description If the syringe is at its home position (upper position), the light is green. If not, the light is red. The light is gray when the syringe position is unknown. Offset value (in number of steps). Not modifiable. Moves the selected syringe to its home position.

The waste and water pumps can be turned on and off by using the corresponding buttons. Moreover, the Water pump output function is used to check the water pump output. To use this function, please refer to the 6 month maintenance procedure. See RAS378: 6 month maintenance, 10. To check the sample needle throughput, page 8. The valves can be opened and closed using the corresponding buttons. Valve V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6

5 - 16

Description Not used. Sample syringe valve. Reagent syringe valve. Mixer wash tower valve. Reagent wash tower valve. Sample wash tower valve. Not used.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Software description Diagnostics menu description

3.5.

Cuvette Changer

The Cuvette Changer tab groups the functions concerning the cuvette changer.

For each cuvette changer motor (vertical motor, horizontal motor, cuvette motion motor), the following functions are available: Heading

VERTICAL

Home

Offset Target Target

HORIZONTAL

Home

Offset Target Target

Format

Description If the grabber is at its vertical home position (upper position), the light is green. If not, the light is red. Colored NOTE: The grabber never stays at its vertical home position, so the square light always stays red. The light is gray if the grabber vertical position is unknown. Offset value (in number of steps). Field See Range of adjustment values for the cuvette changer motor positions, page 5-18. Scrolling list List of the grabber vertical positions. Adjustment value (in number of steps) for the selected position. Field See Range of adjustment values for the cuvette changer motor positions, page 5-18. If the grabber is at its horizontal home position (backward position), Colored the light is green. square If not, the light is red. The light is gray if the grabber horizontal position is unknown. Offset value (in number of steps). Field See Range of adjustment values for the cuvette changer motor positions, page 5-18. Scrolling list List of the grabber horizontal positions. Adjustment value (in number of steps) for the selected position. Field See Range of adjustment values for the cuvette changer motor positions, page 5-18.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

5 - 17

CUVETTE MOTION

Software description Diagnostics menu description

Heading

Format

Home

Colored square

Offset

Field

Check Home

Button

Check Position

Button

+/-

Buttons

Motor Off

Button

Description If the load rack rail is at its home position (lower position), the light is green. If not, the light is red. The light is gray if the load rack rail position is unknown. Offset value (in number of steps). See Range of adjustment values for the cuvette changer motor positions, page 5-18. Moves the grabber to its vertical/horizontal home position or the load rack rail to its home position. Moves the grabber to the position chosen in the Target scrolling list. Increase/Decrease the adjustment value for the position chosen in the Target scrolling list. - If you click once, the grabber moves 1/4 of a step. - If you hold the button down, the grabber moves step by step. The selected motor is turned off.

Other functionalities: ■ The

Segment function is used to load/unload cuvette segments into the reaction tray: - automatically using the Load and Unload buttons - manually using the Forward button.

Range of adjustment values for the cuvette changer motor positions Vertical Position Offset (not modifiable) Used Cuvette Holder Position New Cuvette Holder Position Pause Position Above Reaction Tray Low Position on Reaction Tray

Default value 512 463 44708 75757 102411

Min. value 512 0 40000 71000 98000

Max. value 512 2000 49000 80000 107000

Default value 128 2758 4263 2665 2940

Min. value 128 2300 3700 2000 2100

Max. value 128 3300 4800 3300 3800

Default value 40

Min. value 40

Max. value 40

Horizontal Position Offset (not modifiable) Backward Position in Reaction Tray Load in Reaction Tray Position Taking New Segment Pos Load Used Segment Position Cuvette motion Position Offset (not modifiable)

5 - 18

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Software description Diagnostics menu description

3.6.

Barcode Test

The Barcode Test tab is used to make sure that the reagent and sample barcode readers as well as the sample tube detector are working correctly. To use these functions, please refer to the Reagent tray procedure (see RAS380: Reagent tray, page 1) and the Sample tray procedure (see RAS381: Sample tray, page 1).

3.7.

Spectro

The Spectro tab groups the functions concerning the instrument optical bench and spectrophotometer.

This tab is divided into three subtabs: ■ Spectro

Measure Adjustment

■ Spectro

Settings

■ Spectro

Measurement. Press one of the tabs to access the various functions. The Spectro Measure Adjustment tab is used to adjust the reaction tray home position. To use this function, please refer to the Reaction tray procedure. See RAS382: Reaction tray, 4.3. Home position, page 21. The Spectro Settings and Spectro Measurement tabs are used to check the optical bench and the spectrophotometer. To use these functions, please refer to the Optical bench procedure. See RAS383: Optical bench, 4. Optical bench check, page 31.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

5 - 19

Software description Diagnostics menu description

3.8.

Heating

The Heating tab displays the temperature control values for the reagent needle, the reaction tray chamber and the cooled area of the reagent tray. These parameters are described in the Section 3: Technology, 3.1. PID control, page 3-12.

3.9.

Sensors

The Sensors tab is used to check the state of several instrument sensors.

From the Sensors tab, the following sensors can be checked: Heading Handling cover reagent closed Handling cover reagent locked Handling cover cuvette segment closed Rack used segment in position Rack used segment full New segment available

5 - 20

Description If the reagent cover is closed, the light is green. If not, the light is red. No check available. If the reaction tray door is closed, the light is green. If not, the light is red. If the unload rack of cuvette changer is in position, the light is green. If not, the light is red. If the unload rack of cuvette changer is full, the light is green. If not, the light is red. If a cuvette segment is on the load rack, in position to be loaded by the grabber, the light is green. If not, the light is red.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Software description Diagnostics menu description

Heading Water tank empty Waste tank full Lamp power standby Lamp power full Low liquid level (cooling unit) PC wake up Main cover closed Mixer present Power correct

Description If the water tank is empty, the light is green. If not, the light is red. If the waste tank is full, the light is green. If not, the light is red. No check available. If the lamp is running properly, the light is green. If not, the light is red. If the liquid level in the cooling unit is low, the light is green. If not, the light is red. If the computer wake up push-button is activated, the light is green. If not, the light is red. If the arms main cover is closed, the light is green. If not, the light is red. If the mixer assembly is in position, the light is green. If not, the light is red. If the power supply is running properly, the light is green. If not, the light is red.

To check the state of these sensors, please refer to the Sensors check and adjustment procedure. See RAS394: Sensors check and adjustment, page 1.

3.10.

Pressure

The Pressure tab is used to configure and calibrate the reagent and sample pressure sensors. To use these functions, please refer to the Pressure sensors procedure. See RAS442: Pressure sensors, page 1.

3.11.

ISE

The ISE tab groups the functions concerning the ISE module. This tab is described in the Section 7: ISE module, page 7-1.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

5 - 21

Software description Diagnostics menu description

3.12.

Repeatability

The Repeatability tab is used to perform repeatability cycles on the different instrument mechanical assemblies to verify that these mechanical assemblies are functioning properly. Repeatability cycles can be performed on the following mechanical assemblies: - Sample arm (vertical and rotation movements) - Reagent arm (vertical and rotation movements) - Mixer - Reagent syringe - Sample syringe - Reaction tray - Reagent tray - Sample tray - Cuvette changer (vertical and horizontal movements, cuvette motion movement). Each repeatability cycle performs a series of back and forth movements between the home position and several target positions of the mechanical assembly. Before performing a repeatability cycle, make sure that there is no mechanical assembly in the way of the mechanical assembly to be checked and move the mechanical assembly to be checked to its home position: ■ Place the reagent arm in low position in wash tower before moving the sample arm. ■ Move the sample arm to its upper position (vertical home position) before moving the reagent arm. ■ Move the sample and reagent arms to their upper positions (vertical home positions) before performing rotation movements. ■ Move the sample and reagent arms to their upper positions (vertical home positions) before moving any tray. ■ Make sure that the mixer paddle and the cuvette changer grabber are not in low position in the reaction tray before moving the reaction tray. ■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Arms.

■ Move the sample arm, then the reagent arm to its home ■ Move ■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Syringe.

■ Move ■ Go

the reagent and sample syringes to their home positions.

to Services > Diagnostics > Tray.

■ Move ■ Go

position (vertical and rotation home positions).

the mixer to its home position.

the reagent, sample and reaction trays to their home positions.

to Services > Diagnostics > Cuvette Changer.

■ Move

each cuvette changer motor (vertical motor, horizontal motor, cuvette motion motor) to its home position.

5 - 22

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Software description Diagnostics menu description

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Repeatability.

A B

E D

C

■ Select

the mechanical assembly in the Element scrolling list (A).

■ Enter

the number of repeatability cycles (from 2 to 50) in the Number of repetitions field (B).

■ Press

Start (C).

■ The

following message will appear: "This action can damage the mechanic. Could you confirm this action?"

■ Press

Yes.

During the repeatability cycle, the following information is displayed in the Statistics part (D): Heading Number of remaining cycles Number of results Standard Deviation

Description Number of remaining cycles. Number of rendered results. Standard deviation calculated for all the rendered results.

After the repeatability cycle, the results are displayed in the Statistics/Position table (E). Heading Position Number of results Standard deviation Coefficient of variation

Description Values in 1/16 of a step of the reached positions during the repeatability cycle. Number of rendered results per position. Standard deviation calculated for the rendered results per position. Coefficient of variation calculated for the rendered results per position.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

5 - 23

Software description Diagnostics menu description

Target positions per mechanical assembly Mechanical assembly Vertical sample arm

Rotation sample arm

Vertical reagent arm

Rotation reagent arm Mixer

Reagent syringe

Sample syringe

Reaction tray

Reagent tray

Sample tray

Up and down cuvettes

Translator cuvettes Lambada cuvettes

Target positions (functional position, volume or 16th of steps) - Low position in reaction tray - Low position in wash tower - Low position in cassette on reagent tray - Low position in ISE mix cup - Wash tower - R1 on cassette - Internal sample - ISE mix cup - Low position in reaction tray - Low position in wash tower - Low position in cassette on reagent tray - Wash tower - R1 on cassette - R2 on cassette - Above reaction tray - Cuvette - 150 µL - 300 µL - 450 µL - 600 µL - 25 µL - 50 µL - 75 µL - 95 µL - 10080 (1/4 of turn) - 20160 (1/2 of turn) - 30240 (3/4 of turn) - 40000 (~ 1 turn) - 10000 (1/4 of turn) - 20000 (1/2 of turn) - 30000 (3/4 of turn) - 39000 (~ 1 turn) - 4800 (1/4 of turn) - 9600 (1/2 of turn) - 14400 (3/4 of turn) - 19100 (~ 1 turn) - Used cuvette holder position - New cuvette holder position - Pause position above reaction tray - Low position on reaction tray - Backward position in reaction tray - Load in reaction tray position - 400 (1/4 of turn) - 800 (1/2 of turn) - 1200 (3/4 of turn)

You can save the number of repeatability cycles as follows: the number of repeatability cycles directly in the Number of repetitions field. ■ Press Back to exit from the Repeatability tab. ■ When the message "Exit without saving?" appears, press Cancel. ■ Type

5 - 24

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Software description Initialization phases

4. Initialization phases This section describes the different phases of the instrument initialization. If an error appears during these phases, a warning or an alarm is triggered. See Section 6: Troubleshooting, page 6-1. 1. Manual or automatic start up ■ Computer

power supply starting

■ Spectrophotometer ■ Heating

lamp starting

starting (reaction tray and reagent needle) and temperature regulation

2. ■ Boot

of the computer

■ Launch

of Windows

3. Launch of instrument software ■ Electronic

key check (standard instrument or extended configuration)

4. Computer maintenance ■ Version

check

■ Database

check

■ Language

database check

■ Check

for archive file creation

■ Result

storage capacity check

■ ABX ■ Log

cassette storage capacity check storage capacity check

■ Database

compacting

5. ISE module wake up 6. Synchronization Computer software/Embedded software. ■ Loading

of instrument software modules (COMPROCESS, PRINTER, COMSIL, IHM)

■ Coherence

control between Embedded software version and Computer software version

■ Coherence control between Embedded exchange table version and Computer exchange table version ■ Coherence

control with CPLD version

■ Coherence

control with ISE version

■ Coherence

control with peripherals (CPLD, ISE, barcodes, PIC version)

■ Mechanical

initialization

■ Barcode

configuration

■ Reagent

and sample barcodes reading

■ Spectrophotometer ■ Light ■ Black

gain adjustment and check

stability check (on air) intensity measurement

■ Cuvette

cleanness check

■ Reference ■ Reaction

light intensity measurement (on water-filled cuvette)

tray check (unload/load)

■ Temperature

regulation check

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

5 - 25

Software description Initialization phases

7. Login

5 - 26

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Section 6: Troubleshooting

1. Error messages ............................................................................................. 6 - 2 1.1. System warnings and alarms..................................................................................................... 6 - 2 1.2. Sampling alarms ...................................................................................................................... 6 - 38

2. Troubleshooting .......................................................................................... 6 - 42 2.1. Chemistry problem .................................................................................................................. 2.2. Windows and computer error .................................................................................................. 2.3. Cooling unit.............................................................................................................................. 2.4. What to do if you are having intermittent alarms #066 or 114?............................................... 2.5. Other ........................................................................................................................................

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

6 - 42 6 - 44 6 - 44 6 - 48 6 - 53

6-1

Troubleshooting Error messages

1. Error messages 1.1.

System warnings and alarms System warnings and alarms are listed in the following table. See 1.1.1. List of warnings and alarms, page 6-3. 1. Warnings Warnings are triggered to warn the user but are not blocking the instrument. They are displayed on the Warning tab of the System Warnings menu. When a warning is triggered, the instrument is not stopped but turns to "Ready" status. If a warning appears, follow the instructions given in the following table. See 1.1.1. List of warnings and alarms, page 6-3. 2. Alarms Alarms are blocking the instrument. They are displayed on the Alarm tab of the System Warnings menu.

The Alarm tab is re-set at each start. To access the previous alarms, press CTRL + F8.

When an alarm is triggered, the instrument is stopped and turns to "Emergency Stop" status. If an alarm appears, follow the instructions given in the following table. See 1.1.1. List of warnings and alarms, page 6-3.

6-2

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Code

001

002

003

004

005

006

007

008

009

010

011

012

013

014

015

Level

Warning

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Reagent Syringe Motor Initialization Problem

Sample Syringe Motor Initialization Problem

Mixer Initialization Problem

Reaction Tray Motor Initialization Problem

Reagent Tray Motor Initialization Problem

Sample Tray Motor Initialization Problem

Reagent Rotation Motor Initialization Problem

Reagent Vertical Motor Initialization Problem

Sample Rotation Motor Initialization Problem

Sample Vertical Motor Initialization Problem

Measurement Module Initialization Problem

Temperature Regulation Initialization Problem

Reagent Barcode Reader Initialization Problem

Sample Barcode Reader Initialization Problem

ISE Module Initialization Problem

Message

1.1.1. List of warnings and alarms

Check the ISE module connections and fuse. Check the connector J5 on the sample relay board. Check the connector J4 on the mother board. Reload the embedded software version on the mother board. See RAS517: Software version installation, page 1. Replace the mother board. Check the connectors J1 and J2 on the acquisition board, and the bus.

Instrument/ISE module communication failed. Mother board/sample barcode reader communication failed. Mother board/reagent barcode reader communication failed. Communication failed on PIC of temperature regulation. Mother board/acquisition board communication failed.

Communication failed on PIC of reagent syringe motor.

Communication failed on PIC of sample syringe motor.

Communication failed on PIC of mixer XY motor.

Communication failed on PIC of reaction tray motor.

Communication failed on PIC of sample Reload the embedded software version on the tray motor. mother board. See RAS517: Software version Communication failed on PIC of reagent installation, page 1. Replace the mother board. tray motor.

Communication failed on PIC of reagent arm rotation motor.

Communication failed on PIC of reagent arm vertical motor.

Communication failed on PIC of sample arm rotation motor.

Communication failed on PIC of sample arm vertical motor.

Action

Error type / Description

Troubleshooting Error messages

6-3

6-4

021

Alarm

024

020

Alarm

Alarm

019

Alarm

023

018

Alarm

Alarm

017

Alarm

022

016

Alarm

Alarm

Code

Level

Action

Check the sample arm vertical motion, vertical motor connectors. Sample arm vertical home position is not Check the voltages on the mother board: TP28 reached on time during the initialization. (1 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J59 Pin1-3 (home position 5 V, other 0 V).

motion motor.

Communication failed on PIC of cuvette changer vertical motor. Reload the embedded software version on the Communication failed on PIC of cuvette mother board. See RAS517: Software version installation, page 1. changer horizontal motor. Communication failed on PIC of cuvette Replace the mother board.

Error type / Description

Reagent Tray Motor Reference Position Error

Sample Tray Motor Reference Position Error

Check the reagent arm rotation motion, rotation motor connectors. Check the voltages on the mother board: TP27 (0.6 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J39 Pin1-3 (home position 5 V, other 0 V).

Check the reagent tray motion, motor connectors, home flag adjustment. Reagent tray home position is not Check the voltages on the mother board: TP11 reached on time during the initialization. (1 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J14 Pin1-4 (home position 0 V LED DS5 OFF, other 5 V).

Check the sample tray motion, motor connectors, optical encoder connectors. Sample tray home position is not reached Check the voltages on the mother board: TP14 on time during the initialization. (1 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J21 Pin1-3 (home position 5 V, other 0 V).

Reagent arm rotation home position is Reagent Rotation Motor Reference Position Error not reached on time during the initialization.

Check the reagent arm vertical motion, vertical motor connectors. Reagent arm vertical home position is not Reagent Vertical Motor Reference Position Error Check the voltages on the mother board: TP29 reached on time during the initialization. (1 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J58 Pin1-3 (home position 5 V, other 0 V).

Check the sample arm rotation motion, rotation motor connectors. Sample arm rotation home position is not Sample Rotation Motor Reference Position Error Check the voltages on the mother board: TP30 reached on time during the initialization. (0.6 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J41 Pin1-3 (home position 5 V, other 0 V).

Sample Vertical Motor Reference Position Error

Cuvette Motion Initialization Problem

Cuvette Horizontal Motor Initialization Problem

Cuvette Vertical Motor Initialization Problem

Message

Troubleshooting Error messages

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Code

025

026

027

028

029

030

031

Level

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Action

Mixer home position is not reached on time during the initialization.

Check the mixer XY motion, motor connectors, home flag adjustment. Check the voltages on the mother board: TP16 (0.8 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J33 Pin1-3 (home position 5 V, other 0 V).

Check the reaction tray motion, motor connectors, home flag adjustment. Reaction tray home position is not Check the voltages on the mother board: TP1 reached on time during the initialization. (2 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J12 Pin1-3 (home position 5 V, other 0 V).

Error type / Description

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Cuvette Motion Position Error

Cuvette Horizontal Motor Reference Position Error

Check the cuvette motion, cuvette motion motor connectors. Cuvette motion home position is not Check the voltages on the mother board: TP13 reached on time during the initialization. (0.6 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J37 Pin1-3 (home position 5 V, other 0 V).

Check the cuvette changer horizontal motion, Cuvette changer horizontal home horizontal motor connectors. position is not reached on time during the Check the voltages on the mother board: TP9 initialization. (0.8 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J20 Pin1-3 (home position 5 V, other 0 V).

Check the cuvette changer vertical motion, vertical motor connectors. Cuvette changer vertical home position is Check the voltages on the mother board: TP6 Cuvette Vertical Motor Reference Position Error not reached on time during the (1.2 V ± 50 mV), home sensor (top) on J17 Pin1-3 initialization. (home position 5 V, other 0 V), position detector (bottom) on J61 Pin1-3 (low position 5 V, other 0 V).

Reagent Syringe Reference Position Error

Check the reagent syringe, the reagent syringe Reagent syringe home position is not motion, motor connectors. reached on time during the initialization. Check the voltages on the mother board: TP2 (1.2 V ± 50 mV), home sensor switch on J2.

Check the sample syringe, the sample syringe Sample syringe home position is not motion, motor connectors. Sample Syringe Motor Reference Position Error reached on time during the initialization. Check the voltages on the mother board: TP7 (1 V ± 50 mV), home sensor switch on J9.

Mixer Initialization Problem

Reaction Tray Motor Reference Position Error

Message

Troubleshooting Error messages

6-5

6-6

038

Alarm

035

Alarm

037

034

Alarm

Alarm

033

Alarm

036

032

Alarm

Alarm

Code

Level

Reaction Tray Position Error

Reagent Tray Position Error

Sample Tray Position Error

Reagent Rotation Motor Position Error

Reagent Vertical Motor Position Error

Sample Rotation Position Error

Sample Vertical Position Error

Message

Action

Check the reaction tray motion, motor connectors, Reaction tray home position is not home flag adjustment. reached with the acceptable motor Check the voltages on the mother board: TP1 number of steps during the initialization. (2 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J12 Pin1-3 (home position 5 V, other 0 V).

Check the reagent tray motion, motor connectors, Reagent tray home position is not home flag adjustment. reached with the acceptable motor Check the voltages on the mother board: TP11 number of steps during the initialization. (1 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J14 Pin1-4 (home position 0 V LED DS5 OFF, other 5 V).

Check the sample tray motion, motor connectors, Sample tray home position is not reached optical encoder connectors. with the acceptable motor number of Check the voltages on the mother board: TP14 steps during the initialization. (1 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J21 Pin1-3 (home position 5 V, other 0 V).

Check the reagent arm rotation motion, rotation Reagent arm rotation home position is motor connectors. not reached with the acceptable motor Check the voltages on the mother board: TP27 number of steps (error > 1/2 offset) during (0.6 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J39 Pin1-3 (home the initialization. position 5 V, other 0 V).

Check the reagent arm vertical motion, vertical Reagent arm vertical home position is not motor connectors. reached with the acceptable motor Check the voltages on the mother board: TP29 number of steps (error > 1/2 offset) during (1 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J58 Pin1-3 (home the initialization. position 5 V, other 0 V).

Check the sample arm rotation motion, rotation Sample arm rotation home position is not motor connectors. reached with the acceptable motor Check the voltages on the mother board: TP30 number of steps (error > 1/2 offset) during (0.6 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J41 Pin1-3 (home the initialization. position 5 V, other 0 V).

Check the sample arm vertical motion, vertical Sample arm vertical home position is not motor connectors. reached with the acceptable motor Check the voltages on the mother board: TP28 number of steps (error > 1/2 offset) during (1 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J59 Pin1-3 (home the initialization. position 5 V, other 0 V).

Error type / Description

Troubleshooting Error messages

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Code

039

040

041

042

043

044

045

Level

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Alarm

Alarm

Shock Detection Stop

Cuvette Changer Problem: Moving Forward

Cuvette Horizontal Motor Position Error

Cuvette Vertical Motor Position Error

Reagent Syringe Position Error

Sample Syringe Position Error

Mixer Position Error

Message

Action

Check the sample needle alignment, the sample arm cover. Shock detection switch (SW1) of sample Check the voltage on the sample level detection arm is ON during the initialization. board: shock detection switch on J2 Pin2-5 (ON 0 V, OFF 5 V).

Check the cuvette motion, cuvette motion motor Cuvette motion home position is not connectors. reached with the acceptable motor Check the voltages on the mother board: TP13 number of steps during the initialization. (0.6 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J37 Pin1-3 (home position 5 V, other 0 V).

Check the cuvette changer horizontal motion, Cuvette changer horizontal home horizontal motor connectors. position is not reached with the Check the voltages on the mother board: TP9 acceptable motor number of steps during (0.8 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J20 Pin1-3 (home the initialization. position 5 V, other 0 V).

Check the cuvette changer vertical motion, vertical motor connectors. Cuvette changer vertical home position is Check the voltages on the mother board: TP6 not reached with the acceptable motor (1.2 V ± 50 mV), home sensor (top) on J17 Pin1-3 number of steps during the initialization. (home position 5 V, other 0 V), position detector (bottom) on J61 Pin1-3 (low position 5 V, other 0 V).

Check the reagent syringe, the reagent syringe Reagent syringe home position is not motion, motor connectors. reached with the acceptable motor Check the voltages on the mother board: TP2 number of steps during the initialization. (1.2 V ± 50 mV), home sensor switch on J2.

Check the sample syringe, the sample syringe Sample syringe home position is not motion, motor connectors. reached with the acceptable motor Check the voltages on the mother board: TP7 number of steps during the initialization. (1 V ± 50 mV), home sensor switch on J9.

Check the mixer XY motion, motor connectors, Mixer home position is not reached with home flag adjustment. the acceptable motor number of steps Check the voltages on the mother board: TP16 (0.8 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J33 Pin1-3 (home during the initialization. position 5 V, other 0 V).

Error type / Description

Troubleshooting Error messages

6-7

6-8

053

Alarm

055

048

Alarm

Alarm

047

Alarm

054

046

Alarm

Alarm

Code

Level

Action

Check the reagent needle wires, check the connectors J5 and J4 on the reagent level detection board. Check the detection board cable (XBA517 or XBA814) and its conductivity from the reagent level detection board (J4) to the mother board (J47). Change the reagent needle. Run an initialization and restart the cooling unit. Check the glycol level and circulation. Check the fans inside the reagent tray and the cooling unit fan. Change the glycol.

Temperature of reagent needle, measured by the temperature sensor, is not in the acceptable range: - after 10 min. during the initialization (37°C ±1.5). - after the initialization (37°C ±3). Temperature of reagent tray, measured by the temperature sensor, is not in the acceptable range: - after 4 hours during the initialization (6°C, 4-10°C). - after the initialization (6°C, 2-12°C).

Heating Needle Temperature regulation failed

Refrigerated Compartment Temperature regulation failed

Reaction Tray Temperature regulation failed

Check the reaction tray fan is running (airflow from top to bottom), powered on 24 V on the mother board: J52, LED DS16. Check the heater resistance, check the voltage on the heater: J2 Pin1-2 (24 V TTL). Check the temperature sensor voltage on the mother board: J46 (37°C 1.95 V, 30°C 2.3 V). Check the cooling unit is running.

Reagent needle does not detect liquid, with the capacitive level detection, during Check the level of the concerned reagent. pipetting in reagent tray. Triggered during the shutdown.

Sample needle does not detect liquid, with the capacitive level detection, during Check the level of the concerned reagent. pipetting in reagent tray. Triggered during the shutdown.

Check the sample needle alignment, the sample Shock detection switch (SW1) of sample arm cover. arm is ON during the initialization, and the Check the voltage on the sample level detection sample arm is at its vertical home board: shock detection switch on J2 Pin2-5 position. (ON 0 V, OFF 5 V).

Error type / Description

Temperature of reaction tray, measured by the temperature sensor, is not in the acceptable range: - after 15 min. during the initialization (37°C ±0.25) - after the initialization (37°C ±0.5).

Reagent Level Detection Error

Sample Level Detection Error

Shock Detection Out of Service

Message

Troubleshooting Error messages

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Code

056

057

058

059

060

061

062

063

Level

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Warning

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Warning

Alarm

Alarm

Action

Reagent Door Open

Main Cover Open

ISE command invalid

Detected by the reagent door magnetic switch.

Close the reagent door. Check the reagent door switch, connector J29 Pin1-2 on the mother board. To avoid reagent tray cover alarms when disconnecting connector J29, make a short circuit between the black and white wires on the connector right below the reagent tray.

Close the main cover. Check the main cover switch, connector J30 on Detected by the main cover mechanical the mother board. switch during the initialization. Connector J30 can be disconnected without triggering any alarm on the instrument.

Shut down and switch the instrument off and on. Change the ISE mother board.

Reload the barcode reader configuration (shut down and restart the instrument). Change the barcode reader. Change the mother board.

Incorrect communication frame with reagent barcode reader.

The used ISE function cannot be performed. Triggered by the ISE mother board.

Reload the barcode reader configuration (shut down and restart the instrument). Change the barcode reader. Change the mother board.

Incorrect communication frame with sample barcode reader.

Shut down and switch the instrument off and on. Change the ISE mother board.

Check the connectors J1 and J2 on the acquisition board, and the bus. Check the connector J1 on the mother board.

Mother board/acquisition board communication failed. Triggered during absorbance measurements.

Mother board/acquisition board Check the connectors J1 and J2 on the acquisition communication failed. board, and the bus. Triggered during the spectrophotometer Check the connector J1 on the mother board. initialization.

Error type / Description

Non recoverable material error on the ISE module Triggered by the ISE mother board.

Reagent Tray Identification Failure

Sample Tray Identification Failure

Measurement Module Out of Service

Measurement Module Out of Service

Message

Troubleshooting Error messages

6-9

6 - 10

102

103

Alarm

067

Alarm

Alarm

066

Alarm

101

065

Alarm

Alarm

Code

Level

Reagent Vertical Position Error

Sample Rotation Position Error

Sample Vertical Position Error

No Clean Cuvettes Present

Low pressure on the Sample or Reagent hydraulic system

Check the reagent arm vertical motion, vertical motor connectors. Reagent arm vertical home position is not Check the voltages on the mother board: TP29 reached on time during a run. (1 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J58 Pin1-3 (home position 5 V, other 0 V).

Check the sample arm rotation motion, rotation motor connectors. Sample arm rotation home position is not Check the voltages on the mother board: TP30 reached on time during a run. (0.6 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J41 Pin1-3 (home position 5 V, other 0 V).

Check the sample arm vertical motion, vertical motor connectors. Sample arm vertical home position is not Check the voltages on the mother board: TP28 reached on time during a run. (1 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J59 Pin1-3 (home position 5 V, other 0 V).

Add new cuvette segments. Detected by the cuvette segment sensor, Check the cuvette segment sensor adjustment. located on the load rack, during the Check the voltages on the mother board: J38 initialization. Pin2-3 (24 V), Pin1-2 (without cuvette segment 5 V, with cuvette segment 0 V).

Check the low pressure threshold = 300 in the Pressure menu. Check the water tank and hydraulic circuit (leaks, unplug tubing, ...). Detected by the sample or reagent Check the voltage on the pressure board: TP3 pressure sensor (< 300 mbar) during the (3.8 V ± 50 mV), and readjust it if necessary with initialization. R16. Change the sample or reagent pressure sensor. See 2.4. What to do if you are having intermittent alarms #066 or 114?, page 6-48.

Action

Mixer not Positioned

Error type / Description Manually push the mixer down. Check the "mixer present switch", connector J28 Detected by the "mixer present switch". on the mother board. Connector J28 can be disconnected without triggering any alarm on the instrument.

Message

Troubleshooting Error messages

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Code

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

Level

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Reagent Syringe Position Error

Sample Syringe Position Error

Mixer Position Error

Reaction Tray Position Error

Reagent Tray Position Error

Sample Tray Position Error

Reagent Rotation Position Error

Message Check the reagent arm rotation motion, rotation motor connectors. Check the voltages on the mother board: TP27 (0.6 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J39 Pin1-3 (home position 5 V, other 0 V).

Reagent arm rotation home position is not reached on time during a run.

Check the reagent tray motion, motor connectors, home flag adjustment. Check the voltages on the mother board: TP11 (1 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J14 Pin1-4 (home position 0 V LED DS5 OFF, other 5 V). Check the reaction tray motion, motor connectors, home flag adjustment. Check the voltages on the mother board: TP1 (2 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J12 Pin1-3 (home position 5 V, other 0 V). Check the mixer XY motion, motor connectors, home flag adjustment. Check the voltages on the mother board: TP16 (0.8 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J33 Pin1-3 (home position 5 V, other 0 V). Check the sample syringe, the sample syringe motion, motor connectors. Check the voltages on the mother board: TP7 (1 V ± 50 mV), home sensor switch on J9. Check the reagent syringe, the reagent syringe motion, motor connectors. Check the voltages on the mother board: TP2 (1.2 V ± 50 mV), home sensor switch on J2.

Reagent tray home position is not reached on time during a run.

Reaction tray home position is not reached on time during a run.

Mixer home position is not reached on time during a run.

Sample syringe home position is not reached on time during a run.

Reagent syringe home position is not reached on time during a run.

Check the sample tray motion, motor connectors, Sample tray home position is not reached optical encoder connectors. on time during a run or the optical Check the voltages on the mother board: TP14 encoder detects a wrong position. (1 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J21 Pin1-3 (home position 5 V, other 0 V).

Action

Error type / Description

Troubleshooting Error messages

6 - 11

6 - 12

115

116

117

Alarm

Alarm

113

Alarm

Alarm

112

Alarm

114

111

Alarm

Alarm

Code

Level

Used Cuvette Holder Missing

Manual Cuvette Loading Door Open

Main Cover Open

Low pressure on the Sample or Reagent hydraulic system

Cuvette Changer Problem: Moving Forward

Cuvette Horizontal Motor Position Error

Cuvette Vertical Motor Position Error

Message

Action

Check the low pressure threshold = 300 in the Pressure menu. Check the water tank and hydraulic circuit (leaks, unplug tubing, ...). Check the voltage on the pressure board: TP3 (3.8 V ± 50 mV), and readjust it if necessary with R16. Change the sample or reagent pressure sensor. See 2.4. What to do if you are having intermittent alarms #066 or 114?, page 6-48.

Cuvette motion home position is not reached on time during a run.

Detected by the sample or reagent pressure sensor (< 300 mbar) during a run.

Unload rack is not detected by the mechanical switch during the initialization or a run.

Reinstall the unload rack. Check the "rack used segment in position" sensor, connector J26 on the mother board.

Reaction tray flap door open, detected by Close the reaction tray flap door. the switch located on the reaction tray Check the flap door switch, connector J10 on the upper case during a run. mother board.

Close the main cover. Check the main cover switch, connector J30 on Detected by the main cover mechanical the mother board. switch during a run. Connector J30 can be disconnected without triggering any alarm on the instrument.

Check the cuvette motion, cuvette motion motor connectors. Check the voltages on the mother board: TP13 (0.6 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J37 Pin1-3 (home position 5 V, other 0 V).

Check the cuvette changer horizontal motion, Cuvette changer horizontal home horizontal motor connectors. position is not reached on time during a Check the voltages on the mother board: TP9 run. (0.8 V ± 50 mV), home sensor on J20 Pin1-3 (home position 5 V, other 0 V).

Check the cuvette changer vertical motion, vertical motor connectors. Check the voltages on the mother board: TP6 Cuvette changer vertical home position is (1.2 V ± 50 mV), home sensor (top) on J17 Pin1-3 not reached on time during a run. (home position 5 V, other 0 V), position detector (bottom) on J61 Pin1-3 (low position 5 V, other 0 V).

Error type / Description

Troubleshooting Error messages

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Code

118

119

122

123

124

125

126

Level

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Warning

Warning

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Alarm

Alarm

Sample Level Detection Out of Service

Shock Detection Out of Service

Heating needle temperature exceeds limits

Reaction tray temperature exceeds limits

Measurement Module Out of Service

Reagent Identification Failure

Sample Identification Failure

Message

Check the connectors J1 and J2 on the acquisition board, and the bus. Check the connector J1 on the mother board. Change the acquisition board. Check the reaction tray fan is running (airflow from top to bottom), powered on 24 V on the mother board: J52, LED DS16. Check the heater resistance, check the voltage on the heater: J2 Pin1-2 (24 V TTL). Check the temperature sensor voltage on the mother board: J46 (37°C 1.95 V, 30°C 2.3 V). Check the cooling unit is running. Check the reagent needle wires, check the connectors J5 and J4 on the reagent level detection board. Check the detection board cable (XBA517 or XBA814) and its conductivity from the reagent level detection board (J4) to the mother board (J47). Change the reagent needle.

Mother board/acquisition board communication failed.

Temperature of reaction tray, measured by the temperature sensor, is not in the acceptable range after the initialization: - after 2 min. (37°C ±0.25).

Temperature of reagent needle, measured by the temperature sensor, is not in the acceptable range after the initialization: - after 24 sec. (37°C ±1.5).

Sample needle does not detect liquid, with the capacitive level detection, 3 consecutive times during pipetting in sample or reagent tray.

Check the level of the concerned sample or reagent. Check the sample arm wires, connections and board. Check the frequency on the sample level detection board: U2 Pin1-5 (on air 47 kHz, with J1 disconnected > 100 kHz). Change the sample needle, sample level detection board.

Check the sample needle alignment, the sample arm cover. Shock detection switch (SW1) of sample Check the voltage on the sample level detection arm is ON during a run. board: shock detection switch on J2 Pin2-5 (ON 0 V, OFF 5 V).

Physically check the cassettes and racks.

Physically check the sample tubes and sample racks.

Action

Reagent identification failed.

Sample identification failed.

Error type / Description

Troubleshooting Error messages

6 - 13

6 - 14

130

Alarm

128

Alarm

129

127

Alarm

Alarm

Code

Level

Over pressure on the sample hydraulic system

Reagent Level Detection Out of Service

Reagent Level Detection Out of Service

Sample Level Detection Out of Service

Message

Action

High pressure on the sample hydraulic circuit (> 2500 mbar), detected by the sample pressure sensor during a run.

Check the high pressure threshold = 2500 in the Pressure menu. Check the sample needle is not clogged. Change the sample needle, sample pressure sensor, pressure board, water pump.

Check the reagent syringe has no bubble. Check there is no leaks. Check the concerned reagent (level, foam, bubbles). Air detection 2 consecutive times during Check the low pressure threshold = 300 and factor sampling, the pressure measured by the KA = 0.700 in the Pressure menu. reagent pressure sensor is lower than the Check the voltage on the pressure board: TP3 low limit of acceptable range (3.8 V ± 50 mV), and readjust it if necessary with (= KA * (A * pipetted volume + B)). R16. Calibrate the reagent pressure sensor. Change the reagent needle, reagent pressure sensor, pressure board.

Reagent needle does not detect liquid, with the capacitive level detection, 3 consecutive times during pipetting in reagent tray.

Check the level of the concerned reagent. Check the reagent arm wires, connections and board. Check the voltage on the reagent level detection board at U2 output and U3 input: between TP1 and TP2 (J1 disconnected 2.8 V ±10%, J1 connected 0 V < 0.5 V, J5 disconnected on air 1.9 V ±10%, J5 disconnected on water 1.7 V ±10%). Change the reagent needle, reagent level detection board.

Check the sample syringe has no bubble. Check there is no leaks. Air detection 2 consecutive times during Check the concerned sample or reagent (level, sampling, the pressure measured by the foam, bubbles). sample pressure sensor is lower than the Check the low pressure threshold = 300 and factor low limit of acceptable range KA = 0.050 in the Pressure menu. (= KA * (A * pipetted volume + B)). Calibrate the sample pressure sensor. Change the sample needle, sample pressure sensor, pressure board.

Error type / Description

Troubleshooting Error messages

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Code

131

132

133

134

135

Level

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Alarm

Alarm

Maximum quantity of cycles exceeded

Shock Detection Out of Service

Reagent Needle Clogged

Sample Needle Clogged

Over pressure on the reagent hydraulic system

Message Check the high pressure threshold = 2500 in the Pressure menu. Check the reagent needle is not clogged. Check the voltage on the pressure board: TP3 (3.8 V ± 50 mV), and readjust it if necessary with R16. Change the reagent needle, reagent pressure sensor, pressure board, water pump. Check the concerned sample or reagent. Check the sample needle is not clogged. Check the factor KB = 3.700 in the Pressure menu. Calibrate the sample pressure sensor. Change the sample needle, sample pressure sensor, pressure board.

High pressure on the reagent hydraulic circuit (> 2500 mbar), detected by the reagent pressure sensor during a run.

Clog detection 2 consecutive times during sampling, the pressure measured by the sample pressure sensor is higher than the high limit of acceptable range (= KB * (A * pipetted volume + B)).

Reload the embedded software version on the Number of cycles incompatible with the mother board. See RAS517: Software version embedded software version. installation, page 1. Replace the mother board.

Check the sample needle alignment, the sample Shock detection switch (SW1) of sample arm cover. arm is ON during a run, and the sample Check the voltage on the sample level detection arm is at its vertical home position. board: shock detection switch on J2 Pin2-5 (ON 0 V, OFF 5 V).

Check the concerned reagent. Check the reagent needle is not clogged. Check the factor KB = 1.800 in the Pressure Clog detection 2 consecutive times menu. during sampling, the pressure measured Check the voltage on the pressure board: TP3 by the reagent pressure sensor is higher (3.8 V ± 50 mV), and readjust it if necessary with than the high limit of acceptable range R16. (= KB * (A * pipetted volume + B)). Calibrate the reagent pressure sensor. Change the reagent needle, reagent pressure sensor, pressure board.

Action

Error type / Description

Troubleshooting Error messages

6 - 15

6 - 16

145

140

Alarm

Alarm

139

Alarm

142

138

Alarm

Alarm

137

Alarm

141

136

Alarm

Alarm

Code

Level

Reagent Tray Temperature Sensor Out of Order

Reagent Needle Temperature Sensor Out of Order

Action

Remove used cuvette segments. Check the "rack used segment full" sensor. Check the voltage on the mother board: J19 Pin12 (with cuvette segment 5 V, without cuvette segment 0 V). Check there is no light interference above the instrument.

Detected by the photoelectric beam sensor, located on the load rack.

The temperature sensor, located in the reagent tray, has no resistance (open circuit).

Check the temperature sensor and its wires, connector J43 on the mother board. Change the temperature sensor.

Check the reagent needle wires, check the connectors J5 and J4 on the reagent level detection board. The temperature sensor, located in the Check the detection board cable (XBA517 or reagent needle, has no resistance (open XBA814) and its conductivity from the reagent circuit). level detection board (J4) to the mother board (J47). Change the reagent needle.

Check the temperature sensor and its wires, connector J46 on the mother board. Change the temperature sensor.

Reinstall the unload rack. Check the "rack used segment in position" sensor, connector J26 on the mother board.

Unload rack is not detected by the mechanical switch, located on the cuvette changer.

Reaction tray flap door open, detected by Close the reaction tray flap door. the switch located on the reaction tray Check the flap door switch, connector J10 on the upper case during a run and a reaction mother board. tray motion.

The requested cycle does not exist.

Reload the embedded software version on the mother board. See RAS517: Software version installation, page 1. Replace the mother board.

See Alarm #136 "Peripheral busy", page 6-34 to know which motor is concerned by the message. Incompatible cycle, time out on a motor. Check the concerned motor. Send to HORIBA Medical the files Asp400bd.mdb and Error.log for analysis.

Error type / Description

The temperature sensor, located in the Reaction Tray Temperature Sensor Out of Order reaction tray, has no resistance (open circuit).

Used Cuvette Holder Full

Used Cuvette Holder Missing

Manual Cuvette Loading Cover Open

Unknown Cycle

Peripheral busy [%s]

Message

Troubleshooting Error messages

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Code

146

147

148

149

150

151

Level

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Alarm

Check the high pressure threshold = 2500 in the Pressure menu. Check the sample needle is not clogged. Change the sample needle, sample pressure sensor, pressure board, water pump. Check the high pressure threshold = 2500 in the Pressure menu. Check the reagent needle is not clogged. Check the voltage on the pressure board: TP3 (3.8 V ± 50 mV), and readjust it if necessary with R16. Change the reagent needle, reagent pressure sensor, pressure board, water pump.

Detected by the reagent door magnetic switch during pipetting.

High pressure on the sample hydraulic circuit (> 2500 mbar), detected by the sample pressure sensor during the initialization.

High pressure on the reagent hydraulic circuit (> 2500 mbar), detected by the reagent pressure sensor during the initialization.

Pressure controller initilization error

Over pressure on the reagent hydraulic system

Over pressure on the sample hydraulic system

Reload the embedded software version on the Communication failed on PIC of pressure mother board. See RAS517: Software version board. installation, page 1. Replace the mother board.

Close the reagent door. Check the reagent door switch, connector J29 Pin1-2 on the mother board. To avoid reagent tray cover alarms when disconnecting connector J29, make a short circuit between the black and white wires on the connector right below the reagent tray.

Compressor overload: Refrigeration has been stopped.

Reagent Door Open

Check the cooling unit is switched ON. Check the cooling unit condenser (dirty), fan (damaged), filter, control cable (disconnected). Check the room temperature is not excessive. See Compressor overload alarm, page 6-35.

Instrument received 5 V = compressor overload (instead of 0 V = compressor OK) through the cooling unit control cable on instrument connector Pin6 or the cooling unit is switched OFF.

Action

Shock Detection on dispensing

Error type / Description Check the sample needle alignment, the sample arm cover. Shock detection switch (SW1) of sample Check the voltage on the sample level detection arm is ON during dispensing. board: shock detection switch on J2 Pin2-5 (ON 0 V, OFF 5 V).

Message

Troubleshooting Error messages

6 - 17

Code

152

153

154

156

157

301

Level

Alarm

6 - 18

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Warning

Cuvette Holder Empty

Error card reagent detection [error %s1: %s2]

Mixer not Positioned

Pressure controller of reagent arm out of order

Pressure controller of sample arm out of order

Water Tank Low Level

Message Fill the water tank. Check the voltage of the water tank empty sensor on the mother board: J31 Pin3-4 (water 0 V, no water 5 V). To avoid water level detection alarms when disconnecting connector J31, make a short circuit between Pin 3 and 4. WARNING: This will disabled the waste tank level detection.

Detected by the level switch, located in the water tank.

See Error on the reagent level detection board, page 6-37.

Detected by the mechanical switch, located under the mixer assembly.

Error on the reagent level detection board. [%s1]: error code. [%s2]: error message.

Add new cuvette segments. Check the cuvette segment sensor adjustment. Detected by the cuvette segment sensor, Check the voltages on the mother board: J38 located on the load rack, during a run. Pin2-3 (24 V), Pin1-2 (without cuvette segment 5 V, with cuvette segment 0 V). Check the cuvette motion, clean the load rack rail.

Manually push the mixer down. Check the voltage of the "mixer present switch" on the mother board: J28 Pin2-4 (mixer present 5 V, mixer not present 0 V). Connector J28 can be disconnected without triggering any alarm on the instrument.

Air detection 2 consecutive times during sampling, the pressure measured by the Check the reagent pressure sensor, pressure reagent pressure sensor is lower than the board. low limit of acceptable range (= KA * (A * pipetted volume + B)).

Air detection 2 consecutive times during sampling, the pressure measured by the Check the sample pressure sensor, pressure sample pressure sensor is lower than the board. low limit of acceptable range (= KA * (A * pipetted volume + B)).

Action

Error type / Description

Troubleshooting Error messages

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Code

302

303

304

305

307

308

Level

Warning

Warning

Warning

Warning

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Warning

Warning

Power supply problem

Water level of the cold group is insufficient

Reagent tray temperature exceeds limits

Waste Tank Full

Water Tank Low Level

Used Cuvette Holder Full

Message

Action

Run an initialization and restart the cooling unit. Check the glycol level and circulation. Check the fans inside the reagent tray and the cooling unit fan. Change the glycol.

Temperature of reagent tray, measured by the temperature sensor, is not in the acceptable range after the initialization: - after 30 min. (6°C, 4-10°C).

A default has been detected in the power supply. Change the power supply. Information from the power supply received on the mother board J54 Pin9.

Glycol level in the cooling unit insufficient, detected by the mechanical switch in the cooling unit. Check the glycol level. Instrument received 5 V = low level Check the cooling unit mechanical switch. (instead of 0 V = OK) through the cooling unit control cable on instrument connector Pin4.

Empty the waste tank. Check the voltage of the waste tank full sensor on the mother board: J31 Pin1-2 (empty 0 V, full 5 V).

Detected by the level switch, located in the waste tank.

Fill the water tank. Check the voltage of the water tank empty sensor on the mother board: J31 Pin3-4 (water 0 V, no Detected by the level switch, located in water 5 V). the water tank, during all phases except To avoid water level detection alarms when pipetting. disconnecting connector J31, make a short circuit between Pin 3 and 4. WARNING: This will disabled the waste tank level detection.

Remove used cuvette segments. Check the "rack used segment full" sensor. Detected by the photoelectric beam Check the voltage on the mother board: J19 Pin1sensor, located on the load rack, during a 2 (with cuvette segment 5 V, without cuvette run. segment 0 V). Check there is no light interference above the instrument.

Error type / Description

Troubleshooting Error messages

6 - 19

6 - 20

312

Warning

314

311

Warning

Warning

310

Warning

313

309

Warning

Warning

Code

Level

SOLUTION_CLOGGING/RN on liquid [%s]

SOLUTION_CLOGGING/SN on liquid [%s]

SOLUTION_FOAM/RN on liquid [%s]

SOLUTION_FOAM/SN on liquid [%s]

SOLUTION_EMPTY/RN on liquid [%s]

SOLUTION_EMPTY/SN on liquid [%s]

Message

Action Check the reagent and replace it if necessary. Activate the reagent in the Reagent Configuration menu. Rerun the shutdown. Check the reagent and replace it if necessary. Activate the reagent in the Reagent Configuration menu. Rerun the shutdown. Check the reagent and replace it if necessary. Activate the reagent in the Reagent Configuration menu. Rerun the shutdown. Check the reagent and replace it if necessary. Activate the reagent in the Reagent Configuration menu. Rerun the shutdown. Check the sample needle and tubing. Run a sample pressure calibration. Check the reagent and replace it if necessary. Activate the reagent in the Reagent Configuration menu. Rerun the shutdown. Check the reagent needle and tubing. Run a reagent pressure calibration. Check the reagent and replace it if necessary. Activate the reagent in the Reagent Configuration menu. Rerun the shutdown.

Error type / Description The sampling alarm SOLUTION_EMPTY/ SN has been triggered, by the sample needle, on the solution [%s] during the shutdown. [%s] = solution short name. The sampling alarm SOLUTION_EMPTY/ RN has been triggered, by the reagent needle, on the solution [%s] during the shutdown. [%s] = solution short name. The sampling alarm SOLUTION_FOAM/ SN has been triggered, by the sample pressure sensor, on the solution [%s] during the shutdown. [%s] = solution short name. The sampling alarm SOLUTION_FOAM/ RN has been triggered, by the reagent pressure sensor, on the solution [%s] during the shutdown. [%s] = solution short name. The sampling alarm SOLUTION_CLOGGING/SN has been triggered, by the sample pressure sensor, on the solution [%s] during the shutdown. The sample needle may be clogged. [%s] = solution short name. The sampling alarm SOLUTION_CLOGGING/RN has been triggered, by the reagent pressure sensor, on the solution [%s] during the shutdown. The reagent needle may be clogged. [%s] = solution short name.

Troubleshooting Error messages

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Code

315

316

317

318

319

320

321

Level

Warning

Warning

Warning

Warning

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Warning

Warning

Warning

Position error on ISE syringe 2 (error code 12)

Timeout error on ISE syringe 2 (error code 11)

Position error on ISE syringe 1 (error code 2)

Timeout error on ISE syringe 1 (error code 1)

INC_SOLUTION_PIPET/RN on liquid [%s]

INC_SOLUTION_PIPET/SN on liquid [%s]

SOLUTION_SHOCK on liquid [%s]

Message

Action

Check the reagent and replace it if necessary. Activate the reagent in the Reagent Configuration menu. Rerun the shutdown.

Check the reagent and replace it if necessary. Activate the reagent in the Reagent Configuration menu. Rerun the shutdown. Check the ISE syringe 1 assy motion. Check the voltage of the home sensor on the ISE mother board: CN6 Pin2-3 (home position 0 V, other 5 V). Check the ISE syringe 1 assy motion. Check the voltage of the home sensor on the ISE mother board: CN6 Pin2-3 (home position 0 V, other 5 V). Check the ISE syringe 2 assy motion. Check the voltage of the home sensor on the ISE mother board: CN4 Pin2-3 (home position 0 V, other 5 V). Check the ISE syringe 2 assy motion. Check the voltage of the home sensor on the ISE mother board: CN4 Pin2-3 (home position 0 V, other 5 V).

The sampling alarm INC_SOLUTION_PIPET/SN has been triggered, by the sample pressure sensor, on the solution [%s] during the shutdown. [%s] = solution short name. The sampling alarm INC_SOLUTION_PIPET/RN has been triggered, by the reagent pressure sensor, on the solution [%s] during the shutdown. [%s] = solution short name. ISE syringe 1 assy (Standard 1/waste) home position is not reached on time. ISE module status is 2 = module configured. ISE syringe 1 assy (Standard 1/waste) home position is not reached. ISE module status is 2 = module configured. ISE syringe 2 assy (Reference/Standard 2) home position is not reached on time. ISE module status is 2 = module configured. ISE syringe 2 assy (Reference/Standard 2) home position is not reached. ISE module status is 2 = module configured.

The sampling alarm SOLUTION_SHOCK Check the reagent, remove the caps. Activate the has been triggered, by the sample or reagent in the Reagent Configuration menu. reagent needle, on the solution [%s] Rerun the shutdown. during the shutdown. [%s] = solution short name.

Error type / Description

Troubleshooting Error messages

6 - 21

6 - 22

325

Warning

327

324

Warning

Warning

323

Warning

326

322

Warning

Warning

Code

Level

Action

ISE module reagent/fluidic error. LB sensor cannot detect Standard 1. The LB Check the ISE Standard 1 bottle, hydraulic circuit. sensor measurement is > 4.5 V (air). Check the valve V4 and readjust the LB sensor. ISE module status is 4 = module Run an ISE Global Initialization. sleeping.

Error type / Description

ISE low solution inlet excess on start of measuring (error code 25)

Can’t detect ISE high solution (error code 31)

ISE module reagent/fluidic error. LB sensor detects Standard 1 at the beginning of measurement. The LB sensor measurement is < 1 V (liquid). ISE module status is 4 = module sleeping.

ISE low solution inlet excess on timeout (error code 24)

ISE module reagent/fluidic error. LB sensor cannot detect Standard 2. The LB Check the ISE Standard 2 bottle, hydraulic circuit. Check the valve V4 and readjust the LB sensor. sensor measurement is > 4.5 V (air). Run an ISE Global Initialization. ISE module status is 4 = module sleeping.

Check the ISE Standard 1 bottle, hydraulic circuit. Check the valve V4 and readjust the LB sensor. Run an ISE Global Initialization.

ISE module reagent/fluidic error. LB sensor still detects Standard 1 flow after Check the ISE Standard 1 bottle, hydraulic circuit. the aspiration specified time. The LB Check the valve V4 and readjust the LB sensor. sensor measurement is < 1 V (liquid). Run an ISE Global Initialization. ISE module status is 4 = module sleeping.

Too much ISE low solution inlet (error code 23)

Check the ISE Standard 1 bottle, hydraulic circuit. Check the valve V4 and readjust the LB sensor. Run an ISE Global Initialization

ISE module reagent/fluidic error. LB sensor detects Standard 1. The LB sensor measurement is < 1 V (liquid). ISE module status is 4 = module sleeping.

ISE module reagent/fluidic error. LB sensor cannot detect the arriving of Check the ISE Standard 1 bottle, hydraulic circuit. Standard 1. The LB sensor measurement Can’t detect ISE low solution inlet (error code 22) Check the valve V4 and readjust the LB sensor. is > 4.5 V (air). Run an ISE Global Initialization. ISE module status is 4 = module sleeping.

Can’t detect ISE low solution (error code 21)

Message

Troubleshooting Error messages

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Code

328

329

330

331

332

333

334

Level

Warning

Warning

Warning

Warning

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Warning

Warning

Warning

Check the sample for fibrin, clog. Check the sample needle and tubing. Readjust the LB sensor. Check the sample for fibrin, clog. Check the sample needle and tubing. Readjust the LB sensor. Check the hydraulic circuit. Check the valve V4 and readjust the LB sensor. Run an ISE Global Initialization.

ISE module reagent/fluidic error. LB sensor cannot detect the arriving of sample. The LB sensor measurement is > 4.5 V (air). ISE module reagent/fluidic error. LB sensor detects sample. The LB sensor measurement is < 1 V (liquid). ISE module status is 4 = module sleeping.

ISE module reagent/fluidic error. LB sensor still detects sample flow after the Check the hydraulic circuit. aspiration specified time. The LB sensor Check the valve V4 and readjust the LB sensor. measurement is < 1 V (liquid). Run an ISE Global Initialization. ISE module status is 4 = module sleeping.

Too much ISE sample inlet (error code 43)

ISE sample inlet excess on timeout (error code 44)

Can’t detect ISE sample inlet (error code 42)

Can’t detect ISE sample (error code 41)

ISE module reagent/fluidic error. LB sensor cannot detect sample. The LB sensor measurement is > 4.5 V (air).

ISE high solution inlet excess on timeout (error code 34)

ISE module reagent/fluidic error. LB sensor still detects Standard 2 flow after Check the ISE Standard 2 bottle, hydraulic circuit. the aspiration specified time. The LB Check the valve V4 and readjust the LB sensor. sensor measurement is < 1 V (liquid). Run an ISE Global Initialization. ISE module status is 4 = module sleeping.

Check the ISE Standard 2 bottle, hydraulic circuit. Check the valve V4 and readjust the LB sensor. Run an ISE Global Initialization.

Can’t detect ISE high solution inlet (error code 32)

ISE module reagent/fluidic error. LB sensor detects Standard 2. The LB Too much ISE high solution inlet (error code 33) sensor measurement is < 1 V (liquid). ISE module status is 4 = module sleeping.

ISE module reagent/fluidic error. LB sensor cannot detect the arriving of Check the ISE Standard 2 bottle, hydraulic circuit. Standard 2. The LB sensor measurement Check the valve V4 and readjust the LB sensor. is > 4.5 V (air). Run an ISE Global Initialization. ISE module status is 4 = module sleeping.

Action

Error type / Description

Message

Troubleshooting Error messages

6 - 23

6 - 24

339

340

501

502

Warning

Alarm

Alarm

337

Warning

Warning

336

Warning

338

335

Warning

Warning

Code

Level Run a 2-point calibration. Perform the ISE module maintenance (etching, cleaning). Change the corresponding electrode. Run a 2-point calibration. Perform the ISE module maintenance (etching, cleaning). Change the corresponding electrode.

The difference between the low and high standard values is out of the sensitivity normal range for the electrode in brackets. [%s1] = electrode name. [%s2] = low/high point of the calibration. The low or high standard value is out of the acceptable range for the electrode in brackets. [%s1] = electrode name. [%s2] = low/high point of the calibration.

ISE electrode [%s1] sensibility error for [%s2] point (error code 50)

ISE electrode [%s1] offset error for [%s2] point (error code 51)

Compressor overload: Refrigeration is stopped temporarily for 10 minutes.

Compacting database Not OK

Database compacting failed.

Reload a previous database.

Bad database version. Reload a compatible database version. Database version [%s] Not OK, version required [%s] = database version number. Reinstall the software version. See RAS517: The software detected an incompatible [%s] Software version installation, page 1. database version during the initialization.

Check the cooling unit is switched ON. The cooling unit is stopped for ten Check the cooling unit condenser (dirty), fan minutes and automatically restarted after (damaged), filter, control cable (disconnected). ten minutes stopping. Check the room temperature is not excessive. See Compressor overload alarm, page 6-35.

Change the ISE preampli board.

ISE module mechanical error.

ISE LB check response error (error code 91)

ISE electrode [%s1] response error for [%s2] point (error code 55)

Check the ISE Standard 1 or 2 bottle has no bubble. The potential difference during the three Change the ISE Standard 1 or 2 bottle. last seconds of a measurement is Perform the ISE module maintenance (etching, ≥ 0.40 mV for the electrode in brackets. cleaning). [%s1] = electrode name. Change the corresponding electrode. [%s2] = low/high point of the calibration. Check the spring contact of the corresponding electrode.

Check the ISE Standard 1 bottle has no bubble. Change the ISE Standard 1 bottle. Repeatability error on the low standard Perform the ISE module maintenance (etching, ISE electrode [%s1] repeatability error for [%s2] value for the electrode in brackets. cleaning). point (error code 52) [%s1] = electrode name. Change the corresponding electrode. [%s2] = low/high point of the calibration. Check the spring contact of the corresponding electrode.

Action

Error type / Description

Message

Troubleshooting Error messages

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Code

503

504

505

506

507

508

509

510

511

Level

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Alarm

Error type / Description

Check the lamp and replace it if necessary. Check the gain values. Clean the lamp side of the condensing lens. See RAS656: Partial condensing lens cleaning, page 1. Clean the mirror and all the lens of the optical bench. See RAS383: Optical bench, page 1.

The lamp stability is not reached after 10 min. during the initialization (the difference between 2 consecutive absorbances is > 0.00022).

Bad embedded exchange table version. [%s] = embedded exchange table Reinstall the software version. See RAS517: version number. Software version installation, page 1. The software detected an incompatible Replace the mother board. exchange table version on the mother board during the initialization.

Light stability Not OK

Bad Embedded exchange table: Version Required [%s], Current [%s]

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Unable to found empty cuvette on a reaction tray No new cuvette on the reaction tray.

Add new cuvette segments. Check the cuvette segment sensor adjustment. Check the voltages on the mother board: J38 Pin2-3 (24 V), Pin1-2 (without cuvette segment 5 V, with cuvette segment 0 V).

Run an initialization. Perform a Checkdisk. Reinstall the software version. See RAS517: Software version installation, page 1.

Module loading failed. [%s] = module name (COMPROCESS, IHM).

Loading Module [%s]: Not OK

-

Bad computer exchange table size. [%s] = computer exchange table size.

Bad PC exchange table size: Version Required [%s], Current [%s]

-

Bad embedded exchange table size. [%s] = embedded exchange table size.

Bad Embedded exchange table size: Version Required [%s], Current [%s]

Bad computer exchange table version. Bad PC exchange table: Version Required [%s], Reinstall the software version. See RAS517: [%s] = computer exchange table version Current [%s] Software version installation, page 1. number.

Bad CPLD version Required [%s], Current [%s]

Reinstall the software version. See RAS517: Software version installation, page 1. Replace the mother board.

Reinstall the software version. See RAS517: Software version installation, page 1.

Action

Bad CPLD version. [%s] = CPLD version number.

Bad embedded software version. [%s] = embedded software version Bad Embedded Software Version Required [%s], number. Current [%s] The embedded software version on the mother board is incompatible with the current software version.

Message

Troubleshooting Error messages

6 - 25

6 - 26

601

Warning

518

Alarm

600

517

Alarm

Warning

516

Alarm

520

515

Alarm

Alarm

514

Alarm

519

513

Alarm

Alarm

Code

Level

Reinstall the software version. See RAS517: Software version installation, page 1. Reinstall the ISE version on the ISE module. See RAS540: ISE module software version installation, page 1.

Replace the lamp.

Check the module connections. Run an initialization.

Bad ISE module version. [%s] = ISE version number. Detected during the initialization. Spectrophotometer gain check failed. [%s1] = wavelength. [%s2] = gain. The gain is out of the acceptable range (between 1 and 98%) during the initialization. Module loading failed. [%s] = module name (PRINTER, COMSIL).

Motor [%s1], function position [%s2], value [%s3] has changed

Bad ISE version Required [%s], Current [%s]

The lamp has failed the gain check. [%s1 nm / %s2 Gain]. Please change the lamp.

Bad language database version. Language database version [%s] Not OK, version [%s] = language database version required [%s] number.

-

-

Motor offset value out of range. [%s1] = motor name. [%s2] = position name. [%s3] = old value, new value.

Light intensity out of range

Loading Module [%s]: Not OK

The light intensity on air, measured in the position 1 of an empty sector of the Check the optical bench, reaction tray adjustment reaction tray, is out of the acceptable and clean the reaction tray. range (between 57200 and 65535) during the initialization.

Shut down and switch the instrument off and on.

Problem when configuring the Reagent Barcode Reagent barcode reader configuration Reader failed.

Check the barcode labels on cassettes and reagent racks.

Check the cable from the computer to the mother board. Check the power supply on the mother board.

Action

Shut down and switch the instrument off and on.

At least two identical reagent barcodes.

Internal communication failed.

Error type / Description

Problem when configuring the Sample Barcode Sample barcode reader configuration Reader failed.

At least 2 identical Barcodes detected

Communication Problem

Message

Troubleshooting Error messages

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Code

602

603

604

605

606

607

608

609

Level

Warning

Warning

Warning

Warning

Warning

Warning

Warning

Warning

Error type / Description

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Used Cuvette Holder Missing

Manual Cuvette Loading Door Open

Reagent Door Open

Main Cover Open

This Patient ID [%s] is a reserved code

This Sample ID [%s] is a reserved code

No Ordered Sample on Sample Tray

Position sample tubes on the sample tray.

Add new cuvette segments. Check the cuvette segment sensor adjustment. Check the voltages on the mother board: J38 Pin2-3 (24 V), Pin1-2 (without cuvette segment 5 V, with cuvette segment 0 V). Check the cleanness of the optical bench lenses.

Action

Unload rack is not detected by the mechanical switch, located on the cuvette changer.

Reinstall the unload rack. Check the "rack used segment in position" sensor, connector J26 on the mother board.

Reaction tray flap door open, detected by Close the reaction tray flap door. the switch located on the reaction tray Check the flap door switch, connector J10 on the upper case. mother board.

Detected by the reagent door magnetic switch.

Close the reagent door. Check the reagent door switch, connector J29 Pin1-2 on the mother board. To avoid reagent tray cover alarms when disconnecting connector J29, make a short circuit between the black and white wires on the connector right below the reagent tray.

Close the main cover. Check the main cover switch, connector J30 on Detected by the main cover mechanical the mother board. switch. Connector J30 can be disconnected without triggering any alarm on the instrument.

The patient ID in brackets, programmed from the Host, contains the "AUTO_SID" Modify the Patient ID from the Host. prefix. [%s] = Patient ID.

The sample ID in brackets, programmed from the Host, contains the "AUTO_SID" Modify the Sample ID from the Host. prefix. [%s] = Sample ID.

No ordered sample tube on the sample tray.

Not Enough Clean Cuvettes on Reaction Tray to Less than four new cuvettes on the Start Analysis reaction tray.

Message

Troubleshooting Error messages

6 - 27

Code

610

611

612

613

614

616

617

618

619

620

621

622

623

Level

Warning

6 - 28

Warning

Warning

Warning

Warning

Warning

Warning

Warning

Warning

Warning

Warning

Warning

Warning

Fill the water tank. Check the voltage of the water tank empty sensor on the mother board: J31 Pin3-4 (water 0 V, no water 5 V). To avoid water level detection alarms when disconnecting connector J31, make a short circuit between Pin 3 and 4. WARNING: This will disabled the waste tank level detection. Empty the waste tank. Check the voltage of the waste tank full sensor on the mother board: J31 Pin1-2 (empty 0 V, full 5 V).

Detected by the level switch, located in the water tank.

Detected by the level switch, located in the waste tank.

-

Make sure that the cleaning solution is positioned on the reagent tray.

Make sure that the cleaning solution is positioned on the reagent tray.

Access to electronic key is impossible

Instrument/key communication failed.

Serial number on the instrument is different from serial number on the electronic key.

Serial ## on the electronic key is incompatible with serial ## on memory

-

Check the serial number entered in the System Configuration menu.

Serial number recording on the electronic key has failed.

Write error on the electronic key

A request, programmed from the Host, does not comply with the ASTM format. Check and modify the request from the Host. The fields sample ID, action code or sample type contain an incorrect value.

L.I.S. order can't be performed for SID [sample ID]: incorrect value [value] in field [field]

-

At least two sample racks with the same Check the ID of sample racks. barcode.

Database save failed.

At least two sample racks with the same Check the ID of sample racks. barcode.

Stabilization or calibration in progress.

ISE module cleaning failed.

Needles cleaning failed.

Manually push the mixer down. Check the "mixer present switch", connector J28 Detected by the "mixer present switch". on the mother board. Connector J28 can be disconnected without triggering any alarm on the instrument.

Action

Error type / Description

Sample Rack Duplicate Detected

Database save not OK

Sample Rack Duplicate Detected

ISE Module busy

ISE cleaning failed

System cleaning failed

Mixer missing

Waste Tank Full

Water Tank Empty

Message

Troubleshooting Error messages

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Code

624

625

626

627

628

629

630

631

632

Level

Warning

Warning

Warning

Warning

Warning

Warning

Warning

Warning

Warning

Error type / Description

Check the reagent needle and clean it if necessary. Check the reagent syringe and hydraulic circuit. Recalibrate the reagent pressure sensor. -

The calibration of the reagent pressure sensor has failed. The database saved on [%s1] has been restored by [%s2]. [%s1] = date and time. [%s2] = user name.

Spectrophotometer gain reaches limit. [%s1] = wavelength. [%s2] = gain. The lamp will need to be replaced soon. The gain reaches the limit of the acceptable range (between 95 and 98%) during the initialization.

Restore database saved on [%s1] by [%s2]

The lamp is dying, it is still operational but you will need to change it soon. [%s1 nm / %s2 Gain].

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN Replace the sample tube to its previous position.

Check the barcode label on the sample rack.

The sample rack barcode is not read. [%s1] = position number on the sample tray. [%s2] = Sample ID.

Rack label not read on sector [%s1] for SID: [%s2]

The sample tube has been removed during the analysis. SID [%s1] on position [%s2] no longer displayed [%s1] = Sample ID. [%s2] = rack position.

Check the barcode label on the sample rack.

The sample rack barcode is not read. [%s] = position number on the sample tray.

Rack label not read on sector [%s]

Pressure Reagent calibration failed

Pressure Sample calibration failed

Check the sample needle and clean it if necessary. Check the sample syringe and hydraulic circuit. Recalibrate the sample pressure sensor.

The sample tube has been moved (for a sample that is for validation or validated). Replace the sample tube to its previous position. [%s] = rack position or Sample ID.

See 1.2. Sampling alarms, page 6-38.

Action

The calibration of the sample pressure sensor has failed.

Completed Sample [%s] is now detected on Rack.Pos [%s]

One of the following sampling alarms is triggered: - MISMATCH [%s1]: Sample [%s2] has been detected instead - POS_CHANGE of ordered sample [%s2] - BARCODE_DUPLICATE. [%s1] = sampling alarm. [%s2] = rack position or Sample ID.

Message

Troubleshooting Error messages

6 - 29

6 - 30

640

641

642

644

Warning

Warning

Warning

637

Warning

Warning

636

Warning

639

635

Warning

Warning

634

Warning

638

633

Warning

Warning

Code

Level

-

Check the USB flash drive.

The sample rack has been moved during the analysis. Replace the sample rack to its previous position. [%s1] = rack number. [%s2] = Sample ID.

The sample rack has been moved during the analysis. Replace the sample rack to its previous position. [%s] = rack number.

Archive database save failed.

Results save on the USB flash drive failed.

Check the reagent and replace it if necessary. Not enough solution to perform a Activate the reagent in the Reagent cleaning required from the Customer Configuration menu. Services menu or during the shutdown. Rerun the cleaning from the Customer Services [%s] = solution short name. menu or rerun the shutdown.

Configure the sample rack in the System Configuration menu.

LIS order cannot be performed. No order information available for PID [patient ID].

There is no O frame (Order) for the P frame (Patient).

Ask the IT Services Company to check the LIS configuration.

The analyses have been performed Worklist performed with reagent tray temperature though the temperature in the Rerun the analyses after performing the [temperature] out of the range (acceptable range) refrigerated area of reagent tray was out appropriate controls. of range.

Rack position modified [%s1] for SID: [%s2]

Rack position modified [%s]

Saving archive database failed

Unable to save results onto USB stick

Not enough cleaner solution [%s]

Rack [%s1] on sector [%s2] not configured

The sample rack is not configured. [%s1] = rack number. [%s2] = position number on the sample tray.

-

The column configuration has been restored the [%s1] by [%s2]. Restore column configuration the [%s1] by [%s2] [%s1] = date and time. [%s2] = user name.

Check the sample barcode label.

The sample barcode is not read. [%s1] = Sample ID. [%s2] = rack position. -

Action

Error type / Description

The system configuration has been restored the [%s1] by [%s2]. Restore system configuration the [%s1] by [%s2] [%s1] = date and time. [%s2] = user name.

SID [%s1] on position [%s2] not read

Message

Troubleshooting Error messages

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Code

645

646

647

648

649

650

654

Level

Warning

Warning

Warning

Warning

Warning

Warning

Warning

Ask the IT Services Company to check the LIS configuration. Ask the IT Services Company to check the LIS configuration. Ask the IT Services Company to check the LIS configuration.

Ask the IT Services Company to check the LIS configuration.

LIS order cannot be performed: communication/ There is no O frame (Order) for the P protocol error. Patient information for PID [patient frame (Patient). ID] could not be processed. Interrupted communication.

LIS order cannot be performed: communication/ protocol error. Information for PID [patient ID] and There is no L frame (Terminator) before related orders SID(s): [sample ID] could not be (End of Transmission). processed. There is no P frame (Patient) or O frame (Order) for the C frame (Comment). The Q frame (Query) comes with a P frame (Patient) or a O frame (Order) although only the H frame (Header) and the L frame (Terminator) are authorized with the Q frame. At least two Q frames comes together although only one Q frame is authorized.

A request, programmed from the Host, has one or several rejected tests. Each rejected test contains one of the following errors. - "Channel error": The test field does not contain a channel number. - "Disabled": The test is disabled on the Check and modify the request from the Host. instrument. - "Not configured": The test is not configured on the instrument. - "Sample type incompatible": The sample type of the test does not match the sample. The sample tube has been moved during Replace the sample tube to its previous position. the analysis.

LIS communication/protocol error. Comment information could not be processed.

LIS communication/protocol error. Query information could not be processed.

L.I.S. order with SID [sample ID] error. The following tests are rejected: [test no.1 (reason no.1), test no.2 (reason no.2), etc].

Position change: Sample [read barcode] was detected in [rack position of the sample tube], but it is expected to be in [rack position of the sample tube]

Action Ask the IT Services Company to check the LIS configuration.

Error type / Description

LIS order cannot be performed: communication/ There is no P frame (Patient) for the O protocol error. Order information for SID [sample frame (Order). ID] could not be processed.

Message

Troubleshooting Error messages

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

6 - 31

Code

655

Level

Warning

Error type / Description

Action

Mismatch: Sample [read barcode] was detected For a rack position, the sample ID in the Check the sample. in [rack position of the sample tube] instead of worklist is different from the read Modify the sample ID in the worklist or move the expected sample [expected barcode] barcode. sample tube to its correct position.

Message

Troubleshooting Error messages

6 - 32

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Troubleshooting Error messages

1.1.2. Additional information Special message during the instrument initialization ■ During

the database check/compacting, the following message can be displayed: "Unable to connect to database. Unable to compress or repair database. Do you really want to restore the database?".

■ Press

OK, then the following window is displayed:

This window lists the saved databases (the backup database name and date are displayed).

Each time a new worklist is created, the current database is saved on the instrument. Up to eight databases are saved and numbered from the most recent to the oldest.

■ Choose ■ Then,

a database by clicking the corresponding item.

press OK.

■ The

database is then restored and the following warning is triggered: #628 "Restore database saved on [%s1] by [%s2]".

Modifications carried out after this database backup are lost (calibrations, controls, patient results, reagent consumption, etc.)

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

6 - 33

Troubleshooting Error messages

Alarm #136 "Peripheral busy" With this alarm, you have a number corresponding to each peripheral. Please refer to the following table to see which peripheral is in trouble. #

Peripheral

1

Sample arm rotation motion

2

Reagent arm rotation motion

3

Sample arm vertical motion

4

Reagent arm vertical motion

5

Sample syringe motion

6

Reagent syringe motion

7

Sample tray rotation

8

Reagent tray rotation

9

Reaction tray rotation

10

Mixer XY motion

11

Cuvette changer vertical motion

12

Cuvette changer horizontal motion

13

Cuvette motion

14

Temperature regulation

15

Spectrophotometer

16

Pressure sensors

17

ISE module

18

Sample barcode reader

19

Reagent barcode reader

20

Reaction tray temperature

21

Reagent tray temperature

22

Reagent needle temperature

Management of temperature warnings and alarms This table will help you to understand how the temperature warnings and alarms are triggered. Code Type

Acceptable range

Time of stabilization

Reaction Tray Temperature regulation failed

37°C (+/- 0.25°C)

< 15 min.

37°C (+/- 1.5°C)

< 10 min.***

4-10°C

< 4 hours*

Message

The stability was not reached during the instrument initialization.

053

ALARM

054

ALARM

Heating Needle Temperature regulation failed

ALARM

Refrigerated Compartment Temperature regulation failed

055

The stability was reached during the instrument initialization but the temperature is now out of range.

123

WARNING Reaction tray temperature exceeds limits

37°C (+/- 0.25°C)

< 2 min.

053

ALARM

Reaction Tray Temperature regulation failed

37°C (+/- 0.5°C)

None

124

WARNING Heating needle temperature exceeds limits

37°C (+/- 1.5°C)

< 24 sec.

054

ALARM

37°C (+/- 3°C)

None

305

WARNING Reagent tray temperature exceeds limits**

4-10°C

< 30 min.

2-12°C

None

055

6 - 34

ALARM

Heating Needle Temperature regulation failed Refrigerated Compartment Temperature regulation failed

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Troubleshooting Error messages

* Every hour from the start of the cooling unit, the temperature in the refrigerated area of the reagent tray (if it is still out of the acceptable range) is checked to ensure that it is decreasing by at least two degrees per hour. If not, the alarm #055 "Refrigerated Compartment Temperature regulation failed" is triggered. ** Before performing the analyses, the reagent tray temperature is checked and if it is out of range, a dialog box is displayed: "The current reagent tray temperature [temperature] is out of the range (acceptable range). The results can be affected by this malfunction. We recommend you to perform controls. Do you still want to run analysis?". *** On each start of the heating needle temperature regulation, a test period of 5 seconds is performed. This test period consists in heating at its maximum power within 5 seconds, then checking that the temperature has increased by at least 1.5°C. If the temperature has increased of 1.5°C or more, then the heating needle temperature regulation works properly. If not, the alarm #142 "Reagent Needle Temperature Sensor Out of Order" is triggered and the heating needle temperature regulation is stopped.

Compressor overload alarm If the "Compressor overload" alarm is triggered for the first time, the warning #340 "Compressor overload: Refrigeration is stopped temporarily for 10 minutes" is triggered. This means that the cooling unit has stopped for ten minutes and automatically restarted afterwards. Once the cooling unit has automatically been restarted: ■ If a second "Compressor overload" alarm is triggered within five minutes, the alarm #147 "Compressor

overload: Refrigeration has been stopped" is triggered. This means that the cooling unit has stopped.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

6 - 35

Troubleshooting Error messages

■ After

five minutes, the cooling unit operation is back to normal. If a new "Compressor overload" alarm is triggered, it is considered as the first one.

6 - 36

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Check the LEDs state (DS2 and DS3) on the reagent level detection board. See Section 4: Electric and electronic The reagent level detection principles, 3.3. Reagent level detection board, page 4-20. board or the embedded Reinstall the software version. software version is defective. Replace the reagent level detection board. Run a calibration of the reagent level detection from Services > Customer Services > Cycles (please refer to the instrument user manual). Check the reagent arm wires, connections and board. Disconnect and reconnect J2 connector on the reagent level detection board. Check the LEDs state (DS2 and DS3) on the reagent level detection board. See Section 4: Electric and electronic principles, 3.3. Reagent level detection board, page 4-20. Replace the reagent level detection board.

Defective card (Autotest)

Defective card (Category)

Calibration not performed

Reference error

Calibration failed

001

002

004

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

005

007

008

009

Rerun a calibration of the reagent level detection from Services > Customer Services > Cycles (please refer to the instrument user manual). Replace the reagent needle, the reagent level detection board. Check the reagent arm wires, connections and board. Replace the reagent level detection board. Check the reagent arm wires, connections and board. Replace the reagent level detection board.

The calibration has failed.

The reagent level detection board is busy.

The reagent level detection board is absent or incompatible.

Card busy

Absent or incompatible card

Rerun a calibration of the reagent level detection from Services > Customer Services > Cycles (please refer to the instrument user manual). Reference measurement on air Check the LEDs state (DS2 and DS3) on the reagent level detection board. See Section 4: Electric and electronic out of range. principles, 3.3. Reagent level detection board, page 4-20. Replace the reagent needle, the reagent level detection board.

No valid calibration of the reagent level detection.

Action Check the reagent arm wires, connections and board. Check the LEDs state (DS2 and DS3) on the reagent level detection board. See Section 4: Electric and electronic principles, 3.3. Reagent level detection board, page 4-20. Replace the reagent level detection board.

Error type

The reagent level detection board is defective (detected during instrument initialization).

Code Message

This table lists the different errors that can appear on the reagent level detection board and trigger the system alarm #157 "Error card reagent detection [error %s1: %s2]".

Error on the reagent level detection board

Troubleshooting Error messages

6 - 37

Troubleshooting Error messages

1.2.

Sampling alarms Sampling alarms are displayed on the Sampling Exception tab of the Test Review menu.

If a sampling alarm is triggered, follow the instructions given in the following table.

6 - 38

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Action Check the sample. Check the reagent and replace it if necessary. Activate the reagent in the Reagent Configuration menu. Check the reagent and replace it if necessary. Activate the reagent in the Reagent Configuration menu.

Insufficient volume (detected by the reagent needle). The reagent is then inactivated. Tests in progress for this reagent are interrupted.

Air bubbles or insufficient volume (detected by the reagent pressure sensor). Check the reagent and replace it if necessary. Activate The reagent is then inactivated. the reagent in the Reagent Configuration menu. Tests in progress for this reagent are interrupted.

Check the sample. The sample needle may be clogged (detected by the sample pressure sensor). Make sure that the sample needle is not clogged and Tests in progress for this sample are interrupted. clean it if necessary. Run a sample pressure calibration.

Check the sample needle and tubing. The sample needle may be clogged (detected by the sample pressure sensor). Run a sample pressure calibration. The reagent is then inactivated. Check the reagent and replace it if necessary. Activate Tests in progress for this reagent are interrupted. the reagent in the Reagent Configuration menu.

Check the reagent. Activate the reagent in the Reagent Configuration menu.

Insufficient volume (detected by the sample needle). The reagent is then inactivated. Tests in progress for this reagent are interrupted.

Air bubbles or insufficient volume (detected by the sample pressure sensor). Check the reagent and replace it if necessary. Activate The reagent is then inactivated. the reagent in the Reagent Configuration menu. Tests in progress for this reagent are interrupted.

Check the sample.

Insufficient volume (detected by the sample needle). Tests in progress for this sample are interrupted.

Air bubbles or insufficient volume (detected by the sample pressure sensor). Check the sample. Tests in progress for this sample are interrupted.

Check the reagent needle and tubing. Run a reagent pressure calibration. Check the reagent and replace it if necessary. Activate the reagent in the Reagent Configuration menu.

Error type

The reagent needle may be clogged (detected by the reagent pressure sensor). The reagent is then inactivated. Tests in progress for this reagent are interrupted.

The sample may be capped. Tests in progress for this sample are interrupted.

The reagent may be capped. The reagent is then inactivated. Tests in progress for this reagent are interrupted.

Message

SPLE_EMPTY

SOLUTION_EMPTY/SN

SOLUTION_EMPTY/RN

SAMPLE_FOAM

SOLUTION_FOAM/SN

SOLUTION_FOAM/RN

SAMPLE_FIBRIN

SOLUTION_CLOGGING/SN

SOLUTION_CLOGGING/RN

SAMPLE_SHOCK

SOLUTION_SHOCK

Troubleshooting Error messages

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

6 - 39

6 - 40 Check the sample. Modify the sample ID in the worklist or move the sample tube to its correct position.

For a rack position, the sample ID in the worklist is different from the read barcode (Sampling status).

Air bubbles or insufficient volume (detected by the sample pressure sensor). Check the sample. Tests in progress for this sample are interrupted.

Air bubbles or insufficient volume (detected by the sample pressure sensor). Check the reagent and replace it if necessary. Activate The reagent is then inactivated. the reagent in the Reagent Configuration menu. Tests in progress for this reagent are interrupted.

Air bubbles or insufficient volume (detected by the reagent pressure sensor). Check the reagent and replace it if necessary. Activate The reagent is then inactivated. the reagent in the Reagent Configuration menu. Tests in progress for this reagent are interrupted.

The reagent is missing.

MISMATCH

INC_SAMPLE_PIPET

INC_SOLUTION_PIPET/SN

INC_SOLUTION_PIPET/RN

REAG_MISSING

The calibrator position is not configured.

Not enough reagent for the pending analyses.

Not enough cuvette segments in the load rack.

Calibrator Exp.

Pos. not set

NOT_ENOUGH_REAG

NOT_ENOUGH_CUV

The control has expired.

The calibrator has expired.

CLEANER_EXPIRED

CTRL_EXPIRED

Replace the cleaner.

The cleaner has expired. It then cannot be used for the pending analyses.

DIL_EXPIRED

No current valid calibration for this test (Control).

Replace the diluent.

The diluent has expired. It then cannot be used for the pending analyses.

REAG_EXPIRED

The calibrator is missing.

Replace the reagent.

The reagent has expired. It then cannot be used for the pending analyses.

CLEANER_LOCKED

Calibrator Miss

Activate the cleaner in the Reagent Configuration menu.

The cleaner is inactivated. It then cannot be used for the pending analyses.

DIL_LOCKED

No Cal. in Memory

Activate the diluent in the Reagent Configuration menu.

The diluent is inactivated. It then cannot be used for the pending analyses.

REAG_LOCKED

Replace the control.

Place the calibrator.

Run a calibration for this test.

Add new cuvette segments in the load rack.

Replace the reagent.

Configure the calibrator position in the Calibration/ Control menu.

Replace the calibrator.

Activate the reagent in the Reagent Configuration menu.

The reagent is inactivated. It then cannot be used for the pending analyses.

CLEANER_MISSING

Place the diluent on reagent tray. Place the cleaner on reagent tray.

The diluent is missing.

The cleaner is missing.

DIL_MISSING

Place the reagent on reagent tray.

Action

Error type

Message

Troubleshooting Error messages

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Check the sample. Modify the sample ID in the worklist or move the sample tube to its correct position.

For a rack position, the sample ID in the worklist is different from the read barcode (All status, Identification mode).

The sample tube has been moved during the analysis.

A sampling alarm has interrupted the tests in progress.

Two sample tubes having the same barcode are placed on the sample tray.

MISMATCH

POS_CHANGE

INTERRUPT

Barcode Dup.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN Check the barcode label. Replace the sample tube to its previous position.

No active cassette for this reagent.

The electrode is inactivated.

No active cassette for this cleaner.

No active cassette for this diluent.

The barcode label of the sample rack is not read.

The sample tube has been removed whereas all the tests of the sample are not finished.

The barcode label of the sample tube is not read.

The sample tube has been removed during the analysis.

The sample rack has been moved during the analysis.

ACTIVE_REAGENT_ ABX_CASSETTE_MISSING

Electrode disabled

ACTIVE_CLEANER_ ABX_CASSETTE_MISSING

ACTIVE_DILUANT_ ABX_CASSETTE_MISSING

RACK_NOT_READ

TUBE_NOT_PRESENT

TUBE_LABEL_NOT_READ

TUBE_DISAPPEAR

POSCHANGE_RACK

Replace the diluent.

Insuf. Cleaner

Replace the sample rack to its previous position.

Replace the sample tube to its previous position.

Check the barcode label.

Activate the cassette in the Reagent Configuration menu.

Activate the cassette in the Reagent Configuration menu.

Activate the electrode in the Customer Services menu.

Activate the cassette in the Reagent Configuration menu.

Replace the cleaner.

Not enough diluent for the pending analyses.

Not enough cleaner for the pending analyses.

Insuf. Diluent

Check and remove one of them if necessary.

The tests not completed will be performed at the next start.

Replace the sample tube to its previous position.

Check the sample. Modify the sample ID in the worklist or move the sample tube to its correct position.

For a rack position, the sample ID in the worklist is different from the read barcode (All status, Position mode).

MISMATCH

Run a calibration for this test. Run a control for this test.

No current valid calibration for this test (Patient sample).

Place the control.

No current valid control for this test (Patient sample).

The control is missing.

CTRL_MISSING

Configure the control position in the Calibration/ Control menu.

No Ctrl in Memory

The control position is not configured.

Pos. not set

Action

No Cal. in Memory

Error type

Message

Troubleshooting Error messages

6 - 41

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

2. Troubleshooting This guide is intended to provide help in solving problem situations that may appear when using the instrument. The actions described in this troubleshooting chapter must be undertaken if all the user troubleshooting steps, described in your user manual (refer to the "Maintenance and Troubleshooting" chapter), have been performed. For any situations that cannot be resolved by using this guide, please contact the International Technical Support department (ITS).

Services and repairs of the instrument should only be carried out by a fully trained technician.

2.1.

Chemistry problem In all cases, first perform the "Precision test" procedure. See RAS393: Check up after intervention, page 1.

2.1.1. Repeatability 1. Test T1 or P1 with CV > 1% Cause

Action

Worn syringe plunger tips.

Change the syringe plunger tips.

Improper mixing.

Check the mixer paddle rotation, coupling, position. Check the mixer XY motion.

Defective manifold, valves V1 or V2.

Clean the hydraulic system with bleach solution. Change the manifold block.

Bubbles in the pipetting system.

Check the straw position into the water tank. Check the airtightness of the hydraulic system. Change the manifold block, water pump.

Bubbles clung to the syringe plunger tips. Change the syringe plunger tips. Clogged sample needle.

6 - 42

Prime the hydraulic system. Change the sample needle.

Bubbles on the top of sample.

Remove the bubbles.

Lamp instability.

Change the lamp.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

2. Test T1 or P1 with CV ≤ 1% but absorbance values out of the acceptable range Cause

Action

Contaminated or expired solution.

Use new ABX Pentra Qualitest Solution or ABX Pentra Precitest Solution, use fresh distilled water on the rack.

Defect on the spectrophotometer or pipetting.

Manually dilute the control solution and measure the absorbance value in the Spectro menu. - Test T1: 2.5 µL of ABX Pentra Qualitest Solution + 587.5 µL of distilled water - Test P1: 3 µL of ABX Pentra Precitest Solution + 292 µL of distilled water If the absorbance value x 1000 is in the acceptable range, then there is a defect on the pipetting. Otherwise, check the spectrophotometer.

2.1.2. Blank out of range Cause

Action

Contaminated distilled water and tubing.

Check the distilled water integrity, resistivity > 5 Mohm.cm Perform the decontamination procedure.

Contaminated or expired reagent.

Use fresh reagent.

Use of cuvette segments non-approved by HORIBA Medical.

Use HORIBA Medical approved cuvette segments.

Re-used cuvette segments.

Cuvette segments are designed for single use only.

2.1.3. Calibration factor out of range Cause

Action

Contaminated distilled water and tubing.

Check the distilled water integrity, resistivity > 5 Mohm.cm Perform the decontamination procedure.

Contaminated or expired calibrator, reagent.

Use fresh calibrator, reagent.

Bubbles/foam on the top of reagent (on cassette or reagent rack).

Remove the bubbles/foam.

For kinetic tests, temperature regulation problem.

Check the reaction tray temperature regulation. Change the reaction tray temperature sensor.

For user channels, not suitable calibration factor limits in the application Redefine the calibration factor limits. configuration.

2.1.4. Control out of range Cause

Action

Error in the confidence range configuration.

Check the configured values with the corresponding annex.

Expired calibration, reagent.

Recalibrate with fresh calibrator. Replace the reagent and recalibrate.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

6 - 43

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

2.2.

2.3.

Windows and computer error

Error

Action

General exception

Shut down and restart the computer. Perform a Checkdisk. Purge the Rs_Data and Bugs folders. If the error continues to appear, reinstall the software version.

Boot disk failure

Reinstall the Windows master and the software version.

Cooling unit 2.3.1. Primary checking ■

The warning #340 is not necessarily a cooling unit defect. You should wait 10 minutes to let the compressor cool down the temperature.

■

Check the compatibility of the voltage and frequency with the main power supply (see Section 8: Exploded views, 24. Cooling unit, page 8-40).

■ Make

sure that the laboratory temperature is between +15°C and +32°C.

■ Check ■ Make

the fuses (see Section 8: Exploded views, 24. Cooling unit, page 8-40).

sure that the temperature target is +6°C (Services > Diagnostics > Heating).

■ The

minimum software version required for ABX Pentra 400 is 5.0.6. No minimum software version required for Pentra C400.

■ The

cooling unit maintenances have been performed: RAS378: 6 month maintenance, 4. Cooling unit, page 3 RAS379: Yearly maintenance, 2. Cooling unit, page 7

6 - 44

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

2.3.2. Diagnostic sequence (warning #305, alarms #055 and #147)

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

6 - 45

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

CU401 fan is running?

■ Check

if there is air flow at the back of the CU401.

AIR FLOW

Regulation is functioning well?

"CLAC" ■ From

the Heating menu (Services > Diagnostics > Heating), press Start and check by ear if the solenoid valve has switched ("CLAC").

Cable defective? ■ Check

the cable conductivity with an ohmmeter (see Section 4: Electric and electronic principles, 8.2. DAC034A (1201891034): CABLE, CHILLER CABLE, page 4-37).

Control board defective? ■

6 - 46

Check the voltage on the control board (see Section 3: Technology, 3.2.3. Cooling unit electric diagram, page 3-18).

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

5 V on PIN 3 of CU401 connector?

■ From

the Heating menu (Services > Diagnostics > Heating), press Stop and then Start.

■ Check

the voltage of the PIN 3 of the CU401 connector (see Section 4: Electric and electronic principles, 8.2. DAC034A (1201891034): CABLE, CHILLER CABLE, page 4-37).

Pump is running?

■ Check

if the pump is running: the liquid is moving in the tank.

Liquid throughput OK?

■ Disconnect

the IN tubing from the CU401 and put it above the tank in order to make sure that the liquid throughput is correct.

Tubing pinched or clogged? ■

Check if the cooling liquid tubing is pinched or unclog the circuit (see Section 3: Technology, 2.3. Cooling system diagram, page 3-11).

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

6 - 47

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Temperature sensor and fans?

■ Check

if the reagent tray fans are working.

■ Check

with an external temperature probe if the temperature inside the reagent tray is the same than the temperature displayed in the Heating menu (Services > Diagnostics > Heating).

2.4.

What to do if you are having intermittent alarms #066 or 114? This troubleshooting guide is intended to help you in solving problems of intermittent alarms #66 or #114: "Low pressure on the Sample or Reagent hydraulic system". We recommend performing the following steps in the indicated sequence: ■ 2.4.1.

Pressure sensors activation, configuration, calibration, page 6-48

■ 2.4.2.

Improving the hydraulic system airtightness, page 6-50

■ 2.4.3.

Checking the sample needle throughput, page 6-52

■ 2.4.4.

Checking the water pump pressure, page 6-52

■ 2.4.5.

Replacing the pressure sensors and the pressure board, page 6-52

2.4.1. Pressure sensors activation, configuration, calibration 2.4.1.1. To activate the pressure sensors 1. Go to Services > System Configuration > Analyser. 2. Make sure that the reagent and sample pressure sensors are activated.

6 - 48

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Both pressure sensors must be activated. Otherwise, erroneous test results could occur.

2.4.1.2. To configure the pressure sensors 1. Go to Services > Diagnostics > Pressure. 2. Check the values KA, KB, Low Pressure and High Pressure for the sample pressure sensor and modify them if necessary. 3. Check the values KA, KB, Low Pressure and High Pressure for the reagent pressure sensor and modify them if necessary.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

6 - 49

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

2.4.1.3. To calibrate the pressure sensors 1. Go to Services > Customer Services > Cycles. 2. Press Reagent pressure calibration and wait until the calibration is finished. 3. Press Sample pressure calibration and wait until the calibration is finished.

2.4.2. Improving the hydraulic system airtightness

A

1. Remove the heat shrink tape (A). Disconnect the tubing from the water straw. Cut the tubing and reconnect it. Instead of doing that, you can replace the water straw assy ref. XBA568F (1209114568).

6 - 50

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

2. Check the inner water connection on the water / waste connection assembly (B).

B D 3. Disconnect the tubing from the water pump inlet (C). Cut the tubing, add a tube clamp ref. 3027030 (1223027030), reconnect the tubing and tighten the tube clamp. 4. Make sure that the tube clamp at the water pump outlet (D) is well-tightened.

C

5. Remove the collar ref. EAJ003A (1202261003) and disconnect the tubing from the internal water tank inlet (E). Cut the tubing, add a tube clamp ref. 3027030 (1223027030), reconnect the tubing and tighten the tube clamp.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

E

6 - 51

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

6- If necessary, replace the filter located on the right-hand side, at the back of the instrument. Observe the fitting direction indicated by the arrow. Make sure that both tube clamps are well-tightened.

7. Make sure that no air bubbles are visible in the syringes and check for leaks. In case of problem, check the syringe plunger tips, the syringes and the manifold assembly (V1-V2).

If you are still having intermittent alarms #66 or #114, go to 2.4.3. Checking the sample needle throughput, page 6-52.

2.4.3. Checking the sample needle throughput Refer to the "RAS378: 6 month maintenance" procedure to check the sample needle throughput. In case of problem, check the sample needle (clogged, bent) and the manifold assembly (V1-V2).

If you are still having intermittent alarms #66 or #114, go to 2.4.4. Checking the water pump pressure, page 6-52.

2.4.4. Checking the water pump pressure Refer to the "RAS389: Waste and water pumps replacement" procedure to check the water pump pressure (2.1 bars +/- 0.1). In case of problem, check the filter and the water pump.

If you are still having intermittent alarms #66 or #114, go to 2.4.5. Replacing the pressure sensors and the pressure board, page 6-52.

2.4.5. Replacing the pressure sensors and the pressure board Refer to the "RAS442: Pressure sensors" procedure to replace the pressure sensors and the pressure board, adjust the pressure board voltage, and then, activate, configure and calibrate the pressure sensors.

6 - 52

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

2.5.

Other 2.5.1. Rejected cuvette segments Cause

Action

Use of cuvette segments non-approved by HORIBA Medical.

Use HORIBA Medical approved cuvette segments.

Re-used cuvette segments.

Cuvette segments are designed for single use only.

Lamp instability.

Check the lamp voltage (5.6 V). Change the lamp.

Dirty optical bench lenses.

Clean the optical bench lenses.

2.5.2. Not read or misread barcode Cause

Action

Bad adjustment of the barcode reader.

Readjust the barcode reader.

Bad barcode label.

Check the barcode label with the supplier.

2.5.3. No sound Cause

Action

Incompatible software version.

Install the latest higher software version.

Incompatible hardware.

Install the KIT, SOUND+USB UPDATE KIT P400.

Defective loudspeaker.

Check the loudspeaker connectors. Change the loudspeaker.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

6 - 53

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

6 - 54

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Section 7: ISE module

1. ISE module description ................................................................................ 7 - 2 1.1. Measuring principle ...................................................................................................................7 - 2 1.2. Cycles description .....................................................................................................................7 - 6 1.3. ISE module status description .................................................................................................7 - 21 1.4. ISE module hydraulic diagram .................................................................................................7 - 22 1.5. Electric and electronic principles .............................................................................................7 - 24 1.6. ISE software description ..........................................................................................................7 - 28 1.7. Additional information ..............................................................................................................7 - 36

2. Error messages ........................................................................................... 7 - 38 3. Procedures .................................................................................................. 7 - 42 3.1. Maintenance by customers .....................................................................................................7 - 42 3.2. ISE 6 month maintenance ........................................................................................................7 - 42 3.3. ISE yearly maintenance ...........................................................................................................7 - 42 3.4. ISE procedure list ....................................................................................................................7 - 43 3.5. ISE maintenance check up summary ......................................................................................7 - 43 RAS441: ISE module installation RAS388: ISE module maintenance RAS537: ISE module check up after intervention RAS538: ISE module spare part replacement RAS539: Dummy PENTRA software use RAS540: ISE module software version installation

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

7-1

ISE module ISE module description

1. ISE module description 1.1.

Measuring principle

1.1.1. Measurement description The ISE module is designed to determine sodium, potassium and chloride concentrations in serum, plasma or urine samples. It uses three Ion Selective Electrodes (ISE) for the measurement of sodium, potassium and chloride concentrations and one reference electrode. The measurement principle is based on the interaction between moveable free ions in a sample solution and an active sensing unit (ion selective sensing electrode). An ion-selective membrane separates the sample solution, where the electrolyte concentration is unknown, from the electrode electrolyte, where the concentration is known. Potentiometry principle

Voltage measurement

Reference Electrode

Selective electrode (for the ion measured)

Electrolyte (known concentration)

Selective membrane

-

+

+

-

-

+

+

+

-

+

-

+

+

+

+

-

+

The membrane itself consists of a specific type of material which can react with one type of ions. Each ion selective electrode is equipped with a different type of membrane: ■ Sodium

electrode: a glass membrane selective to Na+ ions.

■ Potassium ■ Chloride

electrode: a PVC crown ether membrane which is selective to K+ ions.

electrode: a plastic membrane electrode selective to Cl- ions.

The four electrodes are compact and located in a Faraday cage to minimize the influence of electromagnetic fields. This electrode layout allows a simultaneous measurement of the Na+, K+ and Cl- concentration. The electrodes are supplied ready for use and no assembly is required.

7-2

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

ISE module ISE module description

Reference electrode

Sodium electrode

Sealing plug O-ring Electrode

Sealing plug O-ring Electrode

Electrolyte

Electrolyte

Electrode body

Electrode body

Reference tube Na tube with glass membrane

Waste tube O-ring

Sealing-ring

Potassium electrode

Chloride electrode

Sealing plug

Sealing plug

O-ring

O-ring

Electrode

Electrode

Electrolyte Electrolyte Electrode body Electrode body PVC crown ether membrane

Plastic membrane

O-ring

O-ring

The electrode membrane can bind a selective type of ions whereby a potential change appears at the membrane/sample boundary.

Membrane

Ion selective membrane

+

+ + +

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

+

+

+

+

+

Δ mV

+ +

+ + +

Sample

+

+ + +

7-3

ISE module ISE module description

In order to measure this potential change, a reference electrode with a fixed potential is immersed in the same solution. The potential of the reference electrode is kept fixed and constant, by filling it with an electrolyte that has a constant concentration. Sodium, potassium and chloride are measured on: ■ undiluted

serum and plasma samples: 60 µL of sample is pipetted by the sample needle and 50 µL is dispensed into the ISE module sample cup.

■ diluted

urine samples: 20 µL of sample is pipetted by the sample needle and 10 µL is dispensed and diluted with 60 µL of low standard directly into the ISE module sample cup.

A syringe is used to transport the required solution through the electrodes. The sample flows through the air sensor to reach the ISE block. The air detection by air sensor indicates the end of sample transfer from the sample cup to the ISE block. The reference solution flows through the reference electrode and merges with the sample downstream of the ISE block. The electrical potential is measured between each ion selective electrode and the reference electrode. This measured potential is proportional to the ion concentration. STD1 STD2 Low Waste

Syringe 1

Ref.

High

Syringe 2

REF

Ref Na

Cl

K

Air sensor

VOLTMETER

Cup

The potential values ascertained are amplified, digitized and finally sent via the RS232C serial interface to the instrument.

7-4

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

ISE module ISE module description

1.1.2. Calibration The calculation of the ion concentration in a sample solution is derivated from a calibration curve. When carrying out a calibration, the ion selective electrodes and the reference electrode are brought in contact with a series of solutions (standards) with known concentration. The voltages are recorded. The concentration of each standard is plotted against the measured voltage (in millivolts) on semi-logarithmic paper. The straight line drawn through these points is called a calibration curve.

mV

K+ = 37 to 67 mv/dec K+ ClNa = 38 to 65 mv/dec

Na

Cl- = -53 to -28 mv/dec

CONCENTRATION Std1 Std1 Std1

Std2

Std2 Std2

The electrical potential measured between these electrodes is proportional to the concentration of the specific ion, and can be described by the Nernst equation: E = E0 + S * log ai where: E: Measured potential between ion selective electrode and reference electrode E0: Standard potential of electrode assembly S: Electrode slope (Nernst factor) ai: Activity of measured ion The S slopes of the three electrodes are determined with two standard solutions of known concentration. The values are stored by the on board microprocessor system.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

7-5

ISE module ISE module description

1.2.

Cycles description

This chapter describes the ISE module cycles: ■ Global

initialization, page 7-7

■ Initialization

of the flow system, page 7-7

■ Two

point calibration, page 7-8

■ One

point calibration, page 7-10

■ Serum ■ Urine

measurement, page 7-11

measurement, page 7-13

■ Priming

of the flow system, page 7-14

■ Stabilization

of flow system, page 7-15

■ Draining,

page 7-16

■ Cleaning,

page 7-16

■ Wake

up, page 7-17

■ Keep

ready, page 7-17

■ Ready,

page 7-18

■ Activation, ■ Shut

page 7-18

down, page 7-19

■ Electrode

replacement, page 7-19

■ Standard

1 reagent check, page 7-19

■ Standard

2 reagent check, page 7-20

■ Reference ■ LB

reagent check, page 7-20

sensor check, page 7-21

The cycles described on the following pages correspond to the ISE software version V1.53 for the ABX Pentra 400 or V2.00 for the Pentra C400.

Caption Item Std1 Std2 R S1Mx S2Mx RM CSx SM UM S:x W:x

7-6

Definition ABX Pentra Standard 1, ref. A11A01717 ABX Pentra Standard 2, ref. A11A01718 ABX Pentra Reference 280 mL, ref. A11A01901 Measured potential of Standard 1 Measured potential of Standard 2 Measured potential of Reference solution Known concentration of Standard Measured concentration of sample (serum, plasma) Measured concentration of diluted sample (urine + Standard 1) ISE module status at the beginning and at the end of the cycle Warning

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

ISE module ISE module description

Global initialization

mV Initialization of flow system

Two point calibration

Std1/Std2/R

Std1/Std2

1

2

t S:6

S:0,1,2,3,4,5,6

1. The ISE module initializes the flow system (see Initialization of the flow system, page 7-7). 2. A two point calibration is run (see Two point calibration, page 7-8).

Initialization of the flow system

mV

Reagent detection

Rinsing (x4)

Rinsing (x4)

Rinsing

Std2

Std2

R Reagent detection + Keep condition in electrode

1

2

Rinsing (x6)

Rinsing

Rinsing

Std1

Std1

Std1

5

6

3

4

S:3,4,5,6

t S:5

1. Rinsing with Reference (4 times): Reference solution passes through the reference electrode then goes to waste. 2. Rinsing with Standard 2 (4 times): Standard 2 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, passes through the electrode then goes to waste. 3. Rinsing with Standard 1 (6 times): Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, passes through the electrode then goes to waste.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

7-7

ISE module ISE module description

4. Rinsing with Standard 2: Standard 2 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, detected by the LB sensor then goes to waste. During liquid check by the LB sensor, if Standard 2 is too much or not enough, warning #327 or #330 is triggered. The cycle is stopped. 5. Rinsing with Standard 1: Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, passes through the electrode then goes to waste. 6. Rinsing with Standard 1: Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated in the electrode (keep condition). The end of the aliquot is detected by the LB sensor. During liquid check by the LB sensor, if Standard 1 is too much or not enough, warning #322 or #325 is triggered. The cycle is stopped.

Two point calibration A two point calibration determines a slope and an offset from a high and low solution with known concentrations. See Standards concentration, page 7-37. The slope and the offset are used to determine the patient sample concentration. Frequency: every 2 hours.

mV W:338 S2M1 W:335

W:338

W:337

W:337

S1M2 S1M1

S1M2

X6 max. Rinsing S1M3 Std1

1 S:4,5,6

2

3

4 3 sec.

5 3 sec.

S1M3

S1M3

X6 max. Rinsing Rinsing

X6 max.

Std1

Std1

6

7

8

S:6 or 4 (if 4 at the beginning)

1. First measurement of Standard 1 (S1M1): - Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated in the electrode. The end of the aliquot is detected by the LB sensor. During liquid check by the LB sensor, if Standard 1 is too much or not enough, warning #322 or #325 is triggered. The cycle is stopped. - The potential of Standard 1 is measured. If the potential of S1M1 is out of range (see Range of normal values (Standard 1) triggering warning #336, page 7-37), warning #336 is triggered and the cycle is stopped. - Standard 1 goes to waste.

7-8

t

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

ISE module ISE module description

2. Second measurement of Standard 1 (S1M2): - Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated in the electrode. The end of the aliquot is detected by the LB sensor. During liquid check by the LB sensor, if Standard 1 is too much or not enough, warning #322 or #325 is triggered. The cycle is stopped. - A second measurement of Standard 1 potential is run and compared with the first measurement (S1M1). If the difference in potential between S1M1 and S1M2 is out of range (see Repeatability normal range (Standard 1) triggering warning #337, page 7-37), S1M2 is rerun and the updated S1M2 is compared with S1M1 again. S1M2 is rerun maximum 6 times. If it is more than 6 times, warning #337 is triggered and the cycle is stopped. - Standard 1 goes to waste. 3. First measurement of Standard 2 (S2M1): - Standard 2 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated in the electrode. The end of the aliquot is detected by the LB sensor. During liquid check by the LB sensor, if Standard 2 is too much or not enough, warning #327 or #330 is triggered. The cycle is skipped to the rescue cycle (see Two point calibration rescue cycle, page 7-10). - The potential of Standard 2 is measured. If the difference in potential during the last 3 seconds of measurement is ≥ 0.40 mV, warning #338 ("Calibration Error #1") is triggered. - Standard 2 goes to waste. 4. Rinsing with Standard 1: Standard 1 is dispensed into the sample cup, passes through the electrode then goes to waste. 5. Third measurement of Standard 1 (S1M3): - Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated in the electrode. The end of the aliquot is detected by the LB sensor. During liquid check by the LB sensor, if Standard 1 is too much or not enough, warning #322 or #325 is triggered. The cycle is stopped. - A third measurement of Standard 1 potential is run and compared with the Standard 2 measurement (S2M1). If the difference in potential between S2M1 and S1M3 is out of range (see Sensitivity normal range (difference between Standard 1 and Standard 2) triggering warning #335, page 7-37), warning #335 is triggered and the rescue cycle is run (see Two point calibration rescue cycle, page 7-10). Then, the cycle is stopped. If the difference in potential during the last 3 seconds of measurement is ≥ 0.40 mV, warning #338 ("Calibration Error #1") is triggered. If the difference in potential between S1M2 and S1M3 is ≥ 0.40 mV, S1M3 is rerun and the updated S1M3 is compared with S1M2 again. S1M3 is rerun maximum 6 times. If it is more than 6 times, warning #337 is triggered. The slope in sensitive electrode is calculated from the values of the Standard 2 measurement (S2M1) and the third measurement of Standard 1 (S1M3): Slope = (S2M1-S1M3)/log ( CS2 ) CS1 Where: - S2M1 is the measured potential of Standard 2 - S1M3 is the measured potential of Standard 1 - CS2 is the known concentration of Standard 2 - CS1 is the known concentration of Standard 1 - Standard 1 goes to waste. 6. Rinsing with Standard 1: Standard 1 is dispensed into the sample cup, passes through the electrode then goes to waste.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

7-9

ISE module ISE module description

7. Rinsing with Standard 1: Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated in the electrode. Standard 1 stays in the electrode (keep condition). 8. Third measurement of Standard 1 (S1M3): this measurement is rerun to check the correct functioning of the valves. The S1M3 is rerun maximum 6 times.

Two point calibration rescue cycle

mV Reagent detection Keep condition in electrode

Rinsing

Rinsing

Rinsing

Std1

Std1

Std1

1

2

3

t

1. Rinsing with Standard 1: Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, passes through the electrode then goes to waste. 2. Rinsing with Standard 1: Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated in the electrode. The end of the aliquot is detected by the LB sensor. Standard 1 goes to waste. During liquid check by the LB sensor, if Standard 1 is too much or not enough, warning #322 or #325 is triggered. The cycle is stopped. 3. Rinsing with Standard 1: Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated in the electrode. Standard 1 stays in the electrode (keep condition).

One point calibration A one point calibration monitors the electrodes stability by passing Standard 1 through the electrode. Frequency: every 15 minutes except when patient or control samples have to be run.

mV W:338

Reagent detection

W:337

Keep condition in electrode

S1M2

S1M

X6 max. Rinsing Std1

1 S:4,5,6

S1M1

Rinsing Std1

2

3 3 sec.

t

S:identical to the initial status

1. Rinsing with Standard 1: Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, passes through the electrode then goes to waste.

7 - 10

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

ISE module ISE module description

2. First measurement of Standard 1 (S1M1): - Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated in the electrode. The end of the aliquot is detected by the LB sensor. During liquid check by the LB sensor, if Standard 1 is too much or not enough, warning #322 or #325 is triggered. The cycle is stopped. - The potential of Standard 1 is measured. If the difference in potential between S1M1 and the previous S1M is out of range (see Repeatability normal range (Standard 1) triggering warning #337, page 7-37), a second measurement of Standard 1 is run (S1M2) and the updated S1M2 is compared with S1M1. S1M2 is run maximum 6 times. If it is more than 6 times, warning #337 is triggered. The cycle is stopped. If the difference in potential during the last 3 seconds of measurement is ≥ 0.40 mV, warning #338 ("Calibration Error #1") is triggered. - Standard 1 goes to waste. 3. Rinsing with Standard 1: Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated in the electrode. Standard 1 stays in the electrode (keep condition).

Serum measurement

mV

W:338

SM Serum/Plasma (50 µL) Reagent detection + Keep condition in electrode

W:338

Rinsing S1M1

1 S:6

Std1

Std1

2

3

3 sec.

t 3 sec. S:6

1. Sample measurement: - 60 µL of sample (serum, plasma) is pipetted by the sample needle and 50 µL is dispensed into the ISE sample cup. - The sample is aspirated in the electrode. The end of the aliquot is detected by the LB sensor. During liquid check by the LB sensor, if sample is too much or not enough, warning #331 or #334 is triggered. The cycle is skipped to the rescue cycle (see Serum measurement rescue cycle, page 7-12). - The sample concentration is measured. If the difference in potential during the last 3 seconds of measurement is ≥ 0.40 mV, warning #338 ("ISE Error") is triggered. - Sample goes to waste.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

7 - 11

ISE module ISE module description

2. Rinsing with Standard 1: Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, passes through the electrode then goes to waste. 3. Measurement of Standard 1 (S1M1): - Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated in the electrode. The end of the aliquot is detected by the LB sensor. During liquid check by the LB sensor, if Standard 1 is too much or not enough, warning #322 or #325 is triggered. The cycle is stopped. - The potential of Standard 1 is measured. If the difference in potential during the last 3 seconds of measurement is ≥ 0.40 mV, warning #338 ("ISE Error") is triggered. The sample concentration is calculated from the values of the measured concentration of sample (SM), the measured potential of Standard 1 (S1M) and the slope obtained in the two point calibration. Dilution concentration = CS1 x 10^((SM-S1M)/Slope) Where: - SM is the measured concentration of sample - S1M is the measured potential of Standard 1 - Slope comes from the two point calibration - CS1 is the known concentration of Standard 1 - Standard 1 stays in the electrode (keep condition).

Serum measurement rescue cycle

mV

Reagent detection + Keep condition in electrode

S1M

W:337 S1M2 X6 max.

S1M

1

t

1. Measurement of Standard 1 (S1M): - Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated in the electrode. The end of the aliquot is detected by the LB sensor. During liquid check by the LB sensor, if Standard 1 is too much or not enough, warning #322 or #325 is triggered. The cycle is stopped. - The potential of Standard 1 is measured. If the difference in potential between the current S1M and the previous S1M is ≥ 0.40 mV, the rescue cycle is rerun (max. 6 times) after updating the previous S1M to the current S1M. If it is more than 6 times, warning #337 is triggered. The cycle is stopped. - Standard 1 stays in the electrode (keep condition).

7 - 12

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

ISE module ISE module description

Urine measurement

mV

W:338

UM Urine (10 µL)

+ Std1 (60 µL) Reagent detection + Keep condition in electrode

W:338 Rinsing

Rinsing

Std1

Std1

1 S:6

3

2 3 sec.

Rinsing Rinsing S1M1 Std1 Std1

4

5

6

t 3 sec. S:6

1. Rinsing with Standard 1: Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, passes through the electrode then goes to waste. 2. Sample measurement: - 60 µL of Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup. An air bubble is created (LV6 commutation and small aspiration by syringe 1). Then, LV6 commutes and Standard 1 is dispensed (through the top connector) into the ISE sample cup. This cycle will avoid contamination between Standard 1 and mixing solution. - 20 µL of sample (urine) is pipetted by the sample needle. 10 µL is dispensed into the ISE sample cup and diluted with Standard 1. - The sample is aspirated in the electrode. The end of the aliquot is detected by the LB sensor. During liquid check by the LB sensor, if sample is too much or not enough, warning #331 or #334 is triggered. The cycle is skipped to the rescue cycle (see Urine measurement rescue cycle, page 7-14). - The sample concentration is measured. If the difference in potential during the last 3 seconds of measurement is ≥ 0.40 mV, warning #338 ("ISE Error") is triggered. - Sample goes to waste. 3. Rinsing with Standard 1: Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup (from the LV6- inlet 3 to the middle inlet of the ISE sample cup), passes through the electrode then goes to waste. 4. Rinsing with Standard 1: Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup (from the LV6- inlet 1 to the upper inlet at the back of the ISE sample cup), passes through the electrode then goes to waste. 5. Rinsing with Standard 1: Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup (from the LV6- inlet 3 to the middle inlet of the ISE sample cup), passes through the electrode then goes to waste.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

7 - 13

ISE module ISE module description

6. Measurement of Standard 1 (S1M1): - Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated in the electrode. The end of the aliquot is detected by the LB sensor. - The potential of Standard 1 is measured. If the difference in potential during the last 3 seconds of measurement is ≥ 0.40 mV, warning #338 ("ISE Error") is triggered. The sample concentration is calculated from the values of the measured concentration of diluted sample (UM), the measured potential of Standard 1 (S1M) and the slope obtained in the two point calibration. Dilution concentration = CS1 x 10^((UM-S1M)/Slope) then, Concentration = 7 x Dilution concentration - 6 x S1M Where: - UM is the measured concentration of the diluted sample - S1M is the measured potential of Standard 1 - Slope obtained from the two point calibration - CS1 is the known concentration of Standard 1 - Standard 1 stays in the electrode (keep condition).

Urine measurement rescue cycle

mV

Reagent detection + Keep condition in electrode

S1M

W:337 S1M2 X6 max.

S1M

1

t

1. Measurement of Standard 1 (S1M): - Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated in the electrode. The end of the aliquot is detected by the LB sensor. During liquid check by the LB sensor, if Standard 1 is too much or not enough, warning #322 or #325 is triggered. The cycle is stopped. - The potential of Standard 1 is measured. If the difference in potential between the current S1M and the previous S1M is ≥ 0.40 mV, the rescue cycle is rerun (max. 6 times) after updating the previous S1M to the current S1M. If it is more than 6 times, warning #337 is triggered. The cycle is stopped. - Standard 1 stays in the electrode (keep condition).

Priming of the flow system The priming of the flow system cycle is the same as the initialization of the flow system (see Initialization of the flow system, page 7-7). The only difference is that the ISE module status is at the beginning 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 and at the end identical to the initial status.

7 - 14

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

ISE module ISE module description

Stabilization of flow system

mV Rinsing

Rinsing

R

Std2 Reagent detection

Rinsing

Rinsing Rinsing

Std1

1

2

3

Reagent detection + Keep condition in electrode

Rinsing Rinsing

Std1

Std1

Std1

Std1

4

5

6

7

S:4,5,6

t S:5

1. Rinsing with Reference: Reference solution passes through the reference electrode then goes to waste. 2. Rinsing with Standard 1: Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, passes through the electrode then goes to waste. 3. Rinsing with Standard 2: Standard 2 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, passes through the electrode then goes to waste. 4. Rinsing with Standard 1: Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, passes through the electrode then goes to waste. 5. Rinsing with Standard 1: Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated in the electrode. The end of the aliquot is detected by the LB sensor. Standard 1 goes to waste. 6. Rinsing with Standard 1: Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, passes through the electrode then goes to waste. 7. Rinsing with Standard 1: Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated in the electrode (keep condition). The end of the aliquot is detected by the LB sensor. During liquid check by the LB sensor, if Standard 1 is too much or not enough, warning #322 or #325 is triggered. The cycle is stopped.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

7 - 15

ISE module ISE module description

Draining

mV Rinsing (x6) Rinsing (x4)

Std2

R

Rinsing (x6) Std1

1

3

2

S:3,4,5,6

t S:3

1. Rinsing Reference (4 times): Reference solution passes through the reference electrode then goes to waste. 2. Rinsing with Standard 2 (6 times): Standard 2 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, passes through the electrode then goes to waste. 3. Rinsing wih Standard 1 (6 times): Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, passes through the electrode then goes to waste.

Cleaning

mV Cleaning Cleaning solution

Reagent detection twice + Waste Rinsing Std2

(80 µL)

Reagent detection + Keep condition in electrode 4 times Rinsing Std1

1 S:4,5,6

2

3

t S:identical to the initial status

1. Cleaning with cleaning solution: 80 µL of cleaning solution is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated in the electrode for cleaning. The end of the aliquot is detected by the LB sensor. Then, it goes to waste. During liquid check by the LB sensor, if the cleaning solution is too much or not enough, warning #331 or #334 is triggered. The cycle is skipped to step 2.

7 - 16

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

ISE module ISE module description

2. Standard 2 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated in the electrode (keep condition). The end of the aliquot is detected by the LB sensor. Then, it goes to waste. (twice) During liquid check by the LB sensor, if Standard 2 is too much or not enough, warning #327 or #330 is triggered. The cycle is stopped. 3. Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated in the electrode (keep condition). The end of the aliquot is detected by the LB sensor. (4 times) During liquid check by the LB sensor, if Standard 1 is too much or not enough, warning #322 or #325 is triggered. The cycle is stopped.

Wake up

mV Stabilization of flow system

Two point calibration

R/Std2/Std1

Std1/Std2

1

2

t S:6

S:4,5,6

1. The ISE module stabilizes the flow system (see Stabilization of flow system, page 7-15). 2. A two point calibration is run (see Two point calibration, page 7-8).

Keep ready When the instrument is shut down and to keep the electrodes stability, the ISE module runs the "Keep ready" cycle to ensure reagent transfer at electrodes level. Frequency: every 15 minutes (can be modified by the user, see ISE calibration setting, page 7-30).

mV Reagent detection Keep condition in electrode

Rinsing

Rinsing

Std1

Std1

1

2

S:4,5,6

t S:4

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

7 - 17

ISE module ISE module description

1. Rinsing with Standard 1: Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated in the electrode. The end of the aliquot is detected by the LB sensor. Standard 1 goes to waste. During liquid check by the LB sensor, if Standard 1 is too much or not enough, warning #322 or #325 is triggered. The cycle is stopped. 2. Rinsing with Standard 1: Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated in the electrode. Standard 1 stays in the electrode (keep condition).

Ready When the instrument is in operation and to keep the electrodes stability, the ISE module runs the "Ready" cycle to ensure reagent transfer at electrodes level. Frequency: every 5 minutes (can be modified by the user, see ISE calibration setting, page 7-30).

mV Reagent detection Keep condition in electrode

Rinsing

Rinsing

Std1

Std1

1

2

S:6

t S:6

1. Rinsing with Standard 1: Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated in the electrode. The end of the aliquot is detected by the LB sensor. Standard 1 goes to waste. During liquid check by the LB sensor, if Standard 1 is too much or not enough, warning #322 or #325 is triggered. The cycle is stopped. 2. Rinsing with Standard 1: Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated in the electrode. Standard 1 stays in the electrode (keep condition).

Activation The activation cycle consists in running one serum or plasma sample to condition electrodes.

mV Detection + Keep condition in electrode + Waste Sample

Reagent detection Keep condition in electrode

(50 µL)

Rinsing Rinsing Rinsing Std1 Std1 Std1

1 S:4,5,6

7 - 18

2

3

4

t S:identical to initial status

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

ISE module ISE module description

1. 60 µL of sample (serum, plasma) is pipetted by the sample needle and 50 µL of serum or plasma sample is dispensed into the ISE sample cup. Sample is detected by the LB sensor, stays in the electrode (keep condition) then goes to waste. During liquid check by the LB sensor, if sample is too much or not enough, warning #331 or #334 is triggered. The cycle is skipped to step 2. 2. Rinsing with Standard 1: Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, passes through the electrode then goes to waste. 3. Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated in the electrode. The end of the aliquot is detected by the LB sensor. Standard 1 goes to waste. During liquid check by the LB sensor, if Standard 1 is too much or not enough, warning #322 or #325 is triggered. The cycle is stopped. 4. Rinsing with Standard 1: Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated in the electrode. Standard 1 stays in the electrode (keep condition).

Shut down

mV

Keep condition in electrode Rinsing R

Rinsing Std1

1 S:3,4,5,6

2

t S:3

1. Rinsing with Reference: Reference solution passes through Reference electrode then goes to waste. 2. Rinsing with Standard 1: Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated in the electrode. Standard 1 stays in the electrode (keep condition).

Electrode replacement

mV Waste Std1

1

t

S:3,4,5,6 S:Not applicable 1. Standard 1, present in electrode, goes to waste.

Standard 1 reagent check

mV S1M 1

t

S:3,4,5,6 S:3 or 4

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

7 - 19

ISE module ISE module description

1. Measurement of Standard 1 (S1M): - Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated in the electrode. The end of the aliquot is detected by the LB sensor. During liquid check by the LB sensor, if Standard 1 is too much or not enough, warning #322 or #325 is triggered. The cycle is stopped. - The potential of Standard 1 is measured.

Standard 2 reagent check

mV S2M

1

t

S:3,4,5,6 S:3 or 4 1. Measurement of Standard 2 (S2M): - Standard 2 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated in the electrode. The end of the aliquot is detected by the LB sensor. During liquid check by the LB sensor, if Standard 2 is too much or not enough, warning #327 or #330 is triggered. The cycle is stopped. - The potential of Standard 2 is measured.

Reference reagent check

mV RM

1

t

S:3,4,5,6 S:3 or 4 1. Measurement of Reference (RM): - Reference solution is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated into the reference electrode. The end of the aliquot is detected by the LB sensor. During liquid check by the LB sensor, if Reference is too much or not enough, warning #331 or #334 is triggered. The cycle is stopped. - The potential of Reference solution is measured.

7 - 20

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

ISE module ISE module description

LB sensor check

mV

LB sensor detection + Keep condition in electrode Std1

1

t

S:3,4,5,6 S:3 or 4 1. Standard 1 is dispensed into the ISE sample cup, then aspirated in the electrode. The end of the aliquot is detected by the LB sensor. If the LB Sensor cannot detect "ON" or "OFF", warning #322 or #325 is triggered.

1.3.

ISE module status description

The ISE module exists in seven different statuses. While the instrument is running, the status of the ISE module is displayed in the ISE tab. Go to Services > Customer Services > ISE. The status from 0 to 6 of the ISE module are described in the following table: Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

Description Module not initialized Module initialized Module configured Mechanical part initialized Module sleeping Fluidic part initialized Module calibrated

In correct working order, the ISE module evolves sequentially from status 0 to 6, thus from the instrument start up (Power ON) to the calibrated module achievement, ready for the analyses.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

7 - 21

ISE module ISE module description

1.4.

ISE module hydraulic diagram

This diagram is available in the form of a sticker to be stuck on the inside of the ISE cover: STICKER, ISE HYDRAULIC HAX0271 (1207230271).

Mark on diagram 0.76-xxx 1.52-xxx 1.5/2.5 ISOLATOR

7 - 22

P/n EAE003A* EAE007A* EAB015A (1202211015) XCA167A (1209121167)

Designation TUBING, TYGON 0.762 (0.030) TUBING, TYGON 1.52 (0.060) FITTING, STRAIGHT 2.5/1.5 CHAMBER, ISOLATOR (SMALL)

Sales unit * * Pack of 5 1

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

ISE module ISE module description

Mark on diagram Air sensor Na+ ClK+ Ref LV1, LV2, LV3, LV4 LV5, LV6 E1

P/n GBM0746 (3014029452) A11A01738 A11A01739 A11A01740 A11A01741 XBA635AS (1209119635) XBA544C (1209113544) EBA018A (1202351018) EBA017A (1202351017) XBA733AS (1209119733) EAB013A (1202211013) GBM1266 (1203601266) GBM0751 (1203600751) GBM0750 (1203600750)

Designation FLUID, ISE AIR DETECT.ELECTRODE ABX PENTRA SODIUM-E ABX PENTRA CHLORIDE-E ABX PENTRA POTASSIUM-E ABX PENTRA REFERENCE-E VALVE, ISE VALVE VALVE, ISE VALVE ASSY VALVE, LV5 VALVE ISE VALVE, LV6 VALVE ISE VALVE, ISE MIXCUP VALVE ASSY FITTING, STRAIGHT 3.1/2.3 CLEAR FLUID, ISE REF.BLUE STRAW 300 ML FLUID, ISE 300 ML BOTTLE STRAW FLUID, ISE 100 ML BOTTLE STRAW

Sales unit 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

* Possible to order under the following references: - EAE003AS (1202249003) (2 metres) - EAE007AS (1202249007) (2 metres)

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

7 - 23

ISE module ISE module description

1.5.

Electric and electronic principles

1.5.1. ISE mother board XAA492CS (1209109492) To ISE syringe motor 1/150 sensor To ISE syringe motor 1/75 sensor To ISE preampli board To Valve block

To ISE syringe motor 1/75

To ISE syringe motor 1/150

Fuse

To power supply

To the analyzer

To ISE software board

1.5.2. ISE preampli board XAA496C (3200092606)

To Reference electrode TP3 To Reference electrode

To Na electrode

To Cl electrode

To ISE mother board

TP2

To K electrode

7 - 24

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

ISE module ISE module description

1.5.3. ISE software board ISE software board CPU-03N XAA497E (3200448459) for ABX Pentra 400 only

ISE software board CPU-07N XAA646A (3200375620) for Pentra C400 only

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

7 - 25

ISE module ISE module description

1.5.4. Electric circuit configuration ISE preampli board

ISE mother board ISE software board

LP-PRE-01

LP-CNT-03

CPU-03N (P400) / CPU-07N (PC400)

Reference electrode

Amplifier

Na electrode

Amplifier

Peripheral control circuit

RS-232C-2 MPX AD converter

Cl electrode

K electrode

LB sensor

RS232

Signal isolator

Amplifier Liquid Valve bulb unit drive circuit

Liquid Valve bulb unit

Syringe-1 drive circuit

Syringe-1

Syringe-2 drive circuit

Syringe-2

Amplifier

Amplifier

(DC 5 V)

(DC 5 V)

DC/DC converter Power supply (DC24V) DC/DC converter

7 - 26

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Electrodes

Valves

ISE preampli board

Valves

ISE syringe motor 1/75 sensor

ISE syringe motor 1/75

ISE syringe motor 1/150 sensor

ISE syringe motor 1/150

ISE mother board

ISE software board

To power supply

To the analyzer

ISE module ISE module description

1.5.5. ISE module wiring diagram

7 - 27

ISE module ISE module description

1.6.

ISE software description

To minimize environmental interferences, the ISE module cover must always be closed during ISE module operation.

1.6.1. ISE module status presentation The ISE Module Status button, located on the main menu, allows the user to check the ISE module status.

ABX Pentra 400

ISE Module Status button

Pentra C400

ISE Module Status button

7 - 28

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

ISE module ISE module description

This button aspect changes according to the ISE module status:

ISE module is available and calibrations are finished.

ISE module is busy (calibration, cleaning, measurement, etc.).

Error on calibrations. A calibration needs to be ordered. See ISE calibration screens, page 7-29.

Error on ISE module (mechanical, fluidic, etc.). A global initialization needs to be ordered. See ISE customer services screen, page 7-30.

ISE module not initialized. ISE module needs to be activated. See ISE customer services screen, page 7-30.

1.6.2. ISE customer screens ISE calibration screens ■ ISE calibration Press the ISE Module Status button to open the ISE module status screen. The ISE module status screen displays the last results of chloride, potassium and sodium calibrations. The Calibrate button allows the user to perform a 2-point calibration. To know the expected values of the slope and the sensitivity for each electrode, refer to 1.7.2. NA, K, CL normal range, page 7-37.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

7 - 29

ISE module ISE module description

■ ISE calibration setting The ISE Calibration tab allows the user to configure the 2-point and 1-point calibrations frequency as well as the Keep ready and Ready functions. Go to Calibration > Control > ISE Calibration. For more detailed information, refer to the "Calibration and Control Configuration" chapter of your user manual.

ISE customer services screen The ISE tab allows the user to activate electrodes, stop ISE cycle, change electrodes, run a fluidic initialization, stabilize fluidic system, prime the flow system, drain the reagents, run a global initalization, run a mechanical initialization, shut down the ISE module, run cleaning cycles (etching, cleaning) and ISE module activation. Moreover, the ISE tab allows the user to perform ISE automatic maintenance. Go to Services > Customer Services > ISE.

A

B

C

D

E

Fig.7-1: ISE tab 7 - 30

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

ISE module ISE module description

■ Activated electrode (Fig.7-1-A): Activates/inactivates the three electrodes: Chloride, Potassium, Sodium. If the check box is selected, the electrode is activated.

An electrode cannot be inactivated if there are ISE tests for this electrode in the worklist or for validation.

■ Stop ISE cycle: Stops the ISE module immediately (without user confirmation). Then, the user must initialize the ISE module by pressing the Global Initialization key. The Stop ISE cycle key is enabled only if the ISE module is occupied.

■ Change electrode: Helps the user to replace an electrode. The ISE module drains the reagents from the electrodes to allow the user to replace the electrode. The ISE module will be stabilized in status 4. The Change electrode key is enabled only if the ISE module is not occupied and its status ≥ 3. ■ Fluidic

Initialization: Primes the reagents into the fluidic system. This function should be used after the ISE reagents replacement or an ISE shutdown (complete stop of the ISE module) exceeding three days. The Fluidic Initialization key is enabled only if the ISE module is not occupied and its status ≥ 3.

■ Stabilization of Fluidic system: Rinses the fluidic system out. This function should be used to rinse the fluidic system out or eliminate air bubbles in the fluidic system. The Stabilization of Fluidic system key is enabled only if the ISE module is not occupied and its status ≥ 4. ■ Prime flow system: Primes the reagents into the fluidic system. This function should be used to prime the reagents into the fluidic system at the ISE module installation. The Prime flow system key is enabled only if the ISE module is not occupied and its status ≥ 5. ■ Drain: Drains the reagents from the fluidic system. This function should be used for an ISE shutdown (complete stop of the ISE module) exceeding three days or the system transportation. The Drain key is enabled only if the ISE module is not occupied and its status ≥ 3. ■ Global

Initialization: Initializes the ISE module. The Global Initialization key is enabled only if the ISE module is not occupied.

■ Mechanical Initialization: Checks the syringe movement and sets the syringes to their initial position. The Mechanical Initialization key is enabled only if the ISE module is not occupied and its status ≥ 2.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

7 - 31

ISE module ISE module description

■ Shutdown:

ISE shutdown (complete stop of the ISE module) exceeding three days. See 1.6.3. ISE module shutdown, page 7-32. Fills the electrodes with low standard and air to prevent the contamination of the reference solution. The Shutdown key is enabled only if the ISE module is not occupied and its status ≥ 3. ■ ISE cleaning Solution (Fig.7-1-B): Allows the user to perform etching and cleaning of the ISE module.

■ ISE

activation (Fig.7-1-C): Runs one serum or plasma sample to condition the electrodes. This function should be used after the ISE module cleaning and/or etching. This function is disabled if the ISE module is occupied.

■ ISE

automatic maintenance (Fig.7-1-D): Helps the user to perform the ISE module weekly maintenance (cleaning, etching, activation and 2-point calibration). For more detailed information, please refer to the instrument user manual.

■ ISE Status window (Fig.7-1-E): Displays the ISE status. See 1.3. ISE module status description, page 7-21.

1.6.3. ISE module shutdown Shutdown within 3 days

ISE reagents running dry can damage the electrodes. Ensure that there is always enough ISE reagents to perform the ISE module calibrations.

■ Go

to Services > Customer Services > ISE.

■ First,

make sure that the ISE module status is ≥ 3 (A). If not, press Global Initialization (B).

■ Press

Shutdown (C).

■ Switch

the instrument off. B C

7 - 32

A

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

ISE module ISE module description

Shutdown over 3 days ■ Go

to Services > Customer Services > ISE.

■ First,

make sure that the ISE module status is ≥ 3 (A). If not, press Global Initialization (B).

■ Remove the straws from the reagent bottles

and wrap them in absorbent paper. ■ Close

the reagent bottles with caps.

B A

After opening, ISE reagents are stable for one month if stored at 5-30°C and protected from light.

■ Press

Drain (C).

■ Plunge

the straws into a distilled water bottle and press Fluidic Initialization (D).

■ Remove

the straws from the distilled water bottle and wrap them in absorbent paper.

■ Press

Drain (C).

■ Switch

D C

the instrument off.

■ Remove

the electrodes and the air sensor from the cage. - For the sodium, chloride and potassium electrodes as well as for the air sensor, ensure there is no liquid in the inner tube. - For the reference electrode, connect a tubing filled with reference solution between the two connectors and seal the inner tube with a cellophane tape.

Store the electrodes in a dry and clean area in their original packaging.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

7 - 33

ISE module ISE module description

Electrodes reinstallation after a shutdown over 3 days ■ Reinstall

the electrodes and the air sensor into the cage. - For the reference electrode, disconnect the tubing between the two connectors and remove the cellophane tape from the inner tube. - For all electrodes, make sure that the O-ring is well-positioned on one side of the electrode and make sure that the electrode is clean. - Install the electrodes.

■ Close

the ISE door and tighten the screw.

■ Plunge

the straws into the reagent bottles.

■ Switch

the instrument on.

1.6.4. Diagnostics screen The ISE diagnostics screen allows you to: ■ Run

a global check, a global initialization, a data initialization, a mechanical initialization.

■ Calibrate ■ Check ■ Clean ■ Keep

electrodes low and high levels.

the sample detection, the syringes 1 and 2, the valves, the LB sensor.

the ISE module. ready.

■ Prime

the flow system.

■ Purge

the ISE module.

Go to Services > Diagnostics > ISE.

To use those functions, select the corresponding option and press Check. If the function is correct, the corresponding light becomes green. ■ Global Check: Checks all the elements of the ISE module for example the mechanical movement of the syringes and valves. This command is a batch of "Standard 1", "Standard 2", "Sample Detection", "Needle 1 Liquid Aspiration", "Needle 2 Liquid Aspiration", "Valve Check", "LB Sensor", "Cleaning", and "Keep ready" functions.

7 - 34

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

ISE module ISE module description

■ Standard 1 and Standard 2: Performs a measurement of each electrode using the Standard 1 or the Standard 2 solution.

■ Sample

Detection: Checks the correct functioning of the sample detection.

■ Needle 1 Liquid Aspiration: Checks the syringe 1 (Std 1 + Waste) complete movement.

■ Needle 2 Liquid Aspiration: Checks the syringe 2 (Std 2 + Reference) complete movement.

■ Valve

Check: Checks the liquid valves movement (open then close the four valves).

■ LB Sensor: Checks the correct detection between air and liquid.

■ Cleaning: Commands ISE module cleaning.

■ Keep ready: Maintains liquid (Standard 1) in the fluidic system during the shutdown.

■ Global

Initialization: Initialization of the system, which is a batch of "Request status" (sets status, the instrument obtains the current status), "Request Data" (sets data, the instrument obtains the current data), "Mechanical System Initialization", "Prime flow system" (primes the reagent into the fluidic system; rinses the distilled/ deionized water into the fluidic system) and "Two point calibration" functions. ■ Data

Initilization: Initialization of the ISE module data.

■ Mechanical

System Initialization: Checks the syringe movements and sets the syringes to their initial position.

■ Prime flow system: Primes the reagent into the fluidic system.

■ Purge

ISE Module: Purges the fluidic system. Prepares the ISE module for transportation.

If a function is used (except Cleaning cycle), you must run a Global Initialization before leaving this menu.

■ Messages:

Displays the ISE error messages of previous tests (see 2. Error messages, page 7-38).

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

7 - 35

ISE module ISE module description

1.7.

Additional information

1.7.1. ISE module reagents consumption The reagents consumption calculation is based on a basic ISE module working day (24 hours) which includes: - 1 ISE module wake up - 90 measurements on serum - 10 measurements on urine - 12 x 2 point calibrations (every 2 hours) - 16 x 1 point calibrations (every 15 minutes in 4 hours, instrument working) - 32 x Ready cycles (every 5 minutes in 4 hours, instrument working) - 80 x Keep ready cycles (every 15 minutes in 20 hours, instrument sleeping) - 2 cleaning cycles (at the beginning and the end of the day) - 0.1 x prime flow system cycle (reagents exchange)

Reagent consumption at each cycle (mL) Cycle Wake up Measure serum Measure urine Two point calibration One point calibration Keep ready Ready Cleaning Prime flow system

Standard 1 1.12 0.14 0.32 0.41 0.21 0.15 0.15 0.29 2.79

Standard 2 0.48 0.00 0.00 0.05 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.26 2.23

Reference 0.75 0.08 0.10 0.19 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.32 1.92

Total consumption

Daily consumption (mL/day) Weekly consumption (mL/week) Bottle volume (mL)

7 - 36

Standard 1 42.6 297.9 280.0

Standard 2 1.9 13.4 100.0

Reference 18.4 129.1 100.0

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

ISE module ISE module description

1.7.2. NA, K, CL normal range Range of normal values (Standard 1) triggering warning #336 NA: -100 to 100 mv K: -100 to 100 mv CL: -50 to 150 mv

Sensitivity normal range (difference between Standard 1 and Standard 2) triggering warning #335 NA: 8.5 to 14.4 mv K: 9 to 16.3 mv CL: 5 to 9.4 mv

Repeatability normal range (Standard 1) triggering warning #337 NA: 0.2 mv K: 0.3 mv CL: 0.2 mv

Slope normal range (for ISE V2) NA: 38 to 65 mv K: 37 to 67 mv CL: -53 to -28 mv

Standards concentration

NA: K: CL:

Standard 1 120 meq 4 meq 100 meq

Standard 2 200 meq 7 meq 150 meq

1.7.3. Automatic cycle frequency Cycle Two point calibration One point calibration Ready Keep ready

Condition Executed every 2 hours (except when the instrument is shut down) Executed every 15 minutes (except when the instrument is shut down) Executed every 5 minutes (only when the instrument is running) Executed every 15 minutes (only when the instrument is shut down)

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

7 - 37

ISE module Error messages

2. Error messages System warnings and alarms are listed in the table on the following pages. 1. Warnings Warnings are triggered to warn the user but are not blocking the instrument. They are displayed on the Warning tab of the System Warnings menu. When a warning is triggered, the instrument is not stopped but turns to "Ready" status. If a warning appears, follow the instructions given in the table on the following pages. 2. Alarms Alarms are blocking the instrument. They are displayed on the Alarm tab of the System Warnings menu.

The Alarm tab is re-set at each start. To access the previous alarms, press CTRL + F8.

When an alarm is triggered, the instrument is stopped and turns to "Emergency Stop" status. If an alarm appears, follow the instructions given in the table on the following pages.

7 - 38

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Code 001

060

061

318

319

320

321

322

323

324

Level Warning

Warning

Warning

Warning

Warning

Warning

Warning

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Warning

Warning

Warning

Too much ISE low solution inlet (error code 23)

Can’t detect ISE low solution inlet (error code 22)

Can’t detect ISE low solution (error code 21)

Position error on ISE syringe 2 (error code 12)

Timeout error on ISE syringe 2 (error code 11)

Position error on ISE syringe 1 (error code 2)

Timeout error on ISE syringe 1 (error code 1)

Action Check the ISE module connections and fuse. Shut down and switch the instrument off and on. Change the ISE mother board. Shut down and switch the instrument off and on. Change the ISE mother board. Check the ISE syringe 1 assy motion. ISE syringe 1 assy (Standard 1/waste) home Check the voltage of the home sensor on the ISE position is not reached on time. mother board: CN6 Pin2-3 (home position 0 V, other ISE module status is 2 = module configured. 5 V). Check the ISE syringe 1 assy motion. ISE syringe 1 assy (Standard 1/waste) home Check the voltage of the home sensor on the ISE position is not reached. mother board: CN6 Pin2-3 (home position 0 V, other ISE module status is 2 = module configured. 5 V). Check the ISE syringe 2 assy motion. ISE syringe 2 assy (Reference/Standard 2) home Check the voltage of the home sensor on the ISE position is not reached on time. mother board: CN4 Pin2-3 (home position 0 V, other ISE module status is 2 = module configured. 5 V). Check the ISE syringe 2 assy motion. ISE syringe 2 assy (Reference/Standard 2) home Check the voltage of the home sensor on the ISE position is not reached. mother board: CN4 Pin2-3 (home position 0 V, other ISE module status is 2 = module configured. 5 V). ISE module reagent/fluidic error. LB sensor Check the ISE Standard 1 bottle, hydraulic circuit. cannot detect Standard 1. The LB sensor Check the valve V4 and readjust the LB sensor. measurement is > 4.5 V (air). Run an ISE Global Initialization. ISE module status is 4 = module sleeping. ISE module reagent/fluidic error. LB sensor Check the ISE Standard 1 bottle, hydraulic circuit. cannot detect the arriving of Standard 1. The LB Check the valve V4 and readjust the LB sensor. sensor measurement is > 4.5 V (air). Run an ISE Global Initialization. ISE module status is 4 = module sleeping. ISE module reagent/fluidic error. LB sensor Check the ISE Standard 1 bottle, hydraulic circuit. detects Standard 1. The LB sensor measurement Check the valve V4 and readjust the LB sensor. is < 1 V (liquid). Run an ISE Global Initialization. ISE module status is 4 = module sleeping.

Message Error type ISE Module Initialization Problem Instrument/ISE module communication failed. Non recoverable material error on the Triggered by the ISE mother board. ISE module The used ISE function cannot be performed. ISE command invalid Triggered by the ISE mother board.

ISE module Error messages

7 - 39

7 - 40

332

333

Warning

329

Warning

Warning

328

Warning

331

327

Warning

Warning

326

Warning

330

325

Warning

Warning

Code

Level

Error type ISE module reagent/fluidic error. LB sensor still detects Standard 1 flow after the aspiration ISE low solution inlet excess on specified time. The LB sensor measurement is timeout (error code 24) < 1 V (liquid). ISE module status is 4 = module sleeping. ISE module reagent/fluidic error. LB sensor detects Standard 1 at the beginning of ISE low solution inlet excess on start measurement. The LB sensor measurement is of measuring (error code 25) < 1 V (liquid). ISE module status is 4 = module sleeping. ISE module reagent/fluidic error. LB sensor Can’t detect ISE high solution (error cannot detect Standard 2. The LB sensor code 31) measurement is > 4.5 V (air). ISE module status is 4 = module sleeping. ISE module reagent/fluidic error. LB sensor Can’t detect ISE high solution inlet cannot detect the arriving of Standard 2. The LB (error code 32) sensor measurement is > 4.5 V (air). ISE module status is 4 = module sleeping. ISE module reagent/fluidic error. LB sensor Too much ISE high solution inlet detects Standard 2. The LB sensor measurement (error code 33) is < 1 V (liquid). ISE module status is 4 = module sleeping. ISE module reagent/fluidic error. LB sensor still detects Standard 2 flow after the aspiration ISE high solution inlet excess on specified time. The LB sensor measurement is timeout (error code 34) < 1 V (liquid). ISE module status is 4 = module sleeping. ISE module reagent/fluidic error. LB sensor Can’t detect ISE sample (error code cannot detect sample. The LB sensor 41) measurement is > 4.5 V (air). ISE module reagent/fluidic error. LB sensor Can’t detect ISE sample inlet (error cannot detect the arriving of sample. The LB code 42) sensor measurement is > 4.5 V (air). ISE module reagent/fluidic error. LB sensor Too much ISE sample inlet (error detects sample. The LB sensor measurement is code 43) < 1 V (liquid). ISE module status is 4 = module sleeping.

Message

Check the hydraulic circuit. Check the valve V4 and readjust the LB sensor. Run an ISE Global Initialization.

Check the sample for fibrin, clog. Check the sample needle and tubing. Readjust the LB sensor. Check the sample for fibrin, clog. Check the sample needle and tubing. Readjust the LB sensor.

Check the ISE Standard 2 bottle, hydraulic circuit. Check the valve V4 and readjust the LB sensor. Run an ISE Global Initialization.

Check the ISE Standard 2 bottle, hydraulic circuit. Check the valve V4 and readjust the LB sensor. Run an ISE Global Initialization.

Check the ISE Standard 2 bottle, hydraulic circuit. Check the valve V4 and readjust the LB sensor. Run an ISE Global Initialization.

Check the ISE Standard 2 bottle, hydraulic circuit. Check the valve V4 and readjust the LB sensor. Run an ISE Global Initialization.

Check the ISE Standard 1 bottle, hydraulic circuit. Check the valve V4 and readjust the LB sensor. Run an ISE Global Initialization.

Check the ISE Standard 1 bottle, hydraulic circuit. Check the valve V4 and readjust the LB sensor. Run an ISE Global Initialization.

Action

ISE module Error messages

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Code

334

335

336

337

338

339

519

614

616

Level

Warning

Warning

Warning

Warning

Warning

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Warning

Alarm

Warning

Warning

Bad ISE module version. [%s] = ISE version number. Detected during the initialization.

Bad ISE version Required [%s], Current [%s]

ISE Module busy

Stabilization or calibration in progress.

ISE module cleaning failed.

ISE module mechanical error.

ISE cleaning failed

Run a 2-point calibration. Perform the ISE module maintenance (etching, cleaning). Change the corresponding electrode.

Check the hydraulic circuit. Check the valve V4 and readjust the LB sensor. Run an ISE Global Initialization.

Action

Reinstall the software version. See RAS517: Software version installation, page 1. Reinstall the ISE version on the ISE module. See RAS540: ISE module software version installation, page 1. Make sure that the cleaning solution is positioned on the reagent tray. -

Change the ISE preampli board.

Run a 2-point calibration. Perform the ISE module maintenance (etching, cleaning). Change the corresponding electrode. Check the ISE Standard 1 bottle has no bubble. Change the ISE Standard 1 bottle. Repeatability error on the low standard value for Perform the ISE module maintenance (etching, the electrode in brackets. cleaning). [%s1] = electrode name. Change the corresponding electrode. [%s2] = low/high point of the calibration. Check the spring contact of the corresponding electrode. Check the ISE Standard 1 or 2 bottle has no bubble. The potential difference during the three last Change the ISE Standard 1 or 2 bottle. seconds of a measurement is ≥ 0.40 mV for the Perform the ISE module maintenance (etching, electrode in brackets. cleaning). [%s1] = electrode name. Change the corresponding electrode. [%s2] = low/high point of the calibration. Check the spring contact of the corresponding electrode.

Error type ISE module reagent/fluidic error. LB sensor still detects sample flow after the aspiration specified time. The LB sensor measurement is < 1 V (liquid). ISE module status is 4 = module sleeping. The difference between the low and high standard values is out of the sensitivity normal range for the electrode in brackets. [%s1] = electrode name. [%s2] = low/high point of the calibration. The low or high standard value is out of the acceptable range for the electrode in brackets. [%s1] = electrode name. [%s2] = low/high point of the calibration.

ISE LB check response error (error code 91)

ISE electrode [%s1] response error for [%s2] point (error code 55)

ISE electrode [%s1] repeatability error for [%s2] point (error code 52)

ISE electrode [%s1] offset error for [%s2] point (error code 51)

ISE electrode [%s1] sensibility error for [%s2] point (error code 50)

ISE sample inlet excess on timeout (error code 44)

Message

ISE module Error messages

7 - 41

ISE module Procedures

3. Procedures

Maintenance and adjustments required for the ISE module are divided into procedures according to the concerned assemblies. This should make any update easier as all interventions can be done with the corresponding procedure on its own.

1 - Procedures must be performed on a clean instrument. If the instrument is suspected not to be perfectly clean, perform a cleaning procedure. 2 - Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator. 3 - When the Diagnostics menu is used, the security switches are disabled and it is therefore recommended to be extremely cautious.

3.1.

Maintenance by customers

The table below lists the ISE maintenance procedures and their frequencies. For more detailed information, please refer to the instrument user manual. Maintenance ISE module etching ISE module cleaning ISE reagents replacement Electrodes replacement

3.2.

Frequency Daily if more than 20 samples are run daily Weekly As needed As needed

ISE 6 month maintenance

See RAS388: ISE module maintenance, 1. 6 month maintenance, page 2.

3.3.

ISE yearly maintenance

See RAS388: ISE module maintenance, 2. Yearly maintenance, page 3.

7 - 42

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

ISE module Procedures

3.4.

ISE procedure list

The procedures are sorted by theme. Theme

P/n and designation

Installation

RAS441: ISE module installation RAS388: ISE module maintenance RAS537: ISE module check up after intervention

Maintenance

RAS538: ISE module spare part replacement RAS539: Dummy PENTRA software use

Software

3.5.

RAS540: ISE module software version installation

Concerns Physical installation - Mechanical adjustments Electrode and reagent installation - Start and use - Check up 6 month maintenance - Yearly maintenance Check up of the ISE module on serum and urine mode Dismantling - Boards, valves, syringes and motors replacement - Mechanical adjustments - LB sensor adjustment Connection - Command description - Software use ISE preparation - ISE version loading

ISE maintenance check up summary

An ISE maintenance check up summary is provided in this manual (see on next page) to ensure the maintenance follow-up. This document can be used as reference to create a maintenance schedule for customer archives.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

7 - 43

ISE module Procedures

7 - 44

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

HORIBA ABX SAS Parc Euromédecine - Rue du Caducée B.P. 7290 34184 Montpellier Cedex 4 - FRANCE Phone: + 33 (0)4 67 14 15 16 Fax: + 33 (0)4 67 14 15 17

ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra C400 ISE module Check-up maintenance 6 month maintenance Rinsing and draining

Yearly maintenance

Rinsing with distilled water and draining. See RAS388: ISE module maintenance, 3.1. Rinsing with distilled water and draining, page 4. Syringes O-rings replacement and greasing. See RAS388: ISE module maintenance, 3.2. Syringes Orings replacement and greasing, page 5.

X

X

Syringes Syringes pistons and O-rings replacement See RAS388: ISE module maintenance, 3.3. Syringes pistons and O-rings replacement, page 7.

Valves

X

Electrovalve no. 4 cleaning. See RAS388: ISE module maintenance, 3.4. Electrovalve no. 4 cleaning, page 9.

X

X

Tubing "reference electrode to electrovalve no. 4" replacement. See RAS388: ISE module maintenance, 3.5. Tubing "reference electrode to electrovalve no. 4" replacement, page 10.

X

X

ISE mix cup cleaning with bleach and rinsing with distilled water. See RAS388: ISE module maintenance, 3.6. ISE mix cup cleaning, page 10.

X

X

Tubing "air sensor to ISE mix cup" replacement. See RAS388: ISE module maintenance, 3.7. Tubing "air sensor to ISE mix cup" replacement, page 11.

X

X

Mix cup

All tubings and fittings replacement. See RAS388: ISE module maintenance, 3.8. All tubings and fittings replacement, page 11.

X

Tubings

Adjustment

Check up after intervention

Isolator and ISE waste tubing replacement. See RAS388: ISE module maintenance, 3.9. Isolator and ISE waste tubing replacement, page 11.

X

X

ISE mix cup adjustment. See RAS388: ISE module maintenance, 3.10. ISE mix cup adjustment, page 12.

X

X

Check up on serum mode. See RAS537: ISE module check up after intervention, 1. Check up on serum mode, page 2: Calibration (x5): difference < 0.2 mV, Control N, P (x10): CV < 1% Na, Cl and K.

X

X

Check up on urine mode. See RAS537: ISE module check up after intervention, 2. Check up on urine mode, page 7: Control Standard 2 (x10): CV < 2% Na, Cl and < 1.5% K.

X

X

This document can be used as reference to create a maintenance schedule for customer archives.

RAS441E

ISE module installation In this procedure, specific instructions are given for previous ABX Pentra 400 hardware versions: ■ V1 corresponds to instruments with serial numbers below 2000.

RAS441: ISE module installation

■For

a full installation on an instrument without ISE module, perform the procedure entirely. ■For an ISE module startup, perform only the ISE module startup part.

Concerns ISE module physical installation ISE module startup

Required tools Hexagonal keys Phillips screwdriver

Required products Distilled water

Intervention time 1 h 00

Frequency On request

Specific kit or consumables ■ ISE

module electrodes: ABX Pentra Sodium-E A11A01738 ABX Pentra Chloride-E A11A01739 ABX Pentra Potassium-E A11A01740 ABX Pentra Reference-E A11A01741

■ ISE

module reagents: ABX Pentra Standard 1 A11A01717 ABX Pentra Standard 2 A11A01718 ABX Pentra Reference 280 ML A11A01901

Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator. Local or national regulations must be applied in all the operations.

ISE module installation

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

1. ISE module physical installation 1.1.

Unpacking

Unpack the ISE module carefully and make sure that all the parts from the package list are present.

Package list Part number

Qty

Designation

1

ISE module

1

ISE packaging

1

KIT, ISE INSTALLATION KIT P400

KIT, ISE INSTALLATION KIT P400 Part number

Qty

Designation

DAC028A (1201891028) 1

CABLE, PC/MAIN BOARD P80

EAE028AS (1202249028) 2 metres

TUBING, CRYSTAL 4X6 L=2M

EAB013A (1202211013)

1

FITTING, STRAIGHT 3.1/2.3 CLEAR

KAA013A (1207401013)

6

CHC SCREW M4X6 FITTING, STRAIGHT 2.5/1.5

EAB015A (1202211015)

2

EAE003A*

0.5 metres TUBING, TYGON 0.762 (0.030)

EAE007A*

0.5 metres TUBING, TYGON 1.52 (0.060)

EAC015A (1202221015)

1

KAU007A (1207571007) 2

FITTING, LUER MALE FITTING PLASTIC WASHER

* Possible to order under the following references: - EAE003AS (1202249003) (2 metres) - EAE007AS (1202249007) (2 metres)

RAS441E - 2

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

1.2.

ISE module installation

Instrument setting ■ Switch ■ Open

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

the arms main cover and the ISE cover.

■ Remove

the ISE plate and the mother board cover. See RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1.

D ■ Remove

the rear plate (A), the luer connector plate (B), the middle plate (C) and the ISE rear plate (D) at the back of the instrument.

A

C

B

Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1 ■ Remove

the rear plate (A), the luer connector plate (B) and the middle plate (C) at the back of the instrument.

A

C

B

Null modem cable connection: J3

■ Connect

the null modem cable (included in the kit) in position J3 of the mother board.

■ Guide the cable down to the passage designed for the wires (follow the black "Barcode Reader" wire)

to achieve the correct position. ■ Put

the mother board cover back in position.

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS441E - 3

ISE module installation

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

B

A

■ Prepare

the null modem cable linked to the mother board (A), the crystal tubing linked to the luer link plate (B) and the power supply cable coming from the power supply block (C).

C

1.3.

ISE module positioning

Tygon tubing

■ Use

the straight fitting 3.1/2.3 (included in the kit) to connect the 1.52 mm Tygon tubing to the crystal tubing 4x6 linked to the ISE waste assy.

Straight fitting

Crystal tubing

Tygon tubing

Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1 ■ Use

the straight fitting 3.1/2.3 (included in the kit) to connect the 1.52 mm Tygon tubing to the crystal tubing 4x6 linked to the ISE waste assy. Straight fitting

Crystal tubing

RAS441E - 4

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

ISE module installation

Power supply cable

Null modem cable

■ Connect the power supply cable on the ISE

module mother board as well as the null modem cable. Make sure that the wires are not in a stressed position.

B

A

■ Slightly loosen the 2 CHC screws (A) to free

the left gusset plate. ■ Place

the ISE module and tighten the 2 CHC screws (one with the braided ground wire) on the left of the module (C), the 2 CHC screws and plastic washers (provided in the kit) on the right of the module (B) and the 2 CHC screws of the left gusset plate (A).

C

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS441E - 5

ISE module installation

■ Put

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

the covers and plates back.

■ Connect

the ISE waste tubing to the external central luer connector plate.

ISE module waste

■ Guide

with the shortest distance from the instrument to the waste detection assy and cut to the correct length.

■ Then,

connect it to the small connector of the waste detection assy.

RAS441E - 6

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

1.4.

ISE module installation

ISE module mechanical adjustments ■ Connect

the power supply cable and switch the instrument on.

1.4.1. ISE mix cup adjustment ■ Remove ■ Make

■ Go

the ISE cup cover. See RAS377: Covers dismantling, 9. Reagent plate, page 6.

sure that the reagent arm is in its wash tower and the sample arm is at its vertical home position.

to Services > Diagnostics > Arms.

■ Select

the sample arm Rotation radio button (A), then press Motor Off (B).

■ Manually

turn the sample arm over the ISE A

mix cup. B

■ Loosen

the 2 CHC screws and washers.

■ Move

the ISE mix cup to have the sample needle centered (left/right).

■ Screw

Technical Manual RAA023

the ISE mix cup support.

RAS441E - 7

ISE module installation

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Check

the position with the sample arm in the ISE mix cup: - Select the sample arm Vertical radio button (A), support the arm by hand, then press Motor Off (B). - Slowly move the arm down and check the position.

A

■ Press Check Home (C) to move the arm up. ■ Put

the ISE cup cover back.

C

B

1.4.2. Sample arm "ISE Sample" position adjustment Adjust the sample arm in the ISE mix cup by following the sample arm adjustment procedure. - ISE Sample (rotation) to center the sample needle in the ISE mix cup. See RAS385: Arms, 6.3.5. ISE Position, page 42. - Low Position in ISE Tower (vertical) to adjust the sample needle height in the ISE mix cup. See RAS385: Arms, 6.4.5. "Low Position in ISE Tower", page 53.

RAS441E - 8

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

ISE module installation

2. ISE module startup 2.1.

Electrode and reagent installation

After opening, the electrodes are stable for: - ABX Pentra Reference-E: 12 months - ABX Pentra Sodium-E: 12 months - ABX Pentra Chloride-E: 4 months - ABX Pentra Potassium-E: 6 months For the reference electrode, remove the protection from one side of the electrode and disconnect the tubing between the two connectors. For all electrodes, make sure that the O-ring is well-positioned on one side of the electrode and make sure that the electrode is clean.

O-ring ■ Install

the electrodes (after removing the foam supporting the air detector):

Reference

Sodium (Na)

Technical Manual RAA023

Chlore (Cl)

Potassium (K)

RAS441E - 9

ISE module installation

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Connect

the tubing from LV3- inlet 1 to the upper inlet of the Reference electrode.

■ Connect

the tubing from LV4- inlet 1 to the lower inlet of the Reference electrode.

■ Close

and fasten the ISE door.

■ Install

the Standard 1, the Standard 2 and the Reference solutions. LV4

LV3

Standard 1

Standard 2

Reference

RAS441E - 10

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

ISE module installation

ISE module hydraulic diagram

This diagram is available in the form of a sticker to be stuck on the inside of the ISE cover: STICKER, ISE HYDRAULIC HAX0271 (1207230271).

Mark on diagram 0.76-xxx 1.52-xxx 1.5/2.5 ISOLATOR Air sensor Na+

Technical Manual RAA023

P/n EAE003A* EAE007A* EAB015A (1202211015) XCA167A (1209121167) GBM0746 (3014029452) A11A01738

Designation TUBING, TYGON 0.762 (0.030) TUBING, TYGON 1.52 (0.060) FITTING, STRAIGHT 2.5/1.5 CHAMBER, ISOLATOR (SMALL) FLUID, ISE AIR DETECT.ELECTRODE ABX PENTRA SODIUM-E

Sales unit * * Pack of 5 1 1 1

RAS441E - 11

ISE module installation

Mark on diagram ClK+ Ref LV1, LV2, LV3, LV4 LV5, LV6 E1

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

P/n A11A01739 A11A01740 A11A01741 XBA635AS (1209119635) XBA544C (1209113544) EBA018A (1202351018) EBA017A (1202351017) XBA733AS (1209119733) EAB013A (1202211013) GBM1266 (1203601266) GBM0751 (1203600751) GBM0750 (1203600750)

Designation ABX PENTRA CHLORIDE-E ABX PENTRA POTASSIUM-E ABX PENTRA REFERENCE-E VALVE, ISE VALVE VALVE, ISE VALVE ASSY VALVE, LV5 VALVE ISE VALVE, LV6 VALVE ISE VALVE, ISE MIXCUP VALVE ASSY FITTING, STRAIGHT 3.1/2.3 CLEAR FLUID, ISE REF.BLUE STRAW 300 ML FLUID, ISE 300 ML BOTTLE STRAW FLUID, ISE 100 ML BOTTLE STRAW

Sales unit 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

* Possible to order under the following references: - EAE003AS (1202249003) (2 metres) - EAE007AS (1202249007) (2 metres)

2.2.

Start and use of ISE option

To minimize environmental interferences, the ISE module cover must always be closed during ISE module operation.

■ Go

to Services > System Configuration > Analyser > ISE Module.

■ Activate

the ISE module: - Press Edit (A). - Select the Activate ISE Module check box (B). - Press OK (C).

B

A

RAS441E - 12

C

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

ISE module installation

■ Go

to Services > Customer Services > ISE.

■ Activate

the electrodes: - Press Edit (D). - In the Activated electrode area, select the Chloride, Potassium and/or Sodium check boxes (E). - Press OK (F).

E

D

F

G

I

■ Go

to Calibration/Control > ISE Calibration.

■ Make

sure that the Keep ready and Ready functions are activated as well as the ISE calibrations, if not:

■ Press

Edit (G).

H

■ Select

the 1 point Calibration Frequency, 2 point Calibration Frequency, Keep ready and/or Ready check boxes (H) and enter the frequency values.

■ Press

OK (I).

■ Go

to Services > Customer Services > ISE.

■ Run

2.3.

a Global Initialization.

ISE module check up

Follow the "ISE module check up after intervention" procedure. See RAS537: ISE module check up after intervention, page 1.

To know the slope and offset range, see Section 7: ISE module, 1.7.2. NA, K, CL normal range, page 7-37.

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS441E - 13

ISE module installation

RAS441E - 14

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS388J

ISE module maintenance

RAS388: ISE module maintenance

Concerns 6 month maintenance Yearly maintenance Procedures Rinsing with distilled water and draining Syringes O-rings replacement and greasing Syringes pistons and O-rings replacement Electrovalve no. 4 cleaning Tubing "reference electrode to electrovalve no. 4" replacement ISE mix cup cleaning Tubing "air sensor to ISE mix cup" replacement All tubings and fittings replacement Isolator and ISE waste tubing replacement ISE mix cup adjustment

Required tools Hexagonal keys Phillips screwdriver

Required products Distilled water Bleach

Intervention time 1 h 00

Frequency On request

Specific kit or consumables KIT, ISE 6 MONTH MAINTENANCE XEC273AS (1209171273) KIT, ISE 1 YEAR MAINTENANCE KIT XEA794ES (1209155794) Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator. Local or national regulations must be applied in all the operations.

ISE module maintenance

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

1. 6 month maintenance 1.1.

Maintenance kit

KIT, ISE 6 MONTH MAINTENANCE XEC273AS (1209171273)

1.2.

P/n

Designation

Qty

XEA019A (1209151019)

TOOL, GREASE SILICON CONTAINER

1

FAA073A (1202401073)

O'RING, ISE SYRINGE O'RING

8

EAE028AS (1202249028)

TUBING, CRYSTAL 4X6 L=2M

2 metres

EAE003AS (1202249003)

TUBING, TYGON 0.762 (0.030) L=2M

2 metres

XCA167A (1209121167)

CHAMBER, ISOLATOR (SMALL)

1

What to do?

Here are listed and organized the tasks to be performed during the ISE 6 month maintenance. For each task, the steps to follow are detailed in chapter 3. No.

RAS388J - 2

Task

Link

1

Syringes O-rings replacement and greasing

3.2. Syringes O-rings replacement and greasing, page 5

2

Electrovalve no. 4 cleaning

3.4. Electrovalve no. 4 cleaning, page 9

3

Tubing "reference electrode to electrovalve no. 4" replacement

3.5. Tubing "reference electrode to electrovalve no. 4" replacement, page 10

4

ISE mix cup cleaning

3.6. ISE mix cup cleaning, page 10

5

Tubing "air sensor to ISE mix cup" replacement

3.7. Tubing "air sensor to ISE mix cup" replacement, page 11

6

Isolator and ISE waste tubing replacement

3.9. Isolator and ISE waste tubing replacement, page 11

7

ISE mix cup adjustment

3.10. ISE mix cup adjustment, page 12

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

ISE module maintenance

2. Yearly maintenance 2.1.

Maintenance kit

KIT, ISE 1 YEAR MAINTENANCE KIT XEA794ES (1209155794) P/n

Designation

Qty

EAE007A*

TUBING, TYGON 1.52 (0.060)

3 metres

EAB015A (1202211015)

FITTING, STRAIGHT 2.5/1.5

11

GBM0891 (1203600891)

SYRINGE, ISE SYR. PISTON

4

XEC273AS (1209171273)

KIT, ISE 6 MONTH MAINTENANCE

XEA019A (1209151019)

TOOL, GREASE SILICON CONTAINER

FAA073A (1202401073)

O'RING, ISE SYRINGE O'RING

8

EAE028AS (1202249028)

TUBING, CRYSTAL 4X6 L=2M

2 metres

EAE003AS (1202249003)

TUBING, TYGON 0.762 (0.030) L=2M

2 metres

XCA167A (1209121167)

CHAMBER, ISOLATOR (SMALL)

1

1

* Possible to order under the following reference: - EAE007AS (1202249007) (2 metres)

2.2.

What to do?

Here are listed and organized the tasks to be performed during the ISE yearly maintenance. For each task, the steps to follow are detailed in chapter 3. No.

Task

Link

1

Rinsing with distilled water and draining

3.1. Rinsing with distilled water and draining, page 4

2

Syringes pistons and O-rings replacement

3.3. Syringes pistons and O-rings replacement, page 7

3

Electrovalve no. 4 cleaning

3.4. Electrovalve no. 4 cleaning, page 9

4

Tubing "reference electrode to electrovalve no. 4" replacement

3.5. Tubing "reference electrode to electrovalve no. 4" replacement, page 10

5

ISE mix cup cleaning

3.6. ISE mix cup cleaning, page 10

6

Tubing "air sensor to ISE mix cup" replacement

3.7. Tubing "air sensor to ISE mix cup" replacement, page 11

7

All tubings and fittings replacement

3.8. All tubings and fittings replacement, page 11

8

Isolator and ISE waste tubing replacement

3.9. Isolator and ISE waste tubing replacement, page 11

9

ISE mix cup adjustment

3.10. ISE mix cup adjustment, page 12

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS388J - 3

ISE module maintenance

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

3. Procedures 3.1.

Rinsing with distilled water and draining

In order not to damage the pistons, it is advisable to drain the syringes, then rinse them as quickly as possible to avoid the crystallization of reagents.

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > ISE.

■ Remove

the straws from the reagent bottles and wrap them in absorbent paper.

■ Run

a Purge ISE Module cycle (A) to drain the circuit.

■ Dry

the straws using absorbent paper.

■ Plunge

the straws into a distilled water bottle, then run a Prime flow system cycle (B).

■ Remove

the straws from the distilled water bottle and wrap them in absorbent paper.

B A

■ Run

a Purge ISE Module cycle (A) to drain the circuit.

RAS388J - 4

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

3.2.

ISE module maintenance

Syringes O-rings replacement and greasing

■ Go

to Services > Customer Services > ISE and press Change electrode. A

■ Disconnect

the 2 tubings from the syringe

(A). ■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws (B) of the syringe body, then remove it. B

■ On a piece of absorbent paper, unscrew the

CHC screws and the Torx screws to open the syringe body. ■ Remove

the pistons and gently clean them with distilled water.

■ Replace

the 4 O-rings with new ones.

■ Take

the first syringe block cover and put 2 O-rings in it. Do not grease these O-rings. Install the first cover on the syringe body (O-ring side facing up).

■ Grease

2 O-rings and put them in the second syringe block cover. Install the second cover on the syringe body (O-ring side facing up).

O-rings without grease

■ Screw

both covers on the syringe body without tightening the screws. O-rings with grease

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS388J - 5

ISE module maintenance

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Both covers must be well-aligned with the syringe body.

■ Put

the pistons in the syringe body.

■ Maintain

the covers and the syringe body well-aligned and tighten the screws.

To avoid risk of instability or impossibility to calibrate, be very careful not to inverse the pistons when reassembling the syringe.

■ Reinstall

the syringe body on the ISE syringes assy without tightening the screws.

■ Perform

the same operation with the second syringe.

■ Press

Mechanical Initialization.

■ When

the pistons are in the highest position, press Stop ISE cycle.

■ Tighten ■ Press

RAS388J - 6

the syringe body screws.

Mechanical Initialization.

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

3.3.

ISE module maintenance

Syringes pistons and O-rings replacement

■ Go

to Services > Customer Services > ISE and press Change electrode. A

■ Disconnect

the 2 tubings from the syringe

(A). ■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws (B) of the syringe body, then remove it. B

■ On a piece of absorbent paper, unscrew the

CHC screws and the Torx screws to open the syringe body. ■ Replace

both pistons with new ones.

■ Replace

the 4 O-rings with new ones.

■ Take

the first syringe block cover and put 2 O-rings in it. Do not grease these O-rings. Install the first cover on the syringe body (O-ring side facing up).

■ Grease

2 O-rings and put them in the second syringe block cover. Install the second cover on the syringe body (O-ring side facing up).

O-rings without grease

■ Screw

both covers on the syringe body without tightening the screws. O-rings with grease

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS388J - 7

ISE module maintenance

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Both covers must be well-aligned with the syringe body.

■ Put

the pistons in the syringe body.

■ Maintain

the covers and the syringe body well-aligned and tighten the screws.

To avoid risk of instability or impossibility to calibrate, be very careful not to inverse the pistons when reassembling the syringe.

■ Reinstall

the syringe body on the ISE syringes assy without tightening the screws.

■ Perform

the same operation with the second syringe.

■ Press

Mechanical Initialization.

■ When

the pistons are in the highest position, press Stop ISE cycle.

■ Tighten ■ Press

RAS388J - 8

the syringe body screws.

Mechanical Initialization.

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

3.4.

ISE module maintenance

Electrovalve no. 4 cleaning

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws of the right syringe body ("Syringe 1"), then remove it.

■ Disconnect

the tubing from the lower inlet of the reference electrode. See ISE module hydraulic diagram, page 13.

B

■ Plunge this tubing into bleach (diluted 1/10)

(A).

A

■ Press on the electrovalve with a screwdriver

(B) and push the syringe piston (C) to make the bleach pass through the electrovalve. C

■ Leave

the bleach to act for a few seconds.

■ Perform

this operation 4 times.

■ Remove

the tubing from the bleach.

■ Plunge

it into distilled water and rinse the electrovalve in the same way as described above.

■ Perform

Technical Manual RAA023

this operation 10 times.

RAS388J - 9

ISE module maintenance

■ Remove

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

the dried up residue of the saline

solution.

■ Reinstall

the syringe body on the ISE syringes assy without tightening the screws.

■ Press

Mechanical Initialization.

■ When

the pistons are in the highest position, press Stop ISE cycle.

■ Tighten ■ Press

3.5.

the syringe body screws.

Mechanical Initialization.

Tubing "reference electrode to electrovalve no. 4" replacement ■ Replace

the tubing from the lower inlet of the reference electrode to the electrovalve no. 4, inlet 1 (cut 0.170 m of the 0.76 mm Tygon tubing). See ISE module hydraulic diagram, page 13.

3.6.

ISE mix cup cleaning ■ Remove

the ISE cup cover. See RAS377: Covers dismantling, 9. Reagent plate, page 6.

■ Disconnect ■ Remove ■ Clean

RAS388J - 10

the 4 tubings from the ISE mix cup.

the ISE mix cup.

it with bleach (diluted 1/10) and rinse it with distilled water.

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

3.7.

ISE module maintenance

Tubing "air sensor to ISE mix cup" replacement ■ Replace the tubing from the air sensor inlet to the electrovalve no. 5 (cut 0.085 m of the 0.76 mm Tygon

tubing) and the tubing from the electrovalve no. 5 to the lower inlet of the ISE mix cup (cut 0.103 m of the 0.76 mm Tygon tubing). See ISE module hydraulic diagram, page 13. ■ Reconnect

3.8.

the 3 other tubings on the ISE mix cup.

■ Put

the ISE mix cup back.

■ Put

the ISE cup cover back.

All tubings and fittings replacement

Replace all the ISE module tubings and fittings by following the hydraulic diagram. See ISE module hydraulic diagram, page 13.

3.9.

Isolator and ISE waste tubing replacement ■ Replace

the isolator with a new one.

Be very careful to respect the isolator orientation.

To LV4 valve

To waste

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS388J - 11

ISE module maintenance

■

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Cut 750 mm of crystal tubing 4x6 and replace the ISE waste tubing located inside the instrument between the straight fitting 3.1/2.3 of the ISE module (E1) and the internal central luer connector.

E1

luer connector

■ Use

the remaining crystal tubing 4x6 to replace the ISE waste tubing located outside the instrument between the external central luer connector and the waste tank. luer connector

■ Guide

with the shortest distance from the instrument to the waste detection assy and cut to the correct length.

■ Then,

connect it to the small connector of the waste detection assy.

3.10.

ISE mix cup adjustment

Perform an ISE mix cup adjustment (see RAS441: ISE module installation, 1.4.1. ISE mix cup adjustment, page 7).

RAS388J - 12

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

ISE module maintenance

ISE module hydraulic diagram

This diagram is available in the form of a sticker to be stuck on the inside of the ISE cover: STICKER, ISE HYDRAULIC HAX0271 (1207230271).

Mark on diagram 0.76-xxx 1.52-xxx 1.5/2.5 ISOLATOR Air sensor Na+

Technical Manual RAA023

P/n EAE003A* EAE007A* EAB015A (1202211015) XCA167A (1209121167) GBM0746 (3014029452) A11A01738

Designation TUBING, TYGON 0.762 (0.030) TUBING, TYGON 1.52 (0.060) FITTING, STRAIGHT 2.5/1.5 CHAMBER, ISOLATOR (SMALL) FLUID, ISE AIR DETECT.ELECTRODE ABX PENTRA SODIUM-E

Sales unit * * Pack of 5 1 1 1

RAS388J - 13

ISE module maintenance

Mark on diagram ClK+ Ref LV1, LV2, LV3, LV4 LV5, LV6 E1

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

P/n A11A01739 A11A01740 A11A01741 XBA635AS (1209119635) XBA544C (1209113544) EBA018A (1202351018) EBA017A (1202351017) XBA733AS (1209119733) EAB013A (1202211013) GBM1266 (1203601266) GBM0751 (1203600751) GBM0750 (1203600750)

Designation ABX PENTRA CHLORIDE-E ABX PENTRA POTASSIUM-E ABX PENTRA REFERENCE-E VALVE, ISE VALVE VALVE, ISE VALVE ASSY VALVE, LV5 VALVE ISE VALVE, LV6 VALVE ISE VALVE, ISE MIXCUP VALVE ASSY FITTING, STRAIGHT 3.1/2.3 CLEAR FLUID, ISE REF.BLUE STRAW 300 ML FLUID, ISE 300 ML BOTTLE STRAW FLUID, ISE 100 ML BOTTLE STRAW

Sales unit 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

* Possible to order under the following references: - EAE003AS (1202249003) (2 metres) - EAE007AS (1202249007) (2 metres)

RAS388J - 14

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS537D

ISE module check up after intervention

RAS537: ISE module check up after intervention

Concerns Check up on serum mode Preliminary operations Calibration ISE activation Control Check results Check up on urine mode Results validation configuration Procedure

Required tools None

Required products Distilled water

Intervention time 0 h 30

Frequency On request

Specific kit or consumables ABX Pentra N Control A11A01653 ABX Pentra P Control A11A01654 ABX Pentra Standard 2 A11A01718

Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator. Local or national regulations must be applied in all the operations.

ISE module check up after intervention

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

The "ISE module check up after intervention" procedure should be performed after an intervention to verify that the ISE module is functioning properly.

To minimize environmental interferences, the ISE module cover must always be closed during ISE module operation.

1. Check up on serum mode 1.1.

Preliminary operations

1.1.1. Results validation configuration ■ Go

to Services > System Configuration > Results validation.

■ Write

down the customer configuration.

It is necessary to write down the customer configuration to reconfigure the control results validation, with the customer configuration, at the end of the procedure.

■ Press

Edit (A).

■ Configure ■ Press

B

the control results validation (B).

OK to validate (C).

A

RAS537D - 2

C

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

ISE module check up after intervention

1.1.2. Application check ■ Go

to Services > Application Configuration > Applications.

■ Select

the application "K_S" in the Applications list and press Details.

■ In

the Result area, the Decimal Position field must be set at least to 1.

■ If

not, press Edit to modify the value, then press OK.

1.1.3. Control configuration ■ Go

to Calibration/Control > Control and refer to your user manual to configure the N Control and the P Control for the tests Cl, K and Na on serum. ■ Refer

to the N Control and the P Control vials to specify the control characteristics. To use the same configuration later, enter a longer expiration date. ■ Refer to the N Control and the P Control vials to specify the Target value, Min. value and Max. value for the tests Cl, K and Na. ■ Fill

one sample tube with 2 mL of N Control and another one with 2 mL of P Control.

■ Physically ■ Then,

Technical Manual RAA023

position the N Control and the P Control on the programmed rack positions.

load the rack on the sample tray.

RAS537D - 3

ISE module check up after intervention

1.2.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Calibration

This part of the procedure has to be done only after the first installation of the ISE module or after the installation of new electrodes.

■ From

the main menu, press the ISE Module Status button.

■ Press

Calibrate to perform a 2-point calibration.

■ Note the results (low and high values) of the

2-point calibration for each electrode. ■ Perform

this operation 5 times.

■ Calculate

the difference between the low and high values for each result.

Low value (mV)

High value (mV)

Difference

1

52.0

44.1

7.9

2

51.9

44.7

7.2

3

52.0

44.7

7.3

4

52.1

44.8

7.3

5

52.0

44.8

7.2

For the three last calibrations, the gap between the calculated differences must be 0.2 mV maximum. For this example: - 7.3 - 7.3 - 7.2 The gap is 0.1 mV. It might be possible, during the first hour after the electrode installation, that the gap exceeds 0.2 mV. It is due to the electrode stabilization. In this case, wait for one hour before repeating this part of the procedure.

RAS537D - 4

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

1.3.

ISE module check up after intervention

ISE activation ■ Go

to Services > Customer Services > ISE.

■ Put

a sample tube on a rack.

■ Select

the rack position of the sample tube used for the ISE activation by using the corresponding scrolling lists.

■ Press

ISE activation key and follow the instructions given by the instrument.

■ Repeat

this operation a second time.

■ From the main menu, press the ISE Module

Status button and then press Calibrate button.

1.4.

Control

Once the calibration is validated, perform the control as explained below. ■ Go

to Worklist > Control and refer to your user manual to create the control request (10 replicates) for the tests Cl, K and Na on serum.

■ Run the analyses by pressing Start from the

generic toolbar. The 10 replicates for the tests Cl, K and Na on the N Control and the P Control will be performed.

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS537D - 5

ISE module check up after intervention

1.5.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Check results

Once the instrument is Ready, check results of the tests Cl, K and Na. ■ Go

to Quality Control > Control. A C

■ Select

the N Control using the Control scrolling list (A).

■ In

the Session Mean area, drag the slider (B) to display the CV (C).

■ Make

B

sure that the CV are lower than those below: Test

CV Max.

CL_S

1.0

K_S

1.0

NA_S

1.0

■ Follow

the same procedure for the P Control.

If you have to run the 10 replicates again, ask for a New Worklist from the Start up window (use the Change User option from the Shutdown window) so that only the 10 new replicates are taken into account in the CV calculation.

RAS537D - 6

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

ISE module check up after intervention

2. Check up on urine mode First, perform check up on serum mode (See 1. Check up on serum mode, page 2).

2.1.

Results validation configuration

See 1.1.1. Results validation configuration, page 2.

2.2.

Procedure

Check the ISE results in urine mode as follows.

2.2.1. Application check ■ Go

to Services > Application Configuration > Applications.

■ For

the applications "K_U" and "NA_U", make sure that the Decimal Position field is set at least to 1.

2.2.2. Control configuration ■ Go

to Calibration/Control > Control and refer to your user manual to configure the Standard 2 as a control for the tests Cl, K and Na on urine.

Please refer to the Standard 2 bottle to specify the control characteristics (name, lot, expiration date) and to the following table to specify the Target value, Min. value and Max. value for the tests "CL_U", "K_U" and "NA_U".

Target values

■

Test

Target value

Min. value

Max. value

CL_U

150

143

157

K_U

7

6.7

7.3

NA_U

200

187.8

212.2

Fill one sample cup with 500 µL of Standard 2 and physically position this sample cup on the programmed rack position.

■ Then,

Technical Manual RAA023

load the rack on the sample tray. RAS537D - 7

ISE module check up after intervention

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

2.2.3. Control ■ Go

to Worklist > Control and refer to your user manual to create the control request (5 replicates) for the tests Cl, K and Na on urine.

■ Run the analyses by pressing Start from the

generic toolbar. The 5 replicates for the tests Cl, K and Na on the Standard 2 will be performed. ■ Perform

this operation twice.

2.2.4. Check results Once the instrument is Ready, check results of the tests Cl, K and Na. ■ Go

to Quality Control > Control.

■ Select

the Standard 2 control and make sure that: - the results are included between the Min. and Max. values. See Target values, page 7. - the CV are lower than those below: Test

CV Max.

CL_U

2.0

K_U

1.5

NA_U

2.0

If you have to run the 10 replicates again, ask for a New Worklist from the Start up window (use the Change User option from the Shutdown window) so that only the 10 new replicates are taken into account in the CV calculation.

■ Go

to Services > System Configuration > Results validation.

■ Press

Edit.

■ Reconfigure ■ Press

RAS537D - 8

the control results validation with the customer configuration previously written down.

OK to validate.

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS538F

ISE module spare part replacement In this procedure, specific instructions are given for previous ABX Pentra 400 hardware versions: ■ V1 corresponds to instruments with serial numbers below 2000.

RAS538: ISE module spare part replacement

Concerns ISE module dismantling ISE module spare parts replacement Boards replacement ISE valves replacement ISE syringes and motors replacement ISE module mechanical adjustments ISE mix cup adjustment Sample arm "ISE Sample" position adjustment LB sensor adjustment

Required tools Hexagonal keys Phillips screwdriver Voltmeter Syringe KIT, ANTISTATIC KIT MZZ015A (1207921015)

Required products Distilled water

Intervention time N/A

Frequency On request

Specific kit or consumables None Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator. Local or national regulations must be applied in all the operations.

ISE module spare part replacement

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

1. ISE module dismantling ■ Open ■ Go

the arms main cover and the ISE cover.

to Services > Diagnostics > ISE.

■ Rinse

and purge the ISE module: - Remove the straws from the reagent bottles and wrap them in absorbent paper. - Run a Purge ISE Module cycle (A) to drain the circuit. - Dry the straws using absorbent paper. - Plunge the straws into a distilled water bottle, then run a Prime flow system cycle (B). - Remove the straws from the distilled water bottle and wrap them in absorbent paper. - Run a Purge ISE Module cycle (A) to drain the circuit.

■ Switch

B A

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

From the instrument rear: Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1 Connections are accessible from the instrument front on ABX Pentra 400 V1. Move directly to the next chapter.

■ Remove

the ISE rear plate by unscrewing the 12 CHC screws.

RAS538F - 2

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Unplug

ISE module spare part replacement

the waste tubing (A).

■ Disconnect

the power supply cable (B) and the null modem cable (C). B C

A

From the instrument front:

B

A

■ Slightly loosen the 2 CHC screws (A) to free

the left gusset plate. ■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws and plastic washers (B) on the right-hand side of the module.

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws (C) on the lefthand side of the module.

C Now, it is possible to move the ISE module, but if necessary, remove the power supply cover, the external and internal sample covers. See RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1.

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS538F - 3

ISE module spare part replacement

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1 ■ Slowly

pull the ISE module to access the connections.

■ Unplug

the waste tubing (A).

■ Disconnect

the power supply cable (B) and the null modem cable (C). B C

A ■ Remove

the ISE module.

■ Reassemble

in reverse order.

2. ISE module spare parts replacement At the end of each replacement, proceed to a mechanical adjustment (see 3. ISE module mechanical adjustments, page 20), run a Global Initialization cycle in Services > Diagnostics > ISE and follow the "ISE module check up after intervention" procedure (see RAS537: ISE module check up after intervention, page 1). ■ Switch ■ Open ■

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

the arms main cover and the ISE cover.

Dismantle the ISE module until you have access to its connections (See 1. ISE module dismantling, page 2).

RAS538F - 4

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

2.1.

ISE module spare part replacement

Boards replacement

As the electronic devices are very sensitive to electrostatic discharges (ESD), the use of an antistatic kit is mandatory during boards handling/dismantling.

2.1.1. ISE software board

CPU-03N

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws and washers.

■ Slowly

pull the ISE software board to remove it from the ISE mother board.

■ Reassemble

in reverse order.

CPU-07N

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS538F - 5

ISE module spare part replacement

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

2.1.2. ISE mother board

■ Carefully

disconnect: - the "preampli to main board ISE" cable (A) - the valves cable (B) - the 2 syringe home sensor cables: one of them from the ISE syringe motor 1/75 (C) and the other one from the ISE syringe motor 1/150 (D) - the 2 syringe motor cables: one of them from the ISE syringe motor 1/75 (E) and the other one from the ISE syringe motor 1/150 (F)

■ Remove

A B C E D F

the ISE software board. See 2.1.1. ISE software board, page 5.

■ Unscrew

the 5 CHC screws and washers (one with a ground wire) to remove the ISE mother board from its plate.

■ Reassemble

RAS538F - 6

in reverse order.

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

ISE module spare part replacement

2.1.3. ISE preampli board assy ■ Open

the ISE cage door and remove the electrodes.

■ Remove

the ISE V2 mix cup valve assy as follows: - Unscrew the 2 CHC screws and washers maintaining the ISE V2 mix cup valve assy.

- Disconnect all the tubings from the ISE V2 mix cup valve assy. - Remove the ISE V2 mix cup valve assy.

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS538F - 7

ISE module spare part replacement

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Unscrew

the 8 CHC screws (one with a braided ground wire) supporting the ISE preampli board assy to access the board.

■ Slowly

pull the ISE preampli board assy.

A B ■ Disconnect

the "preampli to main board ISE" cable (A) from the ISE preampli board.

■ Unscrew

the screw supporting the ground

wire (B). ■ Remove

the preampli board assy.

■ Reassemble

in reverse order. To reconnect all the tubings correctly: see ISE module hydraulic diagram, page 18.

RAS538F - 8

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

2.2.

ISE module spare part replacement

ISE valves replacement

2.2.1. ISE valve (LV1, LV2, LV3, LV4)

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws supporting the ISE valve assy and pull it toward the rear of the ISE module.

■ Disconnect all the tubings from the valve to

be replaced. ■ Unscrew

the 2 screws located under the valve to be replaced.

■ Cut

the Ty-Raps™ maintaining the black and red cables.

■ Disconnect

the valve connector from the connector located on the ISE mother board.

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS538F - 9

ISE module spare part replacement

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Disconnect

the black and red cables of the concerned valve from the valve connector. For this, push the cables using a thin screwdriver.

■ Connect

the new valve cables on the valve connector. Be careful of the polarity when connecting cables. Place the black cable on position "A" and the red cable on position "B".

A

B

■ Reassemble

in reverse order. To reconnect all the tubings correctly: see ISE module hydraulic diagram, page 18.

■ Run

a Valve Check cycle in Services > Diagnostics > ISE.

2.2.2. ISE valve assy (LV1, LV2, LV3, LV4)

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws supporting the ISE valve assy and pull it toward the rear of the ISE module.

■ Disconnect

RAS538F - 10

all the tubings from the valves.

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

ISE module spare part replacement

■ Disconnect

the valve connector from the connector located on the ISE mother board.

■ Reassemble

in reverse order. To reconnect all the tubings correctly: see ISE module hydraulic diagram, page 18.

■ Run

a Valve Check cycle in Services > Diagnostics > ISE.

2.2.3. ISE LV5 valve

■ Disconnect

the LV5 cable connector located at the back of the ISE module electrode holder.

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws supporting the LV5 valve.

■ Replace

the valve.

■ Reassemble

Technical Manual RAA023

in reverse order.

RAS538F - 11

ISE module spare part replacement

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

2.2.4. ISE LV6 valve

■ Disconnect

the LV6 cable connector located at the back of the ISE module electrode holder.

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws and washers supporting the ISE V2 mix cup valve assy.

■ Remove

the ISE V2 mix cup valve assy.

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws supporting the LV6 valve.

■ Replace

the valve.

■ Reassemble

in reverse order. To reconnect all the tubings correctly: see ISE module hydraulic diagram, page 18.

RAS538F - 12

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

ISE module spare part replacement

2.2.5. ISE V2 mix cup valve assy

■ Disconnect

the LV5 and LV6 cable connectors located at the back of the ISE module electrode holder.

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws and washers supporting the ISE V2 mix cup valve assy.

■ Disconnect

all the tubings from the ISE V2 mix cup valve assy.

■ Remove

the ISE V2 mix cup valve assy.

■ Reassemble

in reverse order. To reconnect all the tubings correctly: see ISE module hydraulic diagram, page 18.

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS538F - 13

ISE module spare part replacement

2.3.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

ISE syringes and motors replacement

2.3.1. ISE syringe + motor assy

■ Cut

the Ty-Raps™ maintaining the syringe home sensor and syringe motor cables.

■ Disconnect

from the ISE mother board: - the 2 syringe home sensor cables: one of them from the ISE syringe motor 1/75 (A) and the other one from the ISE syringe motor 1/150 (B) - the 2 syringe motor cables: one of them from the ISE syringe motor 1/75 (C) and the other one from the ISE syringe motor 1/150 (D)

■ Disconnect

A C B D

the 4 tubings on the syringe

blocks.

RAS538F - 14

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

ISE module spare part replacement

■ Remove

the ISE reagent bottles from the ISE bottle support.

■ Unscrew

the 3 screws supporting the ISE bottle support and remove it.

■ Unscrew

the 8 CHC screws supporting the ISE syringe + motor assy.

■ Reassemble

in reverse order. To reconnect all the tubings correctly: see ISE module hydraulic diagram, page 18.

■ Run

a Needle 1 Liquid Aspiration cycle and a Needle 2 Liquid Aspiration cycle in Services > Diagnostics > ISE.

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS538F - 15

ISE module spare part replacement

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

2.3.2. ISE syringe block assy

■ Disconnect

the 2 tubings from the syringe block to be replaced.

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws of the syringe block to be replaced, then remove the syringe body.

■ Reinstall

the syringe body on the ISE syringes assy without tightening the screws.

■ Go

to Services > Customer Services > ISE and press Mechanical Initialization.

■ When

the pistons are in the highest position, press Stop ISE cycle.

■ Tighten ■ Press

■ To

the syringe body screws.

Mechanical Initialization.

reconnect all the tubings correctly: see ISE module hydraulic diagram, page 18.

■ Run

a Needle 1 Liquid Aspiration cycle and a Needle 2 Liquid Aspiration cycle in Services > Diagnostics > ISE.

RAS538F - 16

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

ISE module spare part replacement

2.3.3. ISE syringe motor 1/150, 1/75

■ Cut

the Ty-Raps™ maintaining the syringe home sensor and syringe motor cables.

■ Disconnect

from the ISE mother board the syringe motor cable of the motor to be replaced: - for ISE syringe motor 1/75 (A) - for ISE syringe motor 1/150 (B)

A B

■ Unscrew

the 4 CHC screws supporting the ISE syringe motor to be replaced and remove the motor spring (if present).

spring ■ Reassemble

spring

in reverse order.

■ Run

a Needle 1 Liquid Aspiration cycle and a Needle 2 Liquid Aspiration cycle in Services > Diagnostics > ISE.

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS538F - 17

ISE module spare part replacement

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

ISE module hydraulic diagram

This diagram is available in the form of a sticker to be stuck on the inside of the ISE cover: STICKER, ISE HYDRAULIC HAX0271 (1207230271).

Mark on diagram 0.76-xxx 1.52-xxx 1.5/2.5 ISOLATOR Air sensor Na+

RAS538F - 18

P/n EAE003A* EAE007A* EAB015A (1202211015) XCA167A (1209121167) GBM0746 (3014029452) A11A01738

Designation TUBING, TYGON 0.762 (0.030) TUBING, TYGON 1.52 (0.060) FITTING, STRAIGHT 2.5/1.5 CHAMBER, ISOLATOR (SMALL) FLUID, ISE AIR DETECT.ELECTRODE ABX PENTRA SODIUM-E

Sales unit * * Pack of 5 1 1 1

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Mark on diagram ClK+ Ref LV1, LV2, LV3, LV4 LV5, LV6 E1

ISE module spare part replacement

P/n A11A01739 A11A01740 A11A01741 XBA635AS (1209119635) XBA544C (1209113544) EBA018A (1202351018) EBA017A (1202351017) XBA733AS (1209119733) EAB013A (1202211013) GBM1266 (1203601266) GBM0751 (1203600751) GBM0750 (1203600750)

Designation ABX PENTRA CHLORIDE-E ABX PENTRA POTASSIUM-E ABX PENTRA REFERENCE-E VALVE, ISE VALVE VALVE, ISE VALVE ASSY VALVE, LV5 VALVE ISE VALVE, LV6 VALVE ISE VALVE, ISE MIXCUP VALVE ASSY FITTING, STRAIGHT 3.1/2.3 CLEAR FLUID, ISE REF.BLUE STRAW 300 ML FLUID, ISE 300 ML BOTTLE STRAW FLUID, ISE 100 ML BOTTLE STRAW

Sales unit 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

* Possible to order under the following references: - EAE003AS (1202249003) (2 metres) - EAE007AS (1202249007) (2 metres)

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS538F - 19

ISE module spare part replacement

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

3. ISE module mechanical adjustments ■ Connect

3.1.

the power supply cable and switch the instrument on.

ISE mix cup adjustment

Follow the ISE mix cup adjustment procedure (see RAS441: ISE module installation, 1.4.1. ISE mix cup adjustment, page 7).

3.2.

Sample arm "ISE Sample" position adjustment

Adjust the sample arm in the ISE mix cup by following the sample arm adjustment procedure. - ISE Sample (rotation) to center the sample needle in the ISE mix cup. See RAS385: Arms, 6.3.5. ISE Position, page 42. - Low Position in ISE Tower (vertical) to adjust the sample needle height in the ISE mix cup. See RAS385: Arms, 6.4.5. "Low Position in ISE Tower", page 53.

RAS538F - 20

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

ISE module spare part replacement

4. LB sensor adjustment ■ Remove

the ISE V2 mix cup valve assy (See 2.1.3. ISE preampli board assy, page 7).

■ Unscrew

the 8 CHC screws (one with a braided ground wire) supporting the ISE preampli board assy to access the board.

■ Slowly

pull the ISE preampli board assy. The connectors and tubings must stay connected.

■ Connect a

voltmeter between TP2 and TP3.

VR1

TP2

TP3

■ Remove

the ISE cup cover (See RAS377: Covers dismantling, 9. Reagent plate, page 6).

■ Remove

the ISE mix cup.

■ Disconnect

Technical Manual RAA023

the tubing from the ISE mix cup to the air sensor.

RAS538F - 21

ISE module spare part replacement

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Measure

the voltage between TP2 and TP3. The voltage must be > 4 V with air in the sensor. If not, loosen the 4 CHC screws supporting the board, then move the board to adjust the voltage. If the voltage is still < 4 V, adjust it with the trimmer VR1.

■ Fill

a syringe with distilled water then connect it to the air sensor.

■ Use

the syringe to push the liquid in the air sensor.

■ Measure

the voltage between TP2 and TP3. The voltage must be < 1 V with liquid in the sensor. If not, loosen the 4 CHC screws supporting the board, then move the board to adjust the voltage. If the voltage is still > 1 V, adjust it with the trimmer VR1.

■ Check

if the adjustment with air in the sensor is still correct. If not readjust it.

■ Check

and readjust until both adjustments are correct.

■ When

the adjustment is correct, tighten the screws.

■ Reassemble ■

in reverse order.

Perform an ISE mix cup adjustment (see RAS441: ISE module installation, 1.4.1. ISE mix cup adjustment, page 7).

RAS538F - 22

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS539C

Dummy PENTRA software use In this procedure, specific instructions are given for previous ABX Pentra 400 hardware versions: ■ V1 corresponds to instruments with serial numbers below 2000.

RAS539: Dummy PENTRA software use

Concerns Introduction Connection of the ISE module with the laptop Reminder on the different ISE module status Communication between instrument and ISE module Command access in the Dummy PENTRA software Command validity according to the ISE module status Dummy PENTRA software use Command sequence to complete the diagnostic Explanation of the main error messages End of operation

Required tools Hexagonal keys Phillips screwdriver

Required products Distilled water

Intervention time N/A

Frequency On request

Specific kit or consumables None

Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator. Local or national regulations must be applied in all the operations.

Dummy PENTRA software use

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

1. Introduction The Dummy PENTRA software makes the breakdown diagnostic relative to the ISE module easier. According to the result of the performed tests, the failure can be attributed to the ISE module in itself or to the instrument. ■ This

software stems from the HORIBA Medical production. certain software functions are available. ■ This software is designed for diagnostic help. ■ No upgrade/improvement of the software is expected at that time. ■ No specific aid concerning the use of this software will be provided. ■ The instrument can continue to run even if the ISE module is dismantled. ■ Only

2. Connection of the ISE module with the laptop ■ Switch ■ Open

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

the arms main cover and the ISE cover.

Two solutions are possible to connect to the ISE module.

2.1.

First case (easy one): use of a new connection cable ■ Obtain ■

a null modem cable DB9F/DB9F, ref. DAC028A (1201891028).

Dismantle the ISE module until you have access to its connections (See RAS538: ISE module spare part replacement, 1. ISE module dismantling, page 2).

■ Disconnect

RAS539C - 2

the null modem cable of the ISE module.

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Dummy PENTRA software use

ISE module mother board ■ Connect

the cable, ref. DAC028A (1201891028), to the ISE module (in CN2 position) and to the laptop. CN2

Connector + Null modem cable

2.2. Second case (if no cable at your disposal): use of the ISE/ instrument null modem cable

■ Dismantle

the ISE module until you have access to its connections (see RAS538: ISE module spare part replacement, 1. ISE module dismantling, page 2).

■ Remove

the mixer cover. See RAS377: Covers dismantling, 15. Mixer cover, page 9.

■ Remove the mother board cover. See RAS377: Covers dismantling, 16. Mother board cover, page

10.

Null modem cable in J3 position

■ When

the mother board is visible, disconnect the null modem cable from J3 position.

■

2 cutting wheels

Slowly guide the null modem cable down to the passage designed for the wires (follow the black "Barcode Reader" wire) to reach the ISE module back.

■ Connect

Technical Manual RAA023

the cable to the laptop.

RAS539C - 3

Dummy PENTRA software use

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

3. Reminder on the different ISE module status The ISE module exists in seven different statuses. While the instrument is running, the status of the ISE module is displayed in the ISE tab. Go to Services > Customer Services > ISE. The status from 0 to 6 of the ISE module are described in the following table: Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

Description Module not initialized Module initialized Module configured Mechanical part initialized Module sleeping Fluidic part initialized Module calibrated

In correct working order, the ISE module evolves sequentially from status 0 to 6, thus from the instrument start up (Power ON) to the calibrated module achievement, ready for the analyses.

RAS539C - 4

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Dummy PENTRA software use

4. Communication between instrument and ISE module The change from status to status depends on the instrument which activates specific commands (see Status transition diagram, page 5). In addition to these commands which allow the ISE module to reach the status 6, the instrument can communicate with the ISE through several other commands to provide the global functioning of the ISE module. These commands can vary from a serum measurement to a cleaning command, and include an activation command. These commands are accessible from the Dummy PENTRA software. They are defined by a number and the expected action heading.

Status transition diagram Commands of the analyzer allowing the transition from status to status

Description of the status Power ON

This status doesn’t require any command from the analyzer

Status 0 "Request status", "Request data" "Request system configuration"

Status 1

Ready to communicate with the analyzer

Status 2

Complete initialization (configuration checking, emptying of the RAM memory...)

"Set system configuration"

"Initialization of mechanical system"

Status 3

Initialization of the mechanical system

"Initialization of flow system" Status 4

Waking status

"Stabilization of flow system" Status 5

Complete initialization of the fluidic system

Status 6

Two point calibration ended

"Two point calibration"

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS539C - 5

Dummy PENTRA software use

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

5. Command access in the Dummy PENTRA software ■ Connect ■ Open

the power supply cable and switch the instrument on.

the Dummy PENTRA software by double-clicking.

If a USB/series adapter is used, configure under Windows the selected USB port in COM1.

The Dummy PENTRA screen opens.

B A

The commands are located in the middle of the window (A). They go sequentially from number 001 to 300. The second part of the commands are accessible by using the scroll bar (B).

Some numbers are missing from the sequence. They correspond to commands carried out by the instrument, but which have no sense to exist in this test software (example of unlisted command: 100- "Emergency stop").

RAS539C - 6

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Dummy PENTRA software use

6. Command validity according to the ISE module status The commands present in this software are either valid or not according to the ISE module status. The table below is a summary of the accessible commands (number and designation) according to the ISE module status: Command Command designation number

Status of the ISE Status 0 Status 1 Status 2 Status 3 Status 4 Status 5 Status 6 module after the command

001 002 003 051 052 053 054

Request status Request data Request system configuration Global initialization Set system configuration Initialization of mechanical system Initialization of flow system

OK OK OK OK OK -

OK OK OK OK OK -

OK OK OK OK OK OK -

OK OK OK OK OK OK OK

OK OK OK OK OK OK OK

OK OK OK OK OK OK OK

OK OK OK OK OK OK OK

055

Two point calibration

-

-

-

-

OK

OK

OK

056 057 058 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 101 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 200 300

One point calibration Measure serum Measure urine Keep ready Shut down Cleaning Prime flow system Stabilization of flow system Activation Drain Wake up Exchange electrode Ready Measure urine (2) Global check Check L solution Check H solution Check sample Check dispenser 1 Check dispenser 2 Check liquid valves Check LB sensor Position for transport IPL mode Wait

OK OK

OK OK

OK OK

OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK

OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK

OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK

OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK

ID ID ID 6 2 3 5 6 or 4 (if status 4 at the beginning) ID 6 6 4 3 ID ID 5 ID 3 6 NA 6 6 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 or 4 NU NU NU

OK: Accessible command -: Unaccessible command ID: Status identical to the initial command status NA: Not applicable NU: Not used

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS539C - 7

Dummy PENTRA software use

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

7. Dummy PENTRA software use The Dummy PENTRA software put together all the actions in relation with the ISE module, accessible in the Customer Services menu and in the Diagnostics menu.

The Dummy PENTRA software V1.32 is compatible with both ABX Pentra 400 and Pentra C400.

7.1.

Software description

The Dummy PENTRA screen contains four parts:

3 2

1

4

7.2.

Part 1: Command access

In the case of a breakdown diagnostic, one or several commands can be selected successively. ■ Double-click

the command to select it. A message is displayed. It allows you:

■ To

launch directly the command: click Run

(A). ■ To validate the command without launching

it: click OK (B). This function is used to create a sequence of commands. ■ To

RAS539C - 8

A

B

C

cancel the command: click Cancel (C).

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

7.3.

Dummy PENTRA software use

Part 2: selected commands ■ If

you click OK, the selected command is displayed in part 2 (A) of the window:

A

■

7.4.

To cancel a pre-selected command, click the command in part 2 and cancel it (with delete keyboard key).

Part 3: selected command(s) launching ■ Enter

the number of times the command(s) will be launched in the Repeat times field (B). By default, the command will be carried out only once.

■ To

launch the command without a limit notion: select the Infinity times check box (C).

■ Click

START (D) to launch the command.

■ Click

STOP (E) to stop the command. D E

B C

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS539C - 9

Dummy PENTRA software use

7.5.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Part 4: summary of information linked to the commands ■

When the command is launched, a message is displayed, informing that the selected command is running. The command can be stopped by clicking on the STOP button:

■ When

the command is finished, some information is displayed in part 4.

The information present in each column is explained in the following table: Designation of the column

Corresponding information

"Command"

Command number

"Date"

Date and hour of the test

"Status"

Status of the command (OK, ERR...)

"Initi.Lv"

0 to 6: Status of the ISE module after the command

"Na" "K"

Last values in memory*

"Cl" "SEQ. Time"

Cycle length (in seconds)

"ID#"

Number of the selected command

"Config1"

Value from 0 to 7 according to the selected electrode(s)**

"Config2"

Not used

"Config3"

Not used

"Config4"

Not used

"Config5"

Not used

"Config6"

Not used

* Data can be displayed in these three columns while no analysis have been ordered.

RAS539C - 10

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Dummy PENTRA software use

Example: without any value in memory, the following default values will be displayed: NA

K

Cl

999.9

999.9

999.9

** The table below summarizes the relation between the indicated value and the selected electrode(s):

Electrode use setup Na+

K+

Cl-

0

-

-

-

1

Yes

-

-

2

-

Yes

-

3

Yes

Yes

-

4

-

-

Yes

5

Yes

6 7

Yes

-

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

The command 052 "Set system configuration" allows you to set the use of one, two or three electrodes according to the binary weight (0=none and 7=all) assigned to the field "Config 1". To check the change of configuration, launch the command 003.

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS539C - 11

Dummy PENTRA software use

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

8. Command sequence to complete the diagnostic 8.1.

Communication test between the ISE module and the laptop ■ Command

002: "Request data" If the status is "OK" (A), the communication between the ISE module and the laptop is established.

A

8.2.

ISE module initialization to perform measurements ■ Command

052: "Set system configuration" According to the electrode number present in the ISE module, mention the corresponding value in the field 1 by referring to the information given in the table Electrode use setup, page 11. The command 052 (B) allows: - to initialize the ISE data table - the transition from status 1 to status 2. The status 2 allows you to launch the mechanical initialization of the module.

■ Command

053: "Initialization of mechanical system" If the mechanical initialization is "OK" (C), the system is then in status 3.

■ Command

054: "Initialization of flow system" If the flow system initialization is "OK" (D), the system evolves from status 3 to status 5. In status 5, the flow system is initialized.

The status 4 is a "waking" status. See Status transition diagram, page 5. The status 6 can be reached by using directly the command 067 "Waking up".

RAS539C - 12

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Dummy PENTRA software use

■ Command

055: "Two point calibration" This command makes the system available to perform measurements. If the status is "OK" (E), the status 6 is reached. ■ If

there is a problem during the calibration, an error 03 appears and the system stays in status 5. ■ If there is no value in memory, the value 999.9 is displayed for each physically present electrode. ■ All these sequences can be connected to reach directly the status 6 by using the command 051 "Global initialization".

B C D E

8.3.

Measurement sequences

To perform a measurement command, 50 µL of sample must be poured into the ISE mix cup right before launching the command. ■ Command

057: "Measure serum" The figure below is an example of repeatability performed with the Standard 1 which allows you to compare directly the obtained values with the reference values on Cl, K and Na.

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS539C - 13

Dummy PENTRA software use

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

9. Explanation of the main error messages ■ ERROR

02: communication problem between the ISE module and the instrument.

 Reset the Dummy PENTRA software and switch the ISE module off and on. ■ ERROR

03: this error message exists in different cases:

If the sample is missing or if it has been poured too late:  Make sure that the sample is definitely present before lauching the command. The system stays in status 6. If the system is in "Keep ready":  Wait for the end of the "Keep ready" cycle and launch again the command. The system stays in status 6. If there is a problem with the air sensor:  Make sure that the air sensor is not obstructed.  Readjust the air sensor sensitivity. See RAS538: ISE module spare part replacement, 4. LB sensor adjustment, page 21 The sytem goes to status 4. If there is a problem during the calibration:  Order a new calibration. The system goes to status 5. ■ ERROR

RAS539C - 14

06: command not available in view of the ISE module status.

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Dummy PENTRA software use

10. End of operation ■ When

the diagnostic is done, switch the Dummy PENTRA software off.

■ Switch

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

■ Disconnect

your laptop from the ISE module.

■ Reconnect

the null modem cable.

■ Reassemble ■ Connect

the ISE module in reverse order.

the power supply cable and switch the instrument on.

Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1 ■ Adjust the sample arm in the ISE mix cup. See RAS385: Arms, 6.3.5. ISE Position, page

42 and 6.4.5.

"Low Position in ISE Tower", page 53. ■ Perform

the "ISE module check up after intervention" procedure. See RAS537: ISE module check up after intervention, page 1.

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS539C - 15

Dummy PENTRA software use

RAS539C - 16

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS540C

ISE module software version installation In this procedure, specific instructions are given for previous ABX Pentra 400 hardware versions: ■ V1 corresponds to instruments with serial numbers below 2000.

RAS540: ISE module software version installation

Concerns ISE module preparation ISE software version loading End of operation

Required tools Hexagonal keys Phillips screwdriver Flat screwdriver

Required products None

Intervention time 1 h 00

Frequency On request

Specific kit or consumables Instrument software version CABLE, PC/RS L=1000 5-09 P80 DAD124A (1201921124)

Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator. Local or national regulations must be applied in all the operations.

ISE module software version installation

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

1. ISE module preparation

■ Deselect

the Activate ISE Module check box in Services > System Configuration > Analyser.

■ Install

the instrument software version corresponding to the ISE software version you need. See RAS517: Software version installation, page 1.

■ For

precautionary reasons, save the client parameters (including database, system configuration, parameters of the Customer Services menu and column configuration) by using the Save button in Services > System Configuration > Local Settings.

■ Log ■ Go

in to the instrument software as technician with tech/abxtech as login/password.

to Services > Diagnostics and open the Windows Explorer.

■ Press ■ Log

the Windows Start button, press Log Off abx... and then press Log Off.

in to Windows as administrator with administrator/admin as login/password.

■ From

the Windows Explorer, go to C:\Program Files and modify the name of the P400 Software folder so that at the next instrument start, the instrument software is not launched and you are directly logged in to Windows.

■ Switch ■ Open

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

the arms main cover and the ISE cover.

■ Remove

the mother board cover. See RAS377: Covers dismantling, 16. Mother board cover, page 10.

■ Dismantle

the ISE module until you reach the ISE software board (see RAS538: ISE module spare part replacement, 1. ISE module dismantling, page 2).

RAS540C - 2

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

ISE module software version installation

CPU-03N (for ABX Pentra 400 only) Rotary selector

■ If

your ISE module is equipped with the ISE software board CPU-03N, use a flat screwdriver to turn the rotary selector from 0 to F (located on the ISE software board).

Position F

Position 0

CPU-07N (for Pentra C400 only)

SW1 switch ■ If

your ISE module is equipped with the ISE software board CPU-07N, use a flat screwdriver to change the SW1 switch position from E to W (located on the ISE mother board).

Position W ■ Disconnect

Technical Manual RAA023

the null modem cable from the ISE module.

RAS540C - 3

ISE module software version installation

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

J5

■ On the instrument mother board, unplug the

RS232 cable from position J5.

■ Plug

the RS232 cable into the ISE module.

If needed, use the CABLE, PC/RS L=1000 5-09 P80, ref. DAD124A (1201921124) to simplify the connection between the RS232 cable and the ISE module.

■ Connect

RAS540C - 4

the power supply cable and switch the instrument on.

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

ISE module software version installation

2. ISE software version loading

The following procedure is a generic procedure for the installation of ISE software versions. The version numbers mentioned are shown as an example only.

The ISE software version installation procedure lightly differs depending on the ISE software board you have on your ISE module: CPU-03N or CPU-07N. Make sure to install the ISE software version compatible with your ISE software board.

2.1.

ISE software board CPU-03N (for ABX Pentra 400 only) ■

From the Windows Explorer, go to C:\Program Files\P400 Software\Exe\Tools\ISE\CPU03N and launch the Ipl_load.exe file. The IPL Loader window is displayed.

■ Press

Rom Info.

■ In

the Information Address field, enter "00010000" instead of "00000000".

■ Press

OK. Wait while the message "Just a second..." is displayed.

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS540C - 5

ISE module software version installation

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Make

sure that the indicated ISE version number corresponds to the latest software version installed. For example 1.52.

■ Then,

■ Back

press OK.

to the IPL Loader window, press

Load.

■ Select

the ISE software version to install. For example 1.53.

■ Then,

RAS540C - 6

press Open.

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

ISE module software version installation

■ From

the IPL Loader window, press RomWrite.

■ The

following window is displayed.

■ Once

the data transfer is finished, press Rom Info and make sure that the indicated ISE version number corresponds to the version to install. For example 1.53.

■ Press

OK, then Cancel to close the IPL Loader window.

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS540C - 7

ISE module software version installation

2.2.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

ISE software board CPU-07N (for Pentra C400 only) ■ From

the Windows Explorer, go to C:\Program Files\PC400 Software\Exe\Tools\ISE\CPU07N and launch the IplActiveXClient.exe file. The IPL ActiveXClient window is displayed.

■ Select

the ISE software version to be installed, located in Tools\ISE\CPU07N (A). For example: lp207iplv200.mot.

■ Press

Initialize (B). B

A

■ Once the data transfer is finished, press Get

Info.

RAS540C - 8

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

ISE module software version installation

Version currently installed

Version to be installed

■ In

the Status window, make sure that the indicated ISE version number corresponds to the version to install. For example 2.00.

■ Press

OK to close the Status window.

■ Press

Start.

■ When

"Write completed" is displayed, press OK to close IPL ActiveXClient window.

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS540C - 9

ISE module software version installation

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

3. End of operation ■ From

the Windows Explorer, go to C:\Program Files and rename the P400 Software folder so that at the next instrument start, the instrument software is launched.

■ Press

the Windows Start button, press Shutdown and then Shutdown.

■

When getting the message "It is now safe to turn off your computer", switch the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

■

If your ISE module is equipped with the ISE software board CPU-03N, use a flat screwdriver to turn the rotary selector from F to 0 (located on the ISE software board).

Position F

Position 0

■ If

your ISE module is equipped with the ISE software board CPU-07N, use a flat screwdriver to change the SW1 switch position from W to E (located on the ISE mother board).

Position E

■ Unplug

the RS232 cable from the ISE module and plug it into the instrument mother board (J5). Then, plug the null modem cable into the ISE module.

■ Reassemble ■ Connect

the ISE module in reverse order.

the power supply cable and switch the instrument on.

Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1 ■ Adjust

the sample arm in the ISE mix cup. See RAS385: Arms, 6.4.5. "Low Position in ISE Tower", page 53.

■

Enable the ISE module by selecting the Activate ISE Module check box in Services > System Configuration > Analyser.

■ Run

RAS540C - 10

a Global Initialization cycle in Services > Customer Services > ISE.

Technical Manual RAA023

Section 8: Exploded views

1. Reagent tray .................................................................................................. 8 - 3 2. Reagent tray closing assy ............................................................................ 8 - 6 3. Sample tray.................................................................................................... 8 - 7 4. Optical bench ................................................................................................ 8 - 8 5. Reaction tray ................................................................................................. 8 - 9 6. Cuvette changer.......................................................................................... 8 - 11 7. Cuvette changer carriage assembly ......................................................... 8 - 15 8. Cuvette changer load rack......................................................................... 8 - 16 9. Cuvette changer unload rack .................................................................... 8 - 17 10. Ventilation .................................................................................................. 8 - 18 11. Arms assembly.......................................................................................... 8 - 19 12. Sample arm................................................................................................ 8 - 23 13. Reagent arm .............................................................................................. 8 - 24 14. Arms assembly kits................................................................................... 8 - 25 15. Mixer assembly ......................................................................................... 8 - 26 16. Syringe assy .............................................................................................. 8 - 28 17. Wash cup assy .......................................................................................... 8 - 29 18. Fluid part .................................................................................................... 8 - 30 19. Covering..................................................................................................... 8 - 32 20. ISE module................................................................................................. 8 - 34 21. ISE module electrode holder ................................................................... 8 - 36

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

8-1

Exploded views

22. ISE module syringes ................................................................................. 8 - 37 23. Computer ................................................................................................... 8 - 38 24. Cooling unit ............................................................................................... 8 - 40

8-2

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Exploded views Reagent tray

1. Reagent tray Reagent tray - ABX Pentra 400 V2, V3 and Pentra C400

1

2 2 3

4 8

5

9

6

10

11

7

12 13 14 15 16

Mark 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

P/n GBM1354 (1203601354) XBA587B (1209111587) CBC010A (1201681010) 1300019579 XBA535BS (1209119535) XDA820D (1209134820) XEA809CS (1209159809) GBM0940 (1203600940) XDA891AS (1209139891)

Designation COVER, REAG. INSULATED COVER FAN, REAGENT TRAY FAN L=400 PCB, REAG. TRAY BARCODE READER ROLLER, REAGENT TRAY SUPPORT SENSOR, REAGENT & REACTION TEMP. MOTOR, REAGENT TRAY MOTOR KIT, REAG TRAY TENSIONER ROLLER HOLDER, REAG TRAY FAN HOLDER HEATER, REAG. TRAY COOLING ASSY

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Qty 1 9 1 3 1 1 1 8 1

Sales unit 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Compatibility ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

8-3

Exploded views Reagent tray

Mark 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

8-4

P/n GBM0945 (1203600945) FAA071A (1202401071) 1300019590 XEC186AS (1209179186) XBA573A (1209111573) XDA889AS (1209139889) DAM010A (1201971010)

Designation PCB, ANTI-STATIC BRUSH O'RING, REAG.TRAY COOLING ASSY ROLLER,REAG.TRAY MOTOR ROLLER SENSOR, REAG. TRAY HOME SENSOR SENSOR, REAG.TRAY DOOR SENSOR ASSY, REAG.TRAY CLOSING ASSY PCB, REAG.TRAY CLOSING SOLENOID

Qty 1 4 2 1 1 1 1

Sales unit 1 Pack of 10 1 1 1 1 1

Compatibility ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Exploded views Reagent tray

Reagent tray - Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1

6

1 7

2 8 9

3

10 4

11

5

12 13

14

15

6

Mark 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

P/n CBC010A (1201681010) 1300019590 XBA535BS (1209119535) GBM0544 (1203600544) XDA820D (1209134820) XBA587B (1209111587) GBM0945 (1203600945) XEC186AS (1209179186) FAA071A (1202401071) 1300019579 XEA809CS (1209159809) XBA573A (1209111573) EAA015A (1202201015) XDA889AS (1209139889) DAM010A (1201971010)

Designation PCB, REAG. TRAY BARCODE READER ROLLER, REAG.TRAY MOTOR ROLLER SENSOR, REAGENT & REACTION TEMP. O'RING, PEELABLE SPACER R.TRAY MOTOR, REAGENT TRAY MOTOR FAN, REAGENT TRAY FAN L=400 PCB, ANTI-STATIC BRUSH SENSOR, REAG. TRAY HOME SENSOR O'RING, REAG.TRAY COOLING ASSY ROLLER, REAGENT TRAY SUPPORT KIT, REAG TRAY TENSIONER ROLLER SENSOR, REAG.TRAY DOOR SENSOR FITTING, ANGLE D=6 ASSY, REAG.TRAY CLOSING ASSY PCB, REAG.TRAY CLOSING SOLENOID

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Qty 1 2 1 1 1 8 1 1 4 3 1 1 5 1 1

Sales unit 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Pack of 10 1 1 1 Pack of 5 1 1

Compatibility ALL ALL ALL P400 V1 ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

8-5

Exploded views Reagent tray closing assy

2. Reagent tray closing assy

1

2

Mark P/n 1 XDA889AS (1209139889) 2 DAM010A (1201971010)

8-6

Designation ASSY, REAG.TRAY CLOSING ASSY PCB, REAG.TRAY CLOSING SOLENOID

Qty Sales unit Compatibility 1 1 ALL 1 1 ALL

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Exploded views Sample tray

3. Sample tray

1

2

3 9 4 5

6

7

8

Mark 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

P/n XBA551A (1209111551) XDA888AS (1209139888) XEC019AS (1209179019) CBC011A (1201681011) GBM0945 (1203600945) XBA518A (1209111518) FBR023A (1202621023) XDA871B (1209132871) XBA531B (1209112531)

Designation PCB, SAMPLE TRAY LED COVER, SAMPLE TRAY BLACK COVER KIT, TUBE DETECTOR UPDATE KIT PCB, SAMP.TRAY BARCODE READER PCB, ANTI-STATIC BRUSH SENSOR, LB TRAY/ARM/MIX/HANDLER BELT, SAMPLE TRAY MOTOR BELT MOTOR, SAMPLE TRAY MOTOR ASSY PCB, SAMPLE TRAY TUBE DETECTOR

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Sales unit 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Compatibility ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

8-7

Exploded views Optical bench

4. Optical bench

1

6

2

7 3

8

4

9 10

5

+

Mark P/n 1 XDA838B (1209132838) 2 FCA026A (1202631026) 1300028830 3 GBM1326 (1203601326) 4 XDA858AS (1209139858) 5 XDA857BS (1209139857) 6 XEC106AS (1209179106) 7 XDA854D (1209134854) 8 XAA483CS (1209109483) 9 XAA457BS (1209109457) 10 XDB114A (1209141114)

Designation OPTICAL, OPT. BENCH LAMP LOCK OPTICAL, OPTIC BENCH MIRROR OPTICAL, LAMP P400 OPTICAL, LAMP PC400 OPTICAL, CUV. EMISSION GUN+LENS OPTICAL, LAMP EMISSION GUN+LENS KIT, OPTICAL BENCH+COVERS OPTICAL, SPECTRO P400 >V5.06 PCB, ACQU. BOARD P400 >V5.06 PCB, PREAMPLIFIER BOARD P400 OPTICAL, SPEC.EMISSION GUN+LENS

Qty Sales unit Compatibility 1 1 ALL 1 1 ALL P400 1 1 PC400 1 1 ALL 1 1 ALL 1 1 ALL 1 1 ALL* 1 1 ALL* 1 1 ALL 1 1 ALL

* For the ABX Pentra 400, the acquisition board ref. XAA483CS (1209109483) and the spectrophotometer ref. XDA854D (1209134854) are compatible only if the instrument is equipped with the software version V5.0.6 or higher. The spectrophotometer ref. XDA854D (1209134854) is delivered with the acquisition board cable ref. DAD134C (1201923134). This cable is not compatible with the ABX Pentra 400 V1, the acquisition board cable ref. DAD134B (1201922134) must be used instead.

8-8

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Exploded views Reaction tray

5. Reaction tray

12

11

13

14 1 15 16 6

2 3 4

17

5

18 19 24

7

20

21

8 9

22 10

Mark 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

23

P/n XDA855AS (1209139855) 1300019574 FAC027A (1202421027) GBM1246 (1203601246) XDA856CS (1209139856) XEA833AS (1209159833) 1300019592 1300019591 1300019577

Designation MOTOR, REACTION TRAY MOTOR ROLLER, REACT TRAY BRACKET ASSY ROLLER, TENSION. ROLLER SPRING HOLDER, REAC.TRAY ADJUST PLATE ROLLER, REAC.TRAY ADJUSTABLE KIT, GROUND FITTING REAC. TRAY ROLLER, REACT.TRAY UPPER ROLLER ROLLER, REACTION TRAY LATERAL ROLLER, REACT.TRAY DOWN ROLLER

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 3

Sales unit 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Compatibility ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

8-9

Exploded views Reaction tray

Mark P/n XEC080AS (1209179080) 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

8 - 10

GBM0945 (1203600945) XDB038BS (1209149038) XDA917AS (1209139917) GBM0975 (1203600975) XBA535BS (1209119535) XDB066A (1209141066) XDA853B (1209132853) XBA536A (1209111536) FAL009A (1202491009) XDB130B (1209142130) XBA533B (1209112533) XBA534C (1209113534) XEC028AS (1209179028) FAL005A (1202491005) GBM1203 (1203601203)

Designation KIT, REACTION TRAY ROLLERS KIT Contains: 1 x XDA856CS (1209139856), 3 x 1300019592, 3 x 1300019577, 2 x 1300019591 PCB, ANTI-STATIC BRUSH COVER, TOP COVER+HATCH NEW BO ASSY, CUV. AUTO LOADING HATCH SPRING, CUV. AUTO LOADING HATCH SENSOR, REAGENT & REACTION TEMP. ASSY, CUVETTE HOLDER DISK ASSY, REACTION CROWN GEAR SENSOR, REACT.TRAY HOME SENSOR SILENT BLOCK, FOR SUB ASSEMBL. KIT, LOWCASE+FAN+HEAT FAN, REACTION TRAY FAN HEATER, REACTION TRAY KIT, LOWER CASE ASSEMBLY SILENT BLOCK, FOR LOWER CASE FILTER, LOWER CASE FOAM GRID

Qty Sales unit Compatibility 1

1

ALL

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 4 1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Pack of 12 1 1 1 1 1 1

ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Exploded views Cuvette changer

6. Cuvette changer Cuvette changer - ABX Pentra 400 V2, V3 and Pentra C400

7

1 8 2

3

2

4

9

5 10

6 11

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

8 - 11

Exploded views Cuvette changer

Mark 1 2 3 4 5

P/n XBA554A (1209111554) CAE023A (1201531023) FBR021A (1202621021) XBA519A (1209111519) KAP040A (1207551040)

Designation MOTOR, TRANSLATOR MOTOR SWITCH, UNLOAD RACK SWITCH BELT, CUV.TRANSLATOR MOTOR BELT SENSOR, LB+MOT.CABLE ARM/HANDL. CLIP, CUVETTE GRABBER CLIP

Qty 1 2 1 1 1

6

XEC034AS (1209179034)

MOTOR, UP/DOWN HANDLER MOTOR

1

7

XDB111CS (1209149111)

ASSY, CUV.CHANGER W/O FRAMES

1

8

XBA518A (1209111518)

SENSOR, LB TRAY/ARM/MIX/HANDLER

2

9

FBM008A (1202601008)

CARRIAGE, CUV.HANDLER RAIL

1

10 11

FAC031A (1202421031) FAL009A (1202491009)

SPRING, HANDLER FINGER SPRING SILENT BLOCK, FOR SUB ASSEMBL.

1 4

8 - 12

Sales unit 1 1 1 1 Pack of 10

Compatibility ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL P400 V2, V3 1 PC400 P400 V2, V3 1 PC400 1 ALL P400 V2, V3 1 PC400 1 ALL Pack of 12 ALL

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Exploded views Cuvette changer

Cuvette changer - Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1

1

8

2 9

3 4 5 6

1

7 10

Mark 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

P/n CAE023A (1201531023) FBR021A (1202621021) KAP040A (1207551040) FAC031A (1202421031) XDA887AS (1209139887) XBA519A (1209111519) FAL009A (1202491009) XBA518A (1209111518) XBA554A (1209111554) XBA555A (1209111555)

Designation SWITCH, UNLOAD RACK SWITCH BELT, CUV.TRANSLATOR MOTOR BELT CLIP, CUVETTE GRABBER CLIP SPRING, HANDLER FINGER SPRING ASSY, CUVETTE HANDLER FINGER V1 SENSOR, LB+MOT.CABLE ARM/HANDL. SILENT BLOCK, FOR SUB ASSEMBL. SENSOR, LB TRAY/ARM/MIX/HANDLER MOTOR, TRANSLATOR MOTOR MOTOR, UP/DOWN HANDLER MOTOR V1

Qty 2 1 1 1 1 1 4 2 1 1

Sales unit 1 1 Pack of 10 1 1 1 Pack of 12 1 1 1

Compatibility ALL ALL ALL ALL P400 V1 ALL ALL ALL ALL V1

If the cuvette changer ABX Pentra 400 V1 needs to be replaced, order the cuvette changer update kit ref. XEC033AS (1209179033). See Cuvette changer update kit, page 8-14.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

8 - 13

Exploded views Cuvette changer

Cuvette changer update kit 1

Mark P/n 1 XEC033AS (1209179033)

8 - 14

Designation KIT, CUV. CHANGER V1->V2 UPDATE

Qty Sales unit Compatibility 1 1 V1

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Exploded views Cuvette changer carriage assembly

7. Cuvette changer carriage assembly

4 1

5

2

6

7

3

Mark P/n

Designation

1

XEC205AS (1209179205)

KIT, SILENT BLOCK CARRIAGE ASSY

2 3

XBA554A (1209111554) XBA519A (1209111519)

MOTOR, TRANSLATOR MOTOR SENSOR, LB+MOT.CABLE ARM/HANDL.

4

FBM008A (1202601008)

CARRIAGE, CUV.HANDLER RAIL

5 6 7

FBR021A (1202621021) KAP040A (1207551040) FAC031A (1202421031)

BELT, CUV.TRANSLATOR MOTOR BELT CLIP, CUVETTE GRABBER CLIP SPRING, HANDLER FINGER SPRING

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Qty Sales unit Compatibility P400 V2, V3 1 1 PC400 1 1 ALL 1 1 ALL P400 V2, V3 1 1 PC400 1 1 ALL 1 Pack of 10 ALL 1 1 ALL

8 - 15

Exploded views Cuvette changer load rack

8. Cuvette changer load rack

1 2

9

8

7

3

4

6

5

Mark 1 2 3

P/n XDA863DS (1209139863) HAX0112 (1207230112) HAX0040 (1207230040)

Designation ASSY, LOAD RACK ASSY STICKER, RACK SENSOR WIRE COVER STICKER, LOAD RACK STICKER

Qty 1 1 4

Sales unit 1 Pack of 10 Pack of 10

4

XBA560BS (1209119560)

ASSY, CUV. MOTION MOTOR

1

1

5

DAL021A (1201961021)

MOTOR, LOAD RACK MOTOR

1

1

6 7 8 9

XBA518A (1209111518) XEA997AS (1209159997) XBA532DS (1209119532) GBM0669 (1203600669)

SENSOR, LB TRAY/ARM/MIX/HANDLER KIT, LOAD RACK SUPPORT SENSOR, RACK LOAD/UNLOAD STICKER, NON SKID FOR CUV. RACK

1 1 1 2

1 1 1 1

8 - 16

Compatibility ALL ALL ALL P400 V2, V3 PC400 P400 V2, V3 PC400 ALL ALL ALL ALL

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Exploded views Cuvette changer unload rack

9. Cuvette changer unload rack

1

2

Mark P/n 1 XDA864BS (1209139864) 2 GBM0905 (1203600905)

Designation ASSY, UNLOAD RACK ASSY ASSY, UNLOADING RACK RAILS

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Qty Sales unit Compatibility 1 1 ALL 2 1 ALL

8 - 17

Exploded views Ventilation

10. Ventilation

1

2

Mark P/n 1 XBA393A (1209111393) 2 XBA634A (1209111634)

Designation FAN, MAIN FAN 24 V P60/P80 FAN, PC/LAMP 24 V FAN

Qty Sales unit Compatibility 1 1 ALL 1 1 ALL

The FAN, MAIN FAN 24 V P60/P80 ref. XBA393A (1209111393) is located at the rear of the instrument, right below the mother board.

8 - 18

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Exploded views Arms assembly

11. Arms assembly Arms assembly - ABX Pentra 400 V2, V3 and Pentra C400

1

2 3

5

6

4 7

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

8 - 19

Exploded views Arms assembly

Mark P/n 1

GBM1113 (1203601113)

2

GBM1112 (1203601112)

3 4 5 6 7

FBR022A (1202621022) XBA541A (1209111541) XBA518A (1209111518) XBA542B (1209112542) XBA519A (1209111519)

8 - 20

Designation

Qty Sales unit Compatibility P400 V2, V3 COVER, LEFT ARM COVER 1 1 PC400 P400 V2, V3 COVER, RIGHT ARM COVER 1 1 PC400 BELT, ARM ROTATION MOVEMENT 2 1 ALL MOTOR, UP/DOWN SAMPLE ARM MOTOR 1 1 ALL SENSOR, LB TRAY/ARM/MIX/HANDLER 2 1 ALL MOTOR, ROTATION ARM MOTOR 2 1 ALL SENSOR, LB+MOT.CABLE ARM/HANDL. 2 1 ALL

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Exploded views Arms assembly

Arms assembly - Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1

1

2

3

5

4

6

7

8

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

8 - 21

Exploded views Arms assembly

Mark 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

P/n GBM0924 GBM0654 FBR022A (1202621022) XBA541A (1209111541) XBA518A (1209111518) XBA542B (1209112542) XBA540C* (1209113540) XBA519A (1209111519)

Designation COVER, LEFT ARM COVER P400 V1 COVER, RIGHT ARM COVER P400 V1 BELT, ARM ROTATION MOVEMENT MOTOR, UP/DOWN SAMPLE ARM MOTOR SENSOR, LB TRAY/ARM/MIX/HANDLER MOTOR, ROTATION ARM MOTOR MOTOR, UP/DOWN REAG.ARM MOTOR SENSOR, LB+MOT.CABLE ARM/HANDL.

Qty 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 2

Sales unit 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Compatibility P400 V1 P400 V1 ALL ALL ALL ALL P400 V1 ALL

* The part number XBA540C (1209113540) is obsolete and replaced by the kit ASSY, REAGENT ARM ASSY W/O JIB ref. XDA861CS (1209139861).

8 - 22

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Exploded views Sample arm

12. Sample arm

1

4

5 6

2

7

3

Mark 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

P/n DBJ025A (1202131025) GBM0675 (1203600675) GBM1204 (1203601204) XEA827AS (1209159827) XBA563ET (1209119563) XBA847AT (1209119847) GBM0612 (1203600612) XAA486AS (1209108486)

Designation CLIPS, PLASTIC D=6.4 MM TUBING, SAMPLE PIPE GUIDING TUBING, ARM PIPE HOLDER COVER, SAMPLE ARM JIB COVER NEEDLE, SAMPLE P400 W FERRITE NEEDLE, SAMPLE PC400 NEEDLE, SHOCK DETECTION SPRING PCB, SAMPLE ARM DETECTION BOARD

Qty 2 1 1 1

Sales unit Pack of 2 1 1 1

1

1

1 1

1 1

Compatibility ALL ALL ALL ALL P400 PC400 ALL ALL

To position the teflon tubing of the sample needle in the correct way on the mother board cover, use the CLIPS, PLASTIC D=6.4 MM ref. DBJ025A (1202131025).

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

8 - 23

Exploded views Reagent arm

13. Reagent arm

1 4

5 2

3

Mark 1 2 3 4 5 6

P/n DBJ025A (1202131025) GBM0621 (1203600621) GBM1204 (1203601204) XEA826AS (1209159826) XBA564DT (1209119564) XAA500FS (1209109500)

6

Designation CLIPS, PLASTIC D=6.4 MM TUBING, REAGENT PIPE GUIDING TUBING, ARM PIPE HOLDER KIT, KIT REAG. ARM COVER NEEDLE, REAGENT NEEDLE PCB, REAG.LEVEL DETECTION BOARD

Qty 2 1 1 1 1 1

Sales unit Pack of 2 1 1 1 1 1

Compatibility ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

To position the teflon tubing of the reagent needle in the correct way on the mother board cover, use the CLIPS, PLASTIC D=6.4 MM ref. DBJ025A (1202131025).

8 - 24

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Exploded views Arms assembly kits

14. Arms assembly kits

2

1

Mark P/n 1

XDA823E (1209135823)

2 3

XDA862CS (1209139862) XDA861CS (1209139861)

Designation ASSY, SAMPLE AND REAGENT ARMS Includes: 1 x XBA520A (1209111520), 1 x XBA815A (1209111815), 1 x XBA814A (1209111814) ASSY, SAMPLE ARM ASSY W/O JIB ASSY, REAGENT ARM ASSY W/O JIB

3

Qty Sales unit Compatibility 1

1

P400 V2, V3 PC400

1 1

1 1

ALL ALL

For the ABX Pentra 400 V1 and V2: because the up/down reagent arm motor rotation way is inverted, it is mandatory to replace the reagent arm vertical motor cable by the new one (provided in the kit XDA861CS (1209139861)).

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

8 - 25

Exploded views Mixer assembly

15. Mixer assembly

1

9

10

2

11 3

12

4

13

5 14 6

15 16

7 8

8 - 26

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Exploded views Mixer assembly

Mark 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

P/n JAJ007AS (1207309007) XDA837C (1209133837) XDB299AS (1209149299) XBA518A (1209111518) XBA561D (1209114561) FAC030A (1202421030) EBD007A (1202381007) GBM0134 (1203600134) GBM0633 (1203600633) FZZ009A (1202651009) FAC023A (1202421023) DBD007A (1202091007) DAL029A (1201961029) XDA835B (1209132835) CAE006A (1201531006) XDA886AS (1209139886)

Designation ADHESIVE, TAPE FOR RACK L=1M ASSY, COMPLETE MIXER KIT, MIXER ARM ASSY SENSOR, LB TRAY/ARM/MIX/HANDLER MIXER, MIXING PADDLE MOTOR ASSY SPRING, MIXER SHAFT SPRING AIR CYLINDER, MIXER NEEDLE, MIXING PADDLE COVER, MIXER ASSY COVER CLIP, SMALL RUBBER BUMPER SPRING, MIXER ARM SPRING O'RING, MIX PADDLE MOTOR CABLE MOTOR, MIXER ASSY MOTOR CUP, MIXER WASH CUP SWITCH, MICROSWITCH XC5-81-82 CUP, MIXER WASH CUP SUPPORT

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Qty 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 5 1 1 1 1 1 1

Sales unit 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Pack of 10 1 Pack of 10 1 1 Pack of 5 1

Compatibility ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

8 - 27

Exploded views Syringe assy

16. Syringe assy

1 2 6

7

3

4

5

Mark 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 - 28

P/n XDA822C (1209133822) XBA546A (1209111546) GBM1211 (1203601211) CAE010A (1201531010) FAL009A (1202491009) B8078955 (1228078955) B8076812 (1228076812)

Designation SYRINGE, SYR. BLOCK ASSY MOTOR, SYRINGE MOTOR SPRING, SYRINGE BLOCK GND SWITCH, MICROSWITCH XC5-81 SILENT BLOCK, FOR SUB ASSEMBL. REAGENT SYRINGE (1000 µL) SAMPLE SYRINGE (100 µL)

Qty 1 2 1 2 8 1 1

Sales unit 1 1 1 Pack of 5 Pack of 12 1 1

Compatibility ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Exploded views Wash cup assy

17. Wash cup assy

1

2 5

3

4

Mark 1 2 3 4 5

P/n GBM0773 (1203600773) XDA836A (1209131836) GBM1198 (1203601198) FAL009A (1202491009) XDA879AS (1209139879)

Designation CUP, WASH CUP OVERFLOW CUP, NEEDLE WASH CUP CLIP, FOR REAGENT WASH CUP SILENT BLOCK, FOR SUB ASSEMBL. CUP, NEEDLE WASH CUP SUPPORT

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Qty 1 2 1 1 2

Sales unit 1 1 1 Pack of 12 1

Compatibility ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

8 - 29

Exploded views Fluid part

18. Fluid part

1

13 14

2

16

12

3 4 17

2 3

14 5

6

9

7

18

4

13

13 15

2

19

8

20

9 10

21

11

24

23 22

+ EAC015A (x3)

8 - 30

+ EAC015A (x1)

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Exploded views Fluid part

Mark 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

P/n XCA197A (1209121197) EAA015A (1202201015) EAA017A (1202201017) EAC012A (1202221012) XCA198B (1209122198) EAA022A (1202201022) EAA023A (1202201023) 1300015267 EBA010A (1202351010) EAA006A (1202201006)

11

1300015280

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

XCA193A (1209121193) EAC026A (1202221026) EAC025A (1202221025) FAA072A (1202401072) XCA194B (1209122194) EBA011A (1202351011) EZZ001A (1202391001) XEC202AS (1209179202) XCA216BS (1209129216) FAL008B (1202492008)

22

XBA574C (1209113574)

23

LBH004A (1207791004)

24

XBA568F (1209114568) EAC015A (1202221015)

Designation FLUID, CONDENSATION MANIFOLD V1 FITTING, ANGLE D=6 FITTING, STRAIGHT D=6 FITTING, STOPPER D=6 FLUID, OVERFLOW MANIFOLD FITTING, ANGLE 1/4" 1/8-27 FITTING, STRAIGHT 1/4"1/8-27 MANIFOLD, WITH VALVES V1 AND V2 VALVE, 2 WAYS ELECTROVALVE FITTING, STRAIGHT I=3X19.5 KIT, WIRED PRESSURE SENSORS WITH PCB FLUID, INTERNAL WATER TANK FITTING, FITTING S=20 FITTING, FITTING S=30 O'RING, INTERN.WATER TANK VALVE, 3 VALVES ASSY VALVE, 3 WAYS ELECTROVALVE FITTING, STOPPER D=4 PUMP, WATER ASSY + METAL SHEET PUMP, WASTE ASSY + METAL SHEET SILENT BLOCK, COMPR. ALL P120 FLUID, WASTE STRAW ASSY Includes: 3 x EAC015A (1202221015) FLUID, 10 L CONTAINER FLUID, WATER STRAW ASSY Includes: 1 x EAC015A (1202221015) FITTING, LUER MALE FITTING

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Qty 1 5 3 2 1 2 2 1 3 1

Sales unit 1 Pack of 5 Pack of 5 Pack of 5 1 Pack of 5 Pack of 5 1 1 Pack of 5

Compatibility P400 V1 ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

1

1

ALL

1 7 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 4

1 Pack of 5 Pack of 5 1 1 1 Pack of 5 1 1 Pack of 4

ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

1

1

ALL

1

1

ALL

1

1

ALL

4

Pack of 5

ALL

8 - 31

Exploded views Covering

19. Covering

13 1

14

2

15

3 16

4

17

5

18

6

19

7 8

20

9

21 22

10

23 11 12

26

25

24

27

8 - 32

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Exploded views Covering

Mark P/n 1 XDA872CS (1209139872) HAX0301 (1207230301) 2 HAX0327 (1207230327) 3 GBM0793 (1203600793) 4 GBM0418 (1203600418) 5 XEC099AS (1209179099) 6 GBM0883 (1203600883) 7 XDA932E (1209135932) 8 FAX009AS (1202529009) 9 FAX012AS HAX0300 (1207230300) 10 HAX0343 (1207230343) 11 JAJ015AS (1207309015) 12 GBM0901 (1203600901) 13 GBM0881 (1203600881) 14 EBD006A (1202381006) 15 GBM0886 (1203600886) 16 GBM0789 (1203600789) 17 GBM0791 (1203600791) 18 XDA874CS (1209137874) 19 GBM0790 (1203600790) 20 XDA877BS (1209139877) 21 CZZ030B (1201862030) XBA682CS (1209119682) 22 XBA735AS (1209119735) XDB112AS (1209149112) 23 XAA578A (1209101578) 24 XDA875BS (1209139875) 25 FZZ048A (1202651048) 26 GBM0882 (1203600882)

Designation COVER, TOP ISE COVER STICKER, ISE COVER LABEL P400 STICKER, ISE COVER LABEL PC400 COVER, BOTTOM ISE COVER COVER, SAMPLE TRAY LEFT SIDE COVER, SAMPLE TRAY RIGHT SIDE COVER, POWER SUPPLY COVER COVER, REAGENT TRAY FRONT COVER COVER, REAG. COVER FOAM EP=6 COVER, REAG. COVER FOAM EP=9 STICKER, REAG TRAY DOOR P400 STICKER, REAG TRAY DOOR PC400 COVER, REAG. COVER MAGNET. TAPE COVER, P400 ADJUSTABLE FOOT COVER, ARMS MAIN COVER ASSY AIR CYLINDER, COVER COVER, SEGMENT HANDLER COVER COVER, BACK REAGENT TRAY COVER COVER, MIXER COVER BACK SIDE COVER, LAMP HATCH COVER, REACTION TRAY LEFT SIDE COVER, MANUAL CUVETTE LOADING PCB, SPEAKER PCB, SPEAKER + HATCH USB PCB, CONNECTION HATCH+USB COVER, PC CONNECTION HATCH PCB, USB EXTENSION BOARD COVER, REACTION TRAY RIGHT SIDE COVER, WASH CUP HATCH PUSH-PUSH COVER, PC COVER

Qty Sales unit Compatibility 1 1 ALL P400 1 1 PC400 1 1 ALL 1 1 ALL 1 1 ALL 1 1 ALL 1 1 ALL 1 1 ALL 1 1 ALL P400 1 1 PC400 1 1 ALL 4 1 ALL 1 1 ALL 3 1 ALL 1 1 ALL 1 1 ALL 1 1 ALL 1 1 ALL 1 1 ALL 1 1 ALL 1 1 ALL

27

COVER, REAG. DOOR REPAIR HINGES

1300023001

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

1

1

ALL

1 1 1 1

1 1 1 1

1

1

ALL ALL ALL ALL P400 V2, V3 PC400

8 - 33

Exploded views ISE module

20. ISE module

1

2

3 3

5

4 6 7

9

8 10 20

11

19

12

18 13

21 17 14

15

8 - 34

16

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Exploded views ISE module

Mark P/n XDA843ES (1209139843) 1 XDB263AS (1209149263) 2 HAX0271 (1207230271) 3 GBM0753 (1203600753) 4 GBM0751 (1203600751) 5 GBM1266 (1203601266) 6 GBM0752 (1203600752) 7 GBM0750 (1203600750) 8 GBM1267 (1203601267) 9 XBA635AS (1209119635) 10 XBA544C (1209113544) 11 XDA921DS (1209136921) XAA497E (3200448459) 12 XAA646A (3200375620) 13 XAA492CS (1209109492) 14 EBA017A (1202351017) 15 EBA018A (1202351018) 16 XBA733AS (1209119733) 17 HAX0141 (1207230141) 18 XCA167A (1209121167) 19 XDA892B (1209132892) 20 GBM0870 (1203600870) 21 XBA543A (3012277056)

Designation ISE, MODULE ASSY V1.53 P400 ISE, MODULE ASSY V2.00 PC400 STICKER, ISE HYDRAULIC FLUID, ISE 280 ML BOTTLE CAP FLUID, ISE 300 ML BOTTLE STRAW FLUID, ISE REF.BLUE STRAW 300 ML FLUID, ISE 100 ML BOTTLE CAP FLUID, ISE 100 ML BOTTLE STRAW CUP, ISE BOTTLE SUPPORT VALVE, ISE VALVE VALVE, ISE VALVE ASSY ASSY, ISE SYRINGES + MOTORS PCB, ISE SOFTWARE V1.53 P400 PCB, ISE SOFTWARE V2.00 PC400 PCB, ISE MAIN BOARD VALVE, LV6 VALVE ISE VALVE, LV5 VALVE ISE VALVE, ISE MIXCUP VALVE ASSY STICKER, ISE ELECTRODE POSITION CHAMBER, ISOLATOR (SMALL) CUP, ISE MIX CUP COVER, ISE CUP COVER CABLE, PREAMP.TO MAIN BOARD ISE

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Qty Sales unit Compatibility P400 1 1 PC400 1 1 ALL 1 1 ALL 1 1 ALL 1 1 ALL 2 1 ALL 2 1 ALL 1 1 ALL 1 1 ALL 1 1 ALL 1 1 ALL P400 1 1 PC400 1 1 ALL 1 1 ALL 1 1 ALL 1 1 ALL 1 1 ALL 1 1 ALL 1 1 ALL 1 1 ALL 1 1 ALL

8 - 35

Exploded views ISE module electrode holder

21. ISE module electrode holder

1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8 9

10 Mark 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

8 - 36

P/n GBM0500 (1203600500) GBM0607 (1203600607) A11A01738 A11A01739 A11A01740 GBM0746 (3014029452) XEA795AS (1209159795) A11A01741 XDA923AS (1209139923) XBA603A (1209111603)

Designation PCB, ISE ELECTR. SPRING CONTACT DOOR, ISE ELECTRODE SUPPORT ABX PENTRA SODIUM-E ABX PENTRA CHLORIDE-E ABX PENTRA POTASSIUM-E FLUID, ISE AIR DETECT.ELECTRODE DOOR, ISE CAGE DOOR ABX PENTRA REFERENCE-E PCB, ISE PREAMPL. BOARD ASSY CABLE, ISE BOARDS GND WIRE

Qty 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Sales unit 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Compatibility ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Exploded views ISE module syringes

22. ISE module syringes

1

2

3

4

5

9 6

7

8

Mark 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

P/n XDA921DS (1209136921) XBA591A (1209111591) XBA592A (1209111592) XBA545B (1209112545) 3200261156 XDA922BS (1209138922) FAA073A (1202401073) GBM0891 (1203600891) GBM1372 (1203601372)

Designation ASSY, ISE SYRINGES + MOTORS MOTOR, ISE SYR.MOTOR 1/150 MOTOR, ISE SYR.MOTOR 1/75 CABLE, ISE SYR. LB CABLE SENSOR, OPTICAL CELL SYRINGE, ISE SYR. BLOCK ASSY O'RING, ISE SYRINGE O'RING SYRINGE, ISE SYR. PISTON SPRING, FOR ISE MOTOR SHAFT

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Qty 1 1 1 2 2 1 8 4 2

Sales unit 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Compatibility ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL

8 - 37

Exploded views Computer

23. Computer Computer models from 1300013734 1

2

5 6

3

7 8 4

Mark 1 2 3

P/n 1300013893 GBM0882 (1203600882) XDB355A (1209141355)

4

1201772017

5 6 7

XBA507AS (1209119507) 1300018920 1300014030

8

1300023975

8 - 38

Designation PCB, PC ASSY FOR W7 TYPE 1300013734 COVER, PC COVER PCB, SCREEN COMPL. ASSY PCB, HDD SATA 250 GO (for computer models from "CCC014J") FAN, FOR COMPUTER P80 CABLE, WITH SOUND AMPLIFICATION PCB PCB, RAM 4GB DDR3 PCB, MOTHER BOARD CONFIGURED FOR PC

Qty 1 1 1

Sales unit 1 1 1

Compatibility ALL ALL ALL

1

1

ALL

1 1 1

1 1 1

ALL ALL ALL

1

1

ALL

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Exploded views Computer

Computer models < 1300013734

1

2

5

3 4

Mark P/n 1 GBM0882 (1203600882) 2 XAA511BS (1209109511) CBT018A 3

CBT021A (1201771021)

4

XEC074AS (1209179074) 1201772017

5

XBA507AS (1209119507)

Designation COVER, PC COVER PCB, TOUCH PANEL FUTJI P80 PCB, CD-ROM READER P80/P400 (for computer models < "CCC014L") PCB, DVDRW PC CCC005L/CCC014L (for computer models from "CCC014L") PCB, HDD FOR PC System Configuration > Analyser.

■ Identification ■

mode: select this mode if all sample tubes are identified with barcode labels.

Position mode: select this mode if sample tubes with and without barcode labels are used on the instrument.

IMPORTANT! To use the instrument in connected mode, it is mandatory to select the Identification mode.

Then, the connection is configured on the instrument in Services > System Configuration > Host connection.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

10 - 3

Host connection Connection configuration on the instrument

2.1.

RS232 Configuration

Heading Bauds Parity Stop bit Profile

2.2.

Description Speed selection: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 Parity selection: None, Odd, Even Stop bit selection: 1 Stop, 2 Stop Protocol selection: Xon/Xoff, None

Format

Default value

Radio button

9600

Radio button Radio button Radio button

None 1 Stop Xon/Xoff

Query Mode

This part is used to enable/disable the Query mode. The Query mode allows the instrument to ask the Host if there is a programmed request corresponding to the SID (Sample IDentification) read on the sample tray.

The Query mode is automatically disabled when the instrument operates in Position mode.

The Sending validated samples option is used to manually ask the Host for supplementary tests on validated patient samples by using the corresponding function in the Work Balance menu or the Patient Result list.

2.3.

Handling spaces

This part is used to authorize the character "Space" on the left side of the Sample ID field.

2.4.

■

If the check box is selected, then the character "Space" is allowed on the left side of the Sample ID field when manually captured from the instrument as when loaded from the Host. On prints, the character "Space" is indicated by a rectangle.

■

If the check box is deselected, then the character "Space" is not authorized on the left side of the Sample ID field and is systematically deleted.

Automatic Transmission to Host

This part is used to enable/disable the automatic transmission of patient and/or control results to the Host.

10 - 4

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Host connection Connection protocol

Three options of transmission are available: ■ Nothing: ■

no transmission.

Order: transmission request by request after manual or automatic validation of the results (only for patient results). The results of all the tests of a request must be validated in order to be transmitted.

■ Test:

transmission test by test after manual or automatic validation of the results. The results of each test are transmitted as soon as they are validated.

2.5.

Analyser Id

This field is used to enter the identification number of the instrument by the Host.

2.6.

Host Tools

This part is used to perform some operations regarding the Host connection. See Host Tools, page 10-17.

3. Connection protocol The ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra C400 connection protocol is both the language used for the transmission of data between the instrument and the LIS (Laboratory Information System) and the way the data is exchanged. For simplification, we will call protocol the way the data is exchanged and format the language used.

3.1.

Format type

The ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials) format is the language used for the transmission of data on the ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra C400.

3.2.

Connection type

There are two analyzer operating modes: monodirectional (i.e. unidirectional) and bidirectional. This is inherent to the protocol. On the ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra C400, the bidirectional connection is used.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

10 - 5

Host connection ASTM format

4. ASTM format The ASTM format was developed several years ago to standardize the connection between analysis instruments and LIS. In fact, there were as many connection formats as companies providing instruments. Each company may use a different protocol for each instrument. The ASTM proposed one standard for the low level exchange protocol (E-1381) and another for the format used for the transmission of clinical data (E-1394).

For more information, please refer to the document "Output formats ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra C400" ref. RAA025, intended for IT Services Companies.

4.1.

Exchange structure

At the protocol level, the data exchange is based on the following model: - (ENQuiry) --> line pick-up request. - (ACKnowledge) --> correct acknowledgement, positive response to the line pick-up request. - ..data.. (Start of Text ..data.. End of Text) --> data transmission. - (ACKnowledge) --> acceptance of data receipt. - (End Of Transmission) --> end of message.

The characters (Carriage Return) and (Line Feed) are usually placed at the end of frame for a better organization and reading.

4.2.

The different ASTM frames

These different frames have an identifier that indicates the nature of transmitted data between and . From Host Header (grab)

Patient (patient data) Order (test request) Result (results) Query (Host interrogation)

10 - 6

H separator P patient demography O Q if no request entered

To Host H (full or shortened) separator + sender ID + date and time P patient demography O R Q simple or multiple

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Host connection ASTM format

Comment (comments, optional)

From Host C comments linked to patient / order

To Host C comments linked to patient / order / result

L

L

Terminator (give back, end of communication)

Three types of separators are used in these frames: - | separates the fields - ^ separates the parts of a field - \ separates the repetitive fields.

4.3.

The different record structures

4.3.1. Structure of Order transmission - H (Header) - ...P (Patient) - ...C (Patient Comments) optional - ......O (Order) - ......C (Order Comments) optional - L (Terminator)

The comment frames are optional.

Example Patient. If not, check the connection configuration on the instrument and make sure that the test corresponding to the channel #39 (used above) is enabled.

Check of instrument data transmission The purpose of this procedure is to make sure that a pending data transmission, created in the Rs_Data folder, is sent correctly by the instrument software, and so that the connection on the instrument is well-configured and the communication with the Host works properly.

■ Create

the following file with a text editor: H|\^&||||||||||P|E1394-97|20040226162323 P|1|||||||U O|1|20040216004||||20040216141034|20040216000000||||||||1||||||||||F R|1|^^^18^C_Chol|2.27|12||H||F|||20040216141911 L|1|N

■ Save

this file as follows: Astm260204162323245.trx

■ Put

this file in the Rs_Data folder.

If the connection is well-configured, the result should be sent correctly by the instrument software (the file disappears from the Rs_Data folder) and should be received by the Host. If not, test the physical connection (cable) and ask the IT Services Company to check the LIS configuration and that the test corresponding to the channel #18 (used above) is enabled.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

10 - 19

Host connection Connection test

■ The

Rs_Data folder contains temporary files, created during the communication with the Host. These temporary files are named as follows: AstmddMMyyhhmmsszzz (date, time, three-digit number) and the following file extensions are possible.

File extension .r* .rcv .rrr .rer .t* .trx .ter

Description Data receipt from Host to instrument. Pending data receipt. Data receipt with incorrect ASTM format. Data receipt with an error (see warning #620). Data transmission from instrument to Host. Pending data transmission. An error appears during the communication with the Host. Successful data transmission. Note: These files are quickly suppressed.

.tok

■A

file SEND_TO_SIL can appear in the Rs_Data folder, this file lists the status of data transmissions from instrument to Host in case of "GeneralException" error (for example). ■ During the instrument initialization, the following message can be displayed: "Transmission not successful, do you want to continue to process queued messages?". This message means that data transmissions are pending in the Rs_Data folder. Press Yes to send the pending data transmissions as soon as the communication with the Host is running. Press No to suppress the pending data transmissions.

7.2.2. Using the WinASTM software

The WinASTM software should be used only for connection tests on HORIBA Medical instruments.

■ The

purpose of this procedure is to simulate the Host, using the WinASTM software on a laptop, to send an order to the instrument and to receive a result from the instrument. ■ This procedure consists in simulating the transmission of a test T1 order to the instrument and checking the result receipt once the analysis has been performed.

Installation of the WinASTM software ■ Download

the WinASTM_x.x.x(x.x.x.x).exe file on a laptop (example: WinASTM_1.0.0(1.0.0.2).exe).

■ Double-click

10 - 20

the .exe file and follow the instructions displayed to install the WinASTM software.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Host connection Connection test

Connection configuration on the WinASTM software The connection on the WinASTM software must be configured according to the connection parameters configured on the instrument in Services > System Configuration > Host connection. ■

Note down the connection parameters configured on the instrument in Services > System Configuration > Host connection.

■

Enter these connection parameters on the WinASTM software in Configuration > RS and Sockets Settings.

■ Click

Save and quit to save the connection configuration.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

10 - 21

Host connection Connection test

Configuration of test T1 on the WinASTM software To simulate the transmission of a test T1 order, the test T1 must be previously configured on the WinASTM software. ■ Go

10 - 22

to Configuration > Other Settings.

■ Click

Add One Row.

■ Enter

the channel #600 corresponding to the test T1 in the available field.

■ Click

Save and quit to save the test T1 configuration.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Host connection Connection test

Creation of a test T1 order on the WinASTM software ■ Click

the Database Records tab.

■ Create

a test T1 order by filling the Patient and Order fields as follows:

2 2 4 3

5

5

1. Select the Modify check box to access modification function. 2. Use the Patient Index # displayed in the left window to fill the Patient Index field in the right window. 3. Use the current date to fill the Collection Date field with the following format: yyyyddMM.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

10 - 23

Host connection Connection test

4. Select the channel #600 corresponding to the test T1 in the Test scrolling list. Note: If the channel #600 does not appear in the scrolling list, close and reopen the WinASTM software. 5. Do not forget to click Modify Current Patient/Modify Current Order to save the Patient/Order fields.

For more information about the different fields, please refer to the document "Output formats ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra C400" ref. RAA025, intended for IT Services Companies.

Test of communication between the instrument and the WinASTM software ■ Go

to Services > System Configuration > Host connection.

■ Press

the Test communication button to test the communication with the WinASTM software.

■ Once

the test is done, make sure that the message displayed in the Received character field is ACK (ACKnowledge).

Simulate the transmission of a test T1 order to the instrument ■

Before simulating the transmission of a test T1 order to the instrument, check the status of the instrument. It must be Ready. The control solution for the test T1 must be configured and physically positioned on the sample tray (you can use distilled water in place of the control solution). Two vials of distilled water (15 mL and 10 mL) must be configured as a reagent for the test T1 and physically positioned on the reagent tray. The calibration for the test T1 must be performed.

■ Then,

check the status of the WinASTM software. The WinASTM software must be connected to the instrument i.e. the status buttons must be as follows:

If not and the status buttons are as follows:

1

2

Press (1), then (2) to connect the WinASTM software. If it does not work, check the connection configuration, test the physical connection (cable) and test the communication using the Host Tools in Services > System Configuration > Host connection. ■ Choose

the protocol: On the WinASTM software, there are two protocols "ASTM" and "LIS1/2A". The "LIS1/2A" protocol corresponds to the ASTM protocol with an extended transmission capacity (64 octets -> around 65000 octets). To switch between "ASTM" and "LIS1/2A" protocols, use the button below:

When "ASTM" is displayed, "LIS1/2A" protocol is selected. When "LIS1/2A" is displayed, "ASTM" protocol is selected.

10 - 24

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Host connection Connection test

■ Once

the test T1 order is created from the Database Records tab, click Send Current Patient With His Orders to send the test T1 order to the instrument.

■ Click

the Console tab to visualize the sent frame.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

10 - 25

Host connection Connection test

■ The order should be correctly integrated by the instrument software and created in Worklist > Patient.

If not, check on the instrument: the instrument status, the loading mode configuration and the connection configuration. Check on the WinASTM software: the status buttons, the connection configuration and make sure that the test T1 order is correctly created. ■

In Worklist > Patient, open the order and select the rack position of the control solution physically positioned on the sample tray. Press OK to validate. Then, press Start to run the analysis.

■ Once

10 - 26

the analysis has been performed, check the result receipt on the WinASTM software.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Host connection Troubleshooting

8. Troubleshooting 8.1.

List of warnings about the connection

Level

Code Message

Action

Warning

604

Modify the Sample ID from the Host.

Warning

605

Warning

620

Warning

644

Warning

645

Warning

646

Warning

647

Warning

648

Error type The sample ID in brackets, programmed from the Host, This Sample ID [%s] is a contains the "AUTO_SID" reserved code prefix. [%s] = Sample ID. The patient ID in brackets, programmed from the Host, This Patient ID [%s] is a contains the "AUTO_SID" reserved code prefix. [%s] = Patient ID. A request, programmed from L.I.S. order can't be the Host, does not comply performed for SID [sample with the ASTM format. The ID]: incorrect value [value] in fields sample ID, action code field [field] or sample type contain an incorrect value. LIS order cannot be There is no O frame (Order) performed. No order information available for PID for the P frame (Patient). [patient ID]. LIS order cannot be performed: communication/ There is no P frame (Patient) protocol error. Order for the O frame (Order). information for SID [sample ID] could not be processed. LIS order cannot be performed: communication/ There is no O frame (Order) for the P frame (Patient). protocol error. Patient information for PID [patient Interrupted communication. ID] could not be processed. LIS order cannot be performed: communication/ There is no L frame protocol error. Information for (Terminator) before PID [patient ID] and related (End of Transmission). orders SID(s): [sample ID] could not be processed. LIS communication/protocol There is no P frame (Patient) error. Comment information or O frame (Order) for the C could not be processed. frame (Comment).

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Modify the Patient ID from the Host.

Check and modify the request from the Host.

Ask the IT Services Company to check the LIS configuration.

Ask the IT Services Company to check the LIS configuration.

Ask the IT Services Company to check the LIS configuration.

Ask the IT Services Company to check the LIS configuration.

Ask the IT Services Company to check the LIS configuration.

10 - 27

Host connection Troubleshooting

Level

Code Message

Error type The Q frame (Query) comes with a P frame (Patient) or a O frame (Order) although only LIS communication/protocol the H frame (Header) and the error. Query information L frame (Terminator) are could not be processed. authorized with the Q frame. At least two Q frames comes together although only one Q frame is authorized. A request, programmed from the Host, has one or several rejected tests. Each rejected test contains one of the following errors. - "Channel error": The test L.I.S. order with SID [sample field does not contain a ID] error. The following tests channel number. are rejected: [test no.1 - "Disabled": The test is (reason no.1), test no.2 disabled on the instrument. (reason no.2), etc]. - "Not configured": The test is not configured on the instrument. - "Sample type incompatible": The sample type of the test does not match the sample.

Action

Warning

649

Ask the IT Services Company to check the LIS configuration.

Warning

650

8.2.

Troubleshooting help

Check and modify the request from the Host.

No order is integrated by the instrument software and created in Worklist > Patient. When the instrument is used in connected mode, it is mandatory to select the Identification mode even if the laboratory does not use barcodes. When the Position mode is selected, no order is integrated by the instrument software and created in Worklist > Patient whereas the connection on the instrument is well-configured. In this mode, the instrument can only send results to the Host.

It is impossible to add, from the Host, a supplementary test for a SID Check, from the Host, the value in the Action Code field (field 9.4.12, please refer to the document "Output formats ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra C400" ref. RAA025). For the first request, the Action Code field must be "N" (New request) and when a supplementary test is added from the Host, the Action Code field must be "A" (Add request). This setting must also be respected when using the WinASTM software.

Incorrect sample type An order is not integrated by the instrument software if the sample type specified in the order does not correspond to the requested test. It is mandatory to specify correctly the sample type in the Specimen Descriptor field (field 9.4.16, please refer to the document "Output formats ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra C400" ref. RAA025).

10 - 28

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Host connection Troubleshooting

Please refer to the document "Output formats ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra C400" ref. RAA025 for more information about the ASTM fields.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

10 - 29

Host connection Troubleshooting

10 - 30

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Section 11: Maintenance

1. Preventive maintenance ............................................................................. 11 - 2 1.1. Maintenance by customers .....................................................................................................11 - 2 1.2. 6 month maintenance ..............................................................................................................11 - 3 1.3. Yearly maintenance .................................................................................................................11 - 3

2. Prevention against the electrostatic discharges ..................................... 11 - 4 3. Procedures .................................................................................................. 11 - 7 3.1. Procedure list ...........................................................................................................................11 - 7 3.2. Maintenance check up summary .............................................................................................11 - 8 RAS376: Installation RAS378: 6 month maintenance RAS379: Yearly maintenance RAS393: Check up after intervention RAS377: Covers dismantling RAS380: Reagent tray RAS381: Sample tray RAS382: Reaction tray RAS548: Fan and heater replacement RAS383: Optical bench RAS656: Partial condensing lens cleaning RAS386: Mixer RAS385: Arms RAS384: Cuvette changer RAS392: Internal computer RAS390: Power supply replacement RAS391: Mother board replacement RAS394: Sensors check and adjustment RAS387: Syringe block assembly replacement RAS389: Waste and water pumps replacement RAS442: Pressure sensors RAS533: Windows master installation RAS517: Software version installation RAS518: Reagent applications installation RAS542: Printer installation RAS814: External barcode reader RAS624: Cooling unit

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

11 - 1

Maintenance Preventive maintenance

1. Preventive maintenance 1.1.

Maintenance by customers

Maintenance procedures have to be carried out according to the recommended frequency table and after having attended a HORIBA Medical approved customer training course. The system warranty may be affected if damage appears after a non trained technician intervenes or if replaced spare parts and consumables do not come from HORIBA Medical approved origin. 1. Daily maintenance procedures No special maintenance or adjustment has to be done on your instrument if the recommended start up and shutdown procedures are explicitly respected. Please refer to your user manual and daily guide. 2. Weekly maintenance procedures An overall check for cleanness of the instrument is recommended every week. Please refer to the instrument cleaning and decontamination procedure in your user manual. If the instrument is switched off for one week at least: the reagents from the tray, close them and place them in a refrigerated area, ■ then, switch the cooling unit off. If the instrument is equipped with ISE module, you have to shut down the ISE module first. See Section 7: ISE module, 1.6.3. ISE module shutdown, page 7-32. ■ remove

The table below lists the maintenance procedures and their frequencies. For more detailed information, please refer to your user manual and daily guide. Maintenance Needles cleaning with Deproteinizer Reagent needle cleaning (external part) Wash towers cleaning Syringe plunger tips replacement Precision test Cooling unit (CU400) filter cleaning Cooling unit (CU401) condenser cleaning Glycol level checking Filter replacement Syringes replacement Needles replacement Mixer paddle replacement Lamp replacement Instrument cleaning and decontamination Applications update Software update

11 - 2

Frequency Without mixer: Daily With mixer: Weekly Monthly Monthly Monthly Monthly Monthly Monthly Bimonthly Bimonthly As needed As needed As needed As needed As needed As needed As needed

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Maintenance Preventive maintenance

1.2.

6 month maintenance

See RAS378: 6 month maintenance, page 1.

KIT, 6 MONTH MAINTENANCE XEA766BS (1209159766) P/n 9001072 (1229001072) B8078955 (1228078955) B8076812 (1228076812) 3027030 (1223027030)

1.3.

Designation FILTER, FILTER LIQUID COMPLETE REAGENT SYRINGE (1000 µL) SAMPLE SYRINGE (100 µL) CLAMP, TUBE D7

Qty 1 1 1 2

Yearly maintenance

See RAS379: Yearly maintenance, page 1.

KIT, 1 YEAR MAINTENANCE XEA792GS (1209159792) P/n XEA768A (1209151768) LAM017A (1207681017) 1300024610 DZZ055A (1202191055) LBH003A (1207791003) HAX0239 (1207230239) JAB010A (1207251010) DBJ025A (1202131025) XEA766BS (1209159766)

Designation TOOL, MOLYKOTE GREASE 3.5 ML TOOL, CUV.CHANGER AXIS GREASE CHILLER, GLYCOL 1 L FILTER, COOLING UNIT FILTER REAGENT, 5 L KEG FOR RINSE SPS GLYCOL STICKER CASE USDD40 500x400x250 CLIPS, PLASTIC D=6.4 MM KIT, 6 MONTH MAINTENANCE

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Qty 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 4 1

11 - 3

Maintenance Prevention against the electrostatic discharges

2. Prevention against the electrostatic discharges ■ The

electronic boards are very sensitive to electrostatic discharges (ESD).

■ The

damages are not always immediately visible, but can be detected over the course of time.

In order to prevent those risks, the use of an antistatic kit is MANDATORY.

2.1.

The antistatic kit ref. MZZ015A (1207921015) ■

An antistatic ground mat is one of a number of antistatic devices designed to help eliminate static electricity. This mat has a conductive material embedded within, which collects the static. The mat would need to be grounded (earthed). This is usually accomplished by plugging it into the grounded line in an electrical outlet. It is important to discharge at a slow rate, therefore a resistor should be used in earthing the mat. This ground mat allows you to connect an antistatic wrist strap.

■ The

antistatic kit is composed of:

- An antistatic mat with 2 female snaps:

11 - 4

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Maintenance Prevention against the electrostatic discharges

- A wrist strap:

- A ground cord (for the wrist strap):

- A crocodile clip:

- A second ground cord (for the crocodile clip):

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

11 - 5

Maintenance Prevention against the electrostatic discharges

2.2.

How to use the antistatic kit

■ Connect

the second ground cord to a snap of the antistatic mat and install the crocodile clip on its other end.

■ Connect

the crocodile clip to the earth

outlet.

■ Install

the wrist strap on the first ground cord and connect the first ground cord to the second snap of the antistatic mat.

■ Put

the bracelet around your wrist.

■ The

antistatic kit is ready for use:

To ensure a good contact, ensure that the wrist strap is correctly tightened around your wrist.

11 - 6

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

Maintenance Procedures

3. Procedures

■ Maintenance

and adjustments required for the instrument are divided into procedures according to the concerned assemblies. This should make any update easier as all interventions can be done with the corresponding procedure on its own. ■ For ISE module procedures, please refer to the ISE module specific section (see Section 7: ISE module, 3. Procedures, page 7-42).

1 - Procedures must be performed on a clean instrument. If the instrument is suspected not to be perfectly clean, perform a cleaning procedure. 2 - Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator. 3 - When the Diagnostics menu is used, the security switches are disabled and it is therefore recommended to be extremely cautious.

3.1.

Procedure list

The procedures are sorted by theme and instrument sub-assembly. Category Installation

Maintenance

Covers Reagent tray Sample tray

Reaction tray

Optical bench

Mixer

P/n and designation

Concerns Instrument and cooling unit installation - First start of the RAS376: Installation instrument - Mechanical check - Reagent application installation - Check up Decontamination - Filter and Syringes replacement Cooling unit maintenance - Mechanical adjustments RAS378: 6 month maintenance Photometer, temperature and pumps check up Pressure sensors calibration Greasing and cleaning - Cooling unit maintenance RAS379: Yearly maintenance 6 month maintenance Check up of the instrument pipetting accuracy and RAS393: Check up after intervention precision RAS377: Covers dismantling Dismantling of all the instrument covers Dismantling, parts replacement and adjustment of the RAS380: Reagent tray reagent tray Dismantling, parts replacement and adjustment of the RAS381: Sample tray sample tray Dismantling, parts replacement and adjustment of the RAS382: Reaction tray reaction tray Reaction tray lower box dismantling - Fan and Heater RAS548: Fan and heater replacement replacement - Temperature and Glycol circuit check Dismantling of the optical bench - Mirror and lenses RAS383: Optical bench cleaning and replacement - Check up RAS656: Partial condensing lens Condensing lens cleaning (lamp side) cleaning Mixer paddle replacement - Dismantling and RAS386: Mixer replacement of the mixer assembly - Parts replacement - Adjustment

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

11 - 7

Maintenance Procedures

Category

P/n and designation

Arms

RAS385: Arms

Cuvette changer RAS384: Cuvette changer Computer

Electricity

Hydraulics

RAS392: Internal computer RAS390: Power supply replacement RAS391: Mother board replacement RAS394: Sensors check and adjustment RAS387: Syringe block assembly replacement RAS389: Waste and water pumps replacement

Concerns Needles replacement - Dismantling and parts replacement of the arms assembly - Adjustment of the arms - Level and shock detection check Cuvette changer rack dismantling - Parts replacement Adjustment Computer dismantling and parts replacement Dismantling and replacement of the power supply Dismantling and replacement of the mother board Check and adjustment of all the instrument sensors Dismantling and mounting of the syringe block assembly Dismantling and replacement of the pumps

Pressure sensors and pressure board replacement Pressure board voltage adjustment - Pressure sensors activation, configuration and calibration RAS533: Windows master installation Windows master installation Software version downloading - Software version RAS517: Software version installation installation RAS518: Reagent applications Reagent applications downloading - Reagent installation applications installation RAS542: Printer installation Driver installation - Printer selection RAS814: External barcode reader Installation - Configuration - Barcode reading test Dismantling - Air fan, float switch, control board, RAS624: Cooling unit pressure sensor, pump replacement RAS442: Pressure sensors

Software

Cooling unit

3.2.

Maintenance check up summary

A maintenance check up summary is provided in this manual (see on next page) to ensure the maintenance follow-up. This document can be used as reference to create a maintenance schedule for customer archives.

11 - 8

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400: Technical Manual Ref: 1300021859 - Int. Ref. Doc.: RAA023JEN

HORIBA ABX SAS Parc Euromédecine - Rue du Caducée BP 7290 34184 Montpellier Cedex 4 - FRANCE Phone: + 33 (0)4 67 14 15 16 Fax: + 33 (0)4 67 14 15 17

ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra C400 Check-up maintenance 6 month maintenance - CU401: Condenser cleaning - CU400: Filter cleaning See RAS378: 6 month maintenance, 4. Cooling unit, page 3. Cooling unit

Reagent tray

Arms

X

- Cooling unit draining - Overflow jar cleaning - Filling with glycol and distilled water - Cooling unit grid cleaning - CU400: Filter replacement See RAS379: Yearly maintenance, 2. Cooling unit, page 7.

X

- Reagent tray cleaning - Reagent barcode reader cleaning See RAS379: Yearly maintenance, 1.1. Reagent tray cleaning, page 2.

X

Reagent barcode reader position See RAS380: Reagent tray, 4.4. Reagent barcode reader position, page 24.

X

X

Sample barcode reader position See RAS381: Sample tray, 4.3. Sample barcode reader position, page 17.

X

X

Sample arm all positions mechanical check See RAS385: Arms, 6. Sample arm adjustment, page 36

X

X

Reagent arm all positions mechanical check See RAS385: Arms, 5. Reagent arm adjustment, page 23

X

X

2 arms greasing (Molykote grease) See RAS379: Yearly maintenance, 1.2. Arms assembly greasing (for ABX Pentra 400 V1 only), page 3 Mixer

All positions mechanical check See RAS386: Mixer, 5. Adjustments, page 17.

Reaction tray

Reaction tray cleaning See RAS379: Yearly maintenance, 1.3. Reaction tray cleaning, page 5.

Optic

Yearly maintenance

X

X

X

X

Photometer check up. See RAS383: Optical bench, 4. Optical bench check, page 31: - Black measurement: between 1400 and 2000 - Gain measurement: between 3 and 242 - Dynamic Optical Reading: reference on Air ≅ 0 - Dynamic Optical Reading: Reference on Air with cuvette: WL =340 nm: between 0.06 and 0.12 WL=700 nm: between 0.05 and 0.09

X

X

Lamp replacement. Refer to the instrument user manual.

X

X

Dynamic cuvette changer functioning check See RAS384: Cuvette changer, 4. Adjustments, page 31. Cuvette changer

6 month maintenance

Yearly maintenance

X

X

Endless screw greasing See RAS379: Yearly maintenance, 1.4. Cuvette changer endless screw greasing, page 6.

X

Filter replacement. Refer to the instrument user manual.

X

X

Syringes replacement 100 µL and 1000 µL. Refer to the instrument user manual.

X

X

Pressure sensor calibration. See RAS442: Pressure sensors, 3.3. To calibrate the pressure sensors, page 7.

X

X

Water pump flow check See RAS378: 6 month maintenance, 10. To check the sample needle throughput, page 8.

X

X

Fluidic system decontamination See RAS378: 6 month maintenance, 1. To decontaminate the hydraulic system, page 2.

X

X

- Water tank decontamination - Waste tank decontamination See RAS378: 6 month maintenance, 1.2. To decontaminate the tanks, page 2.

X

X

Wash tower decontamination See RAS378: 6 month maintenance, 1.3. To decontaminate the wash towers, page 2.

X

X

Temperature

Temperature check. See RAS378: 6 month maintenance, 9. To check the temperature, page 7: - Reaction heating: 37°C (± 0.25°C) - Needle heating: 37°C (± 1.5°C) - Refrigerated area: 4-10°C

X

X

Check up after intervention

Run a test T1 or P1 (Precision test) x15, CV < 1%. See RAS393: Check up after intervention, page 1.

X

X

Hydraulic

= Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1

This document can be used as reference to create a maintenance schedule for customer archives.

Specific instructions are given for previous ABX Pentra 400 hardware versions: ■ V1 corresponds to instruments with serial numbers below 2000.

RAS376H

Installation

RAS376: Installation

Concerns Instrument installation Cooling unit installation ISE module preparation First start of the instrument ISE Mechanical alignments check Priming Pressure sensors calibration Reagent applications installation Racks Check up

Required tools Hexagonal keys Phillips screwdriver Graduated ruler

Required products Distilled water

Specific kit or consumables KIT, INSTALLATION P400 XEA759G (1209156759) KIT, INSTALLATION PC400 XEC139B (1209172139) If the instrument is equipped with ISE module option: ■ ISE

module electrodes: ABX Pentra Sodium-E A11A01738 ABX Pentra Chloride-E A11A01739 ABX Pentra Potassium-E A11A01740 ABX Pentra Reference-E A11A01741

■ ISE

module reagents: ABX Pentra Standard 1 A11A01717 ABX Pentra Standard 2 A11A01718 ABX Pentra Reference 280 ML A11A01901 Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator. Local or national regulations must be applied in all the operations.

Installation

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

1. Instrument installation

Before unpacking, control the proper handling of the instrument package during transportation with the help of the shock indicator "Shockwatch" and the tipping indicator "Tiltwatch". Please refer to the Service Information Letter RAN357A to know the procedure to follow for instrument package reception.

1.1.

Unpacking

Unpack the instrument carefully, then make sure that all of the parts from the package list are present. You can print these following tables and tick off the corresponding check box when the part is present.

Package list Part number

Qty

Designation

1

Instrument with or without ISE module

XEA759G (1209156759) XEC139B (1209172139) XEA815E (1209155815) XEC114C (1209173114)

KIT, INSTALLATION P400 or KIT, INSTALLATION PC400 1

KIT, ACCESSORIES BOX P400 V4 or KIT, ACCESSORIES BOX PC400

DZZ045F (1202196045) 1300012509 DZZ047F (1202196047) DZZ048F (1202196048)

1

CHILLER, CU401 100 V 50-60 HZ or CHILLER, CU401 115 V 60 HZ or CHILLER, CU401 230 V 50 HZ or CHILLER, CU401 230 V 60 HZ

1300024610

2

CHILLER, GLYCOL 1 L

LBH004A (1207791004)

2

FLUID, 10 L CONTAINER

1

PCB, QWERTY KEYBOARD USB or PCB, USB AZERTY KEYBOARD

1

PRINTER (OPTIONAL)

DAC051A (1201891051)

1

CABLE, USB PC-FRONT USB L=1M

GBM0418 (1203600418)

1

COVER, SAMPLE TRAY LEFT SIDE

1300017778 CBK055A (1201721055)

RAL199B (1300025224) RAL156D (1300025223) DAC011A (1201891011) DAC012A (1201891012) JAM005A (1207321005)

SAFETY INFORMATION P400 or SAFETY INFORMATION PC400 2 1

CABLE, POWER EUROPE (+ 1 cable if printer) or CABLE, POWER USA (+ 1 cable if printer)

1

KIT, SOFTWARE VERSION P400 / PC400

1

5 OUTLET EXTENSION CORD

1

KIT, REAGENT APPLICATION P400 / PC400

1300030012 1300029998

1

P400 DOCUMENTATION USB FLASH DRIVE PC400 DOCUMENTATION USB FLASH DRIVE

GBD072A (1202901072)

4

COVER, HANDLER FOR P120 & P400 CUVETTE SEGMENTS (3x15)

RAS376H - 2

INSTALLATION

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Installation

KIT, INSTALLATION P400 XEA759G (1209156759) Part number

Qty

Designation

XDA806B (1209132806)

6

SAMPLE RACK

XDA968A (1209131968)

6

TUBE ADAPTORS (x5)

XDA805B (1209132805)

6

SAMPLE CUP RACK

8700205 (1228700205)

1

SAMPLE CUP BLUE (x100)

XDA849A (1209131849)

6

REAGENT RACK + ADAPTORS

8700596 (1228700596)

1

4 ML REAGENT CUP (x10)

8700713 (1228700713)

1

10 ML REAGENT CUP (x10)

B1037307 (1221037307)

0.10

15 ML REAGENT CUP (100/bag)

XDA850A (1209131850)

4

CAL/CTRL REAG. RACK GBM0749 (1203600749) + ADAPTORS GBM0794 (1203600794)

HAX0230 (1207230230)

1

STICKER, REAGENT RACK P400

XBA574C (1209113574)

1

FLUID, WASTE STRAW ASSY

XBA568F (1209114568)

1

FLUID, WATER STRAW ASSY

CBK048A (1201721048)

1

PCB, OPT. MOUSE 3 BUT. & WHEEL

GBM0843 (1203600843)

1

CHILLER, CHILLER TUBING SUPPORT

XDB254AS (1209149254) 1

CHILLER, CU400-401 OVERFLOW JAR (cooling unit overflow jar + magnetic ribbon)

EAE003A*

1 metre TUBING, TYGON 0.762 (0.030)

EAE007A*

1 metre TUBING, TYGON 1.52 (0.060)

3027030 (1223027030)

2

CLAMP, TUBE D7

FAX016AL0060 (1202522016)

2

FLUID, CHILLER CASING L=60CM

DBJ016A (1202131016)

2

COLLAR, COBRA METAL COLLAR D=12

FBA002A (1202551002)

2

ADHESIVE AUTO-GRIP STRIP (0.160)

DZZ039A (1202191039)

3

CABLE, FERRITE D=10 MM

A11A01922

3

KIT, CASSETTE 30/10+CAPS (x6)

* Possible to order under the following references: - EAE003AS (1202249003) (2 metres) - EAE007AS (1202249007) (2 metres)

KIT, ACCESSORIES BOX P400 V4 XEA815E (1209155815) Part number

Qty

Designation

1

Accessory case ABX Pentra 400

HAX0166 (1207230166)

1

SAMPLE RACK STICKERS 1-10

HAX0170 (1207230170)

1

SAMPLE CUP RACK STICKERS 41-50

HAX0173 (1207230173)

1

CAL SAMPLE RACK STICKERS 71-84

HAX0174 (1207230174)

1

CTRL SAMP. RACK STICKERS 85-99

XBA563ET (1209119563) 1

NEEDLE, SAMPLE P400 W FERRITE

HAX0175 (1207230175)

1

REAGENT RACK STICKERS 60-69

HAX0188 (1207230188)

1

CAL REAG. RACK STICKERS 01-15

Technical Manual RAA023

INSTALLATION

RAS376H - 3

Installation

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Part number

Qty

Designation

HAX0190 (1207230190)

1

CTRL REAG. RACK STICKERS 30-44

1300028830

1

OPTICAL, LAMP P400

MAB086A (1207821086)

1

TOOL, ALLEN SCREWDRIVER 2MM

B8076812 (1228076812)

1

SAMPLE SYRINGE (100 µL)

B8086648 (1228086648)

1

100 µL TEFLON SEAL (x10)

B8088454 (1228088454)

1

SEAL REPLACEMENT TOOL

B8078955 (1228078955)

1

REAGENT SYRINGE (1000 µL)

B8086605 (1228086605)

1

1000 µL TEFLON SEAL (x10)

B8086583 (1228086583)

1

1000 µL + 500 µL O'RINGS (x10)

9001072 (1229001072)

1

FILTER, FILTER LIQUID COMPLETE

1

Clips, Ø 12 mm

1

ISO sticker

1

Key screwdriver

1

Mouse pad

2

Touchscreen stylus

EAA021A (1202201021)

1

Straight link DI=4.25

EAB031A (1202211031)

1

Straight link DI=5 Polyprop.

EAC015A (1202221015)

1

FITTING, LUER MALE FITTING

DAR055A (1202001055)

2

FUSE, 5X20 T 6.3 A H

HAX0273 (1207230273)

1

NCD SAMPLE RACK STICKERS 1-10

HAX0277 (1207230277)

1

NCD SAMPLE CUP RACK ST. 41-50

HAX0280 (1207230280)

1

NCD CAL SAMPLE RACK ST. 71-84

HAX0281 (1207230281)

1

NCD CTRL SAMPLE RACK ST. 85-99

EAB015A (1202211015)

5

FITTING, STRAIGHT 2.5/1.5

1

Flat screwdriver 3.5x100

DBK009A (1202141009)

6

ADHESIVE, HOLDER TYRAP D=9 MM

MAB002A (1207821002)

1

TOOL, ALEN SCREWDRIVER 2.5 MM

HAX0334 (1207230334)

1

PC400/P400 OPEN CAS.STICKER SHEET1

HAX0335 (1207230335)

1

PC400/P400 OPEN CAS.STICKER SHEET2

KIT, INSTALLATION PC400 XEC139B (1209172139) Part number

Qty

Designation

XDA806B (1209132806)

6

SAMPLE RACK

XDA968A (1209131968)

6

TUBE ADAPTORS (x5)

XDA805B (1209132805)

6

SAMPLE CUP RACK

8700205 (1228700205)

1

SAMPLE CUP BLUE (x100)

XDA849A (1209131849)

6

REAGENT RACK + ADAPTORS

8700596 (1228700596)

1

4 ML REAGENT CUP (x10)

8700713 (1228700713)

1

10 ML REAGENT CUP (x10)

B1037307 (1221037307)

0.10

15 ML REAGENT CUP (100/bag)

RAS376H - 4

INSTALLATION

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Part number

Installation

Qty

Designation

XDA850A (1209131850)

4

CAL/CTRL REAG. RACK GBM0749 (1203600749) + ADAPTORS GBM0794 (1203600794)

HAX0230 (1207230230)

1

STICKER, REAGENT RACK P400

XBA574C (1209113574)

1

FLUID, WASTE STRAW ASSY

XBA568F (1209114568)

1

FLUID, WATER STRAW ASSY

CBK048A (1201721048)

1

PCB, OPT. MOUSE 3 BUT. & WHEEL

GBM0843 (1203600843)

1

CHILLER, CHILLER TUBING SUPPORT

XDB254AS (1209149254) 1

CHILLER, CU400-401 OVERFLOW JAR (cooling unit overflow jar + magnetic ribbon)

EAE003A*

1 metre TUBING, TYGON 0.762 (0.030)

EAE007A*

1 metre TUBING, TYGON 1.52 (0.060)

3027030 (1223027030)

2

CLAMP, TUBE D7

FAX016AL0060 (1202522016)

2

FLUID, CHILLER CASING L=60CM

DBJ016A (1202131016)

2

COLLAR, COBRA METAL COLLAR D=12

FBA002A (1202551002)

2

ADHESIVE AUTO-GRIP STRIP (0.160)

DZZ039A (1202191039)

3

CABLE, FERRITE D=10 MM

A11A01922

3

KIT, CASSETTE 30/10+CAPS (x6)

* Possible to order under the following references: - EAE003AS (1202249003) (2 metres) - EAE007AS (1202249007) (2 metres)

KIT, ACCESSORIES BOX PC400 XEC114C (1209173114) Part number

Qty

Designation

1

Accessory case Pentra C400

HAX0166 (1207230166)

1

SAMPLE RACK STICKERS 1-10

HAX0170 (1207230170)

1

SAMPLE CUP RACK STICKERS 41-50

HAX0173 (1207230173)

1

CAL SAMPLE RACK STICKERS 71-84

HAX0174 (1207230174)

1

CTRL SAMP. RACK STICKERS 85-99

XBA847AT (1209119847) 1

NEEDLE, SAMPLE PC400

HAX0175 (1207230175)

1

REAGENT RACK STICKERS 60-69

HAX0188 (1207230188)

1

CAL REAG. RACK STICKERS 01-15

HAX0190 (1207230190)

1

CTRL REAG. RACK STICKERS 30-44

GBM1326 (1203601326)

1

OPTICAL, LAMP PC400

MAB086A (1207821086)

1

TOOL, ALLEN SCREWDRIVER 2MM

B8076812 (1228076812)

1

SAMPLE SYRINGE (100 µL)

B8086648 (1228086648)

1

100 µL TEFLON SEAL (x10)

B8088454 (1228088454)

1

SEAL REPLACEMENT TOOL

B8078955 (1228078955)

1

REAGENT SYRINGE (1000 µL)

B8086605 (1228086605)

1

1000 µL TEFLON SEAL (x10)

B8086583 (1228086583)

1

1000 µL + 500 µL O'RINGS (x10)

9001072 (1229001072)

1

FILTER, FILTER LIQUID COMPLETE

Technical Manual RAA023

INSTALLATION

RAS376H - 5

Installation

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Part number

1.2.

Qty

Designation

1

Clips, Ø 12 mm

1

ISO sticker

1

Key screwdriver

1

Mouse pad

2

Touchscreen stylus

EAA021A (1202201021)

1

Straight link DI=4.25

EAB031A (1202211031)

1

Straight link DI=5 Polyprop.

EAC015A (1202221015)

1

FITTING, LUER MALE FITTING

DAR055A (1202001055)

2

FUSE, 5X20 T 6.3 A H

HAX0273 (1207230273)

1

NCD SAMPLE RACK STICKERS 1-10

HAX0277 (1207230277)

1

NCD SAMPLE CUP RACK ST. 41-50

HAX0280 (1207230280)

1

NCD CAL SAMPLE RACK ST. 71-84

HAX0281 (1207230281)

1

NCD CTRL SAMPLE RACK ST. 85-99

EAB015A (1202211015)

5

FITTING, STRAIGHT 2.5/1.5

1

Flat screwdriver 3.5x100

DBK009A (1202141009)

6

ADHESIVE, HOLDER TYRAP D=9 MM

MAB002A (1207821002)

1

TOOL, ALEN SCREWDRIVER 2.5 MM

HAX0334 (1207230334)

1

PC400/P400 OPEN CAS.STICKER SHEET1

HAX0335 (1207230335)

1

PC400/P400 OPEN CAS.STICKER SHEET2

Location

Keep in mind that the instrument weighs approximately 120 kg (265 lb). To move the instrument, four persons are required. The lifting handles provided in the installation kit must be used. ■ Place

your instrument on a clean and leveled table or workbench.

■ Avoid

exposure to sunlight.

■ Place

your instrument where it is not exposed to water or vapor.

■ Place

your instrument where it is not exposed to dust.

■ Avoid

direct exposure to air conditioner.

■ Place

your instrument where it is free from vibration or shock.

■ Place

your instrument where an independent power receptacle can be used.

■

Use a receptacle different from the one used by a device that easily generates noise such as a centrifuge, etc.

■ Provide

a space of at least 20 cm (7.9 in) at the back of the instrument for a proper ventilation.

■

Make sure to provide enough space to open the main cover easily. The instrument height is approximately 63 cm (24.8 in) closed cover and 105 cm (41.3 in) open cover.

■

Make sure to provide enough space on both sides of the instrument to access the computer connections and power supply connection.

RAS376H - 6

INSTALLATION

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Installation

The Power switch and Power supply connection should always be accessible. When positioning the system for operational use, leave the required amount of space for easy access to these items.

1.3.

Installation

Install the instrument lifting handles in their location, make sure that they are correctly secured, lift the instrument onto the workbench using the four handles.

Technical Manual RAA023

INSTALLATION

RAS376H - 7

Installation

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Open

the arms main cover and remove its protective foam.

■ Remove

the protective foams retaining the

arms.

■ Open

the reagent door and remove the

foam.

In order not to damage needles during installation, disable the arms (vertical and rotation movements), and put them on a sample cup rack over the reagent tray as shown on the following picture.

RAS376H - 8

INSTALLATION

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Installation

C ■ Open

the optic hatch (A).

■ Make

sure that the tubings on the reagent syringe and on the sample syringe are correctly fastened (B).

B

■ Remove

the mixer cover (C). See RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1. A

■ Unscrew

the CHC screw supporting the mixer in low position and remove it.

■ Lift

the mixer assembly up, then down by pressing the red button.

■ Put

1.4.

the mixer cover back.

Syringes

Required products: - Reagent syringe 1000 µL (provided in the accessories box) - Sample syringe 100 µL (provided in the accessories box) ■

Manually fill and empty several times the syringes using a container of distilled water to ensure that the barrel is filled with water and no air bubbles are visible in the syringes.

Technical Manual RAA023

INSTALLATION

RAS376H - 9

Installation

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

B

■ Push

the syringes support halfway down

(A). ■ Install

the syringes: carefully fasten the glass barrel (B), then the knurl (C). A

C

1.5.

Electrical and computer connections ■ Cut

the Ty-Rap™ maintaining the cooling unit tubing.

■ Make

sure that the power supply module voltage of the instrument (indicated at the instrument back) corresponds to the nominal supply voltage of the laboratory and the country.

■ Connect

the power supply cable.

■ Open the connection hatch (right-hand side

of the instrument). ■ Route

the cables under the frame of the instrument.

RAS376H - 10

INSTALLATION

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Installation

■ Place

a ferrite core on the keyboard cable as follows: - Open the plastic case of the ferrite core. - Place the keyboard cable into the case (at approx. 10 cm of the USB connection). - Make a loop with the keyboard cable, then close the case.

■ Connect

the keyboard to the computer.

■ Place

a ferrite core on the mouse cable as follows: - Open the plastic case of the ferrite core. - Place the mouse cable into the case (at approx. 10 cm of the USB connection). - Make a loop with the mouse cable, then close the case.

■ Connect

the mouse to the computer.

■ Connect

the printer into a free USB port.

■ Close

the connection hatch cautiously.

Make sure to inform the customer that: ■ the instrument is equipped with a ferrite core on the keyboard cable as well as on the mouse cable, ■ if he has to replace the keyboard or the mouse, he must keep the ferrite core and reinstall it on the new peripheral device.

1.6.

Distilled water and waste installation

Use the "Luer" connectors, straws and tubings provided in the installation kit and in the accessories box to connect distilled water and waste.

A - Evacuation of condensation water B - H2O C - ISE module waste D - Intrument waste B

C

D

A ■ Connect

Technical Manual RAA023

the instrument distilled water (B) and waste (D) tubings.

INSTALLATION

RAS376H - 11

Installation

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Place

a ferrite core on both level detection cables (distilled water and waste) as follows: - Mark the distilled water level detection cable and the waste level detection cable. - Open the plastic case of the ferrite core. - Place both level detection cables into the case. - Make a loop with each cable, then close the case.

F

E

■ Connect

the distilled water level detection cable (E) and the waste level detection cable (F) to the instrument.

■

Connect the 6x9 mm PVC tube to the twisted priming tube (evacuation of condensation water (A)). Guide with the shortest distance from the side of the instrument to the waste detection assy and cut to the correct length. Connect it to the big connector of the waste detection assy.

■ If

the instrument is equipped with the ISE module option, follow the same procedure for the ISE waste tubing (C), then connect it to the small connector of the waste detection assy. The evacuation of condensation water is done by gravity, it is very important to make sure that tubes do not bend or do not go up. Idem for ISE waste tubing. This tube must be guided between the cooling unit tubings by the "Chiller tubing support". See 2. Cooling unit installation, page 13.

Place the ISO sticker (provided in the accessories box) on the waste container.

RAS376H - 12

INSTALLATION

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Installation

2. Cooling unit installation ■

Before plugging the cooling unit tubings, install the connectors (provided with the cooling unit) as follows: screw nuts with caps

- Unscrew the screw nuts and caps from the cooling unit. - Remove the caps from the screw nuts. - Keep the caps for a possible transportation of the cooling unit. - Put the connectors in the screw nuts and screw them on the cooling unit. - Tighten the connectors with a pair of pliers.

screw nut with connector

casings

- Put the casings (provided in the installation kit) on the connectors.

Technical Manual RAA023

INSTALLATION

RAS376H - 13

Installation

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Plug

the cooling unit tubings as follows:

■ The

input tubing of the instrument into the output connector of the cooling unit. output tubing of the instrument into the input connector of the cooling unit. See picture below:

■ The

output tubing of instrument

input tubing of instrument

output tubing input tubing of cooling unit of cooling unit

- Compress the tubing cover to access the tubing and cut 10-15 cm of the tubing.

- Put the Cobra metal collar (provided in the installation kit) on the tubing and plug the tubing into the connector.

RAS376H - 14

INSTALLATION

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Installation

- Then, with a pair of pliers, tighten the collar to its maximum.

- Put the tubing cover in contact with the casing. Support the casing and the tubing cover with one auto-grip strip (provided in the installation kit). The rough and grip side of the auto-grip strip must be placed on the casing and the tubing cover.

- Put the slipcover on the tubing cover + casing + auto-grip strip.

To instrument

■ Install the chiller tubing support (included in

the installation kit) to support those tubings.

To cooling unit

Technical Manual RAA023

INSTALLATION

RAS376H - 15

Installation

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Plug

the cooling unit cable into the instrument connector and the cooling unit connector.

■ Install

the cooling unit drainage tubing (10-15 cm of the tubing previously cut) as follows:

- Pull the ventilation grid in the front of the cooling unit and remove it.

- Plug the drainage tubing into the connector next to the bleed screw.

RAS376H - 16

INSTALLATION

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Installation

- Put the ventilation grid back.

When you close the ventilation grid, take care to arrange the drainage tubing up as shown on the figure below.

■ Install the cooling unit overflow jar (included

in the installation kit) at the rear of the cooling unit.

■ Fill

the cooling unit with ethylene glycol and distilled water as follows:

- Slightly push to unlock and to open the lid of the filling opening.

Technical Manual RAA023

INSTALLATION

RAS376H - 17

Installation

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

- Fill the cooling unit with two liters of ethylene glycol and complete with distilled water up to the high mark.

Take care that no liquid enters the cooling unit.

- Close the lid.

Install the cooling unit under the instrument or at the same level but never on a higher position. Proper ventilation requires at least 10 cm (4 inches) space in the front and at the rear.

■ Connect ■ Switch

the cooling unit.

the cooling unit on.

3. ISE module preparation

■ If

the instrument is not equipped with the ISE module option and you have to install the ISE module, refer to RAS441: ISE module installation, page 1. ■ If the instrument is already equipped with the ISE module, refer directly to the ISE module startup procedure. See RAS441: ISE module installation, 2.1. Electrode and reagent installation, page 9.

RAS376H - 18

INSTALLATION

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Installation

4. First start of the instrument ■ Make ■ Put

sure that the arms main cover is open.

some cuvette segments in the cuvette segment loader.

■ Start

the instrument (ON/OFF switch is on the left-hand side of the instrument). The initialization will be "NOT OK" because of the open arms main cover.

■ When

initialization is ended, enter the name (tech) and the password (qbxtech for Azerty keyboard or abxtech for Qwerty keyboard), then press OK to access the main menu.

4.1.

Check online help language

■ Press Help and verify that the

online help is installed on the instrument in the software language.

■ If

not, use the Documentation media supplied within the instrument to install it.

4.2.

Check keyboard setup ■ Go

to Services > System Configuration > Local Settings.

■ Press

Change Configuration, select the country in the Default input language list, press Apply, then

OK.

Technical Manual RAA023

INSTALLATION

RAS376H - 19

Installation

4.3.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Check date and time

B

■ In

the Local Settings tab, press Edit (A) to access the System Date and Time scrolling lists (B).

■ Make

the modifications, then press OK (C) to confirm. A

C

If the date format or the time format is changed, the instrument will reboot automatically after confirmation.

4.4.

Check printer configuration

■ Go

to Services > System Configuration > Printer.

■ Press

Edit (D) to access the different scrolling lists.

■ Make

the modifications, then press OK (E) to confirm.

D

E

5. ISE

See RAS441: ISE module installation, 2.2. Start and use of ISE option, page 12 in Section 7: ISE module.

RAS376H - 20

INSTALLATION

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Installation

6. Mechanical alignments check

It is advisable to check the sample needle alignment in order not to damage it. Always move the sample arm to its upper position (vertical home) before moving the reagent arm. Always move the sample and reagent arms to their upper positions before moving a tray. Always move the reagent arm into its wash tower before moving the sample arm. ■

Check the adjustment of the reagent arm positions in the wash tower by following the reagent arm adjustment procedure: - Wash Tower Position (rotation): see RAS385: Arms, 5.3.2. Wash Tower Position, page 29 - Low Position in Wash Tower (vertical): see RAS385: Arms, 5.4.2. "Low Position in Wash Tower", page 32

■

Check the adjustment of the sample arm positions in the wash tower by following the sample arm adjustment procedure: - Wash Tower Position (rotation): see RAS385: Arms, 5.3.2. Wash Tower Position, page 29 - Low Position in Wash Tower (vertical): see RAS385: Arms, 5.4.2. "Low Position in Wash Tower", page 32

7. Priming ■ Push

the waste straw into the waste container.

■ Manually

fill the two wash towers with distilled water to avoid splashes, then put the optic hatch back.

■ Close

the arms main cover, then leave the Diagnostics menu (press Back) and press Startup. The instrument initializes its mechanical components, wait until the end of the initialization.

■ Go

to Services > Customer Services > Cycles\Priming.

■ Connect

the distilled water tubing to the distilled water container, then perform two Filling up cycles.

■ Perform

a Priming Cycle.

■ Make

sure that no air bubbles are visible in the syringes.

8. Pressure sensors calibration Perform the pressure sensors calibration by following the pressure sensors procedure. See RAS442: Pressure sensors, 3.3. To calibrate the pressure sensors, page 7.

Technical Manual RAA023

INSTALLATION

RAS376H - 21

Installation

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

9. Reagent applications installation Perform a full installation of the reagent applications (included in the reagent application kit). See RAS518: Reagent applications installation, page 1.

Before installation, ensure that the reagent application version is compatible with the software version installed on the instrument. Refer to the compatibility table in the technical note included in the reagent application kit.

To optimize the "software" support of your customers, this Reagent Application media must be kept close to the instrument.

10. Racks The instrument racks are identified by means of barcode and numbered labels. Place these labels on racks as shown on the stickers plate: ■ HAX0166

(1207230166) for sample rack 1-10

■ HAX0170

(1207230170) for sample cup rack 41-50

■ HAX0173

(1207230173) for calibrator sample rack 71-84

■ HAX0174

(1207230174) for control sample rack 85-99

■ HAX0175

(1207230175) for reagent rack 60-69

■ HAX0188

(1207230188) for calibrator reagent rack 01-15

■ HAX0190

(1207230190) for control reagent rack 30-44

To read barcode format "Interleaved 2 of 5 WITHOUT Check Digit", use the following stickers: - HAX0273 (1207230273): NCD SAMPLE RACK STICKERS 1-10 (included in the accessories box) - HAX0274 (1207230274): NCD SAMPLE RACK STICKERS 11-20 - HAX0277 (1207230277): NCD SAMPLE CUP RACK ST. 41-50 (included in the accessories box) - HAX0278 (1207230278): NCD SAMPLE CUP RACK ST. 51-60 - HAX0279 (1207230279): NCD SAMPLE CUP RACK ST. 61-70 - HAX0280 (1207230280): NCD CAL SAMPLE RACK ST. 71-84 (included in the accessories box) - HAX0281 (1207230281): NCD CTRL SAMPLE RACK ST. 85-99 (included in the accessories box) Go to Services > System Configuration > Local Settings. Press Edit and deselect the Check Digit option, then press OK.

RAS376H - 22

INSTALLATION

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Installation

Reagent and calibrator/control stickers (STICKER, REAGENT RACK P400 HAX0230 (1207230230)) are also available to identify solutions, calibrators and controls on the reagent racks, calibrator/control reagent racks and calibrator/control sample racks. Place these stickers as shown on the examples below:

11. Check up Follow the "Check up after intervention" procedure. See RAS393: Check up after intervention, page 1.

Technical Manual RAA023

INSTALLATION

RAS376H - 23

Installation

RAS376H - 24

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

INSTALLATION

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS378J

6 month maintenance

RAS378: 6 month maintenance

Concerns To decontaminate the hydraulic system To replace the filter To replace the syringes Cooling unit ISE module To check the mechanical adjustments To check the barcode readers To check the spectrophotometer To check the temperature To check the sample needle throughput To calibrate the pressure sensors To clean and defragment the C:\ and D:\ drives Check up after intervention

Required tools Flat screwdriver Phillips screwdriver Hexagonal keys

Required products Bleach

Intervention time 2 h 00

Frequency Every 6 months

Specific kit or consumables KIT, 6 MONTH MAINTENANCE XEA766BS (1209159766) If the instrument is equipped with ISE module option: KIT, ISE 6 MONTH MAINTENANCE XEC273AS (1209171273) Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator. Local or national regulations must be applied in all the operations.

6 month maintenance

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

KIT, 6 MONTH MAINTENANCE XEA766BS (1209159766) P/n 9001072 (1229001072) B8078955 (1228078955) B8076812 (1228076812) 3027030 (1223027030)

Designation FILTER, FILTER LIQUID COMPLETE REAGENT SYRINGE (1000 µL) SAMPLE SYRINGE (100 µL) CLAMP, TUBE D7

Qty 1 1 1 2

1. To decontaminate the hydraulic system 1.1.

To decontaminate the hydraulic circuit

1. Prepair a bottle containing half a liter of bleach diluted to 1 part of bleach for 9 parts of distilled water (1/10). 2. Prepair a bottle containing half a liter of distilled water. 3. Replace the water tank with the diluted bleach bottle then run several Filling up cycles. 4. Remove the straw from the diluted bleach bottle and wrap it in absorbent paper. 5. Run several Priming Cycle to drain the circuit. 6. Dry the straw with absorbent paper. 7. Plunge the straw into the distilled water bottle then run several Priming Cycle. 8. Remove the straw from the distilled water bottle and wrap it in absorbent paper. 9. Run several Priming Cycle to drain the circuit. 10. Dry the straw well. 11. Decontaminate the water tank (see 1.2. To decontaminate the tanks, page 2). 12. Plunge the straw into the water tank filled with distilled water.

1.2.

To decontaminate the tanks

1. 2. 3. 4.

1.3.

Prepair 2 liters of bleach diluted to 1 part of bleach for 9 parts of distilled water (1/10). Pour this dilution into the water tank then shake it several times. Throw the dilution out in a waste container then rinse thoroughly with distilled water. Follow the same procedure to decontaminate the waste tank.

To decontaminate the wash towers

1. Prepair bleach diluted to 1 part of bleach for 9 parts of distilled water (1/10). 2. Fill the wash towers with this dilution then wait a few minutes. 3. Run a Draining cycle to drain the wash towers.

RAS378J - 2

MAINTENANCE

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

6 month maintenance

4. Fill and drain the wash towers several times with distilled water. 5. Manually clean the wash towers with absorbent paper.

2. To replace the filter The filter is located on the right-hand side, at the back of the instrument. Refer to your user manual to replace the filter.

3. To replace the syringes Refer to your user manual to replace the syringes.

4. Cooling unit 4.1.

To clean the cooling unit condenser (for cooling unit CU401)

1. Go to Services > System Configuration > Analyser and deselect the Activate Cold Area option. 2. Switch the cooling unit off and disconnect the power supply cable.

3. Pull the ventilation grid and remove it.

Technical Manual RAA023

MAINTENANCE

RAS378J - 3

6 month maintenance

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

4. Remove dust from the condenser with a vacuum cleaner.

5. Put the ventilation grid back.

When you close the ventilation grid, take care to arrange the drainage tubing up as shown below.

6. Connect the power supply cable and switch the cooling unit on.

Wait ten minutes minimum, between switching off and switching on the cooling unit.

7. Go to Services > System Configuration > Analyser and select the Activate Cold Area option.

RAS378J - 4

MAINTENANCE

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

4.2.

6 month maintenance

To clean the cooling unit filter (for cooling unit CU400)

If you have just replaced the filter, it is not necessary to clean it now.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Remove the filter with its metallic support from the cooling unit grid. Remove the filter from its metallic support. Clean the filter with water and let it dry. Once dry, put the filter back in its metallic support. Put the filter with its metallic support back on the cooling unit grid by fitting the two metallic pieces in the grid holes.

5. ISE module Refer to the procedure RAS388: ISE module maintenance, 1. 6 month maintenance, page 2 in the section 7: ISE module.

6. To check the mechanical adjustments

Always move the reagent arm into its wash tower before moving the sample arm. Always move the sample arm to its vertical home position before moving the reagent arm.

Technical Manual RAA023

MAINTENANCE

RAS378J - 5

6 month maintenance

6.1.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

To check the sample arm positions

1. Check the adjustment of all the sample arm positions listed below. Refer to the procedure RAS385: Arms, 6. Sample arm adjustment, page 36. - Cuvette: Cuvette Position (rotation) and Low Position in Cuvette (vertical) - Wash tower: Wash Tower Position (rotation) and Low Position in Wash Tower (vertical) - Reagent rack (rotation): R1 Pos.-Reagent Rack, R2 Pos.-Reagent Rack, R3 Pos.-Reagent Rack - Calibrator/control reagent rack (rotation): R1 Pos.-Cal/Ctrl Rack, R2 Pos.-Cal/Ctrl Rack, R3 Pos.-Cal/Ctrl Rack - Cassette (rotation): R1 on Cassette and R2 on Cassette - Reagent rack, calibrator/control reagent rack and cassette (vertical): Low Position in Reagent rack, Low Position CalCs on reagent tray, Low Position in Cassette - Sample (rotation): External Sample and Internal Sample - Sample (vertical): Low Position in Sample Cup and Low Position in Sample Tube - ISE tower: ISE Sample (rotation) and Low Position in ISE Tower (vertical) 2. If necessary, readjust the positions.

6.2.

To check the reagent arm positions

1. Check the adjustment of all the reagent arm positions listed below. Refer to the procedure RAS385: Arms, 5. Reagent arm adjustment, page 23. - Cuvette: Cuvette Position (rotation) and Low Position in Reaction Tray (vertical) - Wash tower: Wash Tower Position (rotation) and Low Position in Wash Tower (vertical) - Reagent rack (rotation): R1 Pos.-Reagent Rack, R2 Pos.-Reagent Rack, R3 Pos.-Reagent Rack - Cassette (rotation): R1 on Cassette and R2 on Cassette - Reagent rack and cassette (vertical): Low Position in Reagent/Cal/Ctrl Rack and Low Position in Cassette 2. If necessary, readjust the positions.

6.3.

To check the mixer positions

1. Check the adjustment of all the mixer positions listed below. Refer to the procedure RAS386: Mixer, 5. Adjustments, page 17. - Home position - Above Reaction Tray position and Cuvette position 2. If necessary, readjust the positions.

6.4.

To check the cuvette changer

1. Refer to the procedure RAS384: Cuvette changer, 4.9. Adjustment check, page 47 to check the adjustment of the cuvette changer. 2. If necessary, readjust the cuvette changer. See RAS384: Cuvette changer, 4. Adjustments, page 31.

RAS378J - 6

MAINTENANCE

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

6 month maintenance

7. To check the barcode readers 1. Check the adjustment of the reagent barcode reader position. Refer to the procedure RAS380: Reagent tray, 4.4. Reagent barcode reader position, page 24. 2. If necessary, readjust the position. 3. Check the adjustment of the sample barcode reader position. Refer to the procedure RAS381: Sample tray, 4.3. Sample barcode reader position, page 17. 4. If necessary, readjust the position.

8. To check the spectrophotometer Refer to the procedure RAS383: Optical bench, 4. Optical bench check, page 31.

9. To check the temperature 1. Go to Services > Diagnostics > Heating. 2. Make sure that the assigned values for the following are correct. - Needle Heating: 37°C - Reaction Heating: 37°C - Refrigerated Area: 6°C

3. If necessary, change the assigned values as follows. - Select the Needle Heating, Reaction Heating or Refrigerated Area option (A). - Press Stop (B). - Change the assigned value. - Press Start (C) to save the modifications on the mother board.

A

C

B

4. Make sure that the current temperatures for the following are correct. - Needle Heating: 37°C +/- 1.5°C - Reaction Heating: 37°C +/- 0.25°C - Refrigerated Area: between 4 and 10°C The lights should be green.

Technical Manual RAA023

MAINTENANCE

RAS378J - 7

6 month maintenance

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

10. To check the sample needle throughput

This procedure allows you to check the sample needle and the water pump flow.

1. Go to Services > Customer Services > Cycles. 2. Run a Priming Cycle. 3. Make sure that the suction and the flow of the reagent and sample needles are correct.

A 4. Go to Services > Diagnostics > Tray. 5. Select the Reagent option (A) then press Motor Off (B). B

6. Place an empty 15 mL vial on the position "A1" of a reagent rack. 7. Manually load this rack on the reagent tray, in position "1".

8. Go to Services > Diagnostics > Syringe. 9. In the Pump area, select the Water Pump option (C) then press Water pump flow measurement (D). The cycle starts then the water volume that has flowed is displayed in the Measured volume field (E). The water volume is displayed in red if it is out of range or if an error appears during the cycle.

C

E D

11. To calibrate the pressure sensors Refer to the procedure RAS442: Pressure sensors, 3.3. To calibrate the pressure sensors, page 7.

RAS378J - 8

MAINTENANCE

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

6 month maintenance

12. To clean and defragment the C:\ and D:\ drives 12.1.

To log in to Windows

1. 2. 3. 4.

12.2.

Log in to the instrument software as technician with tech/abxtech as login/password. Go to Services > Diagnostics and open the Windows Explorer. Press the Windows Start button, press Log Off abx... and then press Log Off. Log in to Windows as administrator with administrator/admin as login/password.

To clean the C:\ and D:\ drives

1. Press the Windows Start button and go to Programs > Accessories > System Tools > Disk Cleanup.

2. Select the C:\ drive and press OK. 3. Add the Compress old files option and press OK.

4. Repeat the steps 1 to 3 for the D:\ drive.

Technical Manual RAA023

MAINTENANCE

RAS378J - 9

6 month maintenance

12.3.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

To defragment the C:\ and D:\ drives

1. Press the Windows Start button and go to Programs > Accessories > System Tools > Disk Defragmenter.

2. Select the C:\ drive and press Defragment. 3. Repeat the steps 1 and 2 for the D:\ drive.

12.4.

To clear the print spooler

1. Open the Windows Explorer and go to C:\WINDOWS\system32\spool\PRINTERS.

2. Delete all the files.

RAS378J - 10

MAINTENANCE

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

12.5.

6 month maintenance

To purge the Host orders

1. Go to C:\Program Files\P400 Software\Exe\Rs_Data. 2. Delete all the files.

12.6.

To empty the recycle bin

Right-click the Recycle Bin and then click Empty Recycle Bin.

13. Check up after intervention Refer to the procedure RAS393: Check up after intervention.

Technical Manual RAA023

MAINTENANCE

RAS378J - 11

6 month maintenance

RAS378J - 12

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

MAINTENANCE

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS379J

Yearly maintenance In this procedure, specific instructions are given for previous ABX Pentra 400 hardware versions: ■ V1 corresponds to instruments with serial numbers below 2000.

RAS379: Yearly maintenance

Concerns Instrument Reagent tray cleaning Arms assembly greasing (for ABX Pentra 400 V1 only) Reaction tray cleaning Cuvette changer endless screw greasing Cooling unit Cooling unit CU401 Cooling unit CU400 ISE module 6 month maintenance procedure

Required tools Flat screwdriver Phillips screwdriver Hexagonal keys Torx key

Required products Distilled water Bleach

Intervention time 3 h 30

Frequency Yearly

Specific kit or consumables KIT, 1 YEAR MAINTENANCE XEA792GS (1209159792) If the instrument is equipped with ISE module option: KIT, ISE 1 YEAR MAINTENANCE KIT XEA794ES (1209155794)

Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator. Local or national regulations must be applied in all the operations.

Yearly maintenance

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

KIT, 1 YEAR MAINTENANCE XEA792GS (1209159792) P/n XEA768A (1209151768) LAM017A (1207681017) 1300024610 DZZ055A (1202191055) LBH003A (1207791003) HAX0239 (1207230239) JAB010A (1207251010) DBJ025A (1202131025) XEA766BS (1209159766) 9001072 (1229001072) B8078955 (1228078955) B8076812 (1228076812) 3027030 (1223027030)

Designation TOOL, MOLYKOTE GREASE 3.5 ML TOOL, CUV.CHANGER AXIS GREASE CHILLER, GLYCOL 1 L FILTER, COOLING UNIT FILTER REAGENT, 5 L KEG FOR RINSE SPS GLYCOL STICKER CASE USDD40 500x400x250 CLIPS, PLASTIC D=6.4 MM KIT, 6 MONTH MAINTENANCE FILTER, FILTER LIQUID COMPLETE REAGENT SYRINGE (1000 µL) SAMPLE SYRINGE (100 µL) CLAMP, TUBE D7

Qty 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 2

1. Instrument 1.1.

Reagent tray cleaning ■ Switch

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

■ Remove

the sample tray, the insulating cover and the reagent tray (see RAS380: Reagent tray, page 1) to access the reagent tray fans.

■ Connect ■ Make

the power supply cable and switch the instrument on.

sure that the reagent tray fans are working properly.

■ Switch

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

■ Use

a brush to remove dust from the reagent tray.

■ Use

absorbent paper to clean the reagent tray and the barcode reader window.

RAS379J - 2

MAINTENANCE

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Yearly maintenance

Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1 Follow the arms assembly greasing procedure before reassembling. See 1.2. Arms assembly greasing (for ABX Pentra 400 V1 only), page 3.

1.2.

Arms assembly greasing (for ABX Pentra 400 V1 only)

It is advisable to remove the needles before dismantling the arms assembly (in order not to damage them).

■ Fill

a syringe with MOLYKOTE grease.

■ Remove

the covers. See RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1. Open the arms main cover and the ISE cover. Remove the external and internal sample covers, the power supply cover, the optic hatch, the arms covers, the cuvettes tray plate, the reagent cover, the reagent plate, the loader cover, the mother board cover and the mixer plate.

■ Disconnect

the two connectors from the reagent arm board and the connector from the sample arm

board. ■ Disconnect

the reagent arm motor connector (J58) from the mother board.

■ Disconnect

the sample arm motor connector (J59) from the mother board. A

■ Cut

the Ty-Rap™, then unplug the connectors of the two rotation motors (A) and the connectors of the two home sensors (B).

B

A

Technical Manual RAA023

MAINTENANCE

RAS379J - 3

Yearly maintenance

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Remove

the arms assembly by unscrewing the four CHC screws.

Take care of the needles.

■ Turn

the arms to access the greasing holes.

■ Use

the syringe to grease the arms through the two holes on each arm body.

■ Reassemble

in reverse order.

After the arms assembly greasing procedure, it is advisable to check the mechanical adjustments of the sample and reagent arms. See RAS378: 6 month maintenance, 6. To check the mechanical adjustments, page 5.

RAS379J - 4

MAINTENANCE

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

1.3.

Yearly maintenance

Reaction tray cleaning ■ Follow

the reaction tray dismantling procedure. See RAS382: Reaction tray, page 1.

A ■ Unscrew the 7 CHC screws, disconnect the

flap door (A) switch and unscrew the NTC to remove the upper case.

■ Unscrew

the 6 CHC screws to remove the holder disk.

■ Remove

dust from the reaction tray using a brush and a vacuum cleaner.

■ Clean

the crown wheel using a brush and a vacuum cleaner.

■ Clean

the roller groove using absorbent paper.

■ Blow

dust off the spectrophometer lenses, using an aerosol duster.

■ Reassemble

Technical Manual RAA023

in reverse order.

MAINTENANCE

RAS379J - 5

Yearly maintenance

1.4.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Cuvette changer endless screw greasing

This procedure does not apply to the ABX Pentra 400 V1.

■ Open

the arms main cover.

■ Remove

the loader cover. See RAS377: Covers dismantling, 11. Loader cover, page 7.

■ Use

the syringe of "TOOL, CUV.CHANGER AXIS GREASE" (provided in the kit) to grease the endless screw:

- Put a drop of grease on the endless screw. - Manually move up and down the endless screw by turning it.

■ Put

RAS379J - 6

the loader cover back.

MAINTENANCE

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Yearly maintenance

2. Cooling unit Follow the procedure corresponding to the cooling unit model you have: - 2.1. Cooling unit CU401, page 7 - 2.2. Cooling unit CU400, page 9

2.1.

Cooling unit CU401 ■ Drain

the cooling unit as follows:

- Pull the ventilation grid and remove it.

- Put the glycol sticker on the tank (both provided in the kit).

- Put the drainage tubing in the tank to collect the used glycol and unscrew the bleed screw.

- Slightly tilt the cooling unit forwards to drain completely the cooling unit. - Then, screw the bleed screw and remove the drainage tubing from the tank.

Technical Manual RAA023

MAINTENANCE

RAS379J - 7

Yearly maintenance

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

- Put the ventilation grid back.

When you close the ventilation grid, take care to arrange the drainage tubing up as shown on the figure below.

■ Clean

the overflow jar at the rear of the cooling unit.

■ Fill

the cooling unit with ethylene glycol and distilled water as follows:

- Slightly push to unlock and to open the lid of filling opening.

RAS379J - 8

MAINTENANCE

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Yearly maintenance

- Fill the cooling unit with 2 liters of ethylene glycol and complete with distilled water up to the high mark.

Take care that no liquid enters the cooling unit.

- Close the lid. ■ Remove

2.2.

dust from the cooling unit grid (at the rear of the cooling unit).

Cooling unit CU400 ■ Raise

the cooling unit by approximately 40 cm.

■ Drain

the cooling unit as follows: - Put the glycol sticker on the tank (both provided in the kit).

- Place the tank under the cooling unit and put the tubing into the tank to collect the used glycol. - Turn the tap on. - Slightly tilt the cooling unit backwards to drain completely the cooling unit. - Then, turn the tap off and remove the tubing from the tank.

Technical Manual RAA023

MAINTENANCE

RAS379J - 9

Yearly maintenance

■ Clean ■ Fill

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

the overflow jar.

the cooling unit with 2 liters of ethylene glycol, then add one liter of distilled water.

The liquid level (glycol + distilled water) exceeds lightly the middle mark of the window.

■ Remove

dust from the cooling unit grid.

■ Replace

the filter (included in the kit).

3. ISE module See RAS388: ISE module maintenance, 2. Yearly maintenance, page 3 in Section 7: ISE module.

4. 6 month maintenance procedure See RAS378: 6 month maintenance, page 1.

It is not necessary to perform the cooling unit filter cleaning (for cooling unit CU400 only) because it has been replaced.

RAS379J - 10

MAINTENANCE

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS393E

Check up after intervention

RAS393: Check up after intervention

Concerns Preliminary operations Calibration Control Check results

Required tools None

Required products Distilled water

Intervention time 1 h 30

Frequency On request

Specific kit or consumables ABX Pentra Qualitest Solution A11A01758 or ABX Pentra Precitest Solution 1300017438

Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator. Local or national regulations must be applied in all the operations.

Check up after intervention

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

The "Check up after intervention" procedure, also called "Precision test" procedure, should be performed after an intervention to verify that the instrument is functioning properly. This procedure consists in checking the pipetting precision with the ABX Pentra Qualitest Solution or the ABX Pentra Precitest Solution.

1. Preliminary operations 1.1.

Control configuration ■ Go

to Calibration/Control > Control and refer to your user manual to configure either the ABX Pentra Qualitest Solution as a control for the test T1 or the ABX Pentra Precitest Solution as a control for the test P1. ■ For

the test T1, refer to the control solution vial to specify the control characteristics as the Target Value, Min. Value and Max. Value. ■ For the test P1, specify the control characteristics as follows: - Target Value: 600 ΔA, - Min. Value: 500 ΔA, - Max. Value: 700 ΔA ■ Transfer

the control solution in a sample cup (200 µL minimum).

■ Physically ■ Then,

1.2.

position the sample cup on the programmed rack position.

load the rack on the sample tray.

Reagent configuration ■

Go to Reagent Configuration > Configuration and refer to your user manual to configure distilled water as a reagent for the test T1 or P1.

■ Physically

position either two vials of distilled water (15 mL and 10 mL) for the test T1 or a 15 mL vial of distilled water for the test P1 on the programmed rack position.

■ Then,

1.3.

load the rack on the reagent tray.

Results validation configuration ■ Go

to Services > System Configuration > Results validation.

■ Write

RAS393E - 2

the customer configuration down.

MAINTENANCE

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Check up after intervention

It is necessary to write down the customer configuration to reconfigure the results validation of calibrations and controls, with the customer configuration, at the end of procedure.

■ Press

Edit (A). B

■ Configure

the results validation of calibrations and controls (B).

■ Press

OK to validate (C). A

C

2. Calibration ■

Go to Worklist > Calibration and refer to your user manual to create the calibration request for the test T1 or P1.

■ Run

analyses by pressing Start from the generic toolbar.

The calibration for the test T1 or P1 will be performed.

3. Control Once the calibration is validated, perform the control as explained below. ■ Go

to Worklist > Control and refer to your user manual to create the control request (15 replicates) for the test T1 or P1.

■ Run

analyses by pressing Start from the generic toolbar.

The 15 replicates for the test T1 or P1 will be performed.

Technical Manual RAA023

MAINTENANCE

RAS393E - 3

Check up after intervention

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

4. Check results Once the instrument is Ready, check results of the test T1 or P1.

First, make sure that all the results (15 replicates) were validated automatically.

■ Go

to Quality Control > Control. A C

■ Select

the control solution using the Control scrolling list (A).

■ In

the Session Mean part, drag the slider (B) to display the CV (C). The expected coefficient of variation (CV) for the 15 replicates must be ≤ 1.0%.

■ If

B

the test results are bad, see Section 6: Troubleshooting, 2.1.1. Repeatability, page 6-42.

■ If you have to run the 15 replicates again, ask for a New Worklist from the Start up window

(use the Change User option from the Shutdown window) so that only the 15 new replicates are taken into account in the CV calculation. Use new control solution, use fresh distilled water on the rack.

■ Go

to Services > System Configuration > Results validation.

■ Press

Edit (A).

B

■ Reconfigure

the results validation of calibrations and controls with the customer configuration previously written down (B).

■ Press

RAS393E - 4

A

OK to validate (C).

MAINTENANCE

C

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS377E

Covers dismantling In this procedure, specific instructions are given for previous ABX Pentra 400 hardware versions: ■ V1 corresponds to instruments with serial numbers below 2000. ■ V2 corresponds to instruments with serial numbers between 2000 and 2999.

RAS377: Covers dismantling

Concerns Arms main cover and ISE cover Sample covers Power supply cover ISE plate Optic hatch Arms covers Cuvettes tray plate Reagent cover Reagent plate Recuperation jar Loader cover Cuvettes hatch Connection hatch Cuvettes cover Mixer cover Mother board cover Arm bracket covers Mixer plate

Required tools Hexagonal keys Flat screwdriver Phillips screwdriver

Required products None

Specific kit or consumables None Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator. Local or national regulations must be applied in all the operations.

Covers dismantling

■ Switch

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

1. Arms main cover and ISE cover

B

■ Lift

the arms main cover up (A).

■ Lift

the ISE cover up (B).

A

2. Sample covers

■ Remove

the external sample cover.

■ Unscrew

the 3 cruciform screws and the FHC screw to remove the internal sample cover.

RAS377E - 2

COVERS

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Covers dismantling

3. Power supply cover

■ Unscrew

the 7 cruciform screws to remove the power supply cover.

4. ISE plate

■ If

the instrument is not equipped with ISE module, follow the procedure below. the instrument is equipped with ISE module, see RAS538: ISE module spare part replacement, 1. ISE module dismantling, page 2.

■ If

■ Unscrew

the 4 cruciform screws to remove the ISE plate.

Technical Manual RAA023

COVERS

RAS377E - 3

Covers dismantling

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

5. Optic hatch

■ Press

the front of the optic hatch to open it.

Press

6. Arms covers

■ Unscrew

the 4 BHC screws to remove the left arm cover.

■ Unscrew

the 2 FHC screws to remove the right arm cover.

RAS377E - 4

COVERS

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Covers dismantling

7. Cuvettes tray plate

■ Unscrew

the 2 cruciform screws to remove the cuvettes tray plate.

8. Reagent cover

■ Unscrew

the 3 cruciform screws to remove the reagent cover with the reagent hatch.

Technical Manual RAA023

COVERS

RAS377E - 5

Covers dismantling

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

9. Reagent plate

■ First,

remove the ISE cup cover by unscrewing the BHC screw.

■ Then,

unscrew the 5 cruciform screws to remove the reagent plate.

If the instrument is not equipped with ISE module, you have to remove the ISE plate instead of the ISE cup cover. See 4. ISE plate, page 3.

RAS377E - 6

COVERS

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Covers dismantling

10. Recuperation jar

■ Disconnect

the tubings from the wash

towers. ■ Pull

the wash towers and disconnect the overflow tubings.

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws and washers and disconnect the tubing under the recuperation jar to remove the recuperation jar.

11. Loader cover

■ Remove the loader cover by unscrewing the

2 cruciform screws on the side and loosening the 3 CHC screws at the rear.

Technical Manual RAA023

COVERS

RAS377E - 7

Covers dismantling

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

12. Cuvettes hatch

■ Pull

the cuvettes hatch to remove it.

Pull

13. Connection hatch

■ Use

a flat screwdriver to turn the captive screw anti-clockwise.

■ Disconnect

the loudspeaker and the USB cables from the computer, then remove the connection hatch.

RAS377E - 8

COVERS

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Covers dismantling

14. Cuvettes cover

■ Unscrew

the 6 cruciform screws to remove the cuvettes cover.

15. Mixer cover

■ Unscrew

the 3 BHC screws to remove the mixer cover.

Technical Manual RAA023

COVERS

RAS377E - 9

Covers dismantling

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

16. Mother board cover

■ Remove the needle tubings from the plastic

collars located on the mother board cover and unscrew the 4 CHC screws to remove the mother board cover.

Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1 and V2 ■ First,

remove the wire guide by unscrewing the CHC screw.

■ Then,

remove the needle tubings from the plastic collars located on the mother board cover and unscrew the 4 CHC screws to remove the mother board cover.

RAS377E - 10

COVERS

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Covers dismantling

17. Arm bracket covers

Hold the arms in position when unscrewing in order not to damage the needles. The arm boards are sensible to electrostatic discharge. In order not to damage those boards, do not touch them.

■ Unscrew

the 2 BHC screws on the sample arm bracket and the 2 BHC screws on the reagent arm bracket to remove the plastic covers.

18. Mixer plate

■ Unscrew

the 3 cruciform screws to remove the mixer plate.

Technical Manual RAA023

COVERS

RAS377E - 11

Covers dismantling

RAS377E - 12

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

COVERS

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS380E

Reagent tray In this procedure, specific instructions are given for previous ABX Pentra 400 hardware versions: ■ V1 corresponds to instruments with serial numbers below 2000.

RAS380: Reagent tray

Concerns Reagent tray dismantling Reagent tray parts replacement Impacted adjustments Adjustments

Required tools Hexagonal keys Torx key Open-end wrench Phillips screwdriver TOOL, REAG TRAY ADJUSTING TOOL XDB097AS (1209149097) TOOL, DUMMY REAGENT NEEDLE GBM1124 (1203601124) TOOL, DUMMY SAMPLE NEEDLE GBM1125 (1203601125)

Required products None

Intervention time N/A

Frequency On request

Specific kit or consumables None

Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator. Local or national regulations must be applied in all the operations.

Reagent tray

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

1. Reagent tray dismantling The reagent tray dismantling allows you to access the reagent tray parts that can be replaced: - barcode reader - rollers - home sensor - motor - fans - NTC - reagent tray closing assy - reagent tray door sensor. See 2. Reagent tray parts replacement, page 6

■ Switch

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

■ Remove

the covers (see RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1): Open the arms main cover and the ISE cover. Remove the external and internal sample covers, the power supply cover, the optic hatch, the left arm cover, the cuvettes tray plate, the reagent cover and the reagent plate.

■ Remove the left gusset plate by unscrewing

the 3 CHC screws on the side and loosening the 4 CHC screws at the rear of the instrument.

RAS380E - 2

REAGENT TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Reagent tray

■ If

the instrument is equipped with ISE module, you have to remove the ISE module. See RAS538: ISE module spare part replacement, 1. ISE module dismantling, page 2.

■ Remove

the ISE angle support plate by unscrewing the 2 CHC screws at the rear of the instrument.

Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1 For ABX Pentra 400 V1 only, you have to remove the sample tray as follows: ■ Remove

the barcode reader cover by unscrewing the 2 BHC screws and disconnecting the LED connector from the sample relay board (J2).

■ Loosen

the screw to turn the antistatic

brush.

Technical Manual RAA023

REAGENT TRAY

RAS380E - 3

Reagent tray

■ Remove the sample tray by

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

unscrewing the

5 low head CHC screws.

■ Disconnect

the fan from the right side of the tray, then remove the insulating cover by unscrewing the 13 Torx screws and the 2 Torx F screws.

Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1 For ABX Pentra 400 V1, disconnect the fan from the right side of the tray, then remove the insulating cover by unscrewing the 14 CHC screws and the 2 FHC screws.

RAS380E - 4

REAGENT TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Remove

Reagent tray

the reagent tray.

■ Reassemble

in reverse order except covers.

When reassembling the reagent tray, put the reagent tray into gear on the tensioner roller first. Then, pull on the reagent tray to put it into gear on the 2 centering rollers. Never dismantle the motor or the tensioner roller to put the reagent tray back in place.

Technical Manual RAA023

REAGENT TRAY

RAS380E - 5

Reagent tray

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

2. Reagent tray parts replacement 2.1.

Barcode reader replacement

To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement: See 3. Impacted adjustments, page 19.

■ Follow

the reagent tray dismantling procedure (see 1. Reagent tray dismantling, page 2) to access the barcode reader.

■ Remove

the mother board cover. See RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1.

■ Mark

the position of the barcode reader support (to align it when reassembling), then unscrew the 4 Torx screws.

Marks

It is important to mark the position of the barcode reader support to keep the mechanical adjustment done in factory. The position of the barcode reader support is adjusted so that the barcode reader beam passes crosswise through a sector of the reagent tray. The angle formed from one reagent tray sector extremity to the other is 12°.

12°

■ Unplug

RAS380E - 6

the barcode reader connector from the mother board (J4), then remove the barcode reader.

REAGENT TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Reagent tray

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws under the barcode reader support to release the barcode reader from its support.

■ Replace

2.2.

the barcode reader and reassemble in reverse order.

Rollers replacement

To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement: see 3. Impacted adjustments, page 19.

■ Follow

the reagent tray dismantling procedure (see 1. Reagent tray dismantling, page 2) to access the rollers.

■ Remove the 2 deflectors by unscrewing the

10 cruciform screws.

Technical Manual RAA023

REAGENT TRAY

RAS380E - 7

Reagent tray

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

B

This procedure describes how to replace the 2 centering rollers (A), the 3 supporting rollers (B) and the tensioner roller (C): - 2.2.1. Centering roller, page 8 - 2.2.2. Supporting roller, page 8 - 2.2.3. Tensioner roller, page 9.

A C

2.2.1. Centering roller

■ Loosen

the hexagonal screw to release the

roller. ■ Replace

the roller and tighten the hexagonal screw.

■ Reassemble

in reverse order.

2.2.2. Supporting roller

■ Unscrew

the 2 Torx screws to remove the roller with its support.

■ Replace

the roller with its support and reassemble in reverse order.

RAS380E - 8

REAGENT TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Reagent tray

2.2.3. Tensioner roller

CHC screw

■ Unscrew

the CHC screw and washer to remove the roller adjusting plate. Then, remove the spring and the roller assembly.

roller adjusting plate

CHC screws

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws to remove the roller adjusting support with the roller spacer plate. roller spacer plate roller adjusting support

■ Replace

and reassemble the roller as follows:

roller adjusting plate roller adjusting support

CHC screws M4x8

CHC screw M3x5 with washer 1 2 3

tappings roller spacer plate

spring

roller assembly

CHC screws M3x6

- Assemble the roller spacer plate on the roller adjusting support by screwing the 2 CHC screws M3x6 in the tappings # 2 and 3. - Screw the roller adjusting support on the reagent tray by using the 2 CHC screws M4x8.

Technical Manual RAA023

REAGENT TRAY

RAS380E - 9

Reagent tray

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

- Install the roller assembly and the spring on the roller adjusting support.

- Screw the roller adjusting plate on the roller assembly by using the CHC screw M3x5 with washer.

■ Put

the reagent tray back and remove the temperate area of the reagent tray by unscrewing the 3 CHC screws to adjust the tensioner roller.

2.5 mm

■ Make sure that there is 2.5 mm between the

roller support and the L plate. If necessary, adjust the tensioner roller by unscrewing the CHC screw.

RAS380E - 10

CHC screw L plate

REAGENT TRAY

Roller support

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Reagent tray

If you cannot adjust the tensioner roller to have 2.5 mm between the roller support and the L plate, then reassemble the roller spacer plate on the roller adjusting support by screwing the 2 CHC screws M3x6 in the tappings # 1 and 2.

■ Reassemble

2.3.

in reverse order.

Home sensor replacement

To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement: see 3. Impacted adjustments, page 19.

■ Follow

the reagent tray dismantling procedure (see 1. Reagent tray dismantling, page 2) to access the home sensor.

■ Remove

the front deflector by unscrewing the 6 cruciform screws.

■ Remove

the thermal insulation (A).

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws and cut the Ty-Raps™ to release the home sensor and its wires. A

Technical Manual RAA023

REAGENT TRAY

RAS380E - 11

Reagent tray

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Disconnect ■

the home sensor connector.

Replace the home sensor, reconnect the home sensor connector, fasten the 2 CHC screws and put new Ty-Raps™ back.

■ Put

the thermal insulation back.

■ Put

the reagent tray back and remove the temperate area of the reagent tray by unscrewing the 3 CHC screws to adjust the home sensor.

■ Make

sure that the home flag (fixed under the reagent tray) passes in the middle of the home sensor and does not touch the home sensor. If necessary, adjust the home flag by unscrewing the CHC screw on the reagent tray.

■ Remove

RAS380E - 12

CHC screw

the reagent tray to put the front deflector back and reassemble in reverse order.

REAGENT TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

2.4.

Reagent tray

Motor replacement

To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement: see 3. Impacted adjustments, page 19.

2.4.1. General procedure ■ Follow

the reagent tray dismantling procedure (see 1. Reagent tray dismantling, page 2) to access the

motor.

■ Unscrew

the 3 CHC screws and washers, disconnect the motor connector and remove the motor.

■ Replace ■ Put

the motor, fasten the 3 CHC screws and washers and reconnect the motor connector.

the reagent tray back to adjust the motor position.

■ Make

sure that there is no play between the reagent tray and the motor pinion but do not over-tighten the motor. If necessary, adjust the motor position by unscrewing the 3 CHC screws and washers.

■ Reassemble

Technical Manual RAA023

in reverse order.

REAGENT TRAY

RAS380E - 13

Reagent tray

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

2.4.2. Specific procedure ABX Pentra 400 V1 ■ Follow the reagent

tray dismantling procedure (see 1. Reagent tray dismantling, page 2) to access the

motor.

■ Unscrew

the 3 CHC screws and washers.

■ Disconnect

the motor connector and remove the motor with its peelable spacer.

Peelable spacer

■ Replace the motor with the old peelable spacer, fasten the 3 CHC screws and washers and reconnect

the motor connector. The peelable spacer is used to adjust the motor height positioning. This adjustment is done by the factory. You have to replace the motor with the old peelable spacer to keep the adjustment done by the factory. ■ Put

the reagent tray back to adjust the motor position.

■ Make sure that there is no play between the reagent tray and the motor pinion but do not over-tighten

the motor. If necessary, adjust the motor position by unscrewing the 3 CHC screws and washers. ■ Reassemble

RAS380E - 14

in reverse order.

REAGENT TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

2.5.

Reagent tray

Fans replacement

To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement: see 3. Impacted adjustments, page 19.

■ Follow

the reagent tray dismantling procedure (see 1. Reagent tray dismantling, page 2) to access the

fans.

■ Remove the 2 deflectors by unscrewing the

10 cruciform screws.

Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1 ■ Unscrew

the 2 screws maintaining the fan support on the tray.

■ Pull

the fan up to remove it from the tray and cut the Ty-Raps™ to release the fan and its wires.

■ Disconnect ■ Unscrew ■ Replace

Technical Manual RAA023

the fan connector.

the 2 CHC screws to release the fan from its support. the fan and reassemble in reverse order.

REAGENT TRAY

RAS380E - 15

Reagent tray

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Caution!

Put the fan back on the tray by pressing carefully on the two sides of the fan in order not to break the fan. ■ Ensure that the fan is positioned in the correct direction: the letterings must be placed towards the tray center. Press both sides

Letterings

2.6.

NTC replacement

To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement: see 3. Impacted adjustments, page 19.

■ Follow

the reagent tray dismantling procedure (see 1. Reagent tray dismantling, page 2) to access the

NTC.

■ Remove

the front deflector by unscrewing the 6 cruciform screws.

RAS380E - 16

REAGENT TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Reagent tray

■ Unscrew

the Torx screw and cut the Ty-Raps™ to release the NTC and its wires.

■ Disconnect ■ Replace

2.7.

the NTC connector.

the NTC and reassemble in reverse order.

Reagent tray closing assy replacement

To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement: see 3. Impacted adjustments, page 19.

■ Follow

the reagent tray dismantling procedure (see 1. Reagent tray dismantling, page 2) to access the reagent tray closing assy.

■ Disconnect

the 2 connectors SW1 (no polarity), unscrew the 2 Torx screws and remove the reagent tray closing assy.

Torx screws

Connectors SW1 ■ Replace

Technical Manual RAA023

the reagent tray closing assy and reassemble in reverse order.

REAGENT TRAY

RAS380E - 17

Reagent tray

2.8.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Reagent tray door sensor replacement

To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement: see 3. Impacted adjustments, page 19.

■ Follow

the reagent tray dismantling procedure (see 1. Reagent tray dismantling, page 2) to access the reagent tray door sensor.

■ Disconnect ■ Unscrew ■ Replace

the sensor connector.

the black nut to release the sensor. the sensor as well as its washer and nut and reassemble in reverse order.

Make sure that there is a space of 1 to 3 mm between the sensor and the upper side of the tray.

1-3 mm

Black nut

RAS380E - 18

REAGENT TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Reagent tray

3. Impacted adjustments

Replaced spare parts Impacted adjustments

Barcode Home Rollers Motor Fans NTC reader sensor

Door sensor

Dismantling

Reagent Tray Reagent Bar Code Reader Position

X

X

X

Central Loading Reagent Position

X

X

R1 Pos.-Reagent Rack for Sample Arm

X

X

R2 Pos.-Reagent Rack for Sample Arm

X

X

R3 Pos.-Reagent Rack for Sample Arm

X

X

R1 Pos.-Cal/Ctrl Rack for Sample Arm

X

X

R2 Pos.-Cal/Ctrl Rack for Sample Arm

X

X

R3 Pos.-Cal/Ctrl Rack for Sample Arm

X

X

R1 Pos.-Cassette for Sample Arm

X

X

R2 Pos.-Cassette for Sample Arm

X

X

R1 Pos.-Reagent Rack for Reagent Arm

X

X

R2 Pos.-Reagent Rack for Reagent Arm

X

X

R3 Pos.-Reagent Rack for Reagent Arm

X

X

R1 Pos.-Cassette for Reagent Arm

X

X

R2 Pos.-Cassette for Reagent Arm

X

X

X

X

Sample arm rotation ISE Sample (if present)

Technical Manual RAA023

X

REAGENT TRAY

X

X

X

X

RAS380E - 19

Reagent tray

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

4. Adjustments

Recommendations for use: When you adjust a position of the reagent tray by changing the number of steps for this position, please note that a change of 29 steps is approximately equal to a move of 1 mm linear. Please also note that this value is a mean value taking no account of the different reagent tray positions. If the cassette, reagent rack or calibrator/control reagent rack position adjustments are modified, then the corresponding reagent arm and sample arm position adjustments will have to be checked and readjusted if necessary. See RAS385: Arms, page 1.

4.1.

Functional positions to adjust

The following table lists the functional positions to adjust. Those positions are reached by three different types of adjustment: - the combination of two movements to obtain a centering or - performing an automatic "AUTO" adjustment or - performing a manual "MAN" adjustment The table also indicates the tool required to perform those adjustments. Modules Reagent Tray Sector

Position

Target

Type

Sample arm rotation Sector 1 Cassette 1 2

R1 on cassette R2 on cassette

R1 Pos.-Cassette for Sample Arm R2 Pos.-Cassette for Sample Arm

Sector 2 Reagent rack R1 Pos.-Reagent Rack R2 Pos.-Reagent Rack R3 Pos.-Reagent Rack

1-A 2-A 3-A

R1 Pos.-Reagent Rack for Sample Arm R2 Pos.-Reagent Rack for Sample Arm R3 Pos.-Reagent Rack for Sample Arm

1 2 3

R1 Pos.-Cal/Ctrl Rack for Sample Arm R2 Pos.-Cal/Ctrl Rack for Sample Arm R3 Pos.-Cal/Ctrl Rack for Sample Arm

Sector 3 Cal/Ctrl rack R1 Pos.-Cal/Ctrl Rack R2 Pos.-Cal/Ctrl Rack R3 Pos.-Cal/Ctrl Rack

RAS380E - 20

REAGENT TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

Tool

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Reagent tray

Modules Reagent Tray Sector

Position

Target

Type

Reagent arm rotation Sector 1 Cassette R1 on cassette R2 on cassette

1 2

R1 Pos.-Cassette for Reagent Arm R2 Pos.-Cassette for Reagent Arm

Sector 2 Reagent rack R1 Pos.-Reagent Rack R2 Pos.-Reagent Rack R3 Pos.-Reagent Rack

1-A 2-A 3-A

R1 Pos.-Reagent Rack for Reagent Arm R2 Pos.-Reagent Rack for Reagent Arm R3 Pos.-Reagent Rack for Reagent Arm

1 2 3

R1 Pos. Cal/Ctrl Rack for Reagent Arm* R2 Pos. Cal/Ctrl Rack for Reagent Arm* R3 Pos. Cal/Ctrl Rack for Reagent Arm*

1

Reagent Bar Code Reader Position

AUTO

1

Central Loading Reagent Position

MAN

Sector 3 Cal/Ctrl rack R1 Pos.-Cal/Ctrl Rack* R2 Pos.-Cal/Ctrl Rack* R3 Pos.-Cal/Ctrl Rack* Reagent Barcode Reader Sector 1 Cassette

Sector 36 Cassette

* At the moment, these functional positions are not used on HORIBA Medical range.

Technical Manual RAA023

REAGENT TRAY

RAS380E - 21

Tool

Reagent tray

4.2.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

"Reag tray adjusting tool" description

The "Reag tray adjusting tool" represents the functional positions to adjust as follows: - C1 and C2: functional positions of a cassette. - R1, R2 and R3: functional positions of a reagent rack, positions A1, A2 and A3. - CS1, CS2 and CS3: functional positions of a Cal/Ctrl rack.

CS1, CS2, CS3: Functional positions of a Cal/Ctrl rack

C1, C2: Functional positions of a cassette

Height adjustment

R1, R2, R3: Functional positions of a reagent rack A1, A2, A3

It is also used for barcode reader adjustments.

RAS380E - 22

REAGENT TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

4.3.

Reagent tray

Preliminary procedure ■ Connect

the power supply cable and switch the instrument on.

Ensure that the reagent and sample arms are in their respective wash towers.

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Tray.

■ Before

starting the position adjustments, load the "Reag tray adjusting tool" in the reagent tray:

A

- Select the Reagent radio button (A). - Press Motor Off (B). B

- Turn manually the reagent tray and load the "Reag tray adjusting tool" in the reagent tray.

- Press Check Home (C) to move the reagent tray to its home position. C

Technical Manual RAA023

REAGENT TRAY

RAS380E - 23

Reagent tray

4.4.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Reagent barcode reader position

Warning! Class 2 laser barcode reader Do not stare directly into beam or with optical instrument, as it may cause permanent eye damage.

4.4.1. Automatic adjustment The reagent barcode reader position can be adjusted automatically by using the CAB auto reader adjustment function (D). To use this function correctly, the "Reag tray adjusting tool" loaded in the reagent tray (see 4.3. Preliminary procedure, page 23) must be equipped with a barcode label in good condition and perfectly centered on the "Reag tray adjusting tool". ■ Press

Search (D1). The reagent tray moves to its home position. Then, the "Reag tray adjusting tool" moves to the Reagent Bar Code Reader Position position. The adjustment value for the Reagent Bar Code Reader Position position is calculated and then displayed in the corresponding field (D2). - The value is displayed in black if it is within range. - The value is displayed in red if it is out of range.

E

D 2 1

3

4

■ If

the adjustment value is correct, press Validate (D3). The value is then transferred in the Target field for the Reagent Bar Code Reader Position position (E). If not, press Cancel (D4) and try again.

C

■ Press Check Home (C) to move the reagent

tray to its home position.

4.4.2. Adjustment check Once the reagent barcode reader position is adjusted, check the reagent barcode reading as follows:

■

Put different cassettes and racks on the reagent tray.

A

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Barcode Test.

■ Select

the Reagent radio button (A).

■ Then,

press Check Tray (B). At the end of the cycle, make sure that the position of cassettes and racks on the screen corresponds to the position on the reagent tray.

RAS380E - 24

REAGENT TRAY

B

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

4.5.

Reagent tray

"Central Loading Reagent Position"

■ In

the Target scrolling list, select Central Loading Reagent Position (F).

G

■ In the Sector scrolling list, select any sector

F

("7" for this example) (G). ■ Press

Check Home (C).

■ Press Check Position to move the selected

sector to the Central Loading Reagent Position position (H).

C

H

C

H

■ Check the position of the selected sector in

front of the yellow arrow.

■ Adjust the position by changing the number

of steps in the Target field for the Central Loading Reagent Position position (E). - Increase the number of steps to move the tray anticlockwise. - Decrease the number of steps to move the tray clockwise. ■ Press Check Home (C) to move the reagent

tray to its home position, then check the position again (press Check Position (H)).

■ Put

E

the covers back.

Technical Manual RAA023

REAGENT TRAY

RAS380E - 25

Reagent tray

4.6.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Sampling in reagent tray adjustment (cassette, rack, cal/ctrl rack) ■ Load

the "Reag tray adjusting tool" in the reagent tray. See 4.3. Preliminary procedure, page 23.

■ Replace

the reagent and sample needles respectively by the "Dummy reagent needle" (see RAS385: Arms, 5.2. "Dummy reagent needle" installation, page 25) and the "Dummy sample needle" (see RAS385: Arms, 6.2. "Dummy sample needle" installation, page 38).

Adjustment example Adjustment of a sampling with the reagent needle in a cassette in position "C1".

Aim of this procedure: center the reagent needle in the R1 on Cassette position. This adjustment is performed with the "Reag tray adjusting tool" and the "Dummy reagent needle".

R1 on Cassette

R2 on Cassette

RAS380E - 26

REAGENT TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Reagent tray

a- Reagent tray tab ■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Tray.

■ In

the Target scrolling list, select R1 Pos.Cassette for Reagent Arm (F).

■ Press

F

Check Home (C).

■ Press Check Position to move the cassette

to the R1 Pos.- Cassette for Reagent Arm position (H), then check the "Reag tray adjusting tool" position:

E C

H

The "C1" hole of the "Reag tray adjusting tool" must be centered in the rear slot of the insulating cover.

■ Adjust

the position by changing the number of steps in the Target field for the R1 Pos.- Cassette for Reagent Arm position (E). - Y1 - Increase the number of steps to move the tray anticlockwise. - Y2 - Decrease the number of steps to move the tray clockwise. Y1

■

OK

Y2

Press Check Home (C) to move the reagent tray to its home position, then check the position again (press Check Position (H)).

Technical Manual RAA023

REAGENT TRAY

RAS380E - 27

Reagent tray

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

b- Reagent arm rotation tab ■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Arms.

■ Ensure ■ Ensure

that the sample arm is at its vertical home position. that the reagent arm is at its vertical and rotation home position.

■ Select

the reagent arm Rotation radio button (1).

1 2

■ In

the Position scrolling list, select R1 on Cassette (2).

■ Press

Check Position (3). 3

4 ■ Check the centering of the "Dummy reagent

needle" in the "Reag tray adjusting tool" as follows: - Select the reagent arm Vertical radio button (4). - Press Motor Off (5).

5

Reagent arm rotation / R1 on Cassette (b) +

+ - Slowly push the arm down, then check the position of the "Dummy reagent needle" in the "Reag tray adjusting tool".

Reagent tray / R1 Pos.- Cassette for Reagent Arm (a)

RAS380E - 28

REAGENT TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Press

Reagent tray

Check Home (6).

■ Adjust the position by changing the number

of steps in the Position field for the R1 on Cassette position (7). - Increase the number of steps to turn the reagent arm clockwise. - Decrease the number of steps to turn the reagent arm anticlockwise.

6

7

The principle of the adjustment consists in a combination of two movements: the reagent tray rotation (a) and the reagent arm rotation (b). If necessary, repeat the "a" and "b" adjustments by changing each adjustment with the + and - buttons. ■ Move

the reagent arm to its rotation home position as follows: Select the reagent arm Rotation radio button (1) and press Check Home (6).

■ Check

the position again as follows: Press Check Position (3) and check the centering of the needle again (see above).

■ Move

the reagent arm to its vertical and rotation home position as follows: Select the reagent arm Vertical radio button (4) and press Check Home (6). Check the reagent arm Rotation radio button (1) and press Check Home (6).

Follow the same adjustment principle for all the functional positions listed in the functional positions table. See 4.1. Functional positions to adjust, page 20.

Pay attention to select the correct module concerned and to correctly set the sectors, the positions and the targets.

■

Remove the "Dummy sample needle" and the "Dummy reagent needle" and put the sample and reagent needles back.

■ Remove

Technical Manual RAA023

the "Reag tray adjusting tool" from the reagent tray.

REAGENT TRAY

RAS380E - 29

Reagent tray

RAS380E - 30

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

REAGENT TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS381D

Sample tray In this procedure, specific instructions are given for previous ABX Pentra 400 hardware versions: ■ V1 corresponds to instruments with serial numbers below 2000.

RAS381: Sample tray

Concerns Sample tray dismantling Sample tray parts replacement Impacted adjustments Adjustments

Required tools Hexagonal keys Torx key Open-end wrench Flat screwdriver Phillips screwdriver TOOL, DYNAMO. SCREWDRIVER A302 MAG019A (1207851019) TOOL, DUMMY SAMPLE NEEDLE GBM1125 (1203601125)

Required products None

Intervention time N/A

Frequency On request

Specific kit or consumables None

Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator. Local or national regulations must be applied in all the operations.

Sample tray

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

1. Sample tray dismantling ■ Switch

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

■ Remove

the covers (see RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1): Open the arms main cover and the ISE cover. Remove the external and internal sample covers.

This cover dismantling is enough to be able to adjust the sample tray. See 4. Adjustments, page 16. But, if necessary, the sample tray can be removed as follows.

■

Remove the barcode reader cover by unscrewing the 2 BHC screws and disconnecting the LED connector from the sample relay board (J2).

■ Loosen

the screw to turn the antistatic

brush.

RAS381D - 2

SAMPLE TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Remove the sample tray by

Sample tray

unscrewing the

5 low head CHC screws. ■ Reassemble in reverse order except covers.

Technical Manual RAA023

SAMPLE TRAY

RAS381D - 3

Sample tray

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

2. Sample tray parts replacement 2.1.

Barcode reader replacement

■ The

barcode reader frequency (550 Hz) allows the reading of high resolution barcodes (higher than or equal to 0.16 mm). However, this frequency does not allow the reading of higher resolution barcodes (lower than 0.16 mm). ■ To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement: see 3. Impacted adjustments, page 15. ■

Remove the barcode reader cover by unscrewing the 2 BHC screws and disconnecting the LED connector from the sample relay board (J2).

■ Unplug

the barcode reader connector from the sample relay board (J5).

■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws on the barcode

reader support to release the barcode reader from its support.

RAS381D - 4

SAMPLE TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Sample tray

■ Remove

the barcode reader.

■ Replace

the barcode reader and reassemble in reverse order.

To position correctly the barcode reader, screw the 2 CHC screws on the barcode reader support pushing the barcode reader as indicated on the following picture.

Technical Manual RAA023

SAMPLE TRAY

RAS381D - 5

Sample tray

2.2.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Sample tube detector replacement

To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement: see 3. Impacted adjustments, page 15.

■

Remove the barcode reader cover by unscrewing the 2 BHC screws and disconnecting the LED connector from the sample relay board (J2).

■ Disconnect

the sample tube detector connector from the sample relay board (J3).

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws on the sample tube detector to release it from its support.

■ Replace

RAS381D - 6

the sample tube detector and reassemble in reverse order.

SAMPLE TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

2.3.

Sample tray

Home sensor replacement

To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement: see 3. Impacted adjustments, page 15.

2.3.1. General procedure ■ Follow ■

the sample tray dismantling procedure. See 1. Sample tray dismantling, page 2.

Remove the power supply cover, the optic hatch and the reagent cover. See RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1.

■ Open

the computer fan box as follows: slightly loosen the 4 screws and remove the cover.

■ Remove

the blue tube from the computer

fan box.

■ Disconnect

the sample tray home sensor connector (C21) under the reagent tray.

Technical Manual RAA023

SAMPLE TRAY

RAS381D - 7

Sample tray

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Give

play to the sample tray motor by unscrewing the right CHC screw and washer and loosening the left CHC screw.

■ Remove

the belt from the motor pinion to pass the sample tray home sensor connector through the opening under the reagent tray.

■ Mark

the position of the sample tray home sensor support before unscrewing the 4 Torx screws of the support.

■ Unscrew ■ Replace

the CHC screw to release the sample tray home sensor and its wires. the sample tray home sensor and reassemble in reverse order.

Be very careful when you put back the cover of the computer fan box because you can touch/ disconnect the little board, shown on the following picture, with the cover (depending on the computer model).

RAS381D - 8

SAMPLE TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Sample tray

2.3.2. Specific procedure ABX Pentra 400 V1 ■ Follow

the sample tray dismantling procedure. See 1. Sample tray dismantling, page 2.

■ Remove

the power supply cover, the optic hatch and the reagent cover. See RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1.

■ Open

the computer fan box as follows: slightly loosen the 4 screws and remove the cover.

■ Remove

the blue tube from the computer

fan box.

■ Disconnect

the sample tray home sensor connector (C21) under the reagent tray.

■ Move

the sample tray motor support by unscrewing the right CHC screw and washer (A) and loosening the left CHC screw (B) to pass the sample tray home sensor connector through the opening under the reagent tray.

C

■ Mark

the position of the sample tray home sensor support before loosening the 4 CHC screws of the support (C). B

Technical Manual RAA023

SAMPLE TRAY

A

RAS381D - 9

Sample tray

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Unscrew ■ Replace

the CHC screw to release the sample tray home sensor and its wires.

the sample tray home sensor and reassemble in reverse order.

Be very careful when you put back the cover of the computer fan box because you can touch/ disconnect the little board, shown on the following picture, with the cover (depending on the computer model).

2.4.

Motor replacement

To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement: see 3. Impacted adjustments, page 15.

2.4.1. General procedure ■ Follow ■

the sample tray dismantling procedure. See 1. Sample tray dismantling, page 2.

Remove the power supply cover, the optic hatch and the reagent cover. See RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1.

■ Open

the computer fan box as follows: slightly loosen the 4 screws and remove the cover.

■ Remove

the blue tube from the computer

fan box.

RAS381D - 10

SAMPLE TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Sample tray

■ Disconnect

the motor connector (M25) (A) and the optical encoder connector (E27) (B) under the reagent tray.

A

B

■ Remove

the motor without modifying the adjustment of the belt tensioner screw as follows: - Unscrew the right CHC screw and washer and loosen the left CHC screw to give play to the motor. - Unscrew the left CHC screw and washer to release the motor.

The belt tensioner screw is adjusted at 90 mNm with a dynamometric screwdriver.

Technical Manual RAA023

SAMPLE TRAY

RAS381D - 11

Sample tray

■ To

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

remove the motor from the instrument, it is necessary to slightly lift the reagent tray up as follows:

- Loosen the 2 CHC screws and washers of the left reagent tray foot.

- Loosen the 2 CHC screws, one with washer and one with a ground wire of the right reagent tray foot. - Carefully lift the reagent tray up.

■ Replace ■ Put

the motor, put the belt back on the motor pinion and fasten the left CHC screw and washer.

the belt back on the sample tray wheel and fasten the right CHC screw and washer.

■ Tighten

the left and right CHC screws.

■ Reassemble

in reverse order.

Be very careful when you put back the cover of the computer fan box because you can touch/ disconnect the little board, shown on the following picture, with the cover (depending on the computer model).

Because the reagent tray has been lifted up, check all the centering positions of the reagent and sample arms using the "Reag tray adjusting tool", the "Dummy reagent needle" and the "Dummy sample needle". See RAS385: Arms, page 1.

RAS381D - 12

SAMPLE TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Sample tray

2.4.2. Specific procedure ABX Pentra 400 V1 ■ Follow

the sample tray dismantling procedure. See 1. Sample tray dismantling, page 2.

■ Remove

the power supply cover, the optic hatch and the reagent cover. See RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1.

■ Open

the computer fan box as follows: slightly loosen the 4 screws and remove the cover.

■ Remove

the blue tube from the computer

fan box.

■ Disconnect

the motor connector (M25) (A) and the optical encoder connector (E27) (B) under the reagent tray.

B

A

■ Remove

the motor without modifying the adjustment of the belt tensioner screw as follows: - Unscrew the 2 CHC screws and washers to give play to the motor.

Technical Manual RAA023

SAMPLE TRAY

RAS381D - 13

Sample tray

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

- Unscrew the 4 CHC screws under the reagent tray to release the motor from its support.

The belt tensioner screw is adjusted at 90 mNm with a dynamometric screwdriver.

■ Replace

the motor and reassemble in reverse order.

Be very careful when you put back the cover of the computer fan box because you can touch/ disconnect the little board, shown on the following picture, with the cover (depending on the computer model).

RAS381D - 14

SAMPLE TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Sample tray

3. Impacted adjustments

Impacted adjustments

Replaced spare parts Barcode reader

Sample tube detector

Home sensor Motor Dismantling

Sample Tray Sample Bar code reader Position Sample Tube Detector Position

X

X X

X

External sampling Pos.

X

Internal sampling Pos.

X

Technical Manual RAA023

SAMPLE TRAY

RAS381D - 15

Sample tray

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

4. Adjustments

Recommendations for use: When you adjust a position of the sample tray by changing the number of steps for this position, please note that a change of 27 steps is approximately equal to a move of 1 mm linear. Please also note that this value is a mean value taking no account of the different sample tray positions. When you adjust a position by changing the number of steps for this position, press Check Home, then check the position again (press Check Position) to validate and save the new adjustment.

4.1.

Functional positions to adjust

The following table lists the functional positions to adjust. Those positions are reached by the combination of two movements to obtain a centering . The table also indicates the tool required to perform those adjustments. Modules Sample Tray Sector

Position

Target

External Sample

1

2

External Sampling Pos.

Internal Sample

1

1

Internal Sampling Pos.

Type

Tool

Sample arm rotation

Sample Barcode Reader Default value 332

N/A

Sample Bar code reader Position (332)

Sample tube detector 1

RAS381D - 16

1

Sample Tube Detector Position

SAMPLE TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

4.2.

Sample tray

Preliminary procedure ■ Connect ■ Go

the power supply cable and switch the instrument on.

to Services > Diagnostics > Tray.

■ Before

starting the position adjustments, load a sample cup rack on the sample tray in position "1".

A B ■ Select

the Sample radio button (A).

■ In

the Sector and Position scrolling lists, select "1" and "1" (B).

■ Press

Check Home (C). C

4.3.

Sample barcode reader position

Warning! Class 2 laser barcode reader Do not stare directly into beam or with optical instrument, as it may cause permanent eye damage.

■

To adjust this position, remove the barcode reader cover (see 1. Sample tray dismantling, page 2) to access the sample relay board.

■ Perform

the Preliminary procedure, page 17 but load a sample rack instead of a sample cup rack.

■ In

the Target scrolling list, select Sample Bar code reader Position (D).

■ Enter

"332" in the Target field for the Sample Bar code reader Position position (F).

D F

■ Press

Check Home (C), then press Check Position (E).

■ Close

Technical Manual RAA023

C

E

the Diagnostics menu and answer OK at the question: "Do you want to save parameters?".

SAMPLE TRAY

RAS381D - 17

Sample tray

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Go

to Services > Customer Services > Barcode.

■ Place

2

3

a 5 mL adaptor on the rack position

"2". ■ In

the Sector and Position scrolling lists, select "1" and "2" (1).

■ Press

Polling to allow continuous reading of the selected position (2).

1

■ Slightly

loosen the 2 CHC screws on the barcode reader support.

■ Adjust

the barcode reader position to center the beam on the 5 mL adaptor notch.

■ Tighten ■ Press

5 mL adaptor notch

the 2 CHC screws.

Stop (3).

■ Make sure that the beam is centered on the

rack position 1 as follows: - In the Sector and Position scrolling lists, select "1" and "1". - Press Polling and make sure that the beam is centered on the sample rack window.

RAS381D - 18

SAMPLE TRAY

sample rack window

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

4.4.

Sample tray

Sample tube detector position

The vertical centering of the beam is no more required (lightly positioned under the window) because the tube detector position is fixed from now.

■ Perform

the Preliminary procedure, page 17 but load a sample rack instead of a sample cup rack.

■ In

the Target scrolling list, select Sample Tube Detector Position (A).

■ Enter

"3860" in the Target field for the Sample Tube Detector Position position (B).

A B

■ Press

Check Home (C), then press Check Position (D).

C

D

A ■ The

middle window of the sample tray (A) must be approximately centered on the reflector.

B

The LED of the sample tube detector is lit (red light (B)) when the reflector is detected and unlit when the reflector is not detected.

■ Place

Technical Manual RAA023

a 5 mL adaptor on the rack position "2".

SAMPLE TRAY

RAS381D - 19

Sample tray

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

E ■ In

the Sector and Position scrolling lists, select "1" and "2" (E).

■ Press

Check Position (D). D

■ Turn

the potentiometer anticlockwise until the LED is unlit.

■ Then,

turn the potentiometer clockwise until the LED is lit.

■ Move

the sample tray clockwise by using the - button (E) until the LED is unlit and note the number of steps (a) displayed in the Target field for the Sample Tube Detector Position position (B).

■ Move

the sample tray anticlockwise by using the + button (F) until the LED is lit.

■ Move

the sample tray anticlockwise by using the + button (F) until the LED is unlit again and note the number of steps (b) displayed in the Target field for the Sample Tube Detector Position position (B).

■ Enter

the mean value of number of steps (a+b)/2 in the Target field for the Sample Tube Detector Position position (B) and press Check Position (D).

B C

E

D

F

■ Press Check Home (C) to move the sample

tray to its home position, then check the position again (press Check Position (D)).

RAS381D - 20

SAMPLE TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Sample tray

■ Make

sure that all types of sample tubes and cups are correctly detected as follows: - Load 6 sample racks/sample cup racks with several sample tubes and cups on the sample tray. - Go to Services > Diagnostics > Barcode Test.

A - Select the Sample Tray radio button (A) and press Check Tray (B). - At the end of the cycle, make sure that the position of sample tubes and cups on the screen corresponds to their position on the sample tray. Click in the Sector fields (C) to display the different racks. C B ■

If some sample tubes and cups are detected on physically empty positions, lightly turn the potentiometer clockwise and check the detection again (see above).

■

If some sample tubes and cups are not detected, slightly turn the potentiometer anticlockwise and check the detection again (see above).

The most sensitive positions are the rack positions "1" and "10" for each rack. Check the detection with and without sample tubes and cups on these positions.

■ Put

the barcode reader cover back.

Technical Manual RAA023

SAMPLE TRAY

RAS381D - 21

Sample tray

4.5.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Sampling in sample tray adjustment ■ Replace the

sample needle by the "Dummy sample needle". See RAS385: Arms, 6.2. "Dummy sample needle" installation, page 38.

Adjustment example Adjustment of a sampling with the sample needle in a sample cup (or tube) in internal position. a- Sample tray tab ■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Tray.

■ Load

a sample cup rack on the sample tray in sector "1", position "1" as follows: - Select the Sample radio button (A). - In the Sector and Position scrolling lists, select "1" and "1" (B). - Press Check Home (C).

A B

D

■ Move

the sample cup rack to the Internal Sampling Pos. position as follows: - In the Target scrolling list, select Internal Sampling Pos. (D). - Press Check Position (E).

F C

E

■ To

adjust the sample tray position (see Sample position, gray arrows) change the number of steps in the Target field for the Internal Sampling Pos. position (F). - Increase the number of steps to move the tray anticlockwise. - Decrease the number of steps to move the tray clockwise.

Sample position

Sample arm adjustment (b) "Internal Sample" "External Sample"

+ Sample tray adjustment (a) "Internal Sampling Pos." "External Sampling Pos." +

-

-

RAS381D - 22

SAMPLE TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Sample tray

b- Sample arm tab ■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Arms.

■ Place

the reagent arm in its wash tower as follows: - Select the sample arm Vertical radio button (1) and press Check Home (2). - Select the reagent arm Vertical radio button (A) and press Check Home (2). - Select the reagent arm Rotation radio button (B) and press Check Home (2). - In the Position scrolling list, select Wash Tower Position (C) and press Check Position (3). - Select the reagent arm Vertical radio button (A). - In the Position scrolling list, select Low Position in Wash Tower (D) and press Check Position (3).

A

1

B D C 2

3

■ Move

the sample arm to the Internal Sample position as follows: - Select the sample arm Rotation radio button (4) and press Check Home (2). - In the Position scrolling list, select Internal Sample (5). - Press Check Position (3) to move the sample arm over the sample cup rack position "2".

4

5 6 7

■ Check the centering of the "Dummy sample

needle" in the hole "1" of the sample cup rack as follows: - Select the sample arm Vertical radio button (1). - Maintain the arm with one hand, then press Motor Off (6). - Slowly push the arm down, then check the position of the "Dummy sample needle" in the sample cup rack position "1".

■ Press

Check Home (2) to move the sample arm to its vertical home position.

■ To

adjust the sample arm position (see Sample position, blue arrows) change the number of steps in the Position field for the Internal Sample position (7). - Increase the number of steps to turn the sample arm clockwise. - Decrease the number of steps to turn the sample arm anticlockwise.

Technical Manual RAA023

SAMPLE TRAY

RAS381D - 23

Sample tray

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Move

the sample arm to its rotation home position as follows: - Select the sample arm Rotation radio button (8). - Press Check Home (9).

■ Check

the position again as follows: - Press Check Position (10). - Check the centering of the "Dummy sample needle" again (see above).

8 9

10

The principle of the adjustment consists in a combination of two movements: the sample tray rotation (a) and the sample arm rotation (b). If necessary, repeat the "a" and "b" adjustments by changing each adjustment with the + and - buttons.

11 ■ Move

the sample arm to its vertical and rotation home position as follows: - Select the sample arm Vertical radio button (11) and press Check Home (9). - Select the sample arm Rotation radio button (12) and press Check Home (9).

12 9

■ Press Check Home (A) to move the sample

tray to its home position, then check the position again (press Check Position (B)). A

B

Follow the same adjustment principle for the external position described in the functional positions table. See 4.1. Functional positions to adjust, page 16. Pay attention to select the correct module concerned and to correctly set the sectors, the positions and the targets.

■ Remove ■ Put

RAS381D - 24

the "Dummy sample needle " and put the sample needle back.

the covers back.

SAMPLE TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS382F

Reaction tray

RAS382: Reaction tray

Concerns Reaction tray dismantling Reaction tray parts replacement Impacted adjustments Adjustments

Required tools Hexagonal keys Hexagonal screwdriver Flat screwdriver Phillips screwdriver OPTICAL, SEGMENT 1XXX TEST 9200787 (1229200787) TOOL, TEST SEGMENT XDA893A (1209131893) TOOL, DUMMY REAGENT NEEDLE GBM1124 (1203601124) TOOL, DUMMY SAMPLE NEEDLE GBM1125 (1203601125)

Required products None

Intervention time N/A

Frequency On request

Specific kit or consumables Cuvette segments

Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator. Local or national regulations must be applied in all the operations.

Reaction tray

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

1. Reaction tray dismantling

In order not to damage the needles during dismantling, disable the arms (vertical and rotation movements) and put them on a sample cup rack over the reagent tray as shown on the following picture.

■ Switch

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

■ Remove

the covers (see RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1): - Open the arms main cover. - Remove the loader cover, the cuvettes hatch, the connection hatch and the cuvettes cover. - Lift the mixer assembly up by pressing the red button. - Remove the optic hatch, the left arm cover, the cuvettes tray plate and the mixer plate.

■ Remove

the unload rack.

■ Remove

the load rack as follows: - Open the 2 adhesive collars and release the wires of the "rack used segment full" sensor. - Disconnect the "rack used segment full" sensor (C19) and unscrew the 6 CHC screws.

"rack used segment full" sensor

RAS382F - 2

REACTION TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Reaction tray

- Disconnect the ground wire. - Open the adhesive collar and release the wires of the "new segment available" sensor. It is not necessary to disconnect this connector because the wires are long enough to put the load rack close to the instrument.

"new segment available" sensor

- Lightly lift the load rack up to disconnect the cuvette motion motor (M32) and the cuvette motion home sensor (C37), located under the load rack. - Remove the load rack.

■ Remove

the reaction tray cover by unscrewing the 3 CHC screws and washers.

Technical Manual RAA023

REACTION TRAY

RAS382F - 3

Reaction tray

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

2. Reaction tray parts replacement 2.1.

Flap door switch replacement

To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement: see 3. Impacted adjustments, page 18.

■ First,

follow the reaction tray dismantling procedure. See 1. Reaction tray dismantling, page 2.

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws then remove the flap door switch cover.

B

■ Disconnect

the 2 flap door switch cables

(A). ■ Hold

the plate on which the screws are tightened (located in the reaction tray inside) and unscrew the 2 CHC screws (B), then remove the flap door switch. A

■ Install

the new flap door switch then fasten the 2 CHC screws.

■ Make

sure that the flap door switch works properly by hearing a characteristic "click". If not, adjust it by unscrewing/screwing the 2 CHC screws.

■ Connect

the 2 flap door switch cables.

■ Reinstall

the flap door switch cover.

■

Adjust the flap door switch cover with the 2 CHC screws so that the hatch closes properly by magnetization.

■ Reassemble

RAS382F - 4

in reverse order.

REACTION TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

2.2.

Reaction tray

NTC replacement

To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement: see 3. Impacted adjustments, page 18.

■ First,

follow the reaction tray dismantling procedure. See 1. Reaction tray dismantling, page 2.

■ Disconnect

the flap door switch (A). A

■ Unscrew

the 7 CHC screws then remove the upper case.

Make sure that the holder disk is correctly positioned to remove the upper case without damaging the NTC.

NTC

Holder disk

Technical Manual RAA023

REACTION TRAY

RAS382F - 5

Reaction tray

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Unscrew

the CHC screw then remove the NTC from the upper case notch.

■ Remove

the NTC black support.

■ Remove

the rear plate by unscrewing the 8 CHC screws.

■ Disconnect

the NTC connector.

■ Go to Services > Diagnostics > Heating >

Reaction Heating. ■ In

the NTC Impedance field, enter the values written on the new NTC cable sticker.

RAS382F - 6

REACTION TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Reassemble

Reaction tray

in reverse order.

When reinstalling the NTC on the upper case, ensure that only the blue part of the cable is in the upper case notch.

NTC cable

Upper case notch

2.3.

Motor replacement

To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement: see 3. Impacted adjustments, page 18.

■ First, ■

follow the reaction tray dismantling procedure. See 1. Reaction tray dismantling, page 2.

Unscrew the 7 CHC screws, disconnect the flap door switch and unscrew the NTC to remove the upper case. See 2.2. NTC replacement, page 5.

■ Unscrew

the ground wire and disconnect the motor connector.

Technical Manual RAA023

REACTION TRAY

RAS382F - 7

Reaction tray

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws, then remove the motor.

■ Replace

the motor, fasten the 2 CHC screws and reconnect the motor connector.

■ Make

sure that there is no play between the reaction tray crown wheel and the motor pinion but do not over-tighten the motor. If necessary, adjust the motor position by unscrewing the 2 CHC screws.

■ Reassemble

2.4.

in reverse order.

Rollers replacement

To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement: see 3. Impacted adjustments, page 18.

2.4.1. Roller adjusting assy replacement ■ First, ■

follow the reaction tray dismantling procedure. See 1. Reaction tray dismantling, page 2.

Unscrew the 7 CHC screws, disconnect the flap door switch and unscrew the NTC to remove the upper case. See 2.2. NTC replacement, page 5.

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws of the roller adjusting assy and remove it.

RAS382F - 8

REACTION TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Reaction tray

■ Install

the new roller adjusting assy. The roller must touch the crown wheel.

■ Ensure that the crown wheel turns correctly.

Adjust the pressure using the adjusting screw.

■ Reassemble

in reverse order.

2.4.2. Lateral rollers replacement ■ First, ■

follow the reaction tray dismantling procedure. See 1. Reaction tray dismantling, page 2.

Unscrew the 7 CHC screws, disconnect the flap door switch and unscrew the NTC to remove the upper case. See 2.2. NTC replacement, page 5.

■ On the lateral roller to be replaced, unscrew

the 2 CHC screws of the lateral roller support and remove it.

■ Install

the new lateral roller. The screws must be placed alongside the crown wheel.

■ Reassemble

Technical Manual RAA023

in reverse order.

REACTION TRAY

RAS382F - 9

Reaction tray

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

2.4.3. Upper rollers replacement ■ First, ■

follow the reaction tray dismantling procedure. See 1. Reaction tray dismantling, page 2.

Unscrew the 7 CHC screws, disconnect the flap door switch and unscrew the NTC to remove the upper case. See 2.2. NTC replacement, page 5.

2.4.3.1. General procedure

If your instrument is equipped with an old model of optical bench (before "XDA829C"), please refer to the specific procedure: 2.4.3.2. Specific procedure ABX Pentra 400 with an old model of optical bench (before "XDA829C"), page 12.

■

Follow the optical bench dismantling procedure until you removed the optical bench. See RAS383: Optical bench, 1. Optical bench dismantling, page 2.

■ Unscrew

the 6 CHC screws to remove the holder disk.

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws of the upper roller support and remove it.

RAS382F - 10

REACTION TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Reaction tray

■ Unscrew

the CHC screw of the upper roller support then remove the roller from the support.

■ Install ■

the new roller on the upper roller support.

Install the upper roller support on the crown wheel. Ensure that there is a space of 0.2 mm between the roller and the crown wheel as follows: Stick a piece of adhesive tape on the crown wheel. Adjust the space between the roller and the crown wheel using the roller axis. The roller must turn when it is on the adhesive tape and must be fixed when it is on the crown wheel. Roller axis

0.2 mm

Adhesive tape ■ Leave

the adhesive tape on the crown wheel and check the position of the 2 other upper rollers.

■ Remove

the adhesive tape.

■ Reassemble

Technical Manual RAA023

in reverse order.

REACTION TRAY

RAS382F - 11

Reaction tray

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

2.4.3.2. Specific procedure ABX Pentra 400 with an old model of optical bench (before "XDA829C") This procedure is designed for ABX Pentra 400 equipped with an old model of optical bench (before "XDA829C") i.e. ABX Pentra 400 with an instrument serial number lower than 3195.

■ Unscrew

the 6 CHC screws to remove the holder disk.

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws of the upper roller support and remove it.

■ Unscrew

the CHC screw of the upper roller support then remove the roller from the support.

RAS382F - 12

REACTION TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Install

Reaction tray

the new roller on the upper roller support.

■ Install

the upper roller support on the crown wheel. Ensure that there is a space of 0.2 mm between the roller and the crown wheel as follows: Stick a piece of adhesive tape on the crown wheel. Adjust the space between the roller and the crown wheel using the roller axis. The roller must turn when it is on the adhesive holder and must be fixed when it is on the crown wheel. Roller axis

0.2 mm

Adhesive tape ■ Leave

the adhesive tape on the crown wheel and check the position of the 2 other upper rollers.

■ Remove

the adhesive tape.

■ Reassemble

in reverse order.

2.4.4. Down rollers replacement ■ First, ■

follow the reaction tray dismantling procedure. See 1. Reaction tray dismantling, page 2.

Unscrew the 7 CHC screws, disconnect the flap door switch and unscrew the NTC to remove the upper case. See 2.2. NTC replacement, page 5.

■ Follow

the 2.4.3. Upper rollers replacement, page 10 procedure until you removed the holder disk.

2.4.4.1. General procedure

If your instrument is equipped with an old model of optical bench (before "XDA829C"), please refer to the specific procedure: 2.4.4.2. Specific procedure ABX Pentra 400 with an old model of optical bench (before "XDA829C"), page 15.

Technical Manual RAA023

REACTION TRAY

RAS382F - 13

Reaction tray

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Remove

the crown wheel as follows: - Unscrew the 2 external CHC screws of each upper roller, mark them in order not to invert them when reassembling and remove them.

- Unscrew the 2 CHC screws of the lateral roller support "1" and remove it. - Unscrew one of the 2 CHC screws of the roller adjusting assy "2" and loosen the second CHC screw to turn the support. - Now, remove the crown wheel.

2

1

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws of the down roller to be replaced and remove it.

■ Reassemble

RAS382F - 14

in reverse order.

REACTION TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Reaction tray

2.4.4.2. Specific procedure ABX Pentra 400 with an old model of optical bench (before "XDA829C") This procedure is designed for ABX Pentra 400 equipped with an old model of optical bench (before "XDA829C") i.e. ABX Pentra 400 with an instrument serial number lower than 3195.

■ Remove

the crown wheel as follows: - Unscrew the 2 external CHC screws of each upper roller, mark them in order not to invert them when reassembling and remove them.

- Unscrew the 2 CHC screws of the lateral roller support "1" and remove it. - Unscrew one of the 2 CHC screws of the roller adjusting assy "2" and loosen the second CHC screw to turn the support. - Now, remove the crown wheel.

Technical Manual RAA023

REACTION TRAY

2

1

RAS382F - 15

Reaction tray

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws of the down roller to be replaced and remove it.

■ Reassemble

2.5.

in reverse order.

Home sensor replacement

To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement: see 3. Impacted adjustments, page 18.

■ First, ■

follow the reaction tray dismantling procedure. See 1. Reaction tray dismantling, page 2.

Unscrew the 7 CHC screws, disconnect the flap door switch and unscrew the NTC to remove the upper case. See 2.2. NTC replacement, page 5.

■ Follow

the 2.4.3. Upper rollers replacement, page 10 procedure until you removed the holder disk.

■ Follow

the 2.4.4. Down rollers replacement, page 13 procedure to remove the crown wheel.

■ Remove

the rear plate by unscrewing the 8 CHC screws.

RAS382F - 16

REACTION TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Disconnect

Reaction tray

the home sensor connector.

■ Loosen

the 3 CHC screws supporting the lower box.

■ Unscrew

the CHC screw and remove the home sensor.

■ Cut

one ear of the new home sensor and twist the cables.

■ Install

the new home sensor and center it in the notch.

■ Reassemble

in reverse order.

When reinstalling the crown wheel, ensure that the home sensor does not touch the crown wheel flag.

■ Check

Technical Manual RAA023

all the reaction tray position adjustments. See 4. Adjustments, page 19.

REACTION TRAY

RAS382F - 17

Reaction tray

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

3. Impacted adjustments

Impacted adjustments

Replaced spare parts Flap door switch

NTC

Home sensor

Motor

Rollers Dismantling

Reaction Tray Offset

X

X

Mixing Position

X

X

Reagent Arm Position

X

X

Sample Arm Position

X

X

Automatic Loading

X

X

Handling Position

X

X

Reaction Tray cover (for needles)

X

X

X

X

X

X

Sample arm rotation Cuvette Position

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Reagent arm rotation Cuvette Position Mixer Cuvette Position Cuvette changer Load in Reaction Tray Position Heating menu Reaction Heating: NTC Impedance

RAS382F - 18

X

REACTION TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Reaction tray

4. Adjustments

Recommendations for use: When you adjust a position of the reaction tray by changing the number of steps for this position, please note that a change of 53 steps is approximately equal to a move of 1 mm linear.

4.1.

Functional positions to adjust

The following table lists the functional positions to adjust. Those positions are reached by three different types of adjustment: - the combination of two movements to obtain a centering or - performing an automatic "AUTO" adjustment or - performing a manual "MAN" adjustment The table also indicates the tool required to perform those adjustments. Modules Reaction Tray Sector Position

Target

Type

Tool

Optical Bench Light Beam 1

Offset

AUTO

Mixer Cuvette Position

1

2

Mixing Position

1

1

Reagent Arm Position

Reagent arm rotation Cuvette Position Sample arm rotation

+ Cuvette Position

1

2

Sample Arm Position

1

1

Automatic Loading

1

1

Handling Position

Cuvette changer Vertical: Motor Off; Horizontal: Load in Reaction Tray Position Reaction tray

Technical Manual RAA023

REACTION TRAY

MAN

RAS382F - 19

Reaction tray

4.2.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Preliminary procedure

Make sure that all the assemblies are at their home position before starting an adjustment. Make sure that the arms are in the upper position before moving a tray.

■ Connect ■ Go

the power supply cable and switch the instrument on.

to Services > Diagnostics > Tray.

■ Before

starting the position adjustments, select the position of the adjustment tool or cuvette segment on the reaction tray:

A C - Select the Reaction radio button (A). - Press Check Home (B). - In the Sector scrolling list, select "1" (C). B

RAS382F - 20

REACTION TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

4.3.

Reaction tray

Home position

This position adjustment is performed with an adjustment tool: OPTICAL, SEGMENT 1XXX TEST 9200787 (1229200787).

4.3.1. Adjustment tool installation ■ First,

follow the Preliminary procedure, page 20.

■ Manually

load the adjustment tool in the reaction tray in position "1" as follows:

- In the Target scrolling list, select Handling Position (D). - Press Check Position (E). The position "1" of the reaction tray moves to the Handling Position position. - Manually load the tool in the reaction tray.

D

E

Make sure that the tool is loaded properly into the reaction tray. It is necessary to press the tool completely down into the reaction tray.

4.3.2. Home position adjustment ■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Spectro. A B

■ Click

the Spectro Measure Adjustment tab (A). The number of steps of the reaction tray home offset is indicated in the Current offset field (B).

■ Press

C

Measure (C).

The instrument evaluates the quality of the current ajdustment. If the current adjustment is not satisfactory, a new offset is determined and the instrument carries out a second measure with this new offset. If this new offset is not satisfactory, a new offset is again determined and the instrument carries out a third measure.

Technical Manual RAA023

REACTION TRAY

RAS382F - 21

Reaction tray

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ If

the adjustment is not correct, press Cancel (F). The optical density curve and the calculated offset are erased. Run measure cycles until the adjustment is correct.

■ If

G

D

The calculated offset value is displayed in the Calculated offset field (D): - The value is displayed in green if it is within range (optical density curve in green (G)). - The value is displayed in red if it is out of range (optical density curve in red (G)). E

F

the adjustment is correct, press OK (E).

F

The offset value is transferred in the Offset field for the reaction tray home position (F).

■ Leave ■ If

RAS382F - 22

the adjustment tool in the reaction tray to adjust the other positions. the home position is adjusted, the other positions have to be adjusted too.

REACTION TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

4.4.

Reaction tray

Mixing Position

This position adjustment is performed with an adjustment tool: OPTICAL, SEGMENT 1XXX TEST 9200787 (1229200787). The position "2" of the adjustment tool will be used.

1

■ First,

2

follow the Preliminary procedure, page 20.

Make sure that the mixer assembly is in the upper position.

■

If the previous adjustment has been carried out, the adjustment tool is loaded in the reaction tray in position "1". If not, manually load it. See 4.3.1. Adjustment tool installation, page 21.

■ In

the Position scrolling list, select "2" (A).

A

■ In

the Target scrolling list, select Mixing Position (B).

B

■ Press

Check Position (C). The position "1" of the reaction tray moves to the Mixing Position position.

Technical Manual RAA023

REACTION TRAY

C

RAS382F - 23

Reaction tray

■ Go

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

to Services > Diagnostics > Arms.

■ Select

1

the Mixer radio button (1).

■ In the Position scrolling list, select Cuvette

2

Position (2). ■ Press

Check Position (3). The mixer moves over the reaction tray and the mixing paddle turns.

3

■ Wait

for the mixing paddle to stop turning, then manually pull the mixer down.

■ Check

the centering of the paddle on the mobile part of the tool position "2".

■ Manually

pull the mixer up.

reaction tray adjustment

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Tray.

■ Adjust the position by changing the number

of steps in the Target field for the Mixing Position position (D). - Increase the number of steps to turn the reaction tray clockwise. - Decrease the number of steps to move the reaction tray anticlockwise.

RAS382F - 24

REACTION TRAY

D

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Reaction tray

■ Adjust

the mixer positioning center as follows: - Loosen the 2 CHC screws of the mixer positioning center. - Move the mixer positioning center until the mixer paddle is centered on the mobile part of the tool position "2". - Fasten the 2 CHC screws of the mixer positioning center.

■ Move

the reaction tray to its home position (press Check Home (E)) then check the position again (press Check Position then manually pull the mixer down). E

1

■ Move

the mixer to its home position: - Go to Services > Diagnostics > Arms. - Select the Mixer radio button (1). - Press Check Home (4). 4

Leave the adjustment tool in the reaction tray to adjust the other positions.

Technical Manual RAA023

REACTION TRAY

RAS382F - 25

Reaction tray

4.5.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Arms position ■ Replace

the reagent and sample needles respectively by the "Dummy reagent needle" (see RAS385: Arms, 5.2. "Dummy reagent needle" installation, page 25) and the "Dummy sample needle" (see RAS385: Arms, 6.2. "Dummy sample needle" installation, page 38).

4.5.1. Reagent Arm Position ■ First,

follow the Preliminary procedure, page 20.

Make sure that the sample arm is in its vertical home position before moving the reagent arm.

If the previous adjustment has been carried out, the adjustment tool is loaded in the reaction tray in position "1". If not, manually load it. See 4.3.1. Adjustment tool installation, page 21. The position "1" of the adjustment tool will be used.

1

■ In

2

the Position scrolling list, select "1" (A).

A

■ In

the Target scrolling list, select Reagent Arm Position (B).

B

■ Press

Check Position (C). The position "1" of the reaction tray moves to the Reagent Arm Position position.

RAS382F - 26

REACTION TRAY

C

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Reaction tray

■ Move

the sample arm to its vertical home position as follows: - Go to Services > Diagnostics > Arms. - Select the sample arm Vertical radio button (1) and press Check Home (2).

3

4

7

■ Move

the reagent arm to its vertical and rotation home position as follows: - Select the reagent arm Vertical radio button (3) and press Check Home (2). - Select the reagent arm Rotation radio button (4). - In the Position scrolling list, select Cuvette Position (5). - Press Check Position (6).

1

5 2

6

The value of the rotation home offset (7) must not be modified. Adjust the rotation home position with the reagent arm mechanical adjustment described below.

3 ■ Check the centering of the "Dummy reagent

needle" into the hole of the tool position "1" as follows: - Select the reagent arm Vertical radio button (3). - Press Motor Off (8). 8

- Slowly push the arm down, then check the position of the "Dummy reagent needle" into the hole of the tool position "1". arm adjustment (RAS385)

reaction tray adjustment (RAS382)

Technical Manual RAA023

REACTION TRAY

RAS382F - 27

Reaction tray

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Loosen

the CHC screw on the reagent arm, then turn the reagent arm to center the "Dummy reagent needle" into the hole of the tool position "1".

■ Tighten

■ Press

the screw.

Check Home (2).

■ Check

the position again as follows: - Select the reagent arm Rotation radio button (4) and press Check Home (2). - Check the centering of the "Dummy reagent needle" again (see above).

4

2

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Tray.

■ Adjust the position by changing the number

of steps in the Target field for the Reagent Arm Position position (D). - Increase the number of steps to turn the reaction tray clockwise. - Decrease the number of steps to move the reaction tray anticlockwise.

D E

■ Move

the reaction tray to its home position (press Check Home (E)) then check the position again with the reagent needle (see above).

3 ■ Move

the reagent arm to its home position (vertical then rotation): - Go to Services > Diagnostics > Arms. - Select the reagent arm Vertical radio button (3) and press Check Home (2). - Select the reagent arm Rotation radio button (4) and press Check Home (2).

RAS382F - 28

4

2

REACTION TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Reaction tray

4.5.2. Sample Arm Position ■ First,

follow the Preliminary procedure, page 20.

This position corresponds to the home position. Therefore, the number of steps in the Target scrolling list must be "0". This is fixed and must not be changed. Follow this procedure to check the position only.

Make sure that the reagent arm is in its wash position (rotation and vertical) before moving the sample arm.

If the previous adjustment has been carried out, the adjustment tool is loaded in the reaction tray in position "1". If not, manually load it. See 4.3.1. Adjustment tool installation, page 21. The position "2" of the adjustment tool will be used.

1

■ In

2

the Position scrolling list, select "2" (A).

A

■ In

the Target scrolling list, select Sample Arm Position (B).

B

■ Press

Check Position (C). The position "1" of the reaction tray moves to the Sample Arm Position position.

Technical Manual RAA023

REACTION TRAY

C

RAS382F - 29

Reaction tray

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

1

■ Move the sample arm over the reaction tray

as follows: - Go to Services > Diagnostics > Arms. - Select the sample arm Vertical radio button (1) and press Check Home (2). - Select the sample arm Rotation radio button (3). - In the Position scrolling list, select Cuvette Position (4). - Press Check Position (5).

3 2

5

4 6

The value of the rotation home offset (6) must not be modified. Adjust the rotation home position with the sample arm mechanical adjustment described below.

1 ■ Check the centering of the "Dummy sample

needle" on the mobile part of the tool position "2" as follows: - Select the sample arm Vertical radio button (1). - Press Motor Off (7). 7

- Slowly push the arm down, then check the position of the "Dummy sample needle" on the mobile part of the tool position "2". arm adjustment (RAS385)

RAS382F - 30

REACTION TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Reaction tray

■ Loosen

the CHC screw on the sample arm, then turn the sample arm to center the "Dummy sample needle" on the mobile part of the tool position "2".

■ Tighten

■ Press

the screw.

Check Home (2).

■ Check

1

■ Move

3

the position again as follows: - Select the sample arm Rotation radio button (3) and press Check Home (2). - Check the centering of the "Dummy sample needle" again (see above). the sample arm to its home position (vertical then rotation) as follows: - Select the sample arm Vertical radio button (1) and press Check Home (2). - Select the sample arm Rotation radio button (3) and press Check Home (2).

2

■ Remove

the tool from the reaction tray as follows: - Go to Services > Diagnostics > Tray. - In the Sector scrolling list and in the Position scrolling list, select "1" and "1" (A). - In the Target scrolling list, select Handling Position (B). - Press Check Position (C). - Remove the tool from the reaction tray.

4.6.

A B

C

Cuvette changer ■ First,

install the "Test segment Pentra 400". See RAS384: Cuvette changer, 4.2. "Test segment Pentra 400" installation, page 32.

■ Perform

the reaction tray adjustment. See RAS384: Cuvette changer, 4.4. Adjustment of reaction tray "Automatic Loading" position, page 34.

Technical Manual RAA023

REACTION TRAY

RAS382F - 31

Reaction tray

4.7.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Handling Position ■ First,

follow the 4.2. Preliminary procedure, page 20.

■ Manually

load a cuvette segment in the reaction tray in position "1" as follows: - In the Target scrolling list, select Handling Position (A). - Press Check Position (B). The position "1" of the reaction tray moves to the Handling Position position. - Manually load the cuvette segment in the reaction tray.

A

B

■ Check the centering of the cuvette segment

in front of the upper case opening.

■ Adjust the position by changing the number

of steps in the Target field for the Handling Position position (C). - Decrease the number of steps to move the reaction tray anticlockwise. - Increase the number of steps to move the reaction clockwise. ■ Move

the reaction tray to its home position (press Check Home (D)) then check the position again (press Check Position).

■ Remove

the cuvette segment from the reaction tray as follows: - In the Sector scrolling list and in the Position scrolling list, select "1" and "1" (E). - In the Target scrolling list, select Handling Position (A). - Press Check Position (B). - Remove the cuvette segment from the reaction tray.

RAS382F - 32

REACTION TRAY

E A

D

B

C

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

4.8.

Reaction tray

Hole position check ■ Reinstall

the reaction tray cover by slightly turning the 3 CHC screws and washers.

■ Reconnect

the flap door switch.

4.8.1. Mixer hole position check ■ Lift

the mixer up.

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Arms.

■ Select ■ Press

1

the Mixer radio button (1).

Check Home (2)

3

■ In

the Position scrolling list, select Above Reaction Tray (3).

■ Press

Check Position (4): The mixer moves over the reaction tray and the mixing paddle turns. Wait for the mixing paddle to stop turning, then manually pull the mixer down.

2

4

■ Check

the mixer hole position in order to center it according to the mixer paddle. If not, adjust the position by unscrewing/ screwing the CHC screw.

■ Manually

pull the mixer up.

1

■ Move

the mixer to its home position: - Select the Mixer radio button (1). - Press Check Home (2). 2

Technical Manual RAA023

REACTION TRAY

RAS382F - 33

Reaction tray

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

4.8.2. Reagent hole position check

Make sure that the sample arm is in its vertical home position before moving the reagent arm.

■ Move the reagent arm over the reaction tray

as follows: - Go to Services > Diagnostics > Arms. - Select the reagent arm Vertical radio button (1) and press Check Home (2). - Select the reagent arm Rotation radio button (3) and press Check Home (2). This position corresponds to the Cuvette Position position. - Select the reagent arm Vertical radio button (1). - Press Motor Off (4).

■ Slowly

1

3 4

2

pull the reagent arm down.

■ Check

the reagent hole position in order to center it according to the "Dummy reagent needle". If not adjust the position by unscrewing/screwing the CHC screw.

1 ■ Move

the reagent arm to its home position (vertical then rotation) as follows: - Select the reagent arm Vertical radio button (1) and press Check Home (2). - Select the reagent arm Rotation radio button (3) and press Check Home (2).

3 2

RAS382F - 34

REACTION TRAY

4

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Reaction tray

4.8.3. Sample hole position check

Make sure that the reagent arm is in its wash position (rotation and vertical) before moving the sample arm.

■ Move the sample arm over the reaction tray

as follows: - Go to Services > Diagnostics > Arms. - Select the sample arm Vertical radio button (1) and press Check Home (2). - Select the sample arm Rotation radio button (3) and press Check Home (2). This position corresponds to the Cuvette Position position. - Select the sample arm Vertical radio button (1). - Press Motor Off (4).

■ Slowly

1

3 4

2

pull the sample arm down.

■ Check

the sample hole position in order to center it according to the "Dummy sample needle". If not adjust the position by unscrewing/screwing the CHC screw.

1 ■ Move

the sample arm to its home position (vertical then rotation) as follows: - Select the sample arm Vertical radio button (1) and press Check Home (2). - Select the sample arm Rotation radio button (3) and press Check Home (2).

3 2

■

Remove the "Dummy reagent needle" and the "Dummy sample needle" and put the reagent and sample needles back.

Technical Manual RAA023

REACTION TRAY

RAS382F - 35

Reaction tray

4.9.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Automatic loading position

This adjustment is described during the cuvette changer adjustment. See RAS384: Cuvette changer, 4.4. Adjustment of reaction tray "Automatic Loading" position, page 34.

RAS382F - 36

REACTION TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS548B

Fan and heater replacement

RAS548: Fan and heater replacement

Concerns Reaction tray lower box dismantling Fan replacement Heater replacement Impacted adjustments Check up after intervention

Required tools Hexagonal keys Hexagonal screwdriver Flat screwdriver Phillips screwdriver Pliers

Required products None

Intervention time N/A

Frequency On request

Specific kit or consumables None

Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator. Local or national regulations must be applied in all the operations.

Fan and heater replacement

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

1. Reaction tray lower box dismantling

In order not to damage the needles during dismantling, disable the arms (vertical and rotation movements) and put them on a sample cup rack over the reagent tray as shown on the following picture.

■ Switch ■ Lift ■

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

up the arms main cover and the mixer.

Remove the loader cover, the cuvettes hatch, the connection hatch, the cuvettes cover, the optic hatch, the left arm cover, the cuvettes tray plate and the mixer plate. See RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1.

■ Remove

the rear plate by unscrewing the 8 CHC screws.

Heater connector

Fan connector

■ From

the instrument rear, disconnect the heater connector and the fan connector.

RAS548B - 2

REACTION TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Fan and heater replacement

On the lower box input (left side):

■ Remove

the 2 auto-grip strips maintaining the tubing cover and the casing.

■ Slide

the casing to reach the tubing.

Collar

■ Clamp

the tubing, then remove the collar using a flat screwdriver.

■ Disconnect

the input tubing from the lower

box.

On the lower box output (right side):

■ Unscrew

the CHC screw maintaining the braided ground wire.

■ Remove

the auto-grip strip maintaining the tubing cover.

■ Slide

the tubing cover to reach the tubing.

Technical Manual RAA023

REACTION TRAY

RAS548B - 3

Fan and heater replacement

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Collar

■ Clamp

the tubing, then remove the collar using a flat screwdriver.

■ Disconnect

the tubing from the lower box.

■ Remove the left condensate tubing from the

adhesive holder, then disconnect it from the "T" fitting.

■ Unscrew the 4 CHC screws maintaining the

lower box.

■ Remove

delicately the lower box.

■ Disconnect

RAS548B - 4

the condensate tubing from the lower box angle fitting.

REACTION TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Fan and heater replacement

2. Fan replacement ■ First,

perform the lower box dismantling. See 1. Reaction tray lower box dismantling, page 2.

■ Cut

the Ty-Rap™ maintaining the fan cable and the heater cable.

■ Unscrew

the 4 CHC screws then remove the thermic bulkhead and the fan.

■ Reassemble

Technical Manual RAA023

in reverse order.

REACTION TRAY

RAS548B - 5

Fan and heater replacement

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Be very careful when positioning the fan: ■ 2 arrows, located on the fan side, indicate the fan rotation direction and the air direction (A). The fan must breathe toward the heater (B). ■ Pay attention to place the fan cable in front of the cable notch (C). A

Air direction (toward the heater)

Fan rotation direction

B

Air direction (toward the heater)

C

RAS548B - 6

Lower box notch

Fan cable

REACTION TRAY

Cable notch

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Fan and heater replacement

■ The

thermic bulkhead notch must be placed in front of the spectrophotometer flat cable notch (A). ■ When connecting the cooling unit tubings on the lower box, pay attention to connect the Input and Output correctly (B). A Notch

B

Input

Output

Before fastening the 4 CHC screws maintaining the lower box, ensure that the reaction tray home sensor cable, the spectrophotometer flat cable, the fan cable and the heater cable are well positioned in their respective notches. Spectrophotometer flat cable notch Fan and heater notch

Reaction tray home sensor cable notch

Technical Manual RAA023

REACTION TRAY

RAS548B - 7

Fan and heater replacement

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

3. Heater replacement ■

First, perform the lower box dismantling procedure. See 1. Reaction tray lower box dismantling, page 2.

■ Cut

the Ty-Rap™ maintaining the fan cable and the heater cable.

■ Unscrew

the 4 CHC screws then remove the thermic bulkhead and the fan.

RAS548B - 8

REACTION TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Fan and heater replacement

■ Unscrew the 4 crosspieces then remove the

heater. ■ Reassemble

in reverse order.

Be careful when positioning the heater. The heater metallic flaps must be on top.

Be very careful when positioning the fan: ■ 2 arrows, located on the fan side, indicate the fan rotation direction and the air direction (A). The fan must breathe toward the heater (B). ■ Pay attention to place the fan cable in front of the cable notch (C). A

Air direction (toward the heater)

Technical Manual RAA023

REACTION TRAY

Fan rotation direction

RAS548B - 9

Fan and heater replacement

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

B

Air direction (toward the heater)

C

Lower box notch

Fan cable

Cable notch

■ The

thermic bulkhead notch must be placed in front of the spectrophotometer flat cable notch (A). ■ When connecting the cooling unit tubings on the lower box, pay attention to connect the Input and Output correctly (B). A Notch

RAS548B - 10

REACTION TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Fan and heater replacement

B

Input

Output

Before fastening the 4 CHC screws maintaining the lower box, ensure that the reaction tray home sensor cable, the spectrophotometer flat cable, the fan cable and the heater cable are well positioned in their respective notches. Spectrophotometer flat cable notch Fan and heater notch

Reaction tray home sensor cable notch

Technical Manual RAA023

REACTION TRAY

RAS548B - 11

Fan and heater replacement

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

4. Impacted adjustments None.

5. Check up after intervention ■ Connect

5.1.

the power supply cable and switch the instrument on.

Temperature check

■ Go

to Services > Customer Services > Analyser.

■ In

the Temperatures area, check the reaction tray temperature and the reagent tray temperature. - Reaction tray: 37°C (± 0.25°C) - Reagent tray: 4-10°C

5.2.

Glycol circuit check ■ On

RAS548B - 12

the lower box, make sure that there is no leak at the level of Input and Output fittings.

REACTION TRAY

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS383F

Optical bench

RAS383: Optical bench

Concerns Optical bench dismantling Optical bench mirror and lenses cleaning and replacement Impacted adjustments Optical bench check

Required tools Hexagonal keys Hexagonal screwdriver Open-end wrench Flat screwdriver Phillips screwdriver KIT, ANTISTATIC KIT MZZ015A (1207921015) TOOL, OPT. BENCH CLEANING KIT XEA945BS (1209159945)

Required products Dusting spray

Intervention time N/A

Frequency On request

Specific kit or consumables Cuvette segments

Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator. Local or national regulations must be applied in all the operations.

Optical bench

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

1. Optical bench dismantling

As the electronic devices are very sensitive to electrostatic discharges (ESD), the use of an antistatic kit is mandatory during boards handling/dismantling.

1.1.

Dismantling

In order not to damage the needles during dismantling, disable the arms (vertical and rotation movements) and put them on a sample cup rack over the reagent tray as shown on the following picture.

■ Switch

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

■ Remove

the covers (see RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1): - Open the arms main cover. - Remove the loader cover, the cuvettes hatch, the connection hatch and the cuvettes cover. - Lift the mixer assembly up by pressing the red button. - Remove the optic hatch, the left arm cover, the cuvettes tray plate and the mixer plate. - Remove the recuperation jar.

■

Follow the reaction tray dismantling procedure. See RAS382: Reaction tray, 1. Reaction tray dismantling, page 2.

1.1.1. General procedure

If your instrument is equipped with an old model of optical bench (before "XDA829C"), please refer to the specific procedure: 1.1.2. Specific procedure ABX Pentra 400 with an old model of optical bench (before "XDA829C"), page 6.

RAS383F - 2

OPTICAL BENCH

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Optical bench

■ Unscrew the 7 CHC screws, disconnect the

A

flap door switch (A) and unscrew the NTC to remove the upper case.

■ Remove

the spectrophotometer cover as follows: - Remove the antistatic bruch by unscrewing the CHC screw and washer (A), then unscrew the crosspiece (use an openend wrench). - Unscrew the 4 CHC screws to remove the spectrophotometer cover.

A

B

■ Release

the spectrophotometer from the optical bench as follows: - Unscrew the flange (A) of the optical bench. - Unscrew the 2 CHC screws and washers (B) of the spectrophotometer.

A

B

Technical Manual RAA023

OPTICAL BENCH

RAS383F - 3

Optical bench

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

2 - Release the spectrophotometer gun from the optical bench. 1

At this stage of the procedure, you can dismantle the spectrophotometer as well as the acquisition board although this is not necessary to finish the optical bench dismantling.

■ Dismantle

the spectrophotometer as follows: - Remove the ground wires from the acquisition board by unscrewing the CHC screw (A). Take care not to lose the ground wires. - Unplug the flat cable (B).

A

D

■ Remove

the acquisition board from the spectrophotometer as follows: - Unscrew the two CHC screws of the acquisition board (C). - Slowly disconnect the acquisition board (D) to remove it. - Remove the aluminium insulating plate.

RAS383F - 4

OPTICAL BENCH

C

B

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Optical bench

■ Make

a mark on the sample wash tower support (to align the sample wash tower when reassembling), then unscrew the 2 CHC screws to remove the sample wash tower.

■ Disconnect

the lamp supply cable and loosen the 2 CHC screws. Turn the light lock and remove the lamp.

Warning! Hot surface Risk of personal injury due to hot surfaces within the instrument. Wait for the lamp to cool down before proceeding.

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws to remove the lamp supply cable support.

Technical Manual RAA023

OPTICAL BENCH

RAS383F - 5

Optical bench

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Unscrew

the 2 upper CHC screws and loosen the 2 bottom CHC screws to remove the fan plate.

■ Unscrew

the 4 CHC screws of the optical bench: 2 CHC M4x45 screws on the lamp side and 2 CHC M4x25 screws on the spectrophotometer side.

■ Remove

the optical bench.

1.1.2. Specific procedure ABX Pentra 400 with an old model of optical bench (before "XDA829C") This procedure is designed for ABX Pentra 400 equipped with an old model of optical bench (before "XDA829C") i.e. ABX Pentra 400 with an instrument serial number lower than 3195.

■ Unscrew the 7 CHC screws, disconnect the

flap door switch (A) and unscrew the NTC to remove the upper case.

RAS383F - 6

OPTICAL BENCH

A

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Optical bench

■ Unscrew

the 6 CHC screws to remove the holder disk.

■ Remove

the crown wheel as follows: - Unscrew the 2 external CHC screws of each upper roller, mark them in order not to invert them when reassembling and remove them.

- Unscrew the 2 CHC screws of the lateral roller support "1" and remove it. - Unscrew one of the 2 CHC screws of the roller adjusting assy "2" and loosen the second CHC screw to turn the support. - Now, remove the crown wheel.

Technical Manual RAA023

OPTICAL BENCH

2

1

RAS383F - 7

Optical bench

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Remove

the spectrophotometer cover as follows: - Remove the antistatic brush by unscrewing the CHC screw and washer (A), then unscrew the crosspiece (use an openend wrench). - Unscrew the 4 CHC screws to remove the spectrophotometer cover.

A

■ Remove

the ground wires by unscrewing the CHC screw from the acquisition board as well as the CHC screw and washer from the spectrophotometer.

RAS383F - 8

OPTICAL BENCH

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Optical bench

The acquisition board dismantling procedure is described below but is not necessary to dismantle the optical bench.

■ Remove

the acquisition board as follows: - Unplug the flat cable and unscrew the 2 CHC screws.

- Slowly disconnect the acquisition board to remove it. - Remove the aluminium insulating plate.

Technical Manual RAA023

OPTICAL BENCH

RAS383F - 9

Optical bench

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Make

a mark on the sample wash tower support (to align the sample wash tower when reassembling), then unscrew the 2 CHC screws to remove the sample wash tower.

■ Disconnect

the lamp supply cable and loosen the 2 CHC screws. Turn the light lock and remove the lamp.

Warning! Hot surface Risk of personal injury due to hot surfaces within the instrument. Wait for the lamp to cool down before proceeding.

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws to remove the lamp supply cable support.

■ Unscrew

the 2 upper CHC screws and loosen the 2 bottom CHC screws to remove the fan plate.

RAS383F - 10

OPTICAL BENCH

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Optical bench

■ Unscrew

the 5 CHC screws to remove the optical bench.

■ Slightly

loosen the little screw.

■ Then, separate the spectrophotometer from

the optical bench.

Technical Manual RAA023

OPTICAL BENCH

RAS383F - 11

Optical bench

1.2.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Reassembly

1.2.1. General procedure

If your instrument is equipped with an old model of optical bench (before "XDA829C"), please refer to the specific procedure: 1.2.2. Specific procedure ABX Pentra 400 with an old model of optical bench (before "XDA829C"), page 14.

■ Put

the optical bench in place. Two dog points located under the optical bench ensure that you put it in the correct position.

■ Reassemble

the spectrophotometer as well as the acquisition board in reverse order. Do not forget to put the ground wires back.

■ Put

the spectrophotometer in place. The spectrophotometer gun must reach the end stop.

A

■ Tighten

the 2 CHC screws and washers (A) of the spectrophotometer to hold it in place.

A

■ Tighten

the 4 CHC screws of the optical bench to hold it in place: 2 CHC M4x45 screws on the lamp side and 2 CHC M4x25 screws on the spectrophotometer side.

RAS383F - 12

OPTICAL BENCH

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Optical bench

■ Put the flange of the optical bench back and

tighten it (B) to hold the spectrophotometer gun in place.

B

■ Reassemble

the fan plate and the lamp supply cable support in reverse order.

■ Reassemble

the lamp in reverse order.

Do not touch the glass part of the lamp with your fingers! Make sure that the lamp is correctly positioned.

■ Put

the sample wash tower back.

■ Reassemble

the spectrophotometer cover in reverse order (do not forget the antistatic brush).

■ Reassemble

the upper case in reverse order.

■ Now, ■ Put

connect the power supply cable and switch the instrument on.

the reaction tray cover back and check the holes position.

■ Reassemble ■ Put

and readjust if necessary the cuvette changer. See RAS384: Cuvette changer, page 1.

the covers back.

■ Follow

the optical bench check procedure. See 4. Optical bench check, page 31.

■ Follow

the check up after intervention procedure. See RAS393: Check up after intervention, page 1.

Technical Manual RAA023

OPTICAL BENCH

RAS383F - 13

Optical bench

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

1.2.2. Specific procedure ABX Pentra 400 with an old model of optical bench (before "XDA829C") This procedure is designed for ABX Pentra 400 equipped with an old model of optical bench (before "XDA829C") i.e. ABX Pentra 400 with an instrument serial number lower than 3195.

■ Reassemble

the spectrophotometer and the optical bench without tightening the little screw.

■ Put

the assembly back on the reaction tray.

■ Tighten

the 4 CHC screws of the optical bench, indicated in blue on the following figure.

■ Make

sure that the spectrophotometer is correctly engaged in the optical bench.

Spectrophotometer NOT OK

Spectrophotometer OK

■ Now,

tighten the little screw.

■ Tighten

RAS383F - 14

the last CHC screw of the optical bench, indicated in red.

OPTICAL BENCH

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Optical bench

■ Reassemble

the fan plate and the lamp supply cable support in reverse order.

■ Reassemble

the lamp in reverse order.

Do not touch the glass part of the lamp with your fingers! Make sure that the lamp is correctly positioned.

■ Put

the sample wash tower back.

■ Reassemble

the acquisition board in reverse order and put its ground wires back.

■ Reassemble

the spectrophotometer cover in reverse order (do not forget the antistatic brush).

■ Put

the crown wheel and the rollers back.

■ Reassemble

the holder disk as follows: - Put the holder disk back without tightening the 6 CHC screws. - Position 3 cuvette segments into the reaction tray as shown on the following figure, to adjust the holder disk. - Now, tighten the 6 CHC screws.

■ Reassemble ■ Now,

the upper case back.

connect the power supply cable and switch the instrument on.

■ Check

all the reaction tray position adjustments. See RAS382: Reaction tray, 2. Reaction tray parts replacement, page 4.

■ Put

the reaction tray cover back.

■ Reassemble ■ Put

and readjust if necessary the cuvette changer. See RAS384: Cuvette changer, page 1.

the covers back.

■ Follow

the optical bench check procedure. See 4. Optical bench check, page 31.

■ Follow

the check up after intervention procedure. See RAS393: Check up after intervention, page 1.

Technical Manual RAA023

OPTICAL BENCH

RAS383F - 15

Optical bench

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

2. Optical bench mirror and lenses cleaning and replacement

Take care not to touch the mirror or the lenses with your fingers. Wear gloves to handle the mirror and the lenses.

2.1.

Condensing lens cleaning and replacement

2.1.1. Dismantling 2.1.1.1. General procedure

If your instrument is equipped with an old model of optical bench (before "XDA829C"), please refer to the specific procedure: 2.1.1.2. Specific procedure ABX Pentra 400 with an old model of optical bench (before "XDA829C"), page 18.

■

Follow the reaction tray dismantling procedure. See RAS382: Reaction tray, 1. Reaction tray dismantling, page 2.

■ Disconnect

the lamp supply cable and loosen the 2 CHC screws. Turn the light lock and remove the lamp.

Warning! Hot surface Risk of personal injury due to hot surfaces within the instrument. Wait for the lamp to cool down before proceeding.

RAS383F - 16

OPTICAL BENCH

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Optical bench

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws to remove the lamp supply cable support.

■ Unscrew

the 2 upper CHC screws and loosen the 2 bottom CHC screws to remove the fan plate.

■ Unscrew

the lamp socket screws (A) to remove it.

A

B

■ Unscrew

the condensing lens holder (B) to remove it.

Technical Manual RAA023

OPTICAL BENCH

RAS383F - 17

Optical bench

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Slightly

loosen the little screw to free the

lens.

2.1.1.2. Specific procedure ABX Pentra 400 with an old model of optical bench (before "XDA829C") This procedure is designed for ABX Pentra 400 equipped with an old model of optical bench (before "XDA829C") i.e. ABX Pentra 400 with an instrument serial number lower than 3195.

■ Follow

the optical bench dismantling procedure. See 1.1. Dismantling, page 2.

■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws and remove the

mirror clip. ■ Remove

the mirror cautiously and place it on paper.

■ To

access the condensing lens: - Slightly loosen the little screw and remove the cap.

RAS383F - 18

OPTICAL BENCH

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Optical bench

- Turn the optical bench over, unscrew the 4 CHC screws and remove the heat sink cover.

■ Dismantle

the condensing lens as follows: - Slightly loosen the little screw to free the lens.

- Turn the optical bench over, use paper to protect the lens exit and push cautiously the lens with a plastic tool passing through the mirror hole.

Pushing the lens, take care not to touch the lens but the metallic part.

Technical Manual RAA023

OPTICAL BENCH

RAS383F - 19

Optical bench

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

2.1.2. Cleaning and replacement A

B

■ Remove

the condensing lens from its metallic support as follows: - Adjust the lens dismantling key (provided in the optical bench cleaning kit (A)) in the nut notches (B) and unscrew the nut.

- Remove the lens from its metallic support using the pen with suction cup (provided in the optical bench cleaning kit) and place it on paper.

Make sure that the pen with suction cup is clean before use. If necessary, clean it with a cleaning towelette (provided in the optical bench cleaning kit).

■ Clean each side of the condensing lens with

a cleaning towelette. Wipe the condensing lens with paper.

■ Put

the condensing lens back in its metallic support using the pen with suction cup and fasten the nut.

Take care that the convex side of the lens is upwards.

■ Remove

any dust from the condensing lens using a dusting spray. Make sure that there are no marks on the condensing lens.

RAS383F - 20

OPTICAL BENCH

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Optical bench

2.1.3. Reassembly 2.1.3.1. General procedure

If your instrument is equipped with an old model of optical bench (before "XDA829C"), please refer to the specific procedure: 2.1.3.2. Specific procedure ABX Pentra 400 with an old model of optical bench (before "XDA829C"), page 22.

■ Put

the condensing lens back in its holder.

■ Put

the lens holder back in its original position. Make sure that the convex side of the lens is facing the right direction (opposite to the lamp side). Make sure that the lens holder reaches the end stop so that it is properly placed.

CONDENSING LENS focal length = 20 mm

■ Make

sure that the lens is well-positioned and fully inserted.

■ Screw

the condensing lens holder.

■ Tighten ■ Screw

the little screw on top to block the lens.

the lamp socket.

■ Reassemble

Technical Manual RAA023

the rest of the instrument in reverse order.

OPTICAL BENCH

RAS383F - 21

Optical bench

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

2.1.3.2. Specific procedure ABX Pentra 400 with an old model of optical bench (before "XDA829C") This procedure is designed for ABX Pentra 400 equipped with an old model of optical bench (before "XDA829C") i.e. ABX Pentra 400 with an instrument serial number lower than 3195.

■ Reassemble

the condensing lens as follows: - Put the lens back in the optical bench ensuring that it is installed in the correct way. - Make sure that the lens is well-positioned and fully inserted.

- Tighten the little screw to block the lens.

■ Reassemble ■ Clean

in reverse order the heat sink cover and the cap.

the mirror with a cleaning towelette. Wipe the mirror with paper.

■ Remove

any dust from the mirror using a dusting spray. Make sure that there are no marks on the mirror.

■ Reassemble ■ Follow

RAS383F - 22

in reverse order the mirror.

the optical bench reassembly procedure. See 1.2. Reassembly, page 12.

OPTICAL BENCH

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

2.2.

Optical bench

Shaping lens cleaning and replacement

2.2.1. Dismantling 2.2.1.1. General procedure

If your instrument is equipped with an old model of optical bench (before "XDA829C"), please refer to the specific procedure: 2.2.1.2. Specific procedure ABX Pentra 400 with an old model of optical bench (before "XDA829C"), page 24.

■

Follow the reaction tray dismantling procedure. See RAS382: Reaction tray, 1. Reaction tray dismantling, page 2.

■ Unscrew the 7 CHC screws, disconnect the

flap door switch (A) and unscrew the NTC to remove the upper case.

A

■ Unscrew

the flange to have access to the shaping lens holder.

■ Remove

Technical Manual RAA023

the shaping lens holder.

OPTICAL BENCH

RAS383F - 23

Optical bench

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

2.2.1.2. Specific procedure ABX Pentra 400 with an old model of optical bench (before "XDA829C") This procedure is designed for ABX Pentra 400 equipped with an old model of optical bench (before "XDA829C") i.e. ABX Pentra 400 with an instrument serial number lower than 3195.

■ Follow

the optical bench dismantling procedure. See 1.1. Dismantling, page 2.

■ Dismantle

the shaping lens as follows: - Slightly loosen the little screw to free the lens. - Remove the lens and place it on paper.

2.2.2. Cleaning and replacement

■ Remove

the shaping lens from its metallic support as follows: - Slightly loosen the screw and lift up the metallic support.

- Take the lens using the pen with suction cup (provided in the optical bench cleaning kit) and place it on paper.

RAS383F - 24

OPTICAL BENCH

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Optical bench

■ Clean

each side of the shaping lens with a cleaning towelette (provided in the optical bench cleaning kit). Wipe the shaping lens with paper.

■ Remove

any dust from the shaping lens using a dusting spray and make sure that there are no marks on the shaping lens.

■ Put

the shaping lens back in its metallic support using the pen with suction cup and tighten the screw.

Take care that the convex side of the lens is downwards.

SHAPING LENS focal length = 25 mm

Technical Manual RAA023

OPTICAL BENCH

RAS383F - 25

Optical bench

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

2.2.3. Reassembly 2.2.3.1. General procedure

If your instrument is equipped with an old model of optical bench (before "XDA829C"), please refer to the specific procedure: 2.2.3.2. Specific procedure ABX Pentra 400 with an old model of optical bench (before "XDA829C"), page 26.

■ Put

the lens holder back in its original position.

Make sure that the lens holder reaches the end stop so that it is properly placed.

■ Put

the flange back and tighten the flange screws.

■ Reassemble

the rest of the instrument in reverse order.

2.2.3.2. Specific procedure ABX Pentra 400 with an old model of optical bench (before "XDA829C") This procedure is designed for ABX Pentra 400 equipped with an old model of optical bench (before "XDA829C") i.e. ABX Pentra 400 with an instrument serial number lower than 3195.

■ Reassemble

the shaping lens as follows: - Put the lens back in the optical bench ensuring that it is installed in the correct way.

- Make sure that the lens is well-positioned and aligned with the optical bench as shown on the following picture.

RAS383F - 26

OPTICAL BENCH

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Optical bench

- Tighten the little screw to block the lens.

■ Follow

Technical Manual RAA023

the optical bench reassembly procedure. See 1.2. Reassembly, page 12.

OPTICAL BENCH

RAS383F - 27

Optical bench

2.3.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Coupling lens cleaning and replacement ■ Follow

the optical bench dismantling procedure until you dismantled the spectrophotometer. See 1.1. Dismantling, page 2.

The coupling lens is located inside the reception barrel of the spectrophotometer. To replace the coupling lens, you have to replace the reception barrel.

■ Unscrew

the 4 CHC screws on the spectrophotometer to remove the reception barrel.

■ Remove

the coupling lens from the reception barrel as follows: - Adjust the lens dismantling key (provided in the optical bench cleaning kit) in the nut notches or use a ruler and unscrew the nut.

- Gently turn the barrel over onto an optical paper on the workbench.

RAS383F - 28

OPTICAL BENCH

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Optical bench

- Remove the lens from the reception barrel using the pen with suction cup (provided in the optical bench cleaning kit) and place it on paper.

■ Clean

each side of the coupling lens with a cleaning towelette (provided in the optical bench cleaning kit). Wipe the coupling lens with paper.

■ Put

the coupling lens back in the reception barrel using the pen with suction cup and fasten the nut.

Take care that the convex side of the lens is upwards.

COUPLING LENS focal length = 20 mm

■ Remove

any dust from the coupling lens using a dusting spray and make sure that there are no marks on the coupling lens.

■ Reassemble ■ Follow

Technical Manual RAA023

in reverse order.

the optical bench reassembly procedure. See 1.2. Reassembly, page 12.

OPTICAL BENCH

RAS383F - 29

Optical bench

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

3. Impacted adjustments

These adjustments are necessary only if your instrument is equipped with an old model of optical bench (before "XDA829C").

Impacted adjustments

Mirror and lenses replacement

Reaction Tray Offset

X

Mixing Position

X

Reagent Arm Position

X

Sample Arm Position

X

Automatic Loading

X

Handling Position

X

Reaction Tray cover (for needles)

X

Sample arm rotation Cuvette Position

X

Reagent arm rotation Cuvette Position

X Mixer

Cuvette Position

X

Cuvette changer Load in Reaction Tray Position

X

See RAS382: Reaction tray, 4. Adjustments, page 19.

RAS383F - 30

OPTICAL BENCH

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Optical bench

4. Optical bench check ■ Run

an initialization and once the instrument is Ready, go to Services > Diagnostics > Tray.

■ Select

the Reaction radio button and press Motor Off.

■ Manually ■ Then,

remove all the cuvette segments from the reaction tray.

press Check Home.

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Spectro > Spectro Settings. This tab displays the list of spectrophotometer initialization steps (A) and five subtabs to perform each initialization step (B). Once a step is performed, it is marked "Done" in the list.

1. Measure Gain ■ Click

the Measure Gain tab (B).

■ Press

Start (C).

■ When

the message "After the gain measurement, the spectrophotometer is initialized." is displayed, press OK. Then, the following message is displayed: "Verify absence of segment in sector 1."

D

E

■ Make sure that there

is no cuvette segment in the sector 1 of the reaction tray and press OK. Once the step is performed, the gain and the light intensity measured on air (without cuvette) are displayed for each wavelength.

■ Make

sure that the gains (D) are included between 1 and 95%.

C A

B

■ Make

sure that the light intensities (E) are included between 57200 and 65535 (~ 61000).

Technical Manual RAA023

OPTICAL BENCH

RAS383F - 31

Optical bench

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

2. I Black C ■ Click

the I Black tab (A).

■ Press

Start (B). Once the step is performed, the black intensity measured in the black (with the inter-sector located between the sectors 1 and 6 of the reaction tray) is displayed for each wavelength.

■ Make

sure that the black intensities (C) are included between 1400 and 2000.

A B

3. Lamp Stabilization

■ Click

the Lamp Stabilization tab (A).

■ Press

Start (B). A B

Then, the following message is displayed: "Verify absence of segment in sector 1." ■ Make

sure that there is no cuvette segment in the sector 1 of the reaction tray and press OK. During the lamp stabilization, the light intensity measured on air (without cuvette) and the deviation are displayed for each wavelength every 12 s during 600 s maximum. The light intensities (LI) are checked to ensure that they are included between 57200 and 65535. The deviations (Dev) are checked to ensure that the difference between 2 consecutive absorbances < 0.00022. Once the step is performed, the following message is displayed: "Stability of lamp done."

4. I0 Air ■ Click

C

the I0 Air tab (A).

■ Press

Start (B). Then, the following message is displayed: "Verify absence of segment in sector 1."

■ Make sure that there

is no cuvette segment in the sector 1 of the reaction tray and press OK. Once the step is performed, the light intensity measured on air (without cuvette) is displayed for each wavelength.

■ Make

sure that the light intensities (C) are included between 57200 and 65535.

RAS383F - 32

OPTICAL BENCH

A B

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Optical bench

5. I0 Water ■ Click

the I0 Water tab (A).

C

■ Press

Start (B). Then, the following message is displayed: "Put a new segment in sector 1 and manually fill the first cuvette with 200 µL of H2O in the handling position."

■ Manually

load a cuvette segment into the sector 1 of the reaction tray, manually fill the first cuvette with 200 µL of H2O and press OK. Once the step is performed, the light intensity measured through a water-filled cuvette is displayed for each wavelength (C).

A B

B

■ Go to Services > Diagnostics > Spectro >

Spectro Measurement. ■ Select

A

the Reference on Air radio button

C

(A). ■ In

the 1st WL scrolling list (B), select "340".

■ Press

Read (C). D

■ Make

sure that the values displayed in the Dynamic Optical Reading table (D) are close to 0.

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Tray.

■ Select

the Reaction radio button and press Motor Off.

■ Manually ■ Then,

position 6 new cuvette segments into the reaction tray.

press Check Home.

■ Go to Services > Diagnostics > Spectro >

Spectro Measurement. ■ Select

the Reference on Air radio button

B

(A). ■ In

the 1st WL scrolling list (B), select "340".

■ Press

A

Read (C).

C

■ Make

sure that the values displayed in the Dynamic Optical Reading table (D) are included between 0.060 and 0.120.

■ In

the 1st WL scrolling list (B), select "700".

■ Press

D

Read (C).

■ Make

sure that the values displayed in the Dynamic Optical Reading table (D) are included between 0.050 and 0.090.

Technical Manual RAA023

OPTICAL BENCH

RAS383F - 33

Optical bench

RAS383F - 34

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

OPTICAL BENCH

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS656B

Partial condensing lens cleaning

RAS656: Partial condensing lens cleaning

Concerns Preliminary operations Optical bench lamp dismantling Condensing lens cleaning (lamp side) Checks after intervention

Required tools Pair of scissors TOOL, ALLEN SCREWDRIVER 2MM MAB086A (1207821086)

Required products Alcohol

Intervention time 0 h 15

Frequency On request

Specific kit or consumables Cuvette segments TOOL, LAMP LENS CLEANING KIT XEC011AS (1209179011)

Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator. Local or national regulations must be applied in all the operations.

Partial condensing lens cleaning

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Follow this procedure to clean the lamp side of the condensing lens with the help of the TOOL, LAMP LENS CLEANING KIT XEC011AS (1209179011) and without dismantling the optical bench.

1. Preliminary operations 1.1.

TOOL, LAMP LENS CLEANING KIT

crystal tube

optic wipes

crystal tube

1.2.

tool

Tool preparation

■ Take

the tool.

■ Cut

2 strips of about 25 x 200 mm from an "optic wipes" sheet.

■ Twiddle the first strip on itself and insert it in

23 mm

the crystal tube "3/5" present at the extremity of the tool. ■ Cut the strip at about 23 mm of the tool axe,

as illustrated on the following picture: For a better handling of the tool, you can also put a crystal tube lenght at the other extremity of the tool. This crystal tube lenght is in the little bag, ref. EAE011A (1202241011), which contains about 10 cm of crystal tube.

RAS656B - 2

OPTICAL BENCH

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Partial condensing lens cleaning

2. Optical bench lamp dismantling ■ Refer

to your user manual to dismantle the lamp to access the condensing lens (lamp side).

Warning! Hot surface Risk of personal injury due to hot surfaces within the instrument. Wait for the lamp to cool down before proceeding.

Do not touch the glass part of the lamp with your fingers!

spectrophotometer

access to condensing lens

reagent tray cover

Technical Manual RAA023

OPTICAL BENCH

RAS656B - 3

Partial condensing lens cleaning

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

3. Condensing lens cleaning (lamp side) ■ Saturate ■

the tool strip with alcohol.

Insert the tool at 45° in the opening designed for the lamp (A), then bring it to the vertical to lead up the strip in touch with the lens (B).

A

■

B

Once the tool is correctly inserted, get in touch with the lens and clean it by making small rotational movements and keeping the tool as vertical as possible. As the lens surface is positioned further than the emission chamber walls, the lens contact is perceptible.

■ Remove

the tool.

■ Replace

the alcohol strip with a second non-alcohol strip to make the lens dry.

■ If

needed, clean the lamp with an "optic wipes" sheet.

■ Please

refer to your user manual to reassemble the lamp.

4. Checks after intervention ■

Follow the optical bench check procedure (see RAS383: Optical bench, 4. Optical bench check, page 31) to control the cleaning efficiency.

RAS656B - 4

OPTICAL BENCH

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS386G

Mixer In this procedure, specific instructions are given for previous ABX Pentra 400 hardware versions: ■ V1 corresponds to instruments with serial numbers below 2000.

RAS386: Mixer

Concerns Mixer paddle replacement Mixer assembly dismantling Mixer assembly parts replacement Impacted adjustments Adjustments

Required tools Hexagonal keys Phillips screwdriver OPTICAL, SEGMENT 1XXX TEST 9200787 (1229200787)

Required products None

Intervention time N/A

Frequency On request

Specific kit or consumables Cuvette segments

Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator. Local or national regulations must be applied in all the operations.

Mixer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

1. Mixer paddle replacement ■ Connect

the power supply cable and switch the instrument on.

■ Go

to Services > Customer Services > Cycles.

■ Press

Replace Mixer Paddle. The following message appears: "Replace the mixer paddle and click OK when done."

■ Open

the arms main cover.

■ Remove the mixer cover by unscrewing the

3 BHC screws. See RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1. ■ Lift

the mixer assembly up by pressing the red button.

■ Loosen

the CHC screw and remove the mixer paddle by pulling it down.

■ Replace

the mixer paddle and reassemble in reverse order.

When reassembling, make sure that the mixer paddle is pushed up to the maximum in its support.

■ Press

RAS386G - 2

OK when finished.

MIXER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Mixer

2. Mixer assembly dismantling

In order not to damage the needles during dismantling, disable the arms (vertical and rotation movements) and put them on a sample cup rack over the reagent tray as shown on the following picture.

■ Switch

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

■ Remove

the covers (see RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1): - Open the arms main cover. - Remove the mixer cover.

■ Lift

the mixer assembly up by pressing the red button.

■ Cut

the Ty-Rap™ maintaining the home sensor wires, then disconnect the home sensor connector, the motor and the mixer paddle motor.

Technical Manual RAA023

MIXER

RAS386G - 3

Mixer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Manually

push down the cylinder to move the XY carriage up (A), then forward (B).

B A

■ Disconnect

the wash tower tubings, then remove the wash tower.

■ Remove

the rear plate by unscrewing the 8 CHC screws to access the mixer assembly foot.

RAS386G - 4

MIXER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Mixer

■ Then,

unscrew the 6 CHC screws of the mixer assembly foot.

■ Disconnect

the 2 connectors of the "mixer present switch".

■

Cut the Ty-Rap™ maintaining the reagent arm vertical motor cable and gently remove the mixer assembly.

■ Reassemble

in reverse order.

■ When

reassembling, turn the 6 CHC screws of the mixer assembly foot without tightening them. Push the mixer assembly down and check if it is correctly engaged. Then, tighten the 6 CHC screws of the mixer assembly foot. ■ Be careful not to clamp the tubings and wires when you push the mixer assembly down. ■ After the mixer assembly replacement, it is necessary to readjust all the mixer positions. See 5. Adjustments, page 17.

In case of mixer assembly replacement, dismantle the mixer paddle from the old mixer assembly and reassemble it on the new mixer assembly. See 1. Mixer paddle replacement, page 2.

Technical Manual RAA023

MIXER

RAS386G - 5

Mixer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

3. Mixer assembly parts replacement 3.1.

Home sensor replacement

To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement: see 4. Impacted adjustments, page 16.

■ Switch

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

■ Remove

the covers (see RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1): - Open the arms main cover. - Remove the mixer cover.

■ Lift

the mixer assembly up by pressing the red button.

■ Cut

the Ty-Rap™ maintaining the home sensor wires, then disconnect the home sensor connector, the motor and the mixer paddle motor.

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws to remove the home sensor.

■ Replace

the home sensor and reassemble in reverse order.

RAS386G - 6

MIXER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

3.2.

Mixer

Motor replacement

To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement: see 4. Impacted adjustments, page 16.

■ Switch

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

■ Remove

the covers (see RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1): - Open the arms main cover. - Remove the mixer cover.

■ Lift

the mixer assembly up by pressing the red button.

■ Disconnect

the motor.

■ Manually

push down the cylinder to move the XY carriage up.

Technical Manual RAA023

MIXER

RAS386G - 7

Mixer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Loosen

the motor axis screw.

■ Cut

the Ty-Rap™ and unscrew the 2 CHC screws to remove the motor.

■ Replace

the motor and reassemble in reverse order.

When reassembling, make sure that you tighten the motor axis screw on the plane of the motor axis.

RAS386G - 8

MIXER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

3.3.

Mixer

Mixer paddle motor

To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement: see 4. Impacted adjustments, page 16.

■ Switch

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

■ Remove

the covers (see RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1): - Open the arms main cover. - Remove the mixer cover.

■ Lift

the mixer assembly up by pressing the red button.

■ Disconnect

the mixer paddle motor.

■ At

the back of the mixer, cut the 2 Ty-Raps™ maintaining the mixer paddle motor wires.

■ Remove the mixer paddle motor wires from

the wire guide and the adhesive holder.

Technical Manual RAA023

MIXER

RAS386G - 9

Mixer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1 ■ Cut

the Ty-Raps™ maintaining the wires.

B ■ Loosen

the CHC screw (A) and remove the mixer paddle by pulling it down.

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws to remove the mixer paddle motor (B).

■ Replace

the mixer paddle motor and reassemble in reverse order.

A

When reassembling, to avoid risk of wire breaking, ensure that: ■ the O-ring maintaining the mixer paddle motor wires is well positioned at the bottom of the mixer paddle motor (A); ■ the mixer paddle motor wires are well flattened on the mixer paddle motor (B); ■ the ring marker is positioned at the top of the mixer paddle motor close to the welding (C); ■ the mixer paddle motor wires are placed in the correct way: - the wire length between the O-ring bottom and the XY carriage wire guide is 105 mm +/- 3 (D), - the wire length between the XY carriage wire guide and the upper wire guide is 70 mm +/- 3 (E).

C

B A

RAS386G - 10

MIXER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Mixer

70 mm +/- 3 E

105 mm +/- 3 D

When reassembling, make sure that the mixer paddle is pushed up to the maximum in its support.

Technical Manual RAA023

MIXER

RAS386G - 11

Mixer

3.4.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Cylinder replacement

To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement: see 4. Impacted adjustments, page 16.

■ Switch

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

■ Remove

the covers (see RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1): - Open the arms main cover. - Remove the mixer cover.

■ Lift

the mixer assembly up by pressing the red button.

A ■ Unscrew

the CHC screw "A".

■ Unscrew

the CHC screw "B" and plastic

washer. ■ Release

the mixer paddle motor cable and remove the plate.

B

■ Loosen

RAS386G - 12

the 2 CHC screws of the motor.

MIXER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Unscrew

Mixer

the CHC screw and nut of the

cylinder.

■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws and washers of

the X axis. ■ Pull

the X axis forward.

■ Remove

the cylinder and replace it.

■ When

reassembling, make sure that you tighten the cylinder screw on the flat spot of the motor axis.

Technical Manual RAA023

MIXER

RAS386G - 13

Mixer

3.5.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Cylinder spring replacement

To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement: see 4. Impacted adjustments, page 16.

■ Switch

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

■ Remove

the covers (see RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1): - Open the arms main cover. - Remove the mixer cover.

■ Lift

the mixer assembly up by pressing the red button.

■ Unscrew the CHC screw inside the cylinder

to remove the cylinder spring. ■ Replace the cylinder spring and reassemble

in reverse order.

■ When

reassembling, make sure that the CHC screw is right above the cylinder. the cylinder spring replacement, make sure that the XY carriage moves down without moving backward.

■ After

RAS386G - 14

MIXER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

3.6.

Mixer

"Mixer present switch" replacement

To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement: see 4. Impacted adjustments, page 16.

■ Switch

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

■ Remove

the covers (see RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1): Open the arms main cover.

■ Lift

the mixer assembly up by pressing the red button.

■ Remove

the rear plate by unscrewing the 8 CHC screws to access the "mixer present switch".

■ Disconnect

the 2 connectors and unscrew the 2 CHC screws to remove the "mixer present switch".

■ Replace

the "mixer present switch" and reassemble in reverse order.

After the "mixer present switch" replacement, it is necessary to make sure that it works correctly. See RAS394: Sensors check and adjustment, 6. "Mixer present switch", page 7.

Technical Manual RAA023

MIXER

RAS386G - 15

Mixer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

4. Impacted adjustments

Paddle Home sensor Paddle motor

Mixer motor

Cylinder or Mixer assy dismantling Switch cylinder spring or replacement

Mixer Home position

X

X

Above Reaction Tray

X

X

X

Cuvette Position

X

X

X

Reaction tray Mixing Position

RAS386G - 16

X

MIXER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Mixer

5. Adjustments

Disable the arms (vertical and rotation movements) and put them on a sample cup rack over the reagent tray as shown on the following figure.

■ Switch ■ Open

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

the arms main cover.

■

Remove the mixer cover, the loader cover, the cuvettes hatch, the connection hatch, the cuvettes cover, the optic hatch, the left arm cover, the cuvettes tray plate and the mixer plate. See RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1.

■

Remove the unload rack, the load rack and the reaction tray cover. See RAS382: Reaction tray, 1. Reaction tray dismantling, page 2.

■ Connect ■ Lift

the power supply cable and switch the instrument on.

the mixer assembly up by pressing the red button.

Before starting position adjustments, make sure that the CHC screw is right above the cylinder.

Technical Manual RAA023

MIXER

RAS386G - 17

Mixer

5.1.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Home position

A ■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Arms.

■ Move

the mixer to its home position as follows: - Select the Mixer radio button (A) and press Check Home (B). B

■ Position the mixing paddle motor assy in its

upper position as follows: - Loosen the 2 CHC screws of the mixing paddle motor assy. - Place the mixing paddle motor assy in its upper position. - Screw the 2 CHC screws. ■ Make

sure that the mixer paddle is pushed up to the maximum in its support.

A ■ Check

the distance between the XY carriage and the low carriage.

■ Adjust

this position to have 7 mm +/- 0.5 between the XY carriage and the low carriage by moving the home flag (A). - Move the home flag down to move the XY carriage up. - Move the home flag up to move the XY carriage down.

7 mm +/- 0.5

■ Press

Check Home (B), then check the position again.

RAS386G - 18

MIXER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Mixer

■ Manually

make sure that there is a gap of about 2 mm between the end of the mixer paddle and the wash tower bottom by moving the wash tower up and down.

≈2 mm

5.2.

Reaction tray "Mixing Position" ■

Adjust the reaction tray Mixing Position position. See RAS382: Reaction tray, 4.4. Mixing Position, page 23.

■ Remove

the tool from the reaction tray as follows: - Go to Services > Diagnostics > Tray. - In the Sector and Position scrolling lists, select "1" and "1" (1). - In the Target scrolling list, select Handling Position (2). - Press Check Position (3). - Remove the tool from the reaction tray.

Technical Manual RAA023

MIXER

1 2

3

RAS386G - 19

Mixer

5.3.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

"Cuvette" position

The mixer assembly should be in up position.

■ Go

A

to Services > Diagnostics > Arms.

■ In the Position scrolling list, select Cuvette

(A). ■ Press

Check Position (B). B

■ Check

the distance between the XY carriage and the low carriage. This distance must be 7 mm +/- 1.

7 mm +/- 1

■ Adjust the position by changing the number

of steps for the Cuvette position (C). - Increase the number of steps to move the XY carriage down. - Decrease the number of steps to move the XY carriage up. ■ Press

Check Home (D) and check the position again.

■ Manually

RAS386G - 20

C

D

pull the mixer assembly up.

MIXER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

5.4.

Mixer

Mixer paddle height

Follow this procedure to adjust the mixer paddle height in the cuvette. The distance between the end of the mixer paddle and the bottom of the cuvette must be 3 mm.

3 mm

The mixer assembly should be in up position.

■ Manually

load a cuvette segment in the reaction tray as follows: - Go to Services > Diagnostics > Tray. - Select the Reaction radio button (1) and press Check Home (2). - In the Sector and Position scrolling lists, select "1" and "1" (3). - In the Target scrolling list, select Handling Position (4). - Press Check Position (5). - Manually load a cuvette segment in the reaction tray. - In the Target scrolling list, select Mixing Position (4). - Press Check Position (5) to move the cuvette segment to the Mixing Position position.

Technical Manual RAA023

MIXER

1 3 4

2

5

RAS386G - 21

Mixer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

A ■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Arms.

C

■ Select the

Mixer radio button (A) and press Check Home (B).

■ In the Position scrolling list, select Cuvette

(C). ■ Press

Check Position (D).

B

D

■ When

the mixing paddle stops turning, manually push the mixer assembly down to engage it.

■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws maintaining the

mixer paddle motor then move down the paddle until the end of the paddle touches the bottom of the cuvette.

■ Measure

the distance D between the bottom of the mixing paddle motor assy and the top of the reaction tray cover (if the reaction tray cover is removed, make the measurement at the top of the cuvette).

■ Lift the mixer paddle up by 3 mm and screw

the 2 CHC screws maintaining the mixer paddle motor. (Adjustment value = measured distance D 3 mm)

D

■ Press

Check Home (B) and check the position again.

■ Manually

RAS386G - 22

pull the mixer assembly up.

MIXER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Mixer

■ Remove

the cuvette segment from the reaction tray as follows: - Go to Services > Diagnostics > Tray. - In the Sector and Position scrolling lists, select "1" and "1" (3). - In the Target scrolling list, select Handling Position (4). - Press Check Position (5). - Remove the cuvette segment from the reaction tray.

5.5.

3 4

5

"Above Reaction Tray" position

Follow this procedure to adjust the mixer paddle height above the reaction tray.

■ Reinstall

the reaction tray cover.

The mixer assembly should be in up position.

A ■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Arms.

■ Select the

Mixer radio button (A) and press Check Home (B).

C

■ In

the Position scrolling list, select Above Reaction Tray (C).

■ Press

Check Position (D).

■ When

the mixing paddle stops turning, press Motor Off (E).

Technical Manual RAA023

B

MIXER

D

E

RAS386G - 23

Mixer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Manually push the mixer assembly down to

engage it. ■ Check

the distance between the end of the mixer paddle and the top of the reaction tray cover (not above the mixer hole). This distance must be 1-2 mm.

1-2 mm

Mixer hole

■ Adjust the mixer paddle height by changing

the number of steps for the Above Reaction Tray position (F). - Increase the number of steps to move the XY carriage down. - Decrease the number of steps to move the XY carriage up. ■ Press

Check Home (B) and check the position again.

■ Manually ■ Put

F

B

pull the mixer assembly up.

the covers back.

Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1 ■ When

reassembling, check the cuvette changer adjustments. See RAS384: Cuvette changer, 4. Adjustments, page 31.

RAS386G - 24

MIXER

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS385G

Arms In this procedure, specific instructions are given for previous ABX Pentra 400 hardware versions: ■ V1 corresponds to instruments with serial numbers below 2000. ■ V2 corresponds to instruments with serial numbers between 2000 and 2999.

RAS385: Arms

Concerns Needles replacement Arms assembly dismantling Arms assembly parts replacement Impacted adjustments Reagent arm adjustment Sample arm adjustment Level detection check Shock detection check

Required tools Hexagonal keys Torx key Flat screwdriver Phillips screwdriver TOOL, DYNAMO. SCREWDRIVER A302 MAG019A (1207851019) OPTICAL, SEGMENT 1XXX TEST 9200787 (1229200787) TOOL, REAG TRAY ADJUSTING TOOL XDB097AS (1209149097) TOOL, DUMMY REAGENT NEEDLE GBM1124 (1203601124) TOOL, DUMMY SAMPLE NEEDLE GBM1125 (1203601125)

Required products Distilled water TOOL, THREADLOCKING LAX003A (1207721003)

Intervention time N/A

Frequency On request

Specific kit or consumables None Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator. Local or national regulations must be applied in all the operations.

Arms

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

1. Needles replacement ■ Connect ■ Go

1.1.

the power supply cable and switch the instrument on.

to Services > Customer Services > Cycles.

Reagent needle replacement

■ Press

Replace Reagent needle. The following message appears: "Replace the needle and click OK when done."

■ Open

the arms main cover.

■ Remove

the reagent arm bracket cover by unscrewing the 2 BHC screws. See RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1.

■ Make

sure that the reagent needle is above its wash tower and disconnect the teflon tubing of the reagent needle from the syringe block support.

■ Remove

the teflon tubing of the reagent needle from the 2 plastic collars.

RAS385G - 2

ARMS

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Arms

■ Disconnect the level detection cable (A) and

loosen the 2 CHC screws (B) to free the needle. A B

■ Disconnect

the reagent needle connector and remove the needle.

■ Replace

the needle and reassemble in reverse order.

Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1 When reassembling, take care that the plastic collars are positioned in the correct way and the teflon tubing is passing in front of the electrical wire.

Be careful not to clamp the tubing and wires of the reagent arm when you fasten the reagent arm bracket cover.

Technical Manual RAA023

ARMS

RAS385G - 3

Arms

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Press

OK when finished. The following message appears: "Click OK to continue."

■ Press

A

OK again.

■ If

the level detection of the reagent needle is enabled, a message informs the user that the calibration of the reagent level detection will be automatically performed.

1.2.

B

■ Press

Priming Cycle (A).

■ Press

Reagent pressure calibration (B).

Sample needle replacement

■ Press

Replace Sample needle. The following message appears: "Replace the needle and click OK when done."

■ Open

the arms main cover.

■ Remove

the sample arm bracket cover by unscrewing the 2 BHC screws. See RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1.

■ Make

sure that the sample needle is above its wash tower and disconnect the teflon tubing of the sample needle from the syringe block support.

RAS385G - 4

ARMS

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Arms

■ Remove

the teflon tubing of the sample needle from the 2 plastic collars.

When reassembling, take care that the plastic collars are positioned in the correct way. See the picture above.

■ Disconnect the level detection cable (A) and

loosen the sample needle locking screw (B) to release the needle. ■ Remove

the needle.

■ Replace

the needle and reassemble in reverse order. A B

■ Before

the sample arm bracket cover reassembly: position, as much as possible, the sample needle locking screw towards the sample arm inside. ■ Take care that the tubing is correctly positioned in the sample arm bracket cover and be careful not to clamp the tubing nor the wires of the sample arm when you fasten the sample arm bracket cover. ■ When the sample arm bracket cover is fastened, make sure that the shock detection runs smoothly. See 8. Shock detection check, page 59.

Technical Manual RAA023

ARMS

RAS385G - 5

Arms

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Press

OK when finished. The following message appears: "Click OK to continue."

■ Press

OK again.

■ Press

Priming Cycle (A).

■ Press

Sample pressure calibration (B).

RAS385G - 6

A

B

ARMS

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Arms

2. Arms assembly dismantling ■ Switch

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable. It is advisable to remove the needles before dismantling the arms assembly (in order not to damage them).

■ Remove

the covers (see RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1): - Open the arms main cover and the ISE cover. - Remove the external and internal sample covers, the optic hatch, the arms covers, the cuvettes tray plate, the reagent plate, the loader cover, the mother board cover and the mixer plate.

■

Disconnect the 2 connectors from the reagent level detection board (J2 and J4) and the connector from the sample level detection board (J2).

■ Disconnect

the reagent arm vertical motor from the mother board (J58).

■ Disconnect

the sample arm vertical motor from the mother board (J59).

■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws maintaining the

arms assembly.

■

Slightly lift the arms assembly up, then cut the Ty-Rap™ and disconnect the 2 home sensor connectors (A) and the 2 rotation motors (B).

B

A

■ Remove

Technical Manual RAA023

the arms assembly.

ARMS

RAS385G - 7

Arms

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

B

A Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1 ■ First,

cut the Ty-Rap™ and disconnect the 2 home sensor connectors (A) and the 2 rotation motors (B).

B ■ Then,

unscrew the 4 CHC screws to remove the arms assembly.

■ Reassemble

in reverse order.

Make sure that all the wiring is in the correct position before putting a new Ty-Rap™ and make sure that the wires are not in the way of the home sensors.

RAS385G - 8

ARMS

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Arms

3. Arms assembly parts replacement 3.1.

Home sensors replacement

This procedure describes how to replace the 2 vertical home sensors and the 2 rotation home sensors: - 3.1.1. Vertical home sensor, page 9 - 3.1.2. Rotation home sensor, page 11.

To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement: see 4. Impacted adjustments, page 21.

3.1.1. Vertical home sensor ■ Follow

the arms assembly dismantling procedure. See 2. Arms assembly dismantling, page 7.

C ■ Cut

the Ty-Rap™ (A) and disconnect the 2 vertical motor connectors (B).

■ Unscrew

the CHC screw (C) to release the vertical home sensor and its wires. B A

C Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1 and V2 ■ Cut

the Ty-Rap™ (A) and disconnect the 2 vertical motor connectors (B).

■ Unscrew

the CHC screw (C) to release the vertical home sensor and its wires.

B A

Technical Manual RAA023

ARMS

RAS385G - 9

Arms

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Cut

one side of the new vertical home sensor as indicated on the picture.

■ Reassemble ■ Reposition

1

in reverse order.

the cable and gather it with a Ty-Rap™ as shown on the following pictures: 3

2

■

To ensure that the cable is correctly positioned, check the cable bend (refer to the following picture) when the rack rail assembly is in low position. Reagent arm

Sample arm

■ Make

sure that the home flag passes in the middle of the home sensor and does not touch the home sensor. If necessary, manually adjust the home flag position.

RAS385G - 10

ARMS

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Arms

3.1.2. Rotation home sensor ■ Follow

the arms assembly dismantling procedure. See 2. Arms assembly dismantling, page 7.

■ Unscrew

the CHC screw to release the rotation home sensor and its wires.

■ Cut

one side of the new rotation home sensor as indicated on the picture.

■ Reassemble

in reverse order.

■ Make

sure that the home flag passes in the middle of the home sensor and does not touch the home sensor. If necessary, adjust the home flag position by unscrewing the 2 CHC screws and/or manually adjust the home flag position.

Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1 and V2 ■ Make

sure that the home flag passes in the middle of the home sensor and does not touch the home sensor. If necessary, adjust the home flag position by unscrewing the 2 CHC screws and/or manually adjust the home flag position.

Technical Manual RAA023

ARMS

RAS385G - 11

Arms

3.2.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Motors replacement

This procedure describes how to replace the reagent and sample vertical motors and the reagent and sample rotation motors: - 3.2.1. Vertical motor, page 12 - 3.2.2. Rotation motor, page 14.

To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement: see 4. Impacted adjustments, page 21.

3.2.1. Vertical motor ■ Follow

the arms assembly dismantling procedure. See 2. Arms assembly dismantling, page 7.

A

■ Remove

the vertical home flag by unscrewing the 2 CHC screws (A).

B A

■ Remove

the end stop by unscrewing the 2 CHC screws (B). B

■ Remove

the wire guide support by unscrewing the 2 CHC screws (C). C

C

Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1 and V2 ■ Remove

the end stop by unscrewing the 2 CHC screws.

On the reagent arm, before removing end stop screws, note the position of the screws on the end stop to reassemble it in the same way.

RAS385G - 12

ARMS

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Arms

■ Unscrew

the 3 CHC screws to release the support of the vertical motor and home sensor.

■ Remove

the vertical motor as follows: - Unscrew the 3 CHC screws and washers (A). - Then, unscrew the last CHC screw taking care not to lose the spring (B). - Disconnect the motor connector and remove the motor.

A

B

Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1 and V2 ■ Unscrew

the 3 CHC screws to release the support of the vertical motor and home sensor.

■ Remove

the vertical motor as follows: - Unscrew the 3 CHC screws and washers (A). - Then, unscrew the last CHC screw taking care not to lose the spring (B). - Disconnect the motor connector and remove the motor.

A

B

Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1 ■ There

is no spring on the last CHC screw for ABX Pentra 400 V1.

■ Replace

the vertical motor and reassemble in reverse order.

When reassembling, put threadlocking LOCTITE 222 on the end of the 4 CHC screws. First turn the 3 CHC screws and washers without tightening them. Then, turn the last CHC screw with the spring and tighten the 4 CHC screws.

Technical Manual RAA023

ARMS

RAS385G - 13

Arms

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

3.2.2. Rotation motor ■ Follow

the arms assembly dismantling procedure. See 2. Arms assembly dismantling, page 7.

■ Remove

the rotation motor as follows: - Unscrew the belt tensioner screw (A). - Then, unscrew the 4 CHC screws and washers and remove the motor.

A

■ Replace the rotation motor and reassemble

in reverse order.

When reassembling, first turn the 4 CHC screws and washers without tightening them. Then, fasten the belt tensioner screw at 90 mN.m with a dynamometric screwdriver and tighten the 4 CHC screws.

3.3.

Reagent or sample rack rail assembly replacement

To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement: see 4. Impacted adjustments, page 21.

3.3.1. General procedure ■ Follow

the arms assembly dismantling procedure. See 2. Arms assembly dismantling, page 7.

■ Remove

the arm cable. See 3.4. Arm cables replacement, page 19.

■ Unscrew

the CHC screw on the arm to remove the arm.

RAS385G - 14

ARMS

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Arms

A

■ Remove

the vertical home flag by unscrewing the 2 CHC screws (A).

B A

■ Remove

the end stop by unscrewing the 2 CHC screws (B). B

■ Remove

the wire guide support by unscrewing the 2 CHC screws (C). C

C

■ Unscrew

the 3 CHC screws to release the support of the vertical motor and home sensor.

■ Unscrew

the 3 CHC screws to remove the rack rail assembly ring.

belt

■ Loosen

the belt tensioner screw (A) as well as the 4 CHC screws and washers (B), then remove the belt.

C

B

■ Unscrew

the 3 CHC screws (C) to remove the pulley.

A

pulley

Technical Manual RAA023

ARMS

RAS385G - 15

Arms

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Remove

the rack rail assembly by pulling it downwards.

As the rack rail assembly is solidly built, you might have to pull it hard.

■ Replace

the rack rail assembly and reassemble in reverse order. When reassembling the pulley, first fasten the pulley and put the belt back. Then, fasten the belt tensioner screw at 90 mN.m with a dynamometric screwdriver and tighten the 4 CHC screws and washers.

3.3.2. Specific procedure ABX Pentra 400 V1 and V2 ■ Follow

the arms assembly dismantling procedure. See 2. Arms assembly dismantling, page 7.

■ Unscrew

the CHC screw on the arm to remove the arm.

RAS385G - 16

ARMS

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Arms

■ Remove

the vertical home flag by unscrewing the 2 CHC screws (A).

■ Remove

the end stop by unscrewing the 2 CHC screws (B).

A B

On the reagent arm, before removing the end stop screws, note the position of the screws on the end stop to reassemble it in the same way.

■ Unscrew

the 3 CHC screws to release the support of the vertical motor and home sensor.

■ Unscrew

the 3 CHC screws to remove the rack rail assembly ring.

Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1 To remove the rack rail assembly ring, unscrew the CHC screw and crosspiece as well as the 4 CHC screws. Keep the ring to replace it on the new rack rail assembly.

Technical Manual RAA023

ARMS

RAS385G - 17

Arms

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

belt

■ Loosen

the belt tensioner screw (A) as well as the 4 CHC screws and washers (B), then remove the belt.

C

B

■ Unscrew

the 3 CHC screws (C) to remove the pulley.

A

pulley

■ Remove

the rack rail assembly by pulling it downwards.

As the rack rail assembly is solidly built, you might have to pull it hard.

■ Replace

the rack rail assembly and reassemble in reverse order.

■ Because

the up/down reagent arm motor rotation way is inverted, it is mandatory to replace the reagent arm vertical motor cable with the new one (provided in the reagent rack rail assembly replacement kit). Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1 Dismantle the ring from the new rack rail assembly and replace it with the ABX Pentra 400 V1 ring. Reassemble in reverse order with the new pulley and the new vertical motor and home sensor assembly (both provided in the rack rail assembly replacement kit).

RAS385G - 18

ARMS

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Arms

When reassembling the pulley, first fasten the pulley and put the belt back. Then, fasten the belt tensioner screw at 90 mN.m with a dynamometric screwdriver and tighten the 4 CHC screws and washers. When reassembling the reagent arm, be careful to well position the CHC screws on the end stop. Some end stops have 2 holes and others have 4 holes. Refer to the following picture to know the correct positioning of the end stop screws.

End stop with 2 holes

3.4.

End stop with 4 holes

Arm cables replacement ■ Follow

the arms assembly dismantling procedure. See 2. Arms assembly dismantling, page 7.

■ Disconnect

the 2 connectors from the reagent level detection board (J2 and J4) or the connector from the sample level detection board (J2).

■

Remove the reagent or sample rack rail assembly carefully in order not to clamp and not to damage the cables. See 3.3. Reagent or sample rack rail assembly replacement, page 14.

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws of the upper arm axis frame.

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws of the lower arm axis frame.

Technical Manual RAA023

ARMS

RAS385G - 19

Arms

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Remove

the cable from the wire guides.

■ Reassemble

in reverse order.

■ To

reinstall the cable on the rack rail assembly, proceed as follows: - Place the cable into the groove of the hubcap.

- Slowly slide the arm axis frame over the cable. Be careful not to clamp the cable.

■ Be

careful not to clamp the cable in the arm notch. Ty-Rap™ must be positioned close to the arm.

■ The

Arm notch

Ty-Rap™

RAS385G - 20

ARMS

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Arms

4. Impacted adjustments

The indications in the following table have to be taken into account only if a preliminary adjustment with the TOOL, REAG TRAY ADJUSTING TOOL XDB097AS (1209149097) has been performed by the factory or during a previous intervention. If it is not the case, it is imperative to perform all the adjustments of the functional positions mentioned.

Sample arm

Needles

Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Home Home Rails motor motor sensor sensor

Whole module dismantling

Sample arm rotation Cuvette Position (O)

X

V1 only

Wash Tower Position

V1 only

R1 Pos.-Reagent Rack

V1 only

R2 Pos.-Reagent Rack

V1 only

R3 Pos.-Reagent Rack

V1 only

R1 Pos.-Cal/Ctrl Rack

V1 only

R2 Pos.-Cal/Ctrl Rack

V1 only

R3 Pos.-Cal/Ctrl Rack

V1 only

R1 on Cassette

V1 only

R2 on Cassette

V1 only

External sample

V1 only

Internal sample

V1 only

ISE sample

V1 only

X

V1 only

Sample arm vertical Low Position in Cuvette

X

X

X

Low Position in Wash Tower

X

X

X

Low Position in Sample Cup

X

X

X

Low Position in Sample tube

X

X

X

Low Position in Reagent rack

X

X

X

Low Position in Cassette

X

X

X

Low Position CalCs on reagent tray

X

X

X

Low Position in ISE Tower

X

X

X

Technical Manual RAA023

ARMS

RAS385G - 21

Arms

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Reagent arm

Needles

Vertical Horizontal Whole Vertical Horizontal Home Home Rails module motor motor sensor sensor dismantling

Reagent arm rotation Cuvette Position (O)

X

V1 only

X

V1 only

Wash Tower Position R1 Pos.-Reagent Rack R2 Pos.-Reagent Rack R3 Pos.-Reagent Rack R1 on Cassette R2 on Cassette Reagent arm vertical Low Position in Reaction Tray

X

X

X

Low Position in Wash Tower

X

X

X

Low Position in Reagent/Cal/Ctrl Rack

X

X

X

Low Position in Cassette

X

X

X

RAS385G - 22

ARMS

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Arms

5. Reagent arm adjustment

Recommendations for use: When you adjust a position of the reagent arm by changing the number of steps for this position, please note that: - for the rotation movement, a change of 12 steps is approximately equal to a move of 1 mm linear. - for the vertical movement, a change of 128 steps is approximately equal to a move of 1 mm.

5.1.

Functional positions to adjust

The following table lists the functional positions to be adjusted. Those positions are reached by three different types of adjustments: - the combination of two movements to obtain a centering or - performing an automatic "AUTO" adjustment or - performing a manual "MAN" adjustment The table also indicates the tool required to perform those adjustments. Modules Reagent Arm Rotation Sector

Position

1

1

Position

Type

Tool

Reaction tray Reagent Arm Position

Wash tower

Cuvette Position

Wash Tower Position

Reagent tray R1 Pos.-Reagent Rack for Reagent arm 2 R2 Pos.-Reagent Rack for Reagent arm Reagent Rack R3 Pos.-Reagent Rack for Reagent arm R1 Pos.-Cassette for Reagent arm R2 Pos.-Cassette for Reagent arm

Technical Manual RAA023

1 Cassette

1-A 2-A 3-A 1 2

ARMS

R1 Pos.-Reagent Rack R2 Pos.-Reagent Rack R3 Pos.-Reagent Rack R1 on Cassette R2 on Cassette

RAS385G - 23

Arms

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Modules Reagent Arm Vertical Sector

Position

Position

Type

1

10

Low position in Reaction Tray

AUTO

Low Position in Wash Tower

MAN

Low Position in Reagent/ Cal/Ctrl Rack Low position in Cassette

AUTO

Tool

Reaction tray Reagent Arm Position

Wash tower

Reagent tray

(Motor Off)

■

Before starting the position adjustments, remove the covers (see RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1): - Open the arms main cover. - Remove the external and internal sample covers, then remove the optic hatch. - Lift the mixer up, then unscrew the 2 CHC screws of the left arm cover.

- Remove the cuvettes tray plate, the cuvettes hatch and the arm bracket covers. ■ Connect ■ Press

the power supply cable and switch the instrument on.

Stop to stop the initialization. Always move the sample arm to its upper position (vertical home position) before moving the reagent arm. Always move the sample and reagent arms to their upper positions (vertical home position) before moving any tray.

RAS385G - 24

ARMS

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

5.2.

Arms

"Dummy reagent needle" installation ■ Perform

the reagent needle dismantling. See 1.1. Reagent needle replacement, page 2.

■ Install

the "Dummy reagent needle" on the reagent arm.

5.3.

Reagent arm rotation adjustment

5.3.1. Cuvette positions The cuvette position adjustments are performed with an adjustment tool: OPTICAL, SEGMENT 1XXX TEST 9200787 (1229200787). The following positions of the adjustment tool will be used: "1", "2" and "10".

1

Technical Manual RAA023

10

2

ARMS

RAS385G - 25

Arms

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Adjustment tool installation

■ Go

A

to Services > Diagnostics > Tray.

■ Select ■ Press

the Reaction radio button (A). C

Check Home (B).

■ In

the Sector and Position scrolling lists, select "1" and "1" (C).

D

■ In

the Target scrolling list, select Handling Position (D).

■ Press

Check Position (E).

■ Load

the tool into the reaction tray.

B

E

Make sure that the tool is loaded properly in the reaction tray. It is necessary to press the tool completely down in the reaction tray.

"Cuvette Position" ■ The

rotation adjustment value for the Cuvette Position position is factory adjusted on the rotation home position, therefore, the number of steps for the Cuvette Position position is 0. This is fixed and must not be changed. ■ If the rotation home position is adjusted, the other positions have to be adjusted too.

Follow this procedure to have the reagent needle centered in the cuvette.

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Tray.

■ In

the Sector and Position scrolling lists, select "1" and "1" (A).

■ In

the Target scrolling list, select Reagent Arm Position (B).

■ Press

Check Position to move the tool to the Reagent Arm Position position (C).

RAS385G - 26

ARMS

A B

C

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Go

Arms

to Services > Diagnostics > Arms.

1

3

■ Move

the sample arm to its vertical home position as follows: - Select the sample arm Vertical radio button (1) and press Check Home (2).

4

■ Move

the reagent arm to its vertical and rotation home position as follows: - Select the reagent arm Vertical radio button (3) and press Check Home (2). - Select the reagent arm Rotation radio button (4) and press Check Home (2).

5 2

The value of the rotation home offset (5) must not be modified. Adjust the rotation home position with the mechanical adjustment described below.

3 ■ Check the centering of the "Dummy reagent

needle" in the hole of the tool position "1" as follows: - Select the reagent arm Vertical radio button (3). - Press Motor Off (6). 6

- Slowly push the arm down, then check the position of the "Dummy reagent needle" in the hole of the tool position "1" arm adjustment (RAS385)

reaction tray adjustment (RAS382)

Technical Manual RAA023

ARMS

RAS385G - 27

Arms

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Loosen

the CHC screw on the reagent arm, then turn the reagent arm to center the "Dummy reagent needle" in the hole of the tool position "1".

■ Tighten

■ Press

the screw.

Check Home (2). 3

■ Check

the position again as follows: - Select the reagent arm Rotation radio button (4) and press Check Home (2). - Check the centering of the "Dummy reagent needle" again (see above).

4

■ Move

the reagent arm to its vertical and rotation home position as follows: - Select the reagent arm Vertical radio button (3) and press Check Home (2). - Select the reagent arm Rotation radio button (4) and press Check Home (2).

RAS385G - 28

2

ARMS

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Arms

5.3.2. Wash Tower Position

Follow this procedure to have the reagent needle centered in its wash tower.

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Arms.

■ Ensure ■ Ensure

that the sample arm is at its vertical home position. that the reagent arm is at its vertical and rotation home position.

■ Select

the reagent arm Rotation radio button (1).

■ In

the Position scrolling list, select Wash Tower Position (2).

■ Press

Check Position (3).

■ Check the centering of the "Dummy reagent

needle" in the wash tower as follows: - Select the reagent arm Vertical radio button (4). - Press Motor Off (5). - Slowly push the arm down, then check the position of the "Dummy reagent needle" in the wash tower. ■ Press

4

Check Home (6).

■ Adjust the position by changing the number

of steps in the Position field for the Wash Tower Position position (7). - Increase the number of steps in order to turn the reagent arm clockwise. - Decrease the number of steps in order to turn the reagent arm anticlockwise.

1 2 7 6

3

5

■ Move

the reagent arm to its rotation home position as follows: - Select the reagent arm Rotation radio button (1) and press Check Home (6).

■ Check

the position again as follows: - Press Check Position (3) and check the centering of the "Dummy reagent needle" again (see above).

■ Move

the reagent arm to its vertical and rotation home position as follows: - Select the reagent arm Vertical radio button (4) and press Check Home (6). - Select the reagent arm Rotation radio button (1) and press Check Home (6).

5.3.3. Reagent Tray Position See RAS380: Reagent tray, 4.6. Sampling in reagent tray adjustment (cassette, rack, cal/ctrl rack), page 26.

Technical Manual RAA023

ARMS

RAS385G - 29

Arms

5.4.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Reagent arm vertical adjustment

5.4.1. "Low Position in Reaction Tray"

Follow this procedure to adjust the reagent needle height in the cuvette. The point of the needle must be 2 mm above the bottom of the cuvette.

2 mm

This adjustment is made automatically using the adjustment tool.

■ Ensure ■ Ensure

■ Go

that the sample arm is at its vertical home position. that the reagent arm is at its vertical and rotation home position.

to Services > Diagnostics > Tray.

■ In

the Sector and Position scrolling lists, select "1" and "10" (A).

■ In

the Target scrolling list, select Reagent Arm Position (B).

■ Press

Check Position to move the tool to the Reagent Arm Position position (C).

RAS385G - 30

ARMS

A B

C

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Arms

1 ■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Arms.

■ Select

the reagent arm Vertical radio button (1).

2

■ Select

the Automatic adjustment check box (2). It opens the automatic adjustment function.

■ In

the Reference point scrolling list, select Fixed test segment in reaction tray (3).

■ Press

Motor Off (4) and slowly push the arm down. The "Dummy reagent needle" is manually moved down into the hole of the tool position "10", this position is used as vertical reference position.

■ Press

Measure height (5). The "Dummy reagent needle" moves to its vertical home position measuring the number of steps between the 2 positions. This measured number of steps is added to an offset to calculate the value for the Low Position in Reaction Tray position. This calculated value is displayed in the table (6). - The value is displayed in black if it is within range. - The value is displayed in red if it is out of range.

3 8 6

4

5

7

9

■ If

the adjustment value is correct, press Validate AA (7). The value is then transferred in the Position field for the Low Position in Reaction Tray position (8). If not, press Cancel AA (9).

■ Deselect the Automatic adjustment check

box.

■ Remove

the tool from the reaction tray as follows: - Go to Services > Diagnostics > Tray. - In the Sector and Position scrolling lists, select "1" and "1" (A). - In the Target scrolling list, select Handling Position (B). - Press Check Position (C). - Remove the tool from the reaction tray.

Technical Manual RAA023

ARMS

A B

C

RAS385G - 31

Arms

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

5.4.2. "Low Position in Wash Tower" Follow this procedure to adjust the reagent needle height in its wash tower. The distance between the underside of the reagent arm and the top of the wash tower must be 91 mm +/- 0.5.

91 mm +/- 0.5

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Arms. ■ Ensure ■ Ensure

that the sample arm is at its vertical home position. that the reagent arm is at its vertical and rotation home position.

■ Select

the reagent arm Rotation radio button (1).

■ In

the Position scrolling list, select Wash Tower Position (2) and press Check Position (3).

■ Select

the reagent arm Vertical radio button (4).

■ Check

the position as follows: - In the Position scrolling list, select Low Position in Wash Tower (5) and press Check Position (3). - Check the "Dummy reagent needle" height in the wash tower.

4 5 6

1 2

■ Adjust

the reagent needle height by changing the number of steps for the Low Position in Wash Tower position (6) using the + and/or - buttons. - + = Increase the number of steps to move the reagent arm down. - - = Decrease the number of steps to move the reagent arm up.

7

3

■ Move

the reagent arm to its vertical and rotation home position as follows: - Select the reagent arm Vertical radio button (4) and press Check Home (7). - Select the reagent arm Rotation radio button (1) and press Check Home (7).

RAS385G - 32

ARMS

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Arms

5.4.3. Reagent tray position Follow this procedure to adjust the reagent needle height in the vial ("Low Position in Reagent/Cal/Ctrl Rack") and in the cassette ("Low Position in Cassette"). The point of the needle must be 1 mm above the bottom of the vial and 1 mm above the bottom of the cassette.

Vial

Cassette

1 mm

1 mm

These two adjustments are made automatically, in only one go. See "ABX Cassette" (without level detection), page 33. ■ Ensure ■ Ensure

that the sample arm is at its vertical home position. that the reagent arm is at its vertical and rotation home position.

"ABX Cassette" (without level detection)

The vertical position adjustment in a cassette is the same for both R1 and R2. We will do the position adjustment for R1.

■ Move

the "Reag tray adjusting tool" to the R1 Pos.- Cassette for Reagent Arm position.

To load the "Reag tray adjusting tool" on the reagent tray and to move it to the R1 Pos.Cassette for Reagent Arm position, see RAS380: Reagent tray, 4.3. Preliminary procedure, page 23.

Technical Manual RAA023

ARMS

RAS385G - 33

Arms

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

A

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Tray.

■ Select ■ Press

the Reagent radio button (A).

Motor Off (B). B

"Reag tray adjusting tool" notch

■ Manually

move the reagent tray to position the "Reag tray adjusting tool" so as to make the adjustment easier.

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Arms.

4

■ Select

the reagent arm Rotation radio button (1).

■ In

the Position scrolling list, select R1 on Cassette (2).

■ Press

5 1

Check Position (3).

2

■ Select

the reagent arm Vertical radio button (4).

■ Select

the Automatic adjustment check box (5). It opens the automatic adjustment function.

3

■ In

the Reference point scrolling list, select ABX Cassette (6).

■ Press

6

Check Position (3).

■ Then,

use the + and/or - buttons to adjust the position of the "Dummy reagent needle". - + = Increase the number of steps to move the reagent arm down. - - = Decrease the number of steps to move the reagent arm up.

RAS385G - 34

ARMS

3

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Arms

The point of the "Dummy reagent needle" must be positioned right above the notch of the "Reag tray adjusting tool" (as shown on the following figure), this position is used as vertical reference position.

■ Press

Measure height (7). The "Dummy reagent needle" moves to its vertical home position measuring the number of steps between the 2 positions. This measured number of steps is added to 2 different offsets to calculate the value for the Low Position in Cassette position and the value for the Low Position in Reagent/ Cal/Ctrl Rack position. These calculated values are displayed in the table (8). - The values are displayed in black if they are within range. - The values are displayed in red if they are out of range.

3 10 5 8 1

■ If

the adjustment values are correct, press Validate AA (9). The values are then transferred in the Position field for the Low Position in Cassette position and for the Low Position in Reagent/Cal/Ctrl Rack position (10). If not, press Cancel AA (11).

12

4

7

9

11

■ Deselect the Automatic adjustment check

box (5). ■ Move

the reagent arm to its rotation home position as follows: - Select the reagent arm Rotation radio button (1) and press Check Home (12).

Technical Manual RAA023

ARMS

RAS385G - 35

Arms

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

6. Sample arm adjustment

Recommendations for use: When you adjust a position of the sample arm by changing the number of steps for this position, please note that: - for the rotation movement, a change of 8 steps is approximately equal to a move of 1 mm linear. - for the vertical movement, a change of 128 steps is approximately equal to a move of 1 mm. Place the reagent arm in low position in the wash tower before moving the sample arm. See 5.4.2. "Low Position in Wash Tower", page 32.

6.1.

Functional positions to adjust

The following table lists the functional positions to be adjusted. Those positions are reached by three different types of adjustments: - the combination of two movements to obtain a centering or - performing an automatic "AUTO" adjustment or - performing a manual "MAN" adjustment The table also indicates the tool required to perform those adjustments.

RAS385G - 36

ARMS

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Arms

Modules Sample Arm Rotation Sector

Position

1

2

Position

Type

Tool

Reaction tray Sample Arm Position

Cuvette Position

Wash tower

Wash Tower Position

Reagent tray R1 Pos.-Reagent Rack for Sample arm 2 R2 Pos.-Reagent Rack for Sample arm Reagent Rack R3 Pos.-Reagent Rack for Sample arm

1-A 2-A 3-A

R1 Pos.-Reagent Rack R2 Pos.-Reagent Rack R3 Pos.-Reagent Rack

R1 Pos.-Cal/Ctrl Rack for Sample arm 3 R2 Pos.-Cal/Ctrl Rack for Sample arm Cal/Ctrl Rack R3 Pos.-Cal/Ctrl Rack for Sample arm

1 2 3

R1 Pos.-Cal/Ctrl Rack R2 Pos.-Cal/Ctrl Rack R3 Pos.-Cal/Ctrl Rack

1 Cassette

1 2

R1 on Cassette R2 on Cassette

External Sampling Pos.

1

2

External Sample

Internal Sampling Pos.

1

1

Internal Sample

R1 Pos.-Cassette for Sample arm R2 Pos.-Cassette for Sample arm Sample tray

ISE Tower

ISE Sample

Modules Sample Arm Vertical Sector

Position

1

10

Position

Type

Tool

Reaction tray Sample Arm Position

Wash tower

Low Position in Cuvette

AUTO

Low Position in Wash tower

MAN

Reagent tray Low Position in Reagent rack Low Position in Cassette Low Position CalCs on reagent tray

(Motor Off)

AUTO

Sample tray (Motor Off)

Low Position in Sample Cup Low Position in Sample Tube

1

ISE Tower

Technical Manual RAA023

Low Position in ISE Tower

ARMS

RAS385G - 37

Arms

6.2.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

"Dummy sample needle" installation ■ Perform

the sample needle dismantling procedure. See 1.2. Sample needle replacement, page 4.

■ Install

the "Dummy sample needle" on the sample arm.

6.3.

Sample arm rotation adjustment

6.3.1. Cuvette positions Adjustment tool installation The cuvette position adjustments are performed with the adjustment tool already used for the reagent arm.

1

10

2

It is necessary to load this adjustment tool in the reaction tray. Follow the procedure described in Adjustment tool installation, page 26.

RAS385G - 38

ARMS

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Arms

"Cuvette Position" ■ The

rotation adjustment value for the Cuvette Position position is factory adjusted on the rotation home position, therefore, the number of steps for the Cuvette Position position is 0. This is fixed and must not be changed. ■ If the rotation home position is adjusted, the other positions have to be adjusted too.

Follow this procedure to have the sample needle centered in the cuvette.

■ Go

A

to Services > Diagnostics > Tray.

■ Select ■ Press

the Reaction radio button (A).

C

Check Home (B).

■ In

the Sector and Position scrolling lists, select "1" and "2" (C).

D

■ In

the Target scrolling list, select Sample Arm Position (D).

B

E

■ Press

Check Position to move the tool to the Sample Arm Position position (E).

1 ■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Arms.

■ Move

the sample arm to its vertical and rotation home position as follows: - Select the sample arm Vertical radio button (1) and press Check Home (2). - Select the sample arm Rotation radio button (3) and press Check Home (2).

4 3 2

The value of the rotation home offset (4) must not be modified. Adjust the rotation home position with the mechanical adjustment described below.

Technical Manual RAA023

ARMS

RAS385G - 39

Arms

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

1 ■ Check the centering of the "Dummy sample

needle" on the mobile part of the tool position "2" as follows: - Select the sample arm Vertical radio button (1). - Press Motor Off (5).

5

- Slowly push the arm down, then check the position of the "Dummy sample needle" on the mobile part of the tool position "2".

arm adjustment

■ Loosen

the CHC screw on the sample arm, then turn the sample arm to center the "Dummy sample needle" on the mobile part of the tool position "2".

■ Tighten

■ Press

the screw.

Check Home (2). 1

■ Check

the position again as follows: - Select the sample arm Rotation radio button (3) and press Check Home (2). - Check the centering of the "Dummy sample needle" again (see above).

■ Move

the sample arm to its vertical and rotation home position as follows: - Select the sample arm Vertical radio button (1) and press Check Home (2). - Select the sample arm Rotation radio button (3) and press Check Home (2).

RAS385G - 40

3 2

ARMS

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Arms

6.3.2. Wash Tower Position

Follow this procedure to have the sample needle centered in its wash tower.

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Arms.

Ensure that the sample arm is at its vertical and rotation home position.

■ Select

the sample arm Rotation radio button (1).

■ In

the Position scrolling list, select Wash Tower Position (2).

■ Press

Check Position (3).

■ Check the centering of the "Dummy sample

needle" in the wash tower as follows: - Select the sample arm Vertical radio button (4). - Press Motor Off (5). - Slowly push the arm down, then check the position of the "Dummy sample needle" in the wash tower. ■ Press

4

Check Home (6).

■ Adjust the position by changing the number

of steps in the Position field for the Wash Tower Position position (7). - Increase the number of steps in order to turn the sample arm clockwise. - Decrease the number of steps in order to turn the sample arm anticlockwise. ■ Move

the sample arm to its rotation home position as follows: - Select the sample arm Rotation radio button (1) and press Check Home (6).

1 2 6

3

5 7

■ Check

the position again as follows: Press Check Position (3) and check the centering of the "Dummy sample needle" again (see above).

■ Move

the sample arm to its vertical and rotation home position as follows: - Select the sample arm Vertical radio button (4) and press Check Home (6). - Select the sample arm Rotation radio button (1) and press Check Home (6).

6.3.3. Reagent Tray Position See RAS380: Reagent tray, 4.6. Sampling in reagent tray adjustment (cassette, rack, cal/ctrl rack), page 26.

Technical Manual RAA023

ARMS

RAS385G - 41

Arms

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

6.3.4. Sample Tray Position See RAS381: Sample tray, 4.5. Sampling in sample tray adjustment, page 22.

6.3.5. ISE Position

Follow this procedure to center the sample needle in the ISE mix cup.

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Arms.

Ensure that the sample arm is at its vertical and rotation home position.

■ Select

the sample arm Rotation radio button (1).

4

■ In

the Position scrolling list, select ISE Sample (2).

■ Press

1

Check Position (3).

■ Check the centering of the "Dummy sample

2

needle" in the ISE mix cup as follows: - Select the sample arm Vertical radio button (4). - Press Motor Off (5).

3

- Slowly push the arm down, then check the position of the "Dummy sample needle" in the ISE mix cup.

RAS385G - 42

ARMS

5

+ -

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Press

Arms

Check Home (6).

■ Adjust the position by changing the number

of steps in the Position field for the ISE Sample position (7). - Increase the number of steps in order to turn the sample arm clockwise. - Decrease the number of steps in order to turn the sample arm anticlockwise.

4

■ Move

the sample arm to its rotation home position as follows: - Select the sample arm Rotation radio button (1) and press Check Home (6).

1

■ Check

the position again as follows: - Press Check Position (3) and check the centering of the "Dummy sample needle" again (see above).

6

3 7

■ Move

the sample arm to its vertical and rotation home position as follows: - Select the sample arm Vertical radio button (4) and press Check Home (6). - Select the sample arm Rotation radio button (1) and press Check Home (6).

6.4.

Sample arm vertical adjustment

6.4.1. "Low Position in Cuvette" Follow this procedure to adjust the sample needle in the cuvette. The point of the needle must be 2 mm above the bottom of the cuvette.

2 mm

This adjustment is made automatically using the adjustment tool.

Ensure that the sample arm is at its vertical and rotation home position.

Technical Manual RAA023

ARMS

RAS385G - 43

Arms

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Tray.

A

■ In

the Sector and Position scrolling lists, select "1" and "10" (A).

B

■ In

the Target scrolling list, select Sample Arm Position (B).

■ Press

Check Position to move the tool to the Sample Arm Position position (C).

C

1 ■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Arms.

2

■ Select the sample arm Vertical radio button

(1). ■ Select

the Automatic adjustment check box (2). It opens the automatic adjustment function.

■ In

the Reference point scrolling list, select Fixed test segment in reaction tray (3). 3

■ Press

Motor Off (4) and slowly push the arm down. The "Dummy sample needle" is manually moved down into the hole of the tool position "10", this position is used as vertical reference position.

4

Take care of the shock detection. It should not be activated otherwise the adjustment won’t be correct.

RAS385G - 44

ARMS

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Arms

■ Press

Measure height (5). The "Dummy sample needle" moves to its vertical home position measuring the number of steps between the 2 positions. This measured number of steps is added to an offset to calculate the value for the Low Position in Cuvette position. This calculated value is displayed in the table (6). - The value is displayed in black if it is within range. - The value is displayed in red if it is out of range.

2 6 8 5

■ If

the adjustment value is correct, press Validate AA (7). The value is then transferred in the Position field for the Low Position in Cuvette position (8). If not, press Cancel AA (9).

9

7

■ Deselect the Automatic adjustment check

box (2).

■ Remove

the tool from the reaction tray as follows: - Go to Services > Diagnostics > Tray. - In the Sector and Position scrolling lists, select "1" and "1" (A). - In the Target scrolling list, select Handling Position (B). - Press Check Position (C). - Remove the tool from the reaction tray.

Technical Manual RAA023

ARMS

A B

C

RAS385G - 45

Arms

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

6.4.2. "Low Position in Wash Tower" Follow this procedure to adjust the sample needle height in its wash tower. The distance between the underside of the sample arm and the top of the wash tower must be 111 mm +/- 0.5.

111 mm +/- 0.5

Ensure that the sample arm is at its vertical and rotation home position.

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Arms.

■ Select

the sample arm Rotation radio button (1).

■ In

the Position scrolling list, select Wash Tower Position (2) and press Check Position (3).

■ Select the sample arm Vertical radio button

(4). ■ Check

the position as follows: - In the Position scrolling list, select Low Position in Wash Tower (5). - Press Check Position (3) and check the "Dummy sample needle" height in the wash tower.

4 5

■ Adjust

the reagent needle height by changing the number of steps for the Low Position in Wash Tower position (6) using the + and/or - buttons. - + = Increase the number of steps to move the reagent arm down. - - = Decrease the number of steps to move the reagent arm up.

1 7

3

6

2

■ Move

the sample arm to its vertical and rotation home position as follows: - Select the sample arm Vertical radio button (4) and press Check Home (7). - Select the sample arm Rotation radio button (1) and press Check Home (7).

RAS385G - 46

ARMS

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Arms

6.4.3. Reagent Tray Position Follow this procedure to adjust the sample needle height in the vial ("Low Position in Reagent rack"), in the sample cup ("Low position CalCs on reagent tray") and in the cassette ("Low Position in Cassette"). The point of the needle must 1 mm above the bottom of the vial, 1 mm above the bottom of the sample cup and 1 mm above the bottom of the cassette.

Vial

Sample cup

Cassette

1 mm

1 mm

1 mm

These three adjustments are made automatically, in only one go. See "ABX Cassette" (without level detection), page 47.

Ensure that the sample arm is at its vertical and rotation home position.

"ABX Cassette" (without level detection)

The vertical position adjustment in a cassette is the same for both R1 and R2. We will do the position adjustment for R1.

■ Move

the "Reag tray adjusting tool" to the R1 Pos.- Cassette for Sample Arm position.

To load the "Reag tray adjusting tool" on the reagent tray and to move it to the R1 Pos.Cassette for Sample Arm position, see RAS380: Reagent tray, 4.3. Preliminary procedure, page 23.

Technical Manual RAA023

ARMS

RAS385G - 47

Arms

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

A

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Tray.

■ Select ■ Press

the Reagent radio button (A).

Motor Off (B). B

■ Manually

move the reagent tray to position the "Reag tray adjusting tool" so as to make the adjustment easier.

"Reag tray adjusting tool" notch ■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Arms. 4

■ Select

the sample arm Rotation radio button (1).

5

■ In

the Position scrolling list, select R1 on Cassette (2).

■ Press

Check Position (3). 1

■ Select the sample arm Vertical radio button

(4).

3

■ Select

the Automatic adjustment check box (5). It opens the automatic adjustment function.

2

■ In

the Reference point scrolling list, select ABX Cassette (6).

■ Press

Check Position (3).

6

■ Then,

use the + and/or - buttons to adjust the position of the "Dummy sample needle". - + = Increase the number of steps to move the sample arm down. - - = Decrease the number of steps to move the sample arm up.

RAS385G - 48

ARMS

3

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Arms

The point of the "Dummy sample needle" must be positioned right above the notch of the "Reag tray adjusting tool" (as shown on the following figure), this position is used as vertical reference position.

Take care of the shock detection. It should not be activated otherwise the adjustment won’t be correct. ■ Press

Measure height (7). The "Dummy sample needle" moves to its vertical home position measuring the number of steps between the 2 positions. This measured number of steps is added to 3 different offsets to calculate the value for the Low Position in Cassette position, the value for the Low position CalCs on reagent tray position and the value for the Low Position in Reagent rack position. These calculated values are displayed in the table (8). - The values are displayed in black if they are within range. - The values are displayed in red if they are out of range.

5 8 10

■ If

the adjustment values are correct, press Validate AA (9). The values are then transferred in the Position field for the Low Position in 12 Cassette position, for the Low position CalCs on reagent tray position and for the Low Position in Reagent rack position (10). If not, press Cancel AA (11).

■ Deselect

1 7

9

11

the Automatic adjustment check

box (5). ■ Move

the sample arm to its rotation home position as follows: - Select the sample arm Rotation radio button (1) and press Check Home (12).

■ Remove

the "Reag tray adjusting tool" from the reagent tray.

Technical Manual RAA023

ARMS

RAS385G - 49

Arms

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

6.4.4. Sample Tray Position Follow this procedure to adjust the sample needle height in the sample cup ("Low Position in Sample Cup") and in the sample tube ("Low Position in Sample Tube"). The point of the needle must be 1 mm above the bottom of the sample cup and 1 mm above the bottom of the sample tube.

Sample cup

Sample tube

1 mm

1 mm

These two adjustments are made automatically, in only one go. See "Sample tube rack" (without level detection), page 50.

Ensure that the sample arm is at its vertical and rotation home position.

"Sample tube rack" (without level detection)

The vertical position adjustment in a sample tube is valid and is the same for both the External Sample and Internal Sample positions. We will do the position adjustment for the Internal Sample position.

■ Load

a sample rack on the sample tray in position "1".

■ Move

the position "1" of this sample rack to the Internal Sampling Pos. position.

To load a sample rack on the sample tray in position "1" and to move the position "1" of this sample rack to the Internal Sampling Pos. position, see RAS381: Sample tray, 4.2. Preliminary procedure, page 17.

RAS385G - 50

ARMS

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Arms

A

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Tray.

■ Select ■ Press

the Sample radio button (A).

Motor Off (B). B

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Arms. 4

■ Select

the sample arm Rotation radio button (1).

■ In the Position scrolling list, select

5

Internal

Sample (2). ■ Press

Check Position (3). 1

■ Select the sample arm Vertical radio button

(4).

3

■ Select

the Automatic adjustment check box (5). It opens the automatic adjustment function.

2

■ In

the Reference point scrolling list, select Sample tube rack (6).

■ Press

Check Position (3).

6

■ Then,

use the + and/or - buttons to adjust the position of the "Dummy sample needle". - + = Increase the number of steps to move the sample arm down. - - = Decrease the number of steps to move the sample arm up.

3

The point of the "Dummy sample needle" must be positioned right above the upper part of the sample rack (as shown on the following picture), this position is used as vertical reference position. Manually move the sample tray to position the sample rack so as to make the adjustment easier.

Technical Manual RAA023

ARMS

RAS385G - 51

Arms

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Take care of the shock detection. It should not be activated otherwise the adjustment won’t be correct.

■ Press

Measure height (7). The "Dummy sample needle" moves to its vertical home position measuring the number of steps between the 2 positions. This measured number of steps is added to 2 different offsets to calculate the value for the Low Position in Sample Tube position and the value for the Low Position in Sample Cup position. These calculated values are displayed in the table (8). - The values are displayed in black if they are within range. - The values are displayed in red if they are out of range.

5 8 10 1

■ If

the adjustment values are correct, press Validate AA (9). The values are then transferred in the Position field for the Low Position in Sample Tube position and for the Low Position in Sample Cup position (10). If not, press Cancel AA (11).

12

7

9

11

■ Deselect the Automatic adjustment check

box (5). ■ Move

the sample arm to its rotation home position as follows: - Select the sample arm Rotation radio button (1) and press Check Home (12).

RAS385G - 52

ARMS

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Arms

6.4.5. "Low Position in ISE Tower" Follow this procedure to adjust the sample needle height in the ISE mix cup. The distance between the underside of the sample arm and the top of the ISE mix cup must be 121 mm +/- 0.5.

121 mm +/- 0.5

This adjustment is made automatically proceeding as follows.

Ensure that the sample arm is at its vertical and rotation home position.

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Arms.

■ Select

the sample arm Rotation radio button (1).

5

■ In

the Position scrolling list, select ISE Sample (2).

■ Press

Check Position (3).

■ Press

Motor Off (4).

6

1

■ Select the sample arm Vertical radio button

3

(5).

4

2

■ Select

the Automatic adjustment check box (6). It opens the automatic adjustment function.

■ In

the Reference point scrolling list, select ISE (7).

■ Press

Check Position (3).

■ Then,

use the + and/or - buttons to adjust the position of the "Dummy sample needle". The end of the "Dummy sample needle" must be positioned right above the upper part of the ISE mix cup, this position is used as vertical reference position. - + = Increase the number of steps to move the sample arm down. - - = Decrease the number of steps to move the sample arm up.

Technical Manual RAA023

ARMS

7

3

RAS385G - 53

Arms

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Take care of the shock detection. It should not be activated otherwise the adjustment won’t be correct.

■ Press

Measure height (8). The "Dummy sample needle" moves to its vertical home position measuring the number of steps between the 2 positions. This measured number of steps is added to an offset to calculate the value for the Low Position in ISE Tower position. This calculated value is displayed in the table (9). - The value is displayed in black if it is within range. - The value is displayed in red if it is out of range.

6 9 11

8

■ If

the adjustment value is correct, press Validate AA (10). The value is then transferred in the Position field for the Low Position in ISE Tower position (11). If not, press Cancel AA (12).

10

12

■ Deselect the Automatic adjustment check

box (6). ■ Check

the position as follows: - In the Position scrolling list, select Low Position in ISE Tower (13). - Press Check Position (3) and check the "Dummy sample needle" height in the ISE mix cup.

5 13

■ Move

the sample arm to its vertical and rotation home position as follows: - Select the sample arm Vertical radio button (5) and press Check Home (14). - Select the sample arm Rotation radio button (1) and press Check Home (14).

■

1 14

3

Remove the "Dummy sample needle" and the "Dummy reagent needle" and put the sample and reagent needles back.

RAS385G - 54

ARMS

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Arms

7. Level detection check 7.1.

Reagent arm

The principle of this procedure is to move the reagent arm down until it detects the liquid in the vial.

■ Half-fill ■ Place

a "15 mL vial" with distilled water.

this vial on R1 / A on a reagent rack.

■ Move

the position R1 / A of this reagent rack to the R1 Pos.- Reagent Rack for Reagent Arm position.

R1

To load a reagent rack on the reagent tray and to move the position R1 / A of this reagent rack to the R1 Pos.- Reagent Rack for Reagent Arm position, see RAS380: Reagent tray, page 1.

■ Ensure ■ Ensure

Technical Manual RAA023

that the sample arm is at its vertical and rotation home position. that the reagent arm is at its vertical and rotation home position.

ARMS

RAS385G - 55

Arms

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Arms.

■ Select

the reagent arm Rotation radio button (A).

■ In

the Position scrolling list, select R1 Pos. - Reagent Rack (B).

■ Press

Check Position to move the reagent arm right above the filled vial on the reagent tray (C).

■ Select

the reagent arm Vertical radio button (D).

■ In

the Position scrolling list, select Low Position in Reagent/Cal/Ctrl Rack (E), then note the number of steps corresponding to this position (F).

D E

■ Select the Reagent Detection radio button

F

(G). A

■ Let

the Sensibility field at its default value (= 0). This field is used to set the sensitivity level used during the reagent level detection. See Section 3: Technology, 4.1. Reagent level detection, page 3-22.

B G

the Max Step field, type the number of steps previously noted (H).

J

I

■ In

K

H

C

■ Press

Level detection (I). The reagent arm moves down until the reagent needle touches the water.

■ Make

sure that the Level detection light turns green (J).

■ Move

the reagent arm to its vertical and rotation home position as follows: - Select the reagent arm Vertical radio button (D) and press Check Home (K). - Select the reagent arm Rotation radio button (A) and press Check Home (K).

In case of a problem, see Section 4: Electric and electronic principles, 3.3. Reagent level detection board, page 4-20 to check the reagent level detection board (LEDs state).

RAS385G - 56

ARMS

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

7.2.

Arms

Sample arm

The principle of this procedure is to move the sample arm down until it detects the liquid in the vial.

■ Half-fill ■ Place

a "15 mL vial" with distilled water.

this vial on R1 / A on a reagent rack.

■ Move

the position R1 / A of this reagent rack to the R1 Pos.- Reagent Rack for Sample Arm position.

R1

To load a reagent rack on the reagent tray and to move the position R1 / A of this reagent rack to the R1 Pos.- Reagent Rack for Sample Arm position, see RAS380: Reagent tray, page 1.

■ Ensure

that the sample arm is at its vertical and rotation home position. that the reagent arm is in its wash tower. See 5.4.2. "Low Position in Wash Tower", page 32.

■ Ensure

Technical Manual RAA023

ARMS

RAS385G - 57

Arms

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Arms.

■ Select

the sample arm Rotation radio button (1).

■ In

the Position scrolling list, select R1 Pos. - Reagent Rack (2).

■ Press

Check Position to move the sample arm right above the filled vial on the reagent tray (3).

■ Select the sample arm Vertical radio button

(4).

4

■ In

the Position scrolling list, select Low Position in Reagent rack (5), then note the number of steps corresponding to this position (6).

■ Select

5 6

the Sample Detection radio button 1

(7). ■ In

the Max Step field, type the number of steps previously noted (8).

■ Press

Level detection (9). The sample arm moves down until the sample needle touches the water.

2 7 8

11

9

10

3

■ Make

sure that the Level detection light turns green (10).

■ Move

the sample arm to its vertical and rotation home position as follows: - Select the sample arm Vertical radio button (4) and press Check Home (11). - Select the sample arm Rotation radio button (1) and press Check Home (11).

In case of a problem, see Section 4: Electric and electronic principles, 3.2. Sample level detection board XAA486AS (1209108486), page 4-18 to check the sample level detection board.

RAS385G - 58

ARMS

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Arms

8. Shock detection check

The shock detection is available for the sample arm only.

The principle of this procedure is to move the sample arm down until it detects the bottom of the vial.

■ Replace ■ Go

the hall-filled vial on the reagent rack with an empty one.

to Services > Diagnostics > Arms.

■ Follow

the same procedure as that for the sample arm level detection but, in the Max Step field, add some steps (100 steps by 100 steps) to the number of steps previously noted (1).

■ Press

Level detection (2). The sample arm moves this number of steps down. - If the needle touches the bottom of the vial before running this number of steps, it will stop and the Shock Detection light turns green (3). - If the needle doesn’t touch the bottom of the vial, the Shock Detection light stays red (3). In this case, it is necessary to add some steps in the Max Step field (1) again and press Level detection (2) again.

■ Put

3 1

2

the covers back.

Technical Manual RAA023

ARMS

RAS385G - 59

Arms

RAS385G - 60

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

ARMS

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS384F

Cuvette changer In this procedure, specific instructions are given for previous ABX Pentra 400 hardware versions: ■ V1 corresponds to instruments with serial numbers below 2000.

RAS384: Cuvette changer

Concerns Cuvette changer racks dismantling Cuvette changer parts replacement Impacted adjustments Adjustments

Required tools Hexagonal keys Torx key Phillips screwdriver TOOL, DYNAMO. SCREWDRIVER A302 MAG019A (1207851019) TOOL, TEST SEGMENT XDA893A (1209131893)

Required products None

Intervention time N/A

Frequency On request

Specific kit or consumables Cuvette segments

Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator. Local or national regulations must be applied in all the operations.

Cuvette changer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

1. Cuvette changer racks dismantling

In order not to damage the needles during dismantling, disable the arms (vertical and rotation movements) and put them on a sample cup rack over the reagent tray as shown on the following picture.

■ Switch

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

■ Remove

the covers (see RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1): - Open the arms main cover. - Remove the loader cover, the cuvettes hatch, the connection hatch and the cuvettes cover. - Lift the mixer assembly up by pressing the red button. - Remove the optic hatch, the left arm cover, the cuvettes tray plate and the mixer plate.

■ Remove

the unload rack.

■ Remove

the load rack as follows: - Open the 2 adhesive collars and release the wires of the "rack used segment full" sensor. - Disconnect the "rack used segment full" sensor (C19) and unscrew the 6 CHC screws.

"rack used segment full" sensor

RAS384F - 2

CUVETTE CHANGER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Cuvette changer

- Disconnect the ground wire. - Open the adhesive collar and release the wires of the "new segment available" sensor. It is not necessary to disconnect this connector because the wires are long enough to put the load rack close to the instrument.

"new segment available" sensor

- Lightly lift the load rack up to disconnect the cuvette motion motor (M32) and the cuvette motion home sensor (C37), located under the load rack. - Remove the load rack.

On the instruments equipped with centering pins on the load rack support, the readjusting is not mandatory. For the other instruments: see 3. Impacted adjustments, page 30.

■ Remove

the reaction tray cover by unscrewing the 3 CHC screws and washers.

Technical Manual RAA023

CUVETTE CHANGER

RAS384F - 3

Cuvette changer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

2. Cuvette changer parts replacement 2.1.

Cuvette changer

2.1.1. Home sensors replacement Horizontal home sensor

To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement: see 3. Impacted adjustments, page 30.

■ Switch

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

■ Remove

the rear plate by unscrewing the 6 CHC screws to access the cuvette changer horizontal home sensor.

■ Cut

the Ty-Rap™ maintaining the motor wires and the home sensor wires.

■ Disconnect the motor connector (A) and the

C A

motor/home sensor connector (B). ■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws to remove the home sensor and its wires (C). B

■ Replace

the home sensor and reassemble in reverse order.

■ Make

sure that the home flag passes in the middle of the home sensor and does not touch the home sensor.

RAS384F - 4

CUVETTE CHANGER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Cuvette changer

Vertical sensors

To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement: see 3. Impacted adjustments, page 30.

■ Switch

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

■ Remove

the covers (see RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1): - Open the arms main cover. - Remove the loader cover, the cuvettes hatch, the connection hatch and the cuvettes cover.

■ Replace the cuvette changer vertical sensor (home and/or low position) by following the corresponding

procedure. 1. Vertical home sensor

■ Cut

the Ty-Rap™ maintaining the wires of the "new segment available" sensor.

■ Disconnect

A

the home sensor connector

(C17). ■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws to remove the home sensor and its wires (A).

■ Replace

the home sensor and reassemble in reverse order. C17

2. Vertical low position sensor

■ Cut

the Ty-Rap™ maintaining the wires of the vertical low position sensor.

■ Disconnect

the low position sensor connector (C61).

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws to remove the low position sensor and its wires (A).

C61

■ Replace

the home sensor and reassemble in reverse order.

■ Replace

the low position sensor and reassemble in reverse order. A

When reassembling, fasten the low position sensor in its lowest position.

Technical Manual RAA023

CUVETTE CHANGER

RAS384F - 5

Cuvette changer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

2.1.2. Horizontal motor replacement

To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement: see 3. Impacted adjustments, page 30.

■ Switch

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

■ Remove

the rear plate by unscrewing the 6 CHC screws to access the cuvette changer horizontal motor.

motor connector ■ Disconnect ■ Unscrew

the motor connector.

the 2 CHC screws to remove the

motor. ■ Replace

the motor and reassemble in reverse order. motor screws

When reassembling, take care that the motor connector is correctly positioned.

RAS384F - 6

CUVETTE CHANGER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Cuvette changer

■ Adjust

the belt tensioner screw as follows: - Loosen the 2 CHC screws of the belt support. - Loosen the belt tensioner screw, then turn it at 90 mN.m (not for ABX Pentra 400 V1) with a dynamometric screwdriver. - Tighten the 2 CHC screws of the belt support.

belt support screws

belt tensioner screw

2.1.3. Vertical motor replacement

To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement: see 3. Impacted adjustments, page 30.

General procedure ■ Switch

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

■ Remove

the covers (see RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1): Remove the loader cover, the cuvettes hatch, the connection hatch and the cuvettes cover.

■ Remove ■

the unload rack.

Remove the rear plates by unscrewing the 14 CHC screws to access the cuvette changer vertical motor.

Technical Manual RAA023

CUVETTE CHANGER

RAS384F - 7

Cuvette changer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

V5 V4

■ Dismantle

the manifold as follows: - Disconnect the valves 3, 4 and 5 of the manifold, at the rear of the instrument.

V3

- Unscrew the 4 CHC screws and remove the manifold.

■ Disconnect

the motor connector (M15).

■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws maintaining the

motor.

RAS384F - 8

CUVETTE CHANGER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Cuvette changer

■ Release

the motor and the endless screw as follows: - Block the grabber carriage up with one hand. - With the other hand, release the endless screw from the cuvette changer assembly by turning the endless screw clockwise.

2 - Remove the motor and the endless screw.

1

motor connector position ■ Replace

the motor and the endless screw and reassemble in reverse order.

■ Take ■ Take

Technical Manual RAA023

care that the motor connector is correctly positioned. care not to clamp the tubings when reassembling the manifold.

CUVETTE CHANGER

RAS384F - 9

Cuvette changer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Specific procedure ABX Pentra 400 V1 ■ Switch

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

■ Remove

the covers (see RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1): Remove the loader cover, the cuvettes hatch, the connection hatch and the cuvettes cover.

■ Remove

the unload rack.

■ Remove

the rear plates by unscrewing the 14 CHC screws to access the cuvette changer vertical

motor.

V5 V4

■ Dismantle

the manifold as follows: - Disconnect the valves 3, 4 and 5 of the manifold, at the rear of the instrument.

V3

- Unscrew the 4 CHC screws and remove the manifold.

RAS384F - 10

CUVETTE CHANGER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Cuvette changer

■ Loosen

the upper screw of the motor/ endless screw coupling.

■ Disconnect

the motor connector (M15) and unscrew the 2 CHC screws maintaining the motor.

■ Remove

the motor assembly taking care not to drop the endless screw down.

■ Replace

the motor assembly and reassemble in reverse order.

■ Ensure that you tighten the upper screw of the motor/endless screw coupling in the endless

screw notch. care that the motor connector is correctly positioned. ■ Take care not to clamp the tubings when reassembling the manifold. ■ Take

Technical Manual RAA023

CUVETTE CHANGER

RAS384F - 11

Cuvette changer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

2.1.4. Silent blocks replacement

To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement: see 3. Impacted adjustments, page 30.

■ Switch

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

■ Remove

the covers (see RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1): - Open the arms main cover. - Remove the loader cover.

■ Remove ■ Check

the unload rack.

if the cuvette changer carriage assembly has two or four silent blocks.

4 silent blocks

2 silent blocks

■ If

the cuvette changer carriage assembly already has four silent blocks, replace them by referring to the General procedure: four silent blocks, page 12. ■ If the cuvette changer carriage assembly has only two silent blocks, you must install the whole KIT, SILENT BLOCK CARRIAGE ASSY XEC205AS (1209179205) by referring to the Specific procedure: two silent blocks, page 13.

General procedure: four silent blocks

■ Unscrew the 4 CHC screws M3x6 of the nut

support.

RAS384F - 12

CUVETTE CHANGER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Lift

Cuvette changer

up the nut support.

■ Unscrew

the 4 silent blocks to replace

them.

Specific procedure: two silent blocks ■ Remove

the mother board cover. See RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1. B

■ Unscrew

the left screw of the main cover switch support and loosen the right screw.

■ Turn

the main cover switch support (A) to access the 2 screws of the cuvette changer upper plate.

■ Unscrew

the 2 screws of the cuvette changer upper plate (B).

A

J20

■ Disconnect

the cuvette changer horizontal motor from the mother board (J20).

■ Cut

the Ty-Rap™ maintaining the motor wires and release the wires.

Technical Manual RAA023

CUVETTE CHANGER

RAS384F - 13

Cuvette changer

■ Open

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

the adhesive collar (A).

■ Disconnect

the connector of the "new segment available" sensor (B).

B

C

■ Disconnect

the 2 connectors of the "rack used segment in position" sensor (C).

free connector

A

When reassembling, take care to the position of the 2 connectors of the "rack used segment in position" sensor.

C ■ Cut

the Ty-Rap™ maintaining the wires of both vertical sensors (A).

■ Disconnect

the 2 vertical sensors (B).

■ Cut

the 3 Ty-Raps™ maintaining the cuvette changer strand.

■ Open the adhesive collar (C) and release the

B

strand from the cuvette changer course. A

■ Unscrew

the 5 screws of the cuvette changer upper plate.

RAS384F - 14

CUVETTE CHANGER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Cuvette changer

■ Unscrew

the 3 screws of the cuvette changer upper plate and remove the plate.

■ Remove

the cuvette changer carriage assembly.

■ Unscrew

the 3 CHC screws M4x6 of the carriage assembly plate.

■ Unscrew

the 3 CHC screws M3x6 of the grabber rail.

■ Separate

the carriage assembly plate from the carriage assembly block.

Technical Manual RAA023

CUVETTE CHANGER

RAS384F - 15

Cuvette changer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Remove

the two angle brackets from the carriage assembly block.

A

B

■ Unscrew

the 3 CHC screws of the nut (A) and remove it from its support.

■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws of the anti-twist

bearing (B) and remove it from the carriage assembly block.

■

Take the new carriage assembly block (provided in the KIT, SILENT BLOCK CARRIAGE ASSY XEC205AS (1209179205)). - Fasten the 4 new silent blocks. - Take the new nut support and install the nut in its support. - Reassemble the nut and its support without tightening the support on the new carriage assembly block. - Reassemble the anti-twist bearing without tightening it. - Reassemble in reverse order the two angle brackets and the carriage assembly plate.

■ Reassemble ■ Manually ■ Now,

RAS384F - 16

in reverse order the cuvette changer carriage assembly.

move the cuvette changer carriage assembly in low position.

tighten the 4 CHC screws M3x6 of the nut support and the anti-twist bearing.

CUVETTE CHANGER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Cuvette changer

2.1.5. Grabber rail + carriage replacement

To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement: see 3. Impacted adjustments, page 30.

Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1 To replace the grabber rail + carriage on the ABX Pentra 400 V1, you have to replace the complete grabber assembly by following the procedure Specific procedure ABX Pentra 400 V1, page 19.

General procedure ■

Follow the cuvette changer racks dismantling procedure. See 1. Cuvette changer racks dismantling, page 2.

■ Loosen

the 2 CHC screws maintaining the grabber on the belt.

■ Unscrew the 4 CHC screws maintaining the

grabber on its rail.

■ Unscrew

the 3 CHC screws of the grabber rail and remove the rail with its carriage.

In order not to lose the balls, never remove the carriage from the rail.

Technical Manual RAA023

CUVETTE CHANGER

RAS384F - 17

Cuvette changer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Replace

and reassemble in reverse order the grabber rail as follows: - Take care to the position of the rail: the end of the rail must be at the level of the end stop. - Push on the middle of the rail (as indicated by the arrow on the picture) when tightening the 3 CHC screws to respect the balance.

■ Reassemble

RAS384F - 18

end stop

in reverse order.

CUVETTE CHANGER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Cuvette changer

Specific procedure ABX Pentra 400 V1 ■ Follow

the cuvette changer racks dismantling procedure. See 1. Cuvette changer racks dismantling,

page 2.

Torx screw of grabber rail ■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws maintaining the

horizontal home flag on the grabber.

Torx screw of grabber rail ■ Unscrew

the 2 Torx screws of the grabber rail and remove the grabber assembly (grabber + rail + carriage).

■ Dismantle ■ Replace

the horizontal home flag from the new grabber assembly.

the grabber assembly and reassemble in reverse order.

When reassembling, take care to the position of the rail: the end of the rail must be at the level of the plate.

Technical Manual RAA023

CUVETTE CHANGER

RAS384F - 19

Cuvette changer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

2.1.6. Grabber spring replacement

To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement: see 3. Impacted adjustments, page 30.

■ Switch

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

■ Remove

the covers (see RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1): - Open the arms main cover. - Remove the loader cover.

■ Remove

the unload rack.

■ Remove the circlip by pushing up the finger

and using a flat screwdriver. circlip

■ Release

the finger from the grabber and replace the spring.

■ Reassemble

finger

in reverse order.

2.1.7. Cuvette changer replacement

To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement: see 3. Impacted adjustments, page 30.

Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1 To replace the cuvette changer on the ABX Pentra 400 V1, you have to replace the complete cuvette changer assembly by using the cuvette changer update kit. ■

Follow the cuvette changer racks dismantling procedure. See 1. Cuvette changer racks dismantling, page 2.

■ Remove

the mother board cover (see RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1) to access the "main cover closed" sensor.

■ Remove

the "main cover closed" sensor with its support by unscrewing the 2 CHC screws of its support.

RAS384F - 20

CUVETTE CHANGER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Cuvette changer

■ Remove

the rear plate by unscrewing the 6 CHC screws to access the cuvette changer horizontal motor.

■ Cut

the Ty-Rap™ maintaining the motor wires and the home sensor wires.

A

■ Disconnect the motor connector (A) and the

motor/home sensor connector (B). B

■ Disconnect

the cuvette changer vertical motor connector (M15).

■ Disconnect

the 2 connectors of the "rack used segment in position" sensor. Then, unscrew the left CHC screw and loosen the right one to release the "rack used segment in position" sensor.

free connector

Technical Manual RAA023

CUVETTE CHANGER

RAS384F - 21

Cuvette changer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

When reassembling, take care to the position of the 2 connectors of the "rack used segment in position" sensor.

A

A

A

A

A

■ Disconnect

the 2 vertical sensors (C17 and

C61).

C17

■ Cut

the 4 Ty-Raps™ maintaining the cuvette changer strand.

C61

■ Release

the strand from the cuvette changer course (B).

■ Unscrew the 7 CHC screws maintaining the

cuvette changer on the right plate (A).

A

A

B

Take care to the 2 ground wire supports.

RAS384F - 22

CUVETTE CHANGER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Cuvette changer

A

■ Unscrew

the 2 top CHC screws (A) and the 2 bottom CHC screws (B) maintaining the cuvette changer on the left plate.

B

■ Unscrew

the 3 CHC screws at the rear of the instrument to give play to the cuvette changer and gently lift up the cuvette changer to remove it.

■ Replace

the cuvette changer and reassemble in reverse order.

■ Readjust

Technical Manual RAA023

the switch position of the "rack used segment in position" sensor.

CUVETTE CHANGER

RAS384F - 23

Cuvette changer

2.2.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Cuvette changer racks

2.2.1. Cuvette motion home sensor replacement ■

Follow the cuvette changer racks dismantling procedure. See 1. Cuvette changer racks dismantling, page 2.

■ Turn

the load rack over to access the cuvette motion home sensor.

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws to remove the home sensor and its wires.

■ Replace

the home sensor and reassemble in reverse order.

2.2.2. Cuvette motion motor replacement Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1 ■To replace the cuvette motion motor on ABX Pentra 400 V1, you have to replace the complete load rack assembly by following the procedure Specific procedure ABX Pentra 400 V1, page 25. ■To know which adjustments have to be performed after parts replacement: see 3. Impacted adjustments, page 30.

General procedure ■

Follow the cuvette changer racks dismantling procedure. See 1. Cuvette changer racks dismantling, page 2.

■ Turn

the load rack over to access the cuvette motion motor.

■ Disconnect

the ground wire and unscrew the 4 CHC screws.

RAS384F - 24

CUVETTE CHANGER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Cuvette changer

■ Turn

the load rack over and unscrew the 4 Torx screws to release the cuvette motion motor assembly.

■ Replace

the cuvette motion motor assembly and reassemble in reverse order. When reassembling, first turn the 8 screws without tightening them. Then, tighten the 8 screws.

Specific procedure ABX Pentra 400 V1 ■ Follow

the cuvette changer racks dismantling procedure. See 1. Cuvette changer racks dismantling,

page 2.

■ Dismantle

the two iron corners maintaining the load rack assembly on the cuvette changer by unscrewing the 4 CHC screws.

■ Assemble

the two new iron corners. Do not tighten the screws.

■ Put

the new load rack assembly in place using the centering pins and reconnect the connectors in reverse order.

■ Screw ■ Then,

the load rack assembly on the computer. Do not tighten the screws.

screw the load rack assembly on the iron corners. Do not tighten the screws.

■ Now, tighten the 4 CHC screws maintaining

the iron corners.

Technical Manual RAA023

CUVETTE CHANGER

RAS384F - 25

Cuvette changer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Then, tighten the 6 CHC screws maintaining

the load rack assembly on the computer and the iron corners.

■ Reassemble

in reverse order.

After the load rack assembly replacement, it is necessary to readjust the cuvette changer by following the procedures 4.7. Adjustment of new cuvette segment loading (load rack), page 39 and 4.8. Adjustment of used cuvette segment unloading (unload rack), page 43. Then, check the adjustment by following the procedure 4.9. Adjustment check, page 47.

RAS384F - 26

CUVETTE CHANGER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Cuvette changer

2.2.3. "Rack used segment full" sensor replacement ■

Follow the cuvette changer racks dismantling procedure. See 1. Cuvette changer racks dismantling, page 2. To avoid risk of damage on the sensor connector, disconnect it as follows: ■ Press the clip to move it up (A). ■ Disconnect the male and female part of the connector (B).

B B

A

■ Remove

the 2 black adhesive tapes on the left side of the load rack.

■ Unscrew

the 4 CHC screws and the 5 Torx screws to release the left side of the load rack.

■ Unscrew the 2 CHC screws and remove the

black adhesive tape to remove the sensor and its wires. ■ Replace

the sensor and reassemble in reverse order.

Technical Manual RAA023

CUVETTE CHANGER

RAS384F - 27

Cuvette changer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

2.2.4. "New segment available" sensor replacement ■ Switch

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

■ Remove

covers (see RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1): - Open the arms main cover. - Remove the loader cover, the cuvettes hatch, the connection hatch and the cuvettes cover.

■ Open

the adhesive collar and release the wires of the "new segment available" sensor (A).

■ Disconnect

the "new segment available" sensor (C38).

B

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws to remove the sensor and its wires (B). C38

A

To avoid risk of damage on the sensor connector, disconnect it as follows: ■ Press the clip to move it up (A). ■ Disconnect the male and female part of the connector (B).

B B

A ■ Replace

the sensor and reassemble in reverse order. The connectors of the "rack used segment full" sensor (C19) and the "new segment available" sensor (C38) have been modified. ■ In ABX Pentra 400 V1: it is necessary to use the "Cable, adaptor sensor rack" (provided in the sensor kit) to connect the sensor to the right cable (linked to the mother board). ■ If

the instrument has a serial number anterior to #133: before installing the adaptor, it is mandatory to replace the 4 points connectors C19 (for the unload rack) and C38 (for the load rack) by new ones with 3 points. Proceed as follows: - Disconnect the male and female parts of the connector. - Replace the 4 points female connector by the new 3 points connector (provided in the sensor kit): Connect the first pin (which was in position 1 on the 4 points connector) in position 1 on the new connector. Connect the second pin in position 2. Do not disconnect the third pin. Connect the fourth pin in position 3. Cut the third wire end: cut the 4 points female connector. See picture on next page. - Reconnect the male and female parts of the connector.

RAS384F - 28

CUVETTE CHANGER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Cuvette changer

3 points connector

pos.3 pos.2 pos.1

3rd pin pos.4 pos.3 pos.2 pos.1 4 points connector

Technical Manual RAA023

CUVETTE CHANGER

RAS384F - 29

Cuvette changer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

3. Impacted adjustments

Replaced spare parts Impacted adjustments

Horizontal Vertical Vertical low Horizontal Vertical Silent Home Home position motor motor blocks sensor sensor sensor

Grabber Cuvette Grabber rail + changer spring Carriage complete

Rack new segment dismantling

Reaction tray Automatic Loading Reaction tray cover (for needles)

X X

X

X

X

X

X

Cuvette changer horizontal Backward Position in Reaction Tray

X

X

X

X

Load in Reaction Tray Position

X

X

X

X

Taking New Segment Pos

X

X

X

X

V1 only

Load Used Segment Position

X

X

X

X

V1 only

Cuvette changer vertical Used Cuvette Holder Position

X

X

X

X

V1 only

New Cuvette Holder Position

X

X

X

X

V1 only

Pause Position Above Reaction Tray

X

X

X

X

Low Position on Reaction Tray

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Grabber adjustment

RAS384F - 30

CUVETTE CHANGER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Cuvette changer

4. Adjustments

Recommendations for use: When you adjust a position of the cuvette changer by changing the number of steps for this position, please note that: - for the horizontal motion, a change of 130 steps is approximately equal to a move of 1 mm. - for the vertical motion, a change of 530 steps is approximately equal to a move of 1 mm.

Follow the procedures 4.2. "Test segment Pentra 400" installation, page 32 and 4.3. Grabber mechanical adjustment, page 33 before proceeding to the adjustments.

When you adjust a position by changing the number of steps for this position, press Check Home, then check the position again (press Check Position) to validate and save the new adjustment.

4.1.

Introduction

The following procedure is used to adjust the cuvette segment loading/unloading mechanism and the different grabber positions:

- Reaction tray adjustment ■ Automatic

Loading position: Reaction tray cuvette segment loading/unloading position.

- Grabber horizontal positions adjustment ("Horizontal Motions") ■ Load ■

in Reaction Tray Position position: Cuvette segment loading in the reaction tray.

Backward Position in Reaction Tray position: Grabber back position to release a cuvette segment in the reaction tray.

■ Taking ■ Load

New Segment Pos position: New cuvette segment loading (load rack).

Used Segment Position position: Used cuvette segment unloading (unload rack).

- Grabber vertical positions adjustment ("Vertical Motions") ■ Low

Position on Reaction Tray position: Cuvette segment loading in the reaction tray.

■ Pause ■ New

Position Above Reaction Tray position: Intermediate grabber position above the reaction tray.

Cuvette Holder Position position: New cuvette segment loading (load rack).

■ Used

Cuvette Holder Position position: Used cuvette segment unloading (unload rack).

- Rack rails positions adjustment ■ Load

rack rail position adjustment.

■ Unload

Technical Manual RAA023

rack rail position adjustment.

CUVETTE CHANGER

RAS384F - 31

Cuvette changer

4.2.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

"Test segment Pentra 400" installation

The adjustments of the reaction tray, the grabber horizontal and vertical positions, and the rack rails positions are performed with an adjustment tool: TOOL, TEST SEGMENT XDA893A (1209131893). ■ Connect

the power supply cable and switch the instrument on.

A

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Tray.

■ Disable

the reaction tray as follows: Select the Reaction radio button (A) and press Motor Off (B). B

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Cuvette Changer.

A

C

■ Disable

the cuvette changer vertical and horizontal motors as follows: - Select the Vertical Motions radio button (A) and press Motor Off (B). - Select the Horizontal Motions radio button (C) and press Motor Off (B).

B

■ Install the "Test segment Pentra 400" on the

grabber using a CHC screw (M3x10).

RAS384F - 32

CUVETTE CHANGER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

4.3.

Cuvette changer

Grabber mechanical adjustment

The purpose of this mechanical adjustment is to adjust the grabber orientation in the reaction tray.

Each time you have to manually move the grabber, you must use the endless screw (vertical movement) and the grabber gear wheel (horizontal movement).

■ Loosen the 6 CHC screws of the grabber to

move it freely and adjust it.

Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1 The grabber is maintained by 4 CHC screws for ABX Pentra 400 V1.

■ Manually

move the grabber to insert the "Test segment Pentra 400" into the reaction tray, the tool must be fully inserted but must not be constrained (you can feel a resistance on the endless screw when the tool is constrained).

■ Center the "Test segment Pentra 400" in the

reaction tray and tighten the grabber screws.

Technical Manual RAA023

CUVETTE CHANGER

RAS384F - 33

Cuvette changer

4.4.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Adjustment of reaction tray "Automatic Loading" position

The purpose of this adjustment is to obtain a correct cuvette segment loading in the reaction tray. The adjustment is done by changing the number of steps for the reaction tray Automatic Loading position. ■ Manually

move the grabber to remove the "Test segment Pentra 400" from the reaction tray. A

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Tray.

■ Select

the Reaction radio button (A) and press Check Home (B).

■ Select

the Automatic Loading position (C) and press Check Position (D).

C B

D

■ Manually

move the grabber to insert the "Test segment Pentra 400" in the reaction tray.

■ Adjust the reaction tray position to have the

"Test segment Pentra 400" centered in the tray, by changing the number of steps for the reaction tray Automatic Loading position. - Increase the number of steps to turn the reaction tray clockwise. - Decrease the number of steps to turn the reaction tray anticlockwise.

Before changing the number of steps for the reaction tray Automatic Loading position, manually move the grabber to remove the "Test segment Pentra 400" from the reaction tray.

■ Move

the reaction tray to its home position (press Check Home (B)) then check the position again (press Check Position (D)).

■ Manually

move the grabber to remove the "Test segment Pentra 400" from the reaction tray. B

RAS384F - 34

CUVETTE CHANGER

D

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

4.5.

Cuvette changer

Adjustment of cuvette segment loading into the reaction tray

"Horizontal Motions > Load in Reaction Tray Position" position ■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Cuvette Changer.

■ Select the Vertical Motions radio button (A)

and press Check Home (B). ■ Select

the Horizontal Motions radio button (C) and press Check Home (B).

A

C

■ Select

the Vertical Motions > Pause Position Above Reaction Tray position (D) and press Check Position (E).

D

F

■ Select

the Horizontal Motions > Load in Reaction Tray Position position (F) and press Check Position (E).

B

E

G

■ Disable

the cuvette changer vertical motor as follows: Select the Vertical Motions radio button (A) and press Motor Off (G).

■ Manually

move the grabber downward to insert the "Test segment Pentra 400" in the reaction tray. The "Test segment Pentra 400" must not touch the reaction tray.

■ Adjust

this position to have the "Test segment Pentra 400" centered into the reaction tray, by changing the number of steps for the Horizontal Motions > Load in Reaction Tray Position position. - Increase the number of steps to move the grabber forward. - Decrease the number of steps to move the grabber backwards.

■ Manually

move the grabber upwards to remove the "Test segment Pentra 400" from the reaction tray.

■ Check

this position for each sector of the reaction tray as follows: - Go to Services > Diagnostics > Tray. - Select a sector of the reaction tray (A) and press Check Position (B) to move this sector to the Automatic Loading position. - Manually move the grabber downward to insert the "Test segment Pentra 400" into the reaction tray. - Manually move the grabber upwards to remove the "Test segment Pentra 400" from the reaction tray.

Technical Manual RAA023

CUVETTE CHANGER

A

B

RAS384F - 35

Cuvette changer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

"Vertical Motions > Low Position on Reaction Tray" position ■ Remove ■ Install

the "Test segment Pentra 400" from the grabber.

a cuvette segment on the grabber.

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Cuvette Changer.

■ Select the Vertical Motions radio button (A)

and press Check Home (B).

A

C

■ Select

the Horizontal Motions radio button (C) and press Check Home (B).

D

F

■ Select

the Horizontal Motions > Load in Reaction Tray Position position (F) and press Check Position (E).

■ Select

the Vertical Motions > Low Position on Reaction Tray position (D) and press Check Position (E).

B

E

G

■ The

cuvette segment must be fully inserted but must not be forced by the grabber. The circlip must slightly be raised up (< 1 mm) and the finger must not touch at the top.

circlip

■ Adjust

this position by changing the number of steps for the Vertical Motions > Low Position on Reaction Tray position. - Increase the number of steps to move the grabber downward. - Decrease the number of steps to move the grabber upwards.

RAS384F - 36

CUVETTE CHANGER

< 1 mm

finger

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Cuvette changer

"Horizontal Motions > Backward Position in Reaction Tray" position

■ Select

the Horizontal Motions > Backward Position in Reaction Tray position (A) and press Check Position (B).

A

B

■ The

grabber must release the cuvette segment without touching the reaction tray upper case.

■ Adjust

this position by changing the number of steps for the Horizontal Motions > Backward Position in Reaction Tray position. - Increase the number of steps to move the grabber forward. - Decrease the number of steps to move the grabber backwards.

■ Select

the Horizontal Motions > Load in Reaction Tray Position position (A) and press Check Position (B).

C

A

■ Select

the Vertical Motions radio button (C) and press Check Home (D).

■ Put

the reaction tray cover back.

D

B

Make sure that the reagent and sample needles as well as the mixer paddle do not touch the reaction tray cover.

Technical Manual RAA023

CUVETTE CHANGER

RAS384F - 37

Cuvette changer

4.6.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Adjustment of "Vertical Motions > Pause Position Above Reaction Tray" position

A

E ■ Select

the Horizontal Motions radio button (A) and press Check Home (B).

locating pin

C

■ Select

the Vertical Motions > Pause Position Above Reaction Tray position (C) and press Check Position (D).

B

D

■ Adjust

this position for a gap of 2 mm between the cuvette segment and the reaction tray cover, by changing the number of steps for the Vertical Motions > Pause Position Above Reaction Tray position. - Increase the number of steps to move the grabber downward. - Decrease the number of steps to move the grabber upwards.

2 mm

Make sure that the cuvette segment does not touch the reaction tray cover when you press the cuvette segment down. ■ When

the grabber is in this position, the vertical home flag should not cut the beam of the vertical low position sensor. For this, make sure that the voltage on the connector C61 Pin 1-3 is < 1 V. If not, readjust the position by lightly moving the grabber upwards.

vertical home flag vertical low position sensor C61

RAS384F - 38

CUVETTE CHANGER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Select

the Vertical Motions radio button (E) and press Check Home (B).

■ Remove

4.7.

Cuvette changer

the cuvette segment from the grabber.

Adjustment of new cuvette segment loading (load rack)

Load rack rail adjustment ■ Reassemble ■ Stick

in reverse order the load rack. See 1. Cuvette changer racks dismantling, page 2.

a piece of paper on the "new segment available" sensor to avoid the rail movement.

A ■ Select

the Cuvette Motion radio button (A) and press Check Home (B).

B

■ Loosen

the 6 CHC screws maintaining the load rack on its support.

C

E

■ Disable

the cuvette changer vertical and horizontal motors as follows: - Select the Vertical Motions radio button (C) and press Motor Off (D). - Select the Horizontal Motions radio button (E) and press Motor Off (D). D

Technical Manual RAA023

CUVETTE CHANGER

RAS384F - 39

Cuvette changer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Install the "Test segment Pentra 400"on the

grabber. ■ Manually

move the grabber above the load

rack rail. ■ Adjust the load rack so that the rail does not

touch the "Test segment Pentra 400".

3

1

5

6

4

2

■ Once

the load rack is adjusted, tighten the 6 CHC screws maintaining the load rack on its support by following the order of screws indicated on the picture.

RAS384F - 40

CUVETTE CHANGER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Cuvette changer

"Vertical Motions > New Cuvette Holder Position" position

■ Select

the Horizontal Motions radio button (A) and press Check Home (B).

A

C

■ Select

the Vertical Motions radio button (C) and press Check Home (B).

D

■ Select

the Vertical Motions > New Cuvette Holder Position position (D) and press Check Position (E).

E

B

F

After a Vertical Motions > Check Home, the grabber moves to the Vertical Motions > New Cuvette Holder Position position, then the grabber does not move when you select the Vertical Motions > New Cuvette Holder Position position and press Check Position.

■ Disable

the cuvette changer horizontal motor as follows: Select the Horizontal Motions radio button (A) and press Motor Off (F).

■ Manually

move the grabber above the load

rack rail. ■ Adjust

this position to have the end of the load rack rail aligned with the upper mark of the "Test segment Pentra 400", by changing the number of steps for the Vertical Motions > New Cuvette Holder Position position. - Increase the number of steps to move the grabber downward. - Decrease the number of steps to move the grabber upwards.

A

C ■ Select

the Horizontal Motions radio button (A) and press Check Home (B).

■ Select

the Vertical Motions radio button (C) and press Check Home (B). B

Technical Manual RAA023

CUVETTE CHANGER

RAS384F - 41

Cuvette changer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

"Horizontal Motions > Taking New Segment Pos" position ■ Remove ■ Install

the "Test segment Pentra 400" from the grabber.

a cuvette segment on the load rack, in position to be loaded by the grabber.

■ Select

the Horizontal Motions radio button (A) and press Check Home (B).

■ Select

the Vertical Motions radio button (C) and press Check Home (B).

A

C

D

■ Select

the Vertical Motions > New Cuvette Holder Position position (D) and press Check Position (E).

■ Select

the Horizontal Motions > Taking New Segment Pos position (F) and press Check Position (E).

F

E

B

■ Make

sure that the grabber is against the cuvette segment and adjust this position for a gap of 0 to 0.1 mm between the load rack rail and the cuvette segment, by changing the number of steps for the Horizontal Motions > Taking New Segment Pos position. - Increase the number of steps to move the grabber forward. - Decrease the number of steps to move the grabber backwards.

■ Select

the Horizontal Motions radio button (A) and press Check Home (B).

A

C

■ Select

the Vertical Motions radio button (C) and press Check Home (B).

■ Remove

the cuvette segment from the load

rack.

RAS384F - 42

B

CUVETTE CHANGER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

4.8.

Cuvette changer

Adjustment of used cuvette segment unloading (unload rack)

Unload rack rail adjustment ■ Install

the "Test segment Pentra 400" on the grabber.

■ Loosen

the 2 CHC screws of the locating

pin. ■ Put

the unload rack back.

■ Tighten

the 2 CHC screws of the locating

pin.

A

C

■ Disable

the cuvette changer vertical and horizontal motors as follows: - Select the Vertical Motions radio button (A) and press Motor Off (B). - Select the Horizontal Motions radio button (C) and press Motor Off (B). B

■ Loosen

the 3 CHC screws maintaining the unload rack rail.

Technical Manual RAA023

CUVETTE CHANGER

RAS384F - 43

Cuvette changer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Manually

move the grabber above the unload rack rail.

■ Adjust

the unload rack rail so that the rail does not touch the "Test segment Pentra 400".

1 ■ Once

the unload rack rail is adjusted, tighten the 3 CHC screws maintaining the unload rack rail by following the order of screws indicated on the picture.

2

■ Check

the adjustment by manually moving the grabber back and forth above the unload rack rail. 3

RAS384F - 44

CUVETTE CHANGER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Cuvette changer

"Vertical Motions > Used Cuvette Holder Position" position ■ Select

the Horizontal Motions radio button (A) and press Check Home (B).

■ Select

the Vertical Motions radio button (C) and press Check Home (B).

A

C

■ Select

the Vertical Motions > Used Cuvette Holder Position position (D) and press Check Position (E).

D

F

■ Disable

the cuvette changer horizontal motor as follows: Select the Horizontal Motions radio button (A) and press Motor Off (G).

E

B

G

■ Manually

move the grabber above the unload rack rail.

■ Adjust

this position to have the end of the unload rack rail aligned with the lower mark of the "Test segment Pentra 400", by changing the number of steps for the Vertical Motions > Used Cuvette Holder Position position. - Increase the number of steps to move the grabber downward. - Decrease the number of steps to move the grabber upwards.

A

C ■ Select

the Horizontal Motions radio button (A) and press Check Home (B).

■ Select

the Vertical Motions radio button (C) and press Check Home (B). B

Technical Manual RAA023

CUVETTE CHANGER

RAS384F - 45

Cuvette changer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

"Horizontal Motions > Load Used Segment Position" position ■ Remove ■ Install

the "Test segment Pentra 400" from the grabber.

a cuvette segment on the unload rack.

C

A ■ Disable

the cuvette changer vertical and horizontal motors as follows: - Select the Vertical Motions radio button (A) and press Motor Off (B). - Select the Horizontal Motions radio button (C) and press Motor Off (B). B

■ Manually

move the grabber so that the grabber moves between 2 cuvettes without rubbing.

grabber between 2 cuvettes

If you cannot do this preliminary adjustment correctly, readjust the unload rack rail. See Unload rack rail adjustment, page 43.

■ Select

the Horizontal Motions radio button (C) and press Check Home (D).

C

A

■ Select

the Horizontal Motions > Load Used Segment Position position (E) and press Check Position (F).

E

■ Push

the cuvette segment against the grabber.

■ Select

the Horizontal Motions radio button (C) and press Check Home (D).

RAS384F - 46

CUVETTE CHANGER

D

F

B

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Cuvette changer

■ Adjust

this position for a gap of 2.5 mm between the end of the unload rack rail and the cuvette segment, by changing the number of steps for the Horizontal Motions > Load Used Segment Position position. - Increase the number of steps to move the grabber forward. - Decrease the number of steps to move the grabber backwards.

■ Remove

the cuvette segment from the unload rack.

If the gap between the end of the unload rack rail and the cuvette segment is higher than 2.5 mm, the unload rack will not be able to store 30 cuvette segments.

4.9.

Adjustment check ■ Remove

the piece of paper on the "new segment available" sensor.

■ Select

the Horizontal Motions radio button (A) and press Check Home (B).

A

C

D

■ Select

the Vertical Motions radio button (C) and press Check Home (B).

■ Select the

Cuvette Motion radio button (D) and press Check Home (B).

B

A ■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Tray.

■ Disable

the reaction tray as follows: Select the Reaction radio button (A) and press Motor Off (B).

■ Make sure that there

is no cuvette segment in the reaction tray. If necessary, manually remove the cuvette segments.

■ Select

the Reaction radio button (A) and press Check Home (C).

Technical Manual RAA023

CUVETTE CHANGER

C

B

RAS384F - 47

Cuvette changer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Check

the adjustments by loading and unloading a cuvette segment in each sector of the reaction tray as follows: - Go to Services > Diagnostics > Cuvette Changer. - Select the Segment radio button. - Select a sector of the reaction tray and press Load. - Check if the cuvette segment loading is correct, then press Unload. - Check if the cuvette segment unloading is correct.

■ Repeat

the procedure above for each sector of the reaction tray.

Repeat the adjustment check procedure above several times.

■ If

there is no problem during the cycles, put the covers back.

RAS384F - 48

CUVETTE CHANGER

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS392G

Internal computer

RAS392: Internal computer

Concerns Computer dismantling Ferrites installation (for computer models from "CCC014H") Computer parts replacement

Required tools Hexagonal keys Open-end wrench Flat screwdriver Phillips screwdriver KIT, ANTISTATIC KIT MZZ015A (1207921015)

Required products None

Intervention time 1 h 00

Frequency On request

Specific kit or consumables None

Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator. Local or national regulations must be applied in all the operations.

Internal computer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

1. Computer dismantling ■ Switch

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

■ Remove

the covers (see RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1): - Open the arms main cover and the ISE cover. - Remove the external and internal sample covers, the power supply cover and the optic hatch.

- Lift the mixer up, then unscrew the 2 CHC screws of the left arm cover. - Remove the cuvettes tray plate, the reagent cover, the cuvettes hatch, the connection hatch and the cuvettes cover.

■ Open

the computer fan box as follows: Slightly loosen the 4 screws and remove the cover.

■ Unscrew

the 3 CHC screws and washers inside the computer fan box, remove the deflector PC/BO and remove the blue tube from the computer fan box.

■ Disconnect

RAS392G - 2

the mouse and the keyboard as well as the other computer connections.

COMPUTER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Internal computer

■ Unscrew the 3 CHC screws under the frame

and the 2 CHC screws maintaining the load rack of the cuvette changer.

■ Carefully

pull, then lift the computer assembly.

■ Unscrew

the CHC screw and washer maintaining the power supply cable.

Computer models from 1300013734

1

2

3

■ Disconnect

the power supply cable (1), the mother board cable (2), the RS232 cable (3) and, if necessary, the printer cable (4).

■ Then,

remove the computer assembly.

Computer models < 1300013734 1

2

3

4

For computer models from "CCC014H", please ensure that the power supply cable is equipped with two ferrites (one close to the computer assembly and another close to the power supply). See 2. Ferrites installation (for computer models from "CCC014H"), page 5.

Technical Manual RAA023

COMPUTER

RAS392G - 3

Internal computer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Dismantle

the computer fan box as follows: Unscrew the 2 CHC screws and washers and remove the computer fan box.

■ Unscrew

the 6 CHC screws, then remove the computer assembly from its cover.

■ Reassemble

in reverse order.

Be very careful when you put back the cover of the computer fan box because you can touch/ disconnect the little board, shown on the following picture, with the cover (depending on the computer model).

Please note that computer models from 1300013734 are no longer equipped with PS/2 ports (mouse, keyboard) or parallel port (printer). All the peripherals (mouse, keyboard, printer) should be connected into the USB ports.

RAS392G - 4

COMPUTER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Internal computer

2. Ferrites installation (for computer models from "CCC014H") ■ Switch

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

■ Remove

the covers (see RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1): - Open the arms main cover and the ISE cover. - Remove the external and internal sample covers, the power supply cover and the optic hatch.

- Lift the mixer up, then unscrew the 2 CHC screws of the left arm cover. - Remove the cuvettes tray plate, the reagent cover, the cuvettes hatch, the connection hatch and the cuvettes cover.

2.1.

Ferrite installation close to the computer assembly ■ Follow ■ Install

the computer dismantling procedure. See 1. Computer dismantling, page 2.

one ferrite on the power supply cable as follows:

You can find two types of power supply cables: - new shielded power supply cable - old unshielded power supply cable.

■ New

shielded power supply cable - Open the ferrite. - Place the power supply cable in the ferrite. - Make a loop with the power supply cable, then close the ferrite.

Technical Manual RAA023

COMPUTER

ferrite

RAS392G - 5

Internal computer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Old

unshielded power supply cable - Open the ferrite. - Place the power supply cable in the ferrite, then close the ferrite.

2.2.

ferrite

Ferrite installation close to the power supply

■ Disconnect

the power supply connector from the power supply.

If needed, to access the power supply cable, dismantle the power supply by referring to the procedure RAS390: Power supply replacement, page 1.

■ Find

the cable connected to the computer assembly.

■ Install

one ferrite on the power supply cable as follows:

You can find two types of power supply cables: - new shielded power supply cable - old unshielded power supply cable.

RAS392G - 6

COMPUTER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Internal computer

■ New

shielded power supply cable - Open the ferrite. - Place the power supply cable in the ferrite. - Make a loop with the power supply cable, then close the ferrite.

ferrite

■ Old

unshielded power supply cable - Open the ferrite. - Place the power supply cable in the ferrite, then close the ferrite.

■ Reconnect ■ Put

ferrite

the power supply connector on the power supply.

the covers back.

Technical Manual RAA023

COMPUTER

RAS392G - 7

Internal computer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

3. Computer parts replacement

As the electronic devices are very sensitive to electrostatic discharges (ESD), the use of an antistatic kit is mandatory during boards handling/dismantling.

As several computer models are available, a label, stuck on the rear plate, allows you to identify the computer model.

This label can be read from the optic hatch opening with the help of a flashlight, without dismantling the computer assembly first.

The table below lists the computer assembly spare parts and indicates their compatibility with the different computer models in the field. since instrument serial #1

Touch screen (separately)

LCD touch screen (complete)

CD-ROM drive

N/A

XAA511BS (1209109511)

N/A

CBT018A

(1209179074)2

CCC014G->H P4-0853

XAA511BS (1209109511)

N/A

CBT018A

CCC014J

P4-2166

XAA511BS (1209109511)

N/A

CCC014K

P4-2349

XAA511BS (1209109511)

CCC014L

P4-3214

CCC014M CCC014N

PC assembly

CCC014A->F

RAS392G - 8

Hard drive XEC074AS

SD RAM board Mother board

Sound amplification board

N/A

N/A

N/A

(1209179074)2

N/A

N/A

N/A

CBT018A

1201772017

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

CBT018A

1201772017

N/A

N/A

N/A

XAA511BS (1209109511)

N/A

CBT021A (1201771021)

1201772017

N/A

N/A

N/A

P4-3391

XAA511BS (1209109511)

N/A

CBT021A (1201771021)

1201772017

N/A

N/A

N/A

P4-4000 / C4-0110

XAA511BS (1209109511)

N/A

CBT021A (1201771021)

1201772017

N/A

N/A

N/A

COMPUTER

XEC074AS

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

PC assembly

since instrument serial #1 P4-4072 / C4-0473

1300013734

Internal computer

Touch screen (separately)

LCD touch screen (complete)

CD-ROM drive

Hard drive

N/A

XDB355A (1209141355)

N/A

1201772017

SD RAM board Mother board

1300014030

1300023975

Sound amplification board 1300018920

1Please note that the computer assembly may have been changed on the instrument. In this case, do

not take into account the instrument serial # mentioned above. Obsolete when sold out.

2

3.1.

Computer models from 1300013734 ■ Follow

the computer dismantling procedure. See 1. Computer dismantling, page 2.

■ Loosen

the three CHC screws located on the right side (close to the fan).

■ Unscrew

the seven CHC screws, then remove the rear plate.

■ Take care of the USB port cable, disconnect

it.

3.1.1. To dismantle/replace the SD RAM board

A ■ Open

the two latches to free the SD RAM board (A).

B

■ Gently

pull the SD RAM board to disconnect it (B).

A

Technical Manual RAA023

COMPUTER

RAS392G - 9

Internal computer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

3.1.2. To dismantle/replace the mother board

■ Dismantle

the SD RAM board.

■ Disconnect

all the cables from the mother

board. ■ Unscrew

the four CHC screws to remove the mother board.

3.1.3. To dismantle/replace the hard drive

■ Dismantle ■ Unplug

the mother board.

the connector from the hard drive.

■ Unscrew

the four CHC screws to remove the hard drive.

■ The

hard drive is not loaded with the Windows master P400/C400. Therefore, you have to install the Windows master P400/C400 by referring to the procedure RAS533: Windows master installation, page 1. ■ Then, you have to install the software version and the reagent applications by referring respectively to the procedures RAS517: Software version installation, page 1 and RAS518: Reagent applications installation, page 1.

RAS392G - 10

COMPUTER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Internal computer

3.1.4. To dismantle/replace the LCD touch screen

■ Unscrew

the four CHC screws.

■ Unplug

the three connectors at the back of the screen.

Touchscreen calibration (if necessary) ■ Check

that the touchscreen is properly calibrated.

■ If

this is not the case, open C:\Program Files\eGalaxTouch directory and run the eGalaxTouch.exe file.

■ From

the Tools tab, select 4 Points Calibration.

■ Press

OK.

Technical Manual RAA023

COMPUTER

RAS392G - 11

Internal computer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Touch

each of the four corners of the screen to calibrate the touchscreen.

■ Press

Apply, then OK.

Brightness adjustment (if necessary) Touchscreen brightness can be changed in the Windows 7 operating system. If needed: ■ Enter

Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Power Options.

■ Move

the cursor at the bottom of the screen to change the brightness percentage (from 0% to 100%, default is 45%).

3.2.

Computer models < 1300013734

3.2.1. Hard drive replacement

Please note that: ■ computer models from "CCC014J" are equipped with a SATA hard drive, ■ computer models before "CCC014J" are equipped with an IDE hard drive. ■ Follow

the computer dismantling procedure. See 1. Computer dismantling, page 2.

■ Loosen

the 3 CHC screws located on the right side (close to the fan).

■ Unscrew

the 10 CHC screws, then remove the rear plate.

Loosen

■ Remove

the left angle plate as follows: - Unscrew the 6 CHC screws.

RAS392G - 12

COMPUTER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Internal computer

A

B

- Disconnect the flat cable (A) and the connector CN12 (B, use a flat screwdriver) from the left angle plate.

- Disconnect the audio connector CN2 from the mother board and remove the left angle plate.

Specific computer models before "CCC014H" For computer models before "CCC014H", you cannot disconnect the audio connector from the board. So, you have to unscrew the nut and remove the audio connector from the left angle plate.

■ Remove

the bottom angle plate as follows: - Unscrew the 5 CHC screws.

Technical Manual RAA023

COMPUTER

RAS392G - 13

Internal computer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

- Disconnect the connector (A) and the flat cable (B) from the bottom angle plate, then remove the bottom angle plate. A

B

When you disconnect (or reconnect) the flat cable (B) from the bottom angle plate, take care not to disconnect this flat cable from the daughter board or the daughter board from the mother board.

■ Unscrew

the 4 CHC screws and washers maintaining the "hard drive + CD-ROM drive" assembly. SATA hard drive

IDE hard drive

■ Unscrew the 6 CHC screws and washers maintaining the CD-ROM drive on the hard drive support and disconnect the hard drive connector (A).

■ Unscrew the 6 CHC screws and washers maintaining the CD-ROM drive on the hard drive support.

A

RAS392G - 14

COMPUTER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Internal computer

SATA hard drive

IDE hard drive

■ Turn

the hard drive support over and unscrew the 4 CHC screws to release the hard drive from its support.

■ Turn the hard drive support over, disconnect the flat cable from the CD-ROM drive and unscrew the 4 CHC screws to release the hard drive from its support.

■ Then, disconnect the flat cable from the hard drive.

■ Replace

the hard drive and reassemble in reverse order. When reassembling, do not tighten the different screws too much in order not to damage the hard drive or the CD-ROM drive. For the IDE hard drive, ensure that the flat cable is correctly plugged into the hard drive because 4 pins must be free.

Technical Manual RAA023

COMPUTER

RAS392G - 15

Internal computer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ The

hard drive is not loaded with the Windows master P400/C400. Therefore, you have to install the Windows master P400/C400 by referring to the procedure RAS533: Windows master installation, page 1. ■ Then, you have to install the software version and the reagent applications by referring respectively to the procedures RAS517: Software version installation, page 1 and RAS518: Reagent applications installation, page 1.

WARNING! Take care to clear the way of the 2 fans: no flat cables in front of the fans (overheating risk).

3.2.2. CD-ROM drive replacement ■ Follow

the hard drive replacement procedure to access the CD-ROM drive.

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws to release the CD-ROM drive.

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws to remove the support plate.

RAS392G - 16

COMPUTER

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Internal computer

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC screws to remove the board from the CD-ROM drive (take care not to lose the 2 crosspieces between the CDROM drive and the board).

■ Replace the CD-ROM drive and reassemble

in reverse order.

■ Ensure

that the flat cable is correctly plugged into the hard drive because 4 pins must be free. ■ Do not tighten the different screws too much in order not to damage the hard drive or the CD-ROM drive.

3.2.3. Touch screen replacement Touch screen dismantling ■ Follow

the computer dismantling procedure. See 1. Computer dismantling, page 2.

B

■ Disconnect

the flat cable from the touch screen board as follows: - Pull gently on the black part of the connector (A). - Pull on the flat cable (B).

A

The touch screen is fixed on the screen with 13 copper strips and 4 pieces of tape. ■ Remove ■ Cut

the 13 copper strips.

and remove the 4 pieces of tape.

■ Then,

remove the touch screen.

Technical Manual RAA023

COMPUTER

RAS392G - 17

Internal computer

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

New touch screen installation ■ Clean

the screen and the touch screen with soft paper and 70% alcohol.

■ Remove

any dust from the screen and the touch screen using a dusting spray.

■ Put

the touch screen on the 2 blank supports, the flat cable should be on the right side.

■ Adjust

the touch screen position to have its window centered with regards to the window of the screen. flat cable

■ Fix

the touch screen using the 13 copper strips included in the kit.

■ Reconnect

the flat cable to the touch screen board. blank supports

■ Ensure ■ Do

■ Carefully

that the brown band on the flat cable is in the correct position. not forget to block the connector.

hide the flat cable behind the screen.

■ Reassemble

the computer in reverse order.

Touch screen calibration ■ Connect ■ Go

the power supply cable and switch the instrument on.

to Services > Diagnostics and open the Windows Explorer.

■ Go

to C:\FIDTSERV and launch the calwin.exe file.

A white windows appears, with a red cross in the left upper corner. ■ Press

this cross, it will move to the next position.

■ Press

the red cross for the 9 positions, then press Enter twice. The touch screen is calibrated.

RAS392G - 18

COMPUTER

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS390D

Power supply replacement

RAS390: Power supply replacement

Concerns Power supply replacement Power supply LEDs check

Required tools Hexagonal keys Phillips screwdriver Voltmeter KIT, ANTISTATIC KIT MZZ015A (1207921015)

Required products None

Intervention time 0 h 30

Frequency On request

Specific kit or consumables None

Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator. Local or national regulations must be applied in all the operations.

Power supply replacement

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

1. Power supply replacement ■ Switch ■ Open ■

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

the arms main cover.

Remove the sample covers, the power supply cover, the optic hatch and the reagent cover. See RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1.

■ Remove the left gusset plate by unscrewing

the 3 CHC screws on the side and loosening the 4 CHC screws at the rear of the instrument.

■ Unscrew

RAS390D - 2

the 2 CHC back screws.

ELECTRICITY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Power supply replacement

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC front screws (one with metallic collar maintaining the ISE ground wire and the reinforced cable).

■ Remove

the power supply and the recuperation jar stuck to it.

Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1 ABX Pentra 400 V1 are not equipped with a recuperation jar.

■ If

necessary slightly lift the reagent tray up as follows: - Loosen the 2 CHC screws and washers of the left reagent tray foot.

- Loosen the 2 CHC screws (one with washer and one with a ground wire) of the right reagent tray foot. - Carefully lift the reagent tray up.

■ Disconnect,

on the power supply, the three supply connectors.

Technical Manual RAA023

ELECTRICITY

RAS390D - 3

Power supply replacement

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

If the ABX Pentra 400 is not equipped with reinforced power supply cable:

■ Unscrew

the 2 CHC front screws (one with ISE ground wire).

■ Disconnect,

on the power supply, the three supply connectors.

■ Remove

the power supply and the recuperation jar stuck to it.

■ Remove

the recuperation jar from the old power supply.

■ Use

the double-sided adhesive tape stuck on the top of the new power supply to stick the recuperation jar in the same position as on the old power supply.

■ Connect

the three supply connectors.

If the ABX Pentra 400 is not equipped with reinforced power supply cable, connect the three supply connectors after power supply installation.

Reagent tray motor

■ Install

the new power supply with the recuperation jar. The larger part of the recuperation jar is positioned under the reagent tray motor.

■ Reassemble

in reverse order. Recuperation jar

If the reagent tray has been lifted up, check all the centering positions of the reagent and sample arms using the "Reag tray adjusting tool", the "Dummy reagent needle" and the "Dummy sample needle". See RAS385: Arms, page 1.

RAS390D - 4

ELECTRICITY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Power supply replacement

2. Power supply LEDs check

As the electronic devices are very sensitive to electrostatic discharges (ESD), the use of an antistatic kit is mandatory during boards handling/dismantling.

■ Connect

the power supply cable and switch the instrument on.

■ Remove

the mother board cover. See RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1.

■ Check on the mother board that the 4 LEDs

are lit:

Checking LEDs is enough. It is recommended not to check voltages with a voltmeter in order not to damage the board (in fact, the test points are really small and the risk of a shortcut is high). The following voltages are given for information only: - DS 13, - 5 V. - DS 14, + 5 V. - DS 15, VCC (+ 5 V). - DS 16, + 24 V.

Technical Manual RAA023

ELECTRICITY

RAS390D - 5

Power supply replacement

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Ground

■ If

one of the LEDs is not lit, use a voltmeter point to check the corresponding voltage on the connector.

■ Put

the covers back. -5V +5V

RAS390D - 6

ELECTRICITY

+5V

+ 24 V

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS391E

Mother board replacement

RAS391: Mother board replacement

Concerns Parameters backup and software version check Mother board replacement Embedded software version installation Restore parameters Check up

Required tools Hexagonal keys KIT, ANTISTATIC KIT MZZ015A (1207921015)

Required products None

Intervention time 1 h 00

Frequency On request

Specific kit or consumables None

Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator. Local or national regulations must be applied in all the operations.

Mother board replacement

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

As the electronic devices are very sensitive to electrostatic discharges (ESD), the use of an antistatic kit is mandatory during boards handling/dismantling.

1. Parameters backup and software version check Before changing the board, to save all mechanical parameters (offset values, stepper motor values, etc.), proceed as follows: ■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics and press Back.

■ When

the following screen appears, click OK. The parameters are saved under D:\Backup\ParamOS9.bin.

Check the software version currently installed on the instrument. At the end of the procedure, you will need to install the same software version.

2. Mother board replacement ■ Switch

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

■ Remove

the mother board cover. See RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1.

■ Carefully

disconnect all the connectors from the mother board.

■ Unscrew

the 9 CHC M4 screws to remove the board from its plate.

■ Install

the new mother board on the plate and fasten the 9 CHC M4 screws.

■ Connect

all the connectors on the board (see Section 4: Electric and electronic principles, 1.4. Mother board connections, page 4-9).

RAS391E - 2

ELECTRICITY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Mother board replacement

3. Embedded software version installation

It is necessary to reinstall the software version embedded on the mother board (flash memory Eprom) because the latest software version has not been loaded on the new mother board.

■ Connect

the power supply cable and switch the instrument on.

■ After

the boot of the operating system (Windows progress bar), the screen becomes black, then blue. When the screen is blue, press Shift until the Windows login screen appears.

The left Shift key used to skip the automatic logon is no more functional under Windows 7. Press CTRL+ALT+DEL keys to logoff and change current user.

■ Log

in to Windows as administrator with administrator/admin as login/password.

■ Install the software version checked at chapter 1 by following the procedure RAS517: Software version

installation, page 1. ■ Make

sure that the following options are selected, if not select them: Download P400 Eprom Create a desktop icon.

■ When choosing the type of installation, select

Update in order not to lose the configuration (applications, calibrators, controls, settings, etc.) neither the patient results.

■ Shut

down and restart the instrument.

4. Restore parameters To restore all mechanical parameters on the new board, please proceed as follows: ■

At the end of the instrument start, an error message appears which demands to restore the parameters. The following screen appears:

■ Click

Default Restore File. The Default Restore File button allows you to restore the default file: D:\Backup\ParamOS9.bin. This is the last parameters backup file.

Technical Manual RAA023

ELECTRICITY

RAS391E - 3

Mother board replacement

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ It

is possible to select a previous parameters backup file and to do so: - Click Restore File. - Select the backup file you want to restore. - Click Open.

■ When

the following screen appears, click

OK.

■ Click

OK on the following screen. The parameters are restored.

5. Check up ■ After

having restored parameters, it is advisable to check the mechanical adjustments. See RAS378: 6 month maintenance, 6. To check the mechanical adjustments, page 5.

■ Follow

RAS391E - 4

the "Check up after intervention" procedure. See RAS393: Check up after intervention, page 1.

ELECTRICITY

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS394E

Sensors check and adjustment

RAS394: Sensors check and adjustment

Concerns Reagent and sample syringes home sensors Reagent tray home sensor Sample tray home sensor Reaction tray home sensor Mixer assembly motor home sensor "Mixer present switch" Reagent and sample arms home sensors Rack used segment (in position/full) sensors "New segment available" sensor Cuvette motion home sensor Cuvette changer horizontal motions home sensor Cuvette changer vertical motions home sensor "Handling cover cuvette segment closed" sensor "Main cover closed" sensor Needle heating sensor Reaction heating sensor Refrigerated area sensor Inner temperature sensor "Handling cover reagent closed" sensor Water tank empty sensor Waste tank full sensor Sample arm shock detection switch Computer wake up sensor Lamp power standby Lamp power full Low liquid level (cooling unit) Power correct

Required tools Hexagonal keys Flat screwdriver Phillips screwdriver

Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator. Local or national regulations must be applied in all the operations.

Sensors check and adjustment

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

1. Reagent and sample syringes home sensors

■ Remove

the rear plate by unscrewing the 4 CHC screws to access the syringes home sensors. No adjustment available.

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Syringe.

sample syringe home sensor

reagent syringe home sensor

A

■ Select

the Reagent radio button (A), then press Check Home to move the reagent syringe to its home position. B

■ Make sure that the Home light (B) becomes

green.

■ Select

the Sample radio button (C), then press Check Home to move the sample syringe to its home position.

■ Make sure that the Home light (D) becomes

green.

RAS394E - 2

ELECTRICITY

C

D

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Sensors check and adjustment

2. Reagent tray home sensor

■ The

reagent tray home sensor is located under the reagent tray. No adjustment available.

A

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Tray.

■ Select

the Reagent radio button (A), then press Check Home to move the reagent tray to its home position.

B

■ Make sure that the Home light (B) becomes

green.

Technical Manual RAA023

ELECTRICITY

RAS394E - 3

Sensors check and adjustment

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

3. Sample tray home sensor

■ The

sample tray home sensor is located under the sample tray. No adjustment available.

A

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Tray.

■ Select

the Sample radio button (A), then press Check Home to move the sample tray to its home position.

B

■ Make sure that the Home light (B) becomes

green.

RAS394E - 4

ELECTRICITY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Sensors check and adjustment

4. Reaction tray home sensor

■ The

reaction tray home sensor is located under the reaction tray. No adjustment available.

A

B ■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Tray.

■ Select

the Reaction radio button (A), then press Check Home to move the reaction tray to its home position.

■ Make sure that the Home light (B) becomes

green.

Technical Manual RAA023

ELECTRICITY

RAS394E - 5

Sensors check and adjustment

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

5. Mixer assembly motor home sensor

■ The

mixer assembly motor home sensor is located at the rear of the mixer assembly, under its cover. No adjustment available.

A ■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Arms.

■ Select

the Mixer radio button (A), then press Check Home to move the mixer to its home position.

B

■ Make sure that the Home light (B) becomes

green.

RAS394E - 6

ELECTRICITY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Sensors check and adjustment

6. "Mixer present switch"

■ Remove

the rear plate by unscrewing the 8 CHC screws to access the "mixer present switch".

■ The "mixer present switch" is located under

the mixer assembly motor home sensor. The "mixer present switch" must be activated when the mixer assembly is in "present" position (i.e. low position).

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Sensors.

■ Manually

pull the mixer assembly up to its high position to deactivate the "mixer present switch".

■ Press

Read Sensor State.

■ Make

sure that the Mixer Present light (A) becomes red.

A

■ Manually push the mixer assembly down to

B

its low position to activate the "mixer present switch". ■ Press

Read Sensor State.

■ Make

sure that the Mixer Present light (B) becomes green.

If one of the positions is not correct, adjust the "mixer present switch" as follows: Unscrew the 2 CHC screws maintaining the switch, then move it up if the mixer assembly is not detected in low position (red light) or move it down if the mixer assembly is detected in high position (green light).

Technical Manual RAA023

ELECTRICITY

RAS394E - 7

Sensors check and adjustment

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

7. Reagent and sample arms home sensors

rotation home sensor ■ The

reagent and sample arms home sensors are located on the arms assembly. No adjustment available. vertical home sensor

■ Make

sure that the reagent arm is in low position in the wash tower before moving the sample arm. ■ Make sure that the sample arm is in its upper position (vertical home position) before moving the reagent arm. ■ Make sure that the sample and reagent arms are in their upper positions (vertical home position) before moving any tray.

■ Go

1

to Services > Diagnostics > Arms.

■ Select the sample arm Vertical radio button

(1), then press Check Home to move the sample arm to its vertical home position.

2

■ Make sure that the Home light (2) becomes

green. ■ Select

the sample arm Rotation radio button (3), then press Check Home to move the sample arm to its rotation home position.

3

■ Make sure that the Home light (4) becomes

green.

RAS394E - 8

4

ELECTRICITY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Sensors check and adjustment

5

■ Select

the reagent arm Vertical radio button (5), then press Check Home to move the reagent arm to its vertical home position.

6

■ Make sure that the Home light (6) becomes

green. ■ Select

the reagent arm Rotation radio button (7), then press Check Home to move the reagent arm to its rotation home position.

7

■ Make sure that the Home light (8) becomes

green.

8

8. Rack used segment (in position/full) sensors

■ The rack used segment sensors are located

A

as follows: A: Rack used segment in position B: Rack used segment full

B ■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Sensors.

■ Remove

the unload rack, then press Read Sensor State.

■ Make sure that the Rack Used Segment In

A

Position and the Rack Used Segment Full lights (A/B) become red. ■ Put

the unload rack back, then press Read Sensor State.

B

■ Make sure that the Rack Used Segment In

Position light (A) becomes green.

Technical Manual RAA023

ELECTRICITY

RAS394E - 9

Sensors check and adjustment

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

If the Rack Used Segment In Position light (A) stays red, it is possible to adjust the switch position as follows: Loosen the 2 CHC screws maintaining the switch, then adjust it. The switch must be activated when the unload rack is in position and deactivated when the rack is not in position. ■ Put

your finger on the "rack used segment full" sensor and press Read Sensor State.

■ Make

sure that the Rack Used Segment Full light (B) becomes green.

The "rack used segment full" sensor depends on the "rack used segment in position" sensor. If the unload rack is not in position, the Rack Used Segment Full light stays red.

9. "New segment available" sensor ■

The "new segment available" sensor is located on the load rack to check the presence of a new segment.

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Sensors.

■ Remove

the unload rack, then empty the load rack of all its cuvette segments.

■ Press

Read Sensor State.

■ Make

sure that the New Segment Available light becomes red.

■ Manually

place a cuvette segment in loading position.

■ Press

Read Sensor State.

■ Make

sure that the New Segment Available light becomes green.

RAS394E - 10

ELECTRICITY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Sensors check and adjustment

"New segment available" sensor adjustment ■ Remove ■ Cross

the unload rack, then empty the load rack of all its cuvette segments.

off the first cuvette of a cuvette segment.

■ Manually

place the cuvette segment in loading position. Place it in its two extreme positions as shown on the following pictures. Extreme position 1

Extreme position 2

Pressure point of cuvette edge

Pressure point of cuvette edge

Cuvette segment

Cuvette segment

Pressure point of cuvette edge

Pressure point of cuvette edge ■ Refer ■

to the beam impact on the two cuvette segment extreme positions.

Using the 2 CHC screws maintaining its support plate (A), adjust the angle of the "new segment available" sensor. The impact points of the beam have to be symmetric regarding to the edge of the cuvette placed in the extreme positions (B). A

B Cuvette

L1 ~ ~ L2 L1

L2

Beam

Technical Manual RAA023

ELECTRICITY

RAS394E - 11

Sensors check and adjustment

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

10. Cuvette motion home sensor

■ The

cuvette motion home sensor is located under the load rack, right behind the motor. No adjustment available.

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Cuvette Changer.

A

■ Select the Cuvette Motion radio button (A),

then press Check Home to move the cuvette motion to its home position. ■ Make sure that the Home light (B) becomes

B

green.

11. Cuvette changer horizontal motions home sensor

■ The

cuvette changer horizontal motions home sensor is located as shown on the following figure. No adjustment available.

RAS394E - 12

ELECTRICITY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Sensors check and adjustment

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Cuvette Changer.

A

■ Select the Horizontal Motions radio button

(A), then press Check Home to move the cuvette changer to its horizontal home position.

B

■ Make sure that the Home light (B) becomes

green.

12. Cuvette changer vertical motions home sensor ■ The

cuvette changer vertical motions home sensor is located as shown on the following picture and is not adjustable. The cuvette changer doesn’t stay in vertical home position (light is red). No check available.

Technical Manual RAA023

ELECTRICITY

RAS394E - 13

Sensors check and adjustment

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

13. "Handling cover cuvette segment closed" sensor

■ The

"handling cover cuvette segment closed" sensor is a switch located under the reaction tray door.

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Sensors.

■ Open

the reaction tray door.

■ Press

Read Sensor State.

■ Make

sure that the Handling Cover Cuvette segment closed light (A) becomes red.

A

■ Close

the reaction tray door, then press Read Sensor State.

■ Make

sure that the Handling Cover Cuvette segment closed light (A) becomes green.

It is possible to adjust the "handling cover cuvette segment closed" sensor by unscrewing the 2 CHC screws maintaining its support plate.

14. "Main cover closed" sensor

■ The

"main cover closed" sensor is a switch located under the main cover.

■ Go

A

to Services > Diagnostics > Sensors.

■ Open

the main cover.

■ Press

Read Sensor State.

■ Make

sure that the Main Cover Closed light (A) becomes red.

■ Close

the main cover, then press Read Sensor State.

■ Make

sure that the Main Cover Closed light (A) becomes green.

It is possible to adjust the "main cover closed" sensor by unscrewing the 2 CHC screws maintaining its support plate.

RAS394E - 14

ELECTRICITY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Sensors check and adjustment

15. Needle heating sensor

■ The needle

heating sensor is located within the reagent needle.

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Heating.

■ In

the Needle Heating area: - the Assigned Value should be adjusted to 37°C - the Current temperature should be 37°C +/- 0.5°C - the light (A) must be green.

Technical Manual RAA023

ELECTRICITY

A

RAS394E - 15

Sensors check and adjustment

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

16. Reaction heating sensor

■ The

reaction heating sensor is located within the reaction tray.

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Heating.

■ In

the Reaction Heating area: - the Assigned Value should be adjusted to 37°C - the Current temperature should be 37°C +/- 0.2°C - the light (A) must be green.

RAS394E - 16

ELECTRICITY

A

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Sensors check and adjustment

17. Refrigerated area sensor

■ The

refrigerated area sensor is located under the reagent tray.

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Heating.

■ In

the Refrigerated Area area: - the Assigned Value should be adjusted to 6°C - the Current temperature should be between 4°C and 10°C - the light (A) must be green.

Technical Manual RAA023

ELECTRICITY

A

RAS394E - 17

Sensors check and adjustment

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

18. Inner temperature sensor

■ The

inner temperature sensor is located on the frame of the instrument, near the arms assembly.

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Heating.

A

■ Check the inner temperature in the Current

field (A).

19. "Handling cover reagent closed" sensor

■ The "handling cover reagent closed" sensor

is a magnetic sensor located in the reagent tray foam. No adjustment available. ■ Go

A

to Services > Diagnostics > Sensors.

■ Open

the reagent cover.

■ Press

Read Sensor State.

■ Make

sure that the Handling Cover Reagent Closed light (A) becomes red.

■ Close

the reagent cover, then press Read Sensor State.

■ Make

sure that the Handling Cover Reagent Closed light (A) becomes green.

RAS394E - 18

ELECTRICITY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Sensors check and adjustment

20. Water tank empty sensor

■ Remove

the water detector from the water container.

■ Go

B

to Services > Diagnostics > Sensors.

■ Press

Read Sensor State.

■ Make sure that the Water Tank Empty light

(A) becomes green. ■ Move

the sensor up, then press Read Sensor State.

■ Make sure that the Water Tank Empty light

(B) becomes red.

A

21. Waste tank full sensor

■ Remove

the waste detector from the waste container.

■ Go

B

to Services > Diagnostics > Sensors.

■ Press

Read Sensor State.

■ Make sure that the Waste Tank Full light (A)

stays red. ■ Move

the sensor up, then press Read Sensor State.

■ Make sure that the Waste Tank Full light (B)

becomes green.

Technical Manual RAA023

A

ELECTRICITY

RAS394E - 19

Sensors check and adjustment

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

22. Sample arm shock detection switch

■ No

adjustment available. See RAS385: Arms, 8. Shock detection check, page 59.

23. Computer wake up sensor

■ The

computer wake up push-button is located on the right of the instrument.

■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Sensors.

■ Press

Read Sensor State.

■ Make

sure that the PC Wake up light (A) stays red.

■ Simultaneously

press the computer wake up push-button and the Read Sensor State button.

■ Make

sure that the PC Wake up light (A) becomes green. A

24. Lamp power standby ■ No

RAS394E - 20

check available.

ELECTRICITY

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Sensors check and adjustment

25. Lamp power full ■ In

Services > Diagnostics > Sensors, the Lamp Power Full light must be green. That means the lamp is functioning properly.

26. Low liquid level (cooling unit) ■ Go

to Services > Diagnostics > Sensors.

■ Press

Read Sensor State.

■ Make

sure that the Low Liquid Level (Cooling Unit) light becomes red.

■ Manually ■ Make

push the liquid level (red mark) down and press Read Sensor State simultaneously.

sure that the Low Liquid Level (Cooling Unit) light becomes green.

27. Power correct ■ In

Services > Diagnostics > Sensors, the Power Correct light must be green. That means the power supply is functioning properly.

Technical Manual RAA023

ELECTRICITY

RAS394E - 21

Sensors check and adjustment

RAS394E - 22

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

ELECTRICITY

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS387D

Syringe block assembly replacement

RAS387: Syringe block assembly replacement

Concerns Syringe block assembly dismantling (reagent or sample) Syringe block assembly mounting (reagent or sample)

Required tools Hexagonal keys

Required products Distilled water

Intervention time 0 h 15

Frequency On request

Specific kit or consumables None

Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator. Local or national regulations must be applied in all the operations.

Syringe block assembly replacement

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

1. Syringe block assembly dismantling (reagent or sample) ■ Switch ■ Open

the instrument off.

the arms main cover.

■ Remove

the mother board cover. See RAS377: Covers dismantling, 16. Mother board cover, page 10.

■ Remove

the syringe cables from the adhesive holder located on the left side of the mother board.

D

D

C

■ Push

the syringes halfway down (A).

■ Loosen

the screw (B), then carefully unscrew and remove the glass barrel (C).

■ Loosen

the 4 silent-block screws (D) to remove the syringe block assembly.

A D

D B

RAS387D - 2

HYDRAULICS

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Syringe block assembly replacement

■ Gently

pull the syringe block assembly and disconnect the motor, the switch and the ground wire.

■ Remove

the syringe block assembly.

2. Syringe block assembly mounting (reagent or sample) ■ Follow

the syringe block assembly dismantling procedure in reverse order. ■ Before

reinstalling the glass barrel, pump distilled water several times and ensure that the glass barrel is filled with water and no air bubbles are visible in the syringe. ■ Be very careful to correctly stretch the syringe cables again and replace them correctly on the adhesive holder. ■ Switch ■ Go

to Services > Customer Services > Cycles.

■ Run ■

the instrument on and wait for the end of initialization.

a Priming Cycle, then make sure that there are no air bubbles in the hydraulic circuit.

Perform the pressure sensors (reagent and sample) calibration. See RAS442: Pressure sensors, 3.3. To calibrate the pressure sensors, page 7.

Technical Manual RAA023

HYDRAULICS

RAS387D - 3

Syringe block assembly replacement

RAS387D - 4

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

HYDRAULICS

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS389F

Waste and water pumps replacement In this procedure, specific instructions are given for previous ABX Pentra 400 hardware versions: ■ V1 corresponds to instruments with serial numbers below 2000.

RAS389: Waste and water pumps replacement

Concerns Pumps dismantling Pumps replacement Water pump pressure check

Required tools Hexagonal keys Flat screwdriver Phillips screwdriver TOOL, BARFLEX (PRESS. 0-10BARS) MAM013AS (1207899013)

Required products None

Intervention time 1 h 00

Frequency On request

Specific kit or consumables None

Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator. Local or national regulations must be applied in all the operations.

Waste and water pumps replacement

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

1. Pumps dismantling

■ Before

starting the pumps dismantling procedure, drain the hydraulic circuit as follows: - Go to Services > Customer Services > Cycles. - Press Draining (A), disconnect the water tank and press OK. - Then, press Priming Cycle (B).

■ Switch

B

A

the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

■ Remove

the covers (see RAS377: Covers dismantling, page 1): Remove the loader cover, the cuvettes hatch, the connection hatch and the cuvettes cover.

■ Remove

the rear plate by unscrewing the 8 CHC screws.

water pump ■ Loosen

the 4 CHC screws maintaining the pumps assembly and disconnect the ground wire. waste pump

RAS389F - 2

HYDRAULICS

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Waste and water pumps replacement

waste pump black connector ■ Disconnect

the water pump connector (P56) at the rear of the instrument.

P56

■ Disconnect

the waste pump connectors (black and red wires).

waste pump red connector

P55

Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1 ■ Disconnect the water pump connector (P56)

at the rear of the instrument. ■ Disconnect

the waste pump connector

(P55). P56

■ Mark

the pumps tubings, then disconnect the front and rear tubings of the water pump and the 2 rear tubings of the waste pump.

■ Remove

Technical Manual RAA023

the pumps assembly.

HYDRAULICS

RAS389F - 3

Waste and water pumps replacement

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

2. Pumps replacement

The waste and water pumps are factory adjusted and do not require further adjustment.

The waste and water pumps are both provided with the pump support which is compatible with the old references of waste and water pumps.

Please refer to the picture below to fasten the waste and water pumps to their dedicated location on the pump support.

Old waste pump XBA528B (1209112528)

New water pump XEC202AS (1209179202)

Not used New waste pump XCA216BS (1209129216)

Old water pump XBA529D (1209114529) ■ Stick

the conductive fabric on the pump support (both provided in the kit).

15 mm

conductive fabric

RAS389F - 4

HYDRAULICS

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Waste and water pumps replacement

■ Fasten the ground wire support (provided in

the kit) on the pump support.

■ Remove

the pump that you do not replace from the old pump support by unscrewing the 4 CHC screws.

■ Fasten

this pump to its dedicated location on the pump support.

■ Reinstall

the pumps assembly. IN OUT

■ Remove

the protections from the fittings of the new pump.

■ Connect

the front and rear tubings of the water pump and the 2 rear tubings of the waste pump by following the arrows marked on the top of the pumps.

IN

OUT

It might be necessary to cut the tubings to ensure a better connection with the fittings of the new pump.

Technical Manual RAA023

HYDRAULICS

RAS389F - 5

Waste and water pumps replacement

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

waste pump black connector ■ Connect the water pump connector (P56) at

P56

the rear of the instrument. ■ Connect the waste pump connectors (black

and red wires).

waste pump red connector

P55

Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1 ■ Connect

the water pump connector (P56) at the rear of the instrument.

■ Connect

the waste pump connector (P55). P56

Specific ABX Pentra 400 V1 If you have replaced the waste pump, use the CABLE, WST PUMP CONNECT ADAPTOR (provided in the kit) to connect the waste pump connectors to the connector P55. ■ Reassemble

RAS389F - 6

in reverse order.

HYDRAULICS

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Waste and water pumps replacement

3. Water pump pressure check ■ Connect

the power supply cable and switch the instrument on.

■ Fill

up the hydraulic circuit as follows: - Go to Services > Customer Services > Cycles. - Reconnect the water tank, press Filling up (A) and press OK. - Then, press Priming Cycle (B) and make sure that there is no leak.

B

A

■ Check

the water pump pressure as follows: - Go to Services > Diagnostics > Syringe. - Open, then close the valves V1 to V5. - Open the valves V1 and V5.

- Connect a manometer to the water tank as shown on the following picture. - Switch the waste and water pumps on. - Make sure that the water pump pressure is about 2.1 bars ± 0.1. - Switch the water and waste pumps off. - Disconnect the manometer from the water tank and reconnect the water tank tubing. - Close the valves V1 and V5.

■

Perform the water pump flow check. See RAS378: 6 month maintenance, 10. To check the sample needle throughput, page 8.

■

Perform the pressure sensors (reagent and sample) calibration. See RAS442: Pressure sensors, 3.3. To calibrate the pressure sensors, page 7.

■ Follow

Technical Manual RAA023

the "Check up after intervention" procedure. See RAS393: Check up after intervention, page 1.

HYDRAULICS

RAS389F - 7

Waste and water pumps replacement

RAS389F - 8

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

HYDRAULICS

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS442D

Pressure sensors

RAS442: Pressure sensors

Concerns To replace the pressure sensors and board To adjust the pressure board voltage Pressure sensors activation, configuration, calibration

Required tools Hexagonal keys Flat screwdriver KIT, ANTISTATIC KIT MZZ015A (1207921015) Voltmeter

Required products None

Intervention time 1 h 00

Frequency On request

Specific kit or consumables KIT, WIRED PRESSURE SENSORS WITH PCB 1300015280

Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator. Local or national regulations must be applied in all the operations.

Pressure sensors

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

1. To replace the pressure sensors and board

For instruments with a serial number lower than P4-4064 / C4-0305, if you need to replace the pressure sensors or the pressure board, you will have to replace both the pressure sensors and board for compatibility reasons.

As the electronic devices are very sensitive to electrostatic discharges (ESD), the use of an antistatic kit is mandatory during boards handling/dismantling.

1. Switch the instrument off and disconnect the power supply cable.

2. Remove the rear plate by unscrewing the four CHC screws.

J2

J1

3. Disconnect the reagent and sample pressure sensors (J1 and J2), as well as the flat cable (J3), from the pressure board.

J3

RAS442D - 2

HYDRAULICS

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Pressure sensors

4. Open the arms main cover.

5. Unscrew the four CHC screws to remove the pressure sensors spacers from each side of the syringe block support. 6. Remove the pressure sensors.

7. Install the new pressure sensors. Make sure that the new pressure sensors are positioned correctly. The red square on the pressure sensor must be in front of the white square on the syringe block support.

8. Unscrew the five CHC screws to remove the pressure board.

9. Install the new pressure board and reassemble in reverse order. 10. Adjust the pressure board voltage. See 2. To adjust the pressure board voltage, page 4. 11. Perform the pressure sensors activation (if necessary), configuration and calibration. See 3. Pressure sensors activation, configuration, calibration, page 5.

Technical Manual RAA023

HYDRAULICS

RAS442D - 3

Pressure sensors

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

2. To adjust the pressure board voltage 1. Connect the power supply cable and switch the instrument on. 2. Remove the rear plate by unscrewing the four CHC screws.

The pressure board voltage adjustment has to be made without water in the hydraulic circuit. 3. Drain the hydraulic circuit as follows: - Go to Services > Customer Services > Cycles. - Press Draining (A), disconnect the water tank and press OK. - Then, press Priming Cycle (B).

B

A

Ground TP3

4. Adjust, with the potentiometer R16, the voltage between TP3 and the ground to 3.8 V DC +/- 0.05.

R16

5. Fill up the hydraulic circuit as follows: - Reconnect the water tank, press Filling up (C) and press OK. - Then, press Priming Cycle (B). 6. Put the rear plate back.

RAS442D - 4

HYDRAULICS

B

C

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Pressure sensors

3. Pressure sensors activation, configuration, calibration 3.1.

To activate the pressure sensors

1. Go to Services > System Configuration > Analyser. 2. Activate the reagent and sample pressure sensors.

Technical Manual RAA023

HYDRAULICS

RAS442D - 5

Pressure sensors

3.2.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

To configure the pressure sensors

1. Go to Services > Diagnostics > Pressure. 2. Check the values KA, KB, Low Pressure and High Pressure for the sample pressure sensor and modify them if necessary. 3. Check the values KA, KB, Low Pressure and High Pressure for the reagent pressure sensor and modify them if necessary.

RAS442D - 6

HYDRAULICS

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

3.3.

Pressure sensors

To calibrate the pressure sensors

1. Go to Services > Diagnostics > Pressure. 2. Select the Sample radio button (A). 3. Press Set Pressure (B). The system primes the fluids, then runs a 10 aspirations repetition with the syringe, alternating between low and high volumes. At the end of the cycle, the factors A and B of the calibration curve on water are displayed in the left window.

A

C

B

4. Note these results. 5. Perform this operation 3 times. 6. Make sure that the results of the factor A are between 4000 and 8000, and make sure that the difference between the 3 results of the factor A is not > 500. 7. If the results are correct, press OK to validate the calibration. The new factors are then displayed in the right window. 8. Select the Reagent radio button (C) and follow the same procedure as for the sample syringe. 9. Make sure that the results of the factor A are between 2500 and 3900, and make sure that the difference between the 3 results of the factor A is not > 500.

Technical Manual RAA023

HYDRAULICS

RAS442D - 7

Pressure sensors

RAS442D - 8

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

HYDRAULICS

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS533H

Windows master installation

RAS533: Windows master installation

Concerns Computer model check Windows master CD-ROM burning procedure Windows master installation

Required tools None

Required products None

Intervention time 1 h 00

Frequency On request

Specific kit or consumables KIT, WINDOWS MASTERS P400/C400 1300023765

Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator. Local or national regulations must be applied in all the operations.

Windows master installation

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ The

Windows master must be used only in case of stability problems with Windows or to make functional new specifications. ■ This procedure will erase the data on drive C:\ or on drives C:\ and D:\ (instrument software and customer data will be deleted). ■ Then, you will have to install the software version (RAS517: Software version installation) and the reagent applications (RAS518: Reagent applications installation).

1. Computer model check As several computer models are available, a label, stuck on the rear plate, allows you to identify the computer model.

This label can be read from the optic hatch opening with the help of a flashlight, without dismantling the computer assembly first.

The table below indicates the Windows master to be used depending on the computer model. Computer assembly

since instrument serial #1

Windows master Ref.

Version2

CCC014A->F

N/A

NAJ047C (1207953047)

2005/12/20

CCC014G->H

P4-0853

NAJ047D (1207954047)

August 2007

CCC014J

P4-2166

NAJ047D (1207954047)

August 2007

CCC014K

P4-2349

NAJ119A (1207951119)

July 2011

CCC014L

P4-3214

NAJ119A (1207951119)

July 2011

CCC014M

P4-3391

NAJ119B (1207952119)

V1.0.0

CCC014N

P4-4000 / C4-0110

NAJ119B (1207952119)

V1.0.0

1300013734

P4-4072 / C4-0473

1300021186

V1.0.0.6

1

Please note that the computer assembly may have been changed on the instrument. In this case, do not take into account the instrument serial # mentioned above. 2 How to know the Windows master version you have on your instrument? Open the C:\ghost.ini file.

RAS533H - 2

SOFTWARE

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Windows master installation

2. Computer models from 1300013734 2.1.

Windows master bootable USB flash drive

The Windows masters for ABX Pentra 400 and Pentra C400 are available for download. The files to be downloaded have a *.zip extension and are named "Master_P400_PC400_V_1.0.0.6" for example. 1. Download the Windows master version you need depending on the computer model of the instrument. 2. Save the *.zip file on your laptop (do not save it on the instrument). 3. Insert a blank USB flash drive (4 GB minimum) into a USB port. 4. Press the Windows Start button and launch the cmd.exe file. 5. Enter "diskpart" and press Enter. 6. Enter "list disk" and press Enter to list the disks available on your laptop. 7. Select the blank USB flash drive (enter "select disk 1" for example) and press Enter.

Be careful to select the blank USB flash drive and not to select another disk because you will erase all data on the selected disk.

8. Enter "clean" and press Enter. 9. Enter "create partition primary" and press Enter. 10. Enter "active" and press Enter. 11. Enter "format fs=ntfs quick" and press Enter. 12. Enter "exit" and press Enter. 13. Copy and unzip the *.zip file on the bootable USB flash drive.

Technical Manual RAA023

SOFTWARE

RAS533H - 3

Windows master installation

2.2.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Boot sequence modification

1. Insert the Windows master USB flash drive into a USB port. To authorize the computer to boot on the USB flash drive, modify the System Boot into the BIOS as follows: 2. Switch the instrument on and press DEL when the following message appears: "Press DEL to run setup". 3. When the BIOS window appears, enter in the Boot menu. 4. Select Hard Drive BBS Priorities and press Enter.

5. Press Enter to change the Boot Option #1. 6. Select the connected USB flash drive and press Enter. The USB flash drive is named according to the manufacturer (ex: VERBATIM...). Do not select the line starting by "UEFI: ".

Hard Drive BSS Priorities 7. Press ESC to go back to the previous screen. 8. Change the Boot Option #2 to Disabled option.

Boot Menu 9. Press ESC and check the boot order: - Boot Option #1 [USB flash drive name] - Boot Option #2 [Disabled] 10. Press F4 to save modifications and choose YES to restart the computer. The computer automatically boots on the USB flash drive.

RAS533H - 4

SOFTWARE

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

2.3.

Windows master installation

Master installation

1. After the booting period, the following screen appears:

2. The following options are available: - Option 1 allows to install the Windows 7 operating system on C:\ partition and keeps the files of D:\ partition. - Option 2 allows to install the Windows 7 operating system on C:\ partition and to format the D:\ partition. - Option Q allows to cancel the image installation. Type "exit" to go back to system screen. 3. Type your choice (1, 2 or Q) and press Enter.

To cancel, press Q with the AZERTY keyboard and press A with the QWERTY keyboard.

4. At the end of the installation, the following screen appears.

5. Follow the instructions displayed: - Press any key from keyboard, - Wait for the screen to turn black, - Switch the instrument off, - Remove the USB key, - Switch the instrument on. At first restart, after performing the disk image installation, the operating system needs to load the proper drivers (USB peripherals). Wait for the full completion of drivers installation before going to next step. You can check it in the notification bar, on lower right corner of the screen.

Technical Manual RAA023

SOFTWARE

RAS533H - 5

Windows master installation

2.4.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Master installation check

1. Open the C:\ghost.ini file. 2. Make sure it contains the following informations:

3. Make sure that the Windows desktop wallpaper is the following:

The left Shift key used to skip the automatic logon is no more functional under Windows 7. Press CTRL+ALT+DEL keys to logoff and change current user.

2.5.

Printer installation

The following printer drivers are pre-installed but not loaded in Windows 7 after performing the master procedure. These models are the ones supplied by HORIBA Medical over the past years until now: ■ OKI

B4600

■ Epson

M2000

■ Epson

M2400

■ Epson

6200

■ Epson

WP4015

■ Epson

WF5110

To install a printer: 1. Open the Windows menu, click on Devices and Printers. 2. Connect one of these printers only by USB cable, and power on the printer. The drivers will be loaded after 1 minute. 3. Enter Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. 4. You must see your printer model appearing in the Printers and Faxes list. RAS533H - 6

SOFTWARE

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Windows master installation

5. Right click on the printer icon and select Printing preferences. 6. Change the paper size according to you country (A4, Letter, ...).

For the printer models listed above, printing operations have been tested and fully validated. Other printer models can be connected but HORIBA Medical cannot guarantee correct printing operations on all the printer models.

2.6.

Touchscreen calibration (if necessary)

1. Check that the touchscreen is properly calibrated. 2. If this is not the case, open C:\Program Files\eGalaxTouch directory and run the eGalaxTouch.exe file. 3. From the Tools tab, select 4 Points Calibration.

4. Press OK. 5. Touch each of the four corners of the screen to calibrate the touchscreen. 6. Press Apply, then OK.

2.7.

Brightness adjustment (if necessary)

Touchscreen brightness can be changed in the Windows 7 operating system. If needed: 1. Enter Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Power Options. 2. Move the cursor at the bottom of the screen to change the brightness percentage (from 0% to 100%, default is 45%).

Technical Manual RAA023

SOFTWARE

RAS533H - 7

Windows master installation

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

3. Computer models < 1300013734 3.1.

Windows master CD-ROM burning procedure

The Windows masters for ABX Pentra 400 and Pentra C400 are available for download. The files to be downloaded have an *.iso extension and are named "Master_P400_PC400_V_1.0.0" for example. ■ Download the Windows master version you need depending on the computer model of the instrument. ■ Save

the *.iso file on your laptop (do not save it on the instrument).

■ Insert

3.2.

a blank CD-ROM in the CD writer.

■ Start

the CD burning software.

■ Burn

the ISO image to the CD-ROM.

Windows master installation ■ Open

the CD-ROM drive of the instrument.

■ Switch ■ Insert

the instrument off.

the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

■ Switch

the instrument on.

It is seriously recommended to wait one minute between the switch off and the switch on of the instrument, to prevent any damage to the power supply.

■ Press

Delete until the BIOS setting screen appears.

■ Select

the Advanced BIOS Features option and press Enter.

■ Select

CDROM in front of First Boot Device.

■ Press

F10 to save and exit. The instrument restarts and boots on the CD-ROM.

■

When the ABX HARD DRIVE LOADER screen appears, the instrument gives three options: (1), (2), (Q). (1) Load image to disk C:\ only . (2) Load image to disk C:\ and D:\ . (Q) Quit. Option (1): erases the data on drive C:\; installs Windows on drive C:\. Option (2): erases the data on drives C:\ and D:\; installs Windows on drive C:\ and creates a Backup folder on drive D:\. Option (Q): enables to quit the program.

■ Enter

1 and wait a few minutes for the following message: Please remove the CD-ROM and reboot the computer ... ...>

RAS533H - 8

SOFTWARE

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Windows master installation

■ Enter

exit and press Enter. The instrument reboots automatically.

■ While ■ At

the instrument reboots, remove the CD-ROM from the drive.

the end of the boot, the instrument asks for user confirmation to restart the computer.

■ Click

Yes.

■ After

the reboot, you are directly logged in to Windows, click Start and check if the Log Off function is displayed.

■ If

the Log Off function is not displayed, follow the procedure below to display it. - Right-click Start and click Properties.

The Taskbar and Start Menu Properties window is displayed. - Click the Start Menu tab. - Select the Classic Start menu option and click Customize...

- Select the Display Log Off option and click OK.

Technical Manual RAA023

SOFTWARE

RAS533H - 9

Windows master installation

RAS533H - 10

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

SOFTWARE

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS517C

Software version installation

RAS517: Software version installation

Concerns Software version downloading Software version installation

Required tools None

Required products None

Intervention time 0 h 15

Frequency On request

Specific kit or consumables Software version

Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator. Local or national regulations must be applied in all the operations.

Software version installation

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

1. Software version downloading ■ Download ■ Unzip

the P400_SOFT_VX.X.X.zip file on a USB flash drive.

the file.

2. Software version installation ■ Log ■ Go

in to the instrument software as technician with tech/abxtech as login/password.

to Services > Diagnostics and open the Windows Explorer.

■ Press ■ Log

the Windows Start button, press Log Off abx... and then press Log Off.

in to Windows as administrator with administrator/admin as login/password.

■ Insert

the USB flash drive in a free USB port.

■ Press

the Windows Start button to open the menu and press Run.

■ Enter

"explorer" in the Open: field and press OK.

■ Open

the My Computer folder and select the USB flash drive.

■ Execute

the Setup.exe file by double-clicking it.

■ The

following message will appear: "This will install P400 Software. Do you wish to continue?".

■ Press

Yes.

■ Press

successively Next and Next.

■ Make

sure that the following options are selected. If not, select them: Download P400 Eprom Create a desktop icon.

■ Select

one of the two available types of installation: Update Full installation. ■ If

Full installation is selected when installing the software version, the complete configuration (applications, calibrators, controls, settings, etc.) will be lost. Then, you have to install the reagent applications again. See RAS518: Reagent applications installation, page 1. ■ If Update is selected, you will not lose the configuration (applications, calibrators, controls, settings, etc.) neither the patient results. ■ Press

Next.

■ Press

Install.

■ The

instrument will ask you: "Ready to Install?", press Yes.

■ The

Eprom will be updated automatically and then the software as well (it will take a few minutes).

RAS517C - 2

SOFTWARE

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Software version installation

If Full installation is selected, the following message will appear during the update: "The directory: "C:\Program Files\P400 Software\" already exists. Continue the task: "Download P400 Eprom", "Create a desktop icon", "Full installation"?". Press Yes. ■ Press

Finish and remove the USB flash drive.

■ Press

the Windows Start button, press Shutdown and then press Shutdown.

■

When getting the message "It is now safe to turn off your computer.", switch the instrument off and wait 10 seconds.

■ Switch

the instrument on.

If the following message appears during the start up: "Transmission not successful, do you want to continue to process queued messages?". Press Yes.

Technical Manual RAA023

SOFTWARE

RAS517C - 3

Software version installation

RAS517C - 4

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

SOFTWARE

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS518C

Reagent applications installation

RAS518: Reagent applications installation

Concerns Reagent applications downloading Reagent applications installation

Required tools None

Required products None

Intervention time 0 h 15

Frequency On request

Specific kit or consumables KIT, REAGENT APPLICATION P400 / PC400

Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator. Local or national regulations must be applied in all the operations.

Reagent applications installation

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

1. Reagent applications downloading ■ Download ■ Unzip

the P400_APPLI_VX.XX.zip file on a USB flash drive.

the file.

2. Reagent applications installation 2.1.

On the ABX Pentra 400 ■ Go

to Services > Application Configuration > Applications.

■ From

the Applications list, press Import:

■ Install

your reagent applications support (CD-ROM or USB flash drive) on the instrument.

■ Select

the support type in the dialog box and press OK.

■ The applications update screen is displayed

(refer to the following example).

The applications for which an update is available on your support are listed in two tables: one for major parameter updates, another for minor parameter updates. ■ When

a major parameter is updated in an application, the current calibration for this test is lost. A new calibration must be performed. If the number of calibrator levels or the calibration predilution is modified, the calibrator target values for this test are also deleted and must be reconfigured.

■

When a minor parameter is updated in an application, the current calibration for this test is kept in memory. A new calibration is not required. For detailed information concerning major and minor parameters, refer to the ABX Pentra 400 user manual. Each table indicates the application code, the current application version number and modification date and time, the update application version number, if the application is selected to be updated.

■ Press

RAS518C - 2

Edit.

SOFTWARE

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■

Reagent applications installation

By default, all applications are selected to be updated. If necessary, deselect the applications that should not be updated. If an application is already present on the instrument with the same test name, the same application code or the same application local code but a different channel number, then the application is unselected by default and cannot be updated. The following message is displayed: "At least one application has the same name or code with different channel in the media." In this case, the test name, the application code or the application local code must be modified before updating this application.

■ Press

OK to validate. When an update of the reagent online help is available on your support and at least one application is unselected, a dialog box informs the user that the whole reagent online help is going to be updated whereas at least one application will not be updated. ■ Press

OK to validate.

■ Press

Cancel to cancel the applications update.

The selected applications are updated as well as: - the reagents used in these applications, - all diluents and cleaners, - the incompatibilities related to these applications and configured by HORIBA Medical, - the reagent online help (when an update is available on your support). It takes a few minutes. A dialog box informs you when the update is completed. ■ Press

Technical Manual RAA023

OK.

SOFTWARE

RAS518C - 3

Reagent applications installation

2.2.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

On the Pentra C400 ■ Go

to Services > Application Configuration > Applications.

■ From

the Applications list, press Import:

■ Install

your reagent applications support (CD-ROM or USB flash drive) on the instrument.

■ Select

the support type in the dialog box and press OK.

■ The applications update screen is displayed

(refer to the following example).

The applications for which an update is available on your support are listed in two tables: one for major parameter updates, another for minor parameter updates. ■ When

a major parameter is updated in an application, the current calibration for this test is lost. A new calibration must be performed. If the number of calibrator levels or the calibration predilution is modified, the calibrator target values for this test are also deleted and must be reconfigured.

■

When a minor parameter is updated in an application, the current calibration for this test is kept in memory. A new calibration is not required. For detailed information concerning major and minor parameters, refer to the Pentra C400 user manual. Each table indicates the application code, the current application version number and modification date and time, the update application version number, if the application is selected to be updated.

■ Press ■

Edit.

By default, all applications are selected to be updated. If necessary, deselect the applications that should not be updated. If an application is already present on the instrument with the same test name, the same application code or the same application local code but a different channel number, then the application is unselected by default and cannot be updated. The following message is displayed: "At least one application has the same name or code with different channel in the media." In this case, the test name, the application code or the application local code must be modified before updating this application.

■ Press

RAS518C - 4

OK to validate.

SOFTWARE

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Reagent applications installation

The restrictions below apply when updating the applications. - If an application is linked to a ratio and the parameters modified in this application are incompatible with the ratio, the application cannot be updated. In this case, the ratio must be deleted before updating the applications. Modification of the following method parameters could affect the ratio consistency: ■ pre-dilution parameters (diluent solution, factor, delay) ■ cleaning parameters ■ analysis cycles parameters The following modifications always affect the ratio consistency: ■ modification of the specimen type in the method parameters ■ modification of the basic unit ■ creation of an incompatibility for the methods used in the same ratio For detailed information, refer to the "Settings > Application Configuration" chapter of the Pentra C400 user manual. - If an application is linked to a profile and the sample type is modified in this application, the application cannot be updated. In this case, the profile must be deleted before updating the applications. - If a reagent is already present on the instrument with the same reagent short name but a different reagent number, the reagent cannot be updated. In this case, the reagent short name must be modified before updating the applications. - If the container type for a solution with a reagent number between 600 and 799 is changed, a dialog box informs the user that the solution will be deleted from the Reagent Configuration menu. ■

Press OK to validate. In this case, after the applications update, the container type must be reconfigured in Services > Application Configuration > Reagents and the solution in the Reagent Configuration menu.

■ Press

Cancel to cancel the applications update.

- When an update of the reagent online help is available on your support and at least one application is unselected, a dialog box informs the user that the whole reagent online help is going to be updated whereas at least one application will not be updated. ■ Press

OK to validate.

■ Press

Cancel to cancel the applications update.

The selected applications are updated as well as: - the reagents used in these applications, - all diluents and cleaners, - the incompatibilities related to these applications and configured by HORIBA Medical, - the reagent online help (when an update is available on your support). It takes a few minutes. A dialog box informs you when the update is completed. ■ Press

Technical Manual RAA023

OK.

SOFTWARE

RAS518C - 5

Reagent applications installation

RAS518C - 6

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

SOFTWARE

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS542F

Printer installation

RAS542: Printer installation

Concerns Overview Printer installation Preliminary Driver installation for EPSON WF-5110DW printer (for example) Printer selection Printer properties setup Printer connection

Required tools Driver delivered with the printer

Required products One of the listed printers

Intervention time 0 h 20

Frequency On request

Specific kit or consumables None

Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator. Local or national regulations must be applied in all the operations.

Printer installation

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

1. Overview

Instrument ABX Pentra 400 / Pentra C400

OS Connection Printers

XP

Procedure

LPT1

EPL 5700/5800/5900 OKI B4200/4350/4600 EPSON M2000D/M2010D/M2400D 2. Printer installation, page 2

USB

EPSON WP-4015DN/WF-5110DW

2. Printer installation 2.1.

Preliminary

From the instrument application (Services > System Configuration > Printer), make sure that the printer is listed.

2.2.

■ If

it is, go directly to 2.3. Printer selection, page 5

■ If

not, go to 2.2. Driver installation for EPSON WF-5110DW printer (for example), page 2

Driver installation for EPSON WF-5110DW printer (for example)

In order to install an EPSON WF-5110DW printer on your instrument, you need to perform the following steps. ■ Copy ■ Go

the driver to a USB flash drive.

to Services > System Configuration > Printer.

■ Press

■ Click

RAS542F - 2

Edit and then Add Printer.

Next.

SOFTWARE

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Printer installation

■ Select

Local printer and click Next.

■ Select

the USB001 port and click Next.

■ Click

Have Disk.

■ Insert

your USB flash drive and click Browse.

Technical Manual RAA023

SOFTWARE

RAS542F - 3

Printer installation

■ Select

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

the E_JF1KKE.INF file and click

Open.

■ Click

OK and then Next.

■ Select

Yes and click Next.

■ Select

Do not share this printer and click

Next.

RAS542F - 4

SOFTWARE

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Select

■ Click

Printer installation

No and click Next.

Finish and remove the USB flash

drive.

Your printer has been installed.

2.3.

Printer selection

After installing your printer, check if it is set as default. To do that, you need to perform the following steps. ■ Go

to Services > System Configuration > Printer.

■ Press

Edit.

■ From

the Printer List, select the printer you want to set as default.

■ Press

Set Default Printer.

■ Press

OK to validate.

Technical Manual RAA023

SOFTWARE

RAS542F - 5

Printer installation

2.4.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Printer properties setup

■ Go

to Services > System Configuration > Printer.

■ Press

Edit.

■ Press

Printer Properties.

■ Select:

- Paper Source: Auto Select - Document Size: A4 - Paper Type: Plain paper - Color: Grayscale ■ Click

OK.

■ Press

2.5.

OK to validate.

Printer connection ■ Exit

the application and reboot the system.

■ Connect

the printer and switch it on. Please note that a USB cable, ref. DAC051A (1201891051), is delivered with the instrument in order to connect the printer to the instrument. In addition, a US power cable, ref. DAC012A (1201891012), is also delivered with the instrument for the printer connection (only for US).

■ Print

RAS542F - 6

a test page.

SOFTWARE

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS814A

External barcode reader

RAS814: External barcode reader

Concerns To install the barcode reader Barcode reader default configuration To set up the barcode reader To test the barcode reading

Required tools None

Required products None

Intervention time 0 h 20

Frequency On request

Specific kit or consumables KIT,INST.BARCODE PS2 TOUCH 65 XBA453D (1209114453)

Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator. Local or national regulations must be applied in all the operations.

External barcode reader

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

1. To install the barcode reader 1. Exit the application and switch the instrument off. 2. The barcode reader is equipped with a "Y" connection. Connect the female end to the male end of the keyboard and connect the remaining end to the instrument. 3. Switch the instrument on.

2. Barcode reader default configuration The barcode reader has been set up so that it can read the following types of barcodes: ■ ITF

2/5 (2 of 5 interleaved) without check digit (16 characters max.)

■ Code

39 without check digit (16 characters max.)

■ Code

128 (99 characters max.)

■ Codabar

(16 characters max.)

This default configuration has been already done on the barcode reader. However, if you need to reset the barcode reader to the default configuration, you can follow the default configuration procedure (see below).

RAS814A - 2

SOFTWARE

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

External barcode reader

Enter or Exit Configuration

Factory Default Settings

KBD-AT-ALT

Global Suffix: NULL

GS1-AIM ID: Disable, Do not transmit GS1-128 labels

Code 39 Set Length

I 2 of 5 Set Length

Code 128 Set Length

Codabar Enable, Set Length

Codabar ST-SP Char not Xmit

UPC-A & UPC-E Disable

EAN 8 & EAN 13 Disable

Enter or Exit Configuration

Technical Manual RAA023

SOFTWARE

RAS814A - 3

External barcode reader

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

3. To set up the barcode reader 3.1.

ITF 2/5 with check digit (optional)

1. If the ITF 2/5 with check digit is used in the laboratory, you must set up the barcode reader as follows. Enter or Exit Configuration

I2of5 Check Character Calc = Check Std (Modulo 10)

I2of5 Check Character Transmission = Don't Send

Enter or Exit Configuration

2. To reset the barcode reader to the ITF 2/5 without check digit configuration (see below). Enter or Exit Configuration

I2of5 Check Character Calc = Don't Calculate

Enter or Exit Configuration

RAS814A - 4

SOFTWARE

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

3.2.

External barcode reader

Code 39 with check digit (optional)

1. If the Code 39 with check digit is used in the laboratory, you must set up the barcode reader as follows. Enter or Exit Configuration

Code 39 Check Character Calculation = Calculate Std Check

Code 39 Check Character Transmission = Don't Send

Enter or Exit Configuration

2. To reset the barcode reader to the Code 39 without check digit configuration (see below). Enter or Exit Configuration

Code 39 Check Character Calculation = Don't Calculate

Enter or Exit Configuration

Technical Manual RAA023

SOFTWARE

RAS814A - 5

External barcode reader

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

4. To test the barcode reading 4.1.

ITF 2/5 (2 of 5 interleaved)

With C/D on label Barcode checksum: Yes

Without C/D on label Barcode checksum: No

1224488

121314151617

If "12244881" is displayed, disable the check digit transmission (see 3.1. ITF 2/5 with check digit (optional), page 4).

4.2.

Code 39

Without C/D on label Barcode checksum: No

With C/D on label Barcode checksum: Yes

12345ABCDE If "12345ABCDEW" is displayed, disable the check digit transmission (see 3.2. Code 39 with check digit (optional), page 5).

4.3.

Code 128

Barcode checksum: No

RAS814A - 6

SOFTWARE

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

4.4.

External barcode reader

Codabar

Barcode checksum: No

37859

Technical Manual RAA023

123456/$

SOFTWARE

RAS814A - 7

External barcode reader

RAS814A - 8

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

SOFTWARE

Technical Manual RAA023

RAS624C

Cooling unit

RAS624: Cooling unit

Concerns Cooling unit dismantling Cooling unit parts replacement Air fan replacement Float switch replacement Control board replacement Pump replacement (for CU401 only) Bleed screw O-ring replacement (for CU401 only)

Required tools Hexagonal keys Phillips screwdriver Open-end wrench Pliers KIT, ANTISTATIC KIT MZZ015A (1207921015)

Required products None

Intervention time N/A

Frequency On request

Specific kit or consumables None

Disposable gloves, eye protections and a lab coat must be worn by the operator. Local or national regulations must be applied in all the operations.

Cooling unit

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

1. Cooling unit dismantling

To avoid any damage (compressor oil into the condenser), do not tilt the cooling unit during this operation.

■ Switch

the instrument off.

Remove the reagents from the reagent tray and place them in a refrigerated area.

■ Switch

the cooling unit off and disconnect the power supply cable.

CU400 cooling unit dismantling

■ Remove

the cooling unit cover by unscrewing the 6 cruciform screws.

■ Disconnect

the ground wire (located at the back left) from the cooling unit cover.

RAS624C - 2

COOLING UNIT

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Cooling unit

To avoid anything falling into the tank, put the lid on the hole.

CU401 cooling unit dismantling Remove the cooling unit covers as follows:

■ Press

push to open the top lid.

A

A

■ Unscrew

the 2 cruciform screws and washers at the top side of the unit (A). Then, fold away the front cover towards the front (B).

■ Remove

Technical Manual RAA023

C

the rubber corners (C).

C B

COOLING UNIT

RAS624C - 3

Cooling unit

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ At

the rear side of the unit, unscrew the 3 cruciform screws and washers maintaining the left side cover.

■ Slide this cover towards the back of the unit

and remove it. ■ Perform

the same operation for the right side cover.

■ Before

removing the right side cover, disconnect the ground wire.

■ Remove

RAS624C - 4

the back grid.

COOLING UNIT

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Cooling unit

2. Cooling unit parts replacement 2.1.

Air fan replacement ■ First,

perform the cooling unit dismantling procedure. See 1. Cooling unit dismantling, page 2.

CU400 air fan replacement

■ Remove

the air fan as follows: - Unscrew the 2 screws and washers located at the bottom of the air fan (A). - Disconnect the 2 power supply connectors from the air fan (B).

A B

A

C

- Unscrew the ground wire (C). - Cut the 2 Ty-Raps™ (D). Sticker

■ Replace

the air fan and reassemble in reverse order. D D

Ensure that the air fan is positioned in the correct direction: the sticker must be visible.

■ To

simplify the air fan reassembling, it is better to fasten the right screw first (when you are in front of the air fan with sticker visible). ■ In case the connectors are too loose, remove them and tighten them a little bit more with pliers. ■ Only fix the sheath and the ground wire with the Ty-Raps™, do not take the 2 power supply wires.

Technical Manual RAA023

COOLING UNIT

RAS624C - 5

Cooling unit

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

CU401 air fan replacement

A

■ Cut

the 2 Ty-Raps™ (A).

■ Disconnect

the 2 power supply connectors from the air fan (B).

■ Unscrew

B

the ground wire (C).

A C ■ Unscrew

■ Replace

the 3 screws and washers using an 7-mm open-end wrench and remove the air fan.

the air fan and reassemble in reverse order.

Ensure that the air fan is positioned in the correct direction: the sticker must be visible.

Sticker

RAS624C - 6

COOLING UNIT

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

2.2.

Cooling unit

Float switch replacement ■ First,

perform the cooling unit dismantling procedure. See 1. Cooling unit dismantling, page 2.

CU400 float switch replacement C1 R2

GR1

R4 R3

T1

D2

RC1

R1

REL1 TR1

■ On

■ Unscrew the

SK3

SK4

SK5

SSR1

SK1

S11

SK2

the control board, disconnect the float switch cable from the SU6 connector.

SU6

2 screws and remove the float

switch.

■ Unsolder ■ Solder ■ Install

Technical Manual RAA023

the 2 wires from the old float switch.

these wires on the new float switch.

the new float switch and reassemble in reverse order.

COOLING UNIT

RAS624C - 7

Cooling unit

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

CU401 float switch replacement

■ Cut

the Ty-Raps™ maintaining the float switch cable.

S11

SSR1

■ On the control board, lift up and disconnect

SK1

D2

RC1 REL1

GR1

T1 R1

C1

R2

R4 R3

■ Unscrew the

SK3

TR1

the float switch cable from the SU6 connector.

SK4

SK2

SK5

SU6

2 screws and remove the float

switch.

■ Replace

RAS624C - 8

the float switch and reassemble in reverse order.

COOLING UNIT

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

2.3.

Cooling unit

Control board replacement

As the electronic devices are very sensitive to electrostatic discharges (ESD), the use of an antistatic kit is mandatory during boards handling/dismantling.

CU400 control board replacement

■ From

the cooling unit rear, disconnect the cooling unit cable.

■ Unscrew

the 3 cruciform screws and washers supporting the control board support.

Technical Manual RAA023

COOLING UNIT

RAS624C - 9

Cooling unit

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Slowly

slide the control board support to the left side.

■ Carefully

disconnect all the connectors from the control board.

■ Unscrew

the 2 cruciform screws to remove the control board from its support.

■ Replace

the control board and reassemble in reverse order. Connect all the connectors as shown on the following diagram: C1 R4 R3

R1

T1

D2

RC1

R2

GR1

REL1

TR1

To compressor

SSR1

S11

SK2

To instrument connector

To float switch SK1

To ON/OFF switch

RAS624C - 10

SK3

To fan

SK4

To pump

SK5

SU6

To solenoid valve

COOLING UNIT

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Cooling unit

CU401 control board replacement ■ First,

perform the cooling unit dismantling procedure. See 1. Cooling unit dismantling, page 2.

■ Unscrew

the nut and disconnect the cooling unit cable located at the back of the control board (inside the cooling unit).

■ Carefully

disconnect all the connectors from the control board.

■ Unscrew

the 2 cruciform screws and remove the control board.

■ Replace

the control board and reassemble in reverse order. Connect all the connectors as shown on the following diagram: To solenoid valve

To pump

To fan

SK4

SK3

SK5

SU6

To ON/OFF switch

SK1

SSR1

To float switch

Technical Manual RAA023

D2

RC1 REL1

GR1

C1

R2

R1

R4 R3

T1

TR1

To instrument connector

SK2

S11

To compressor

COOLING UNIT

RAS624C - 11

Cooling unit

2.4.

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Pump replacement (for CU401 only)

The pump has to be replaced every 2 years.

■ First,

drain the cooling unit. See RAS379: Yearly maintenance, 2. Cooling unit, page 7.

■ Perform

the CU401 cooling unit dismantling procedure. See 1. Cooling unit dismantling, page 2.

■ At the back of the cooling

unit, unscrew the 2 cruciform screws and washers. Then, slightly pull away the IN/OUT plate towards the back.

Pay attention not to lose the 2 blue washers located at the back of the IN/OUT plate screws.

■ Remove

the top cover as follows: - At the front of the cooling unit, unscrew the 2 cruciform screws and washers located on both sides of the top cover. - Disconnect the ground wire. - Remove the top cover.

■ Cut

RAS624C - 12

the Ty-Raps™ maintaining the cables.

COOLING UNIT

Technical Manual RAA023

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

Cooling unit

SK5

SK1

B

D2

RC1 REL1

GR1

C1

R2

R4 R3

R1

T1

TR1

the control board, disconnect the float switch cable from the SU6 connector and the pump cable on the SK4 connector.

SK3

SK2

■ On

SK4

S11

SSR1

SU6

B

■ On

the pump: - Disconnect the ground wire (A). - Unscrew the 4 cruciform screws and washers (one with a ground wire) (B). A

B

B

■ Slightly

lift the pump up and towards the back to access the tubings.

■ Cut

and remove the 2 collars. Then, disconnect the tubings.

Technical Manual RAA023

COOLING UNIT

RAS624C - 13

Cooling unit

ABX Pentra 400/Pentra C400

■ Remove

the pump from the cooling unit.

■ Remove

the 2 casings from the pump

tubings. ■ Replace

the pump and reassemble in reverse order.

To reconnect the tubings, use the 2 collars provided with the pump. ■ Put the collar on the tubing and plug the tubing into the connector. ■ Then, with pliers, tighten both sides of the square part of the collar.

2.5.

Bleed screw O-ring replacement (for CU401 only) ■ First,

drain the cooling unit. See RAS379: Yearly maintenance, 2. Cooling unit, page 7.

bleed screw

■ Remove

the collar located inside the bleed screw with pliers.

■ Unscrew

the bleed screw.

■ Replace

the O-ring and reassemble in reverse order.

collar

RAS624C - 14

COOLING UNIT

Technical Manual RAA023